JP7243701B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters a starting winning hole and a starting winning is detected while a variable effect (variable display) of symbols or the like is performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. , with a predetermined number as the upper limit, there is a variable effect related to the start winning is suspended. When the variable performance being executed is completed, the execution of the suspended non-executed variable performance is started.

In this variable presentation, as part of the entertainment of the game, a suggestive display that suggests the degree of expectation of a big win (for example, "holding change notice", mini appearance notice, etc.) is executed. When the suggestive display is executed, the timing for starting the suggestive display is determined by a lottery, and the suggestive display appears based on the result of the lottery to suggest the degree of expectation of the big win to the player. (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-340046

However , there is a need to improve the interest in games from conventional gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises acquisition means for acquiring information when a predetermined starting condition is established, and determination means for making a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. dynamic display execution means for causing display means to execute dynamic display of identification information based on the determination result of said determination means; and image display means for displaying a specific image in conjunction with the effect content, and when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information that can be executed by combining two or more dynamic elements. (2) a gaming machine for giving a predetermined game value to a player, comprising storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means with a predetermined number as the upper limit; and information stored in the storage means. determination means for determining whether or not there is a dynamic display that displays the predetermined identification information among the dynamic displays of the identification information executed based on each; As a second display means capable of displaying the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information can appear , and the mode of the display element of the second display means is changed from the predetermined first mode to the predetermined changing means for changing to a second mode in which the degree of expectation that identification information can appear is high ; and at least the predetermined a start timing selection means for selecting one start timing from among a plurality of start timings during execution of dynamic display at which the identification information may appear; and the specific image in the dynamic display at which the predetermined identification information may appear. image lottery means for drawing a lottery to determine whether or not the image lottery means should appear, and when the specific image is displayed based on the lottery by the image lottery means, the specific image may overlap at least a part of the second display means image display means for displaying an image; and when the start timing is selected by the start timing selection means during execution of the dynamic element, the mode of the display elements of the second display means is changed to the second display element. a situation judgment means for judging that the situation is to be changed to two modes; specific display means for displaying an image; and corresponding display means for displaying the second mode in correspondence with the display of the specific image, wherein the specific display means displays the dynamic element being executed. execution period The specific image is made to appear in a specific period shorter than the interval.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the obtaining means for obtaining information when a predetermined starting condition is met, the determining means for making a determination based on the information obtained by the obtaining means, and the determining means a dynamic display executing means for causing a display means to execute dynamic display of identification information based on a determination result; and image display means for displaying a specific image using a combination of two or more dynamic elements. A gaming machine that provides a predetermined game value, wherein storage means stores information acquired by the acquisition means with a predetermined number as the upper limit, and execution is performed based on each of the information stored in the storage means determining means for determining whether or not there is a dynamic display showing the predetermined identification information among the dynamic displays of the identification information to be displayed; a second display means capable of displaying the degree of expectation that the identification information may appear; changing means for changing to a second mode with a high degree of expectation to obtain ; start timing selection means for selecting one start timing from a plurality of start timings during execution of dynamic display that can be displayed; image lottery means for drawing lots to determine whether or not the image lottery means; and when the specific image is displayed based on the lottery by the image lottery means, the specific image is made to appear so as to overlap at least a part of the second display means. and image display means for changing the mode of display elements of the second display means to the second mode when the start timing is selected by the start timing selection means during execution of the dynamic element. a situation judgment means for judging that a situation exists, and the specific image is caused to appear in a situation in which the form of the display element of the second display means during execution of the dynamic element is not displayed in the second form. specific display means, and corresponding display means for displaying the second mode in correspondence with the display of the specific image, wherein the specific display means is shorter than the execution period of the dynamic element being executed. specific period The specific image is made to appear between them. As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. (a) is a diagram showing a state just before (immediately before) "ready-to-win display (variable element of "normal reach")" appears in the main display area of the third symbol display device, and (b) is ( c) is a diagram showing a state in which the "super reach" variable element occurs from the state of (b), the cockpit display area is erased, and the "super reach" variable element is executed in the main display area. (d) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub display area and the cockpit display area are redisplayed from the state of (c), and the third symbol "failure display" appears in the main display area. be. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters, a pending|holding ball storage area, and a pending|holding ball execution area. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table. It is the figure which showed an example of the number table of a reservation typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the A table of the stop pattern table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the B table of the stop pattern table. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the C table of the stop pattern table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the D table of the stop pattern table. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table for big hits. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a change pattern table for losing; It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation time for every variable element of variable production|presentation. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of an audio lamp control device and a display control device; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a pending change table; FIG. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the scenario table for jackpots. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a scenario table for failure; 4 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of a pending information storage area and an execution information storage area; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 4 is a flow chart showing variation processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing a hold display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation production|presentation process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the execution pattern change process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. (a) is a diagram showing a state just before the "ready-to-win display" appears in the main display area of the third pattern display device, and (b) is a state in which the sub-display area is erased from the state of (a). and (c) is a diagram showing a state in which the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area, and (c) is a state in which the cockpit display area is erased from the state of (b), and " FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which the variable element of "Super Reach" is being executed, and (d) suggests that "missing display" appears in the variable element of "Super Reach" from the state of (c). FIG. 10(e) is a diagram showing a state in which an effect is being executed, and (e) shows that the sub display area and the cockpit display area are redisplayed from the state of (d), and a "failure display" appears in the main display area. (f) is a diagram showing a state just before the "big win display" appears after the variable element of "re-variation" is executed from the state of (e). It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the pending|holding information storage area in 2nd Embodiment, and execution information storage area. (A) is a time chart showing the relationship between the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-gase + normal reach + re-fluctuation" and the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach + super reach + re-fluctuation", (b) is "pseudo-ream 1 + It is a time chart showing the relationship between the variation pattern of "normal reach + re-fluctuation" and the variation pattern of "normal reach + special reach + re-fluctuation". FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a hold display setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the execution pattern change process performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing a state just before the "ready-to-win display" appears in the main display area of the third symbol display device in the third embodiment, and (b) is from the state of (a). FIG. 12C is a diagram showing a state in which the sub-display area is erased and the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area, and (c) shows "super reach" in the main display area from the state of (b) (d) shows a state in which the sub-display area is re-displayed from the state (c), and "missing display" appears in the main display area. It is a diagram showing. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the driving pattern of the left movable role and the right movable role according to the "weak pattern" in the third embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a drive pattern by a "strong pattern" of an object; FIG. 11 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of an audio lamp control device in a third embodiment; It is the figure which showed typically an example of the scenario table for jackpots in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a failure scenario table in the third embodiment; FIG. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the accessory lottery table in 3rd Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the performance time for each variable element of the variable performance in the third embodiment, and (b) is the driving time of the "weak pattern" and "strong pattern" of each movable role. It is the figure which showed an example. (a) is a time chart showing the relationship of the "weak pattern" of each movable role in the "normal reach" production mode in the third embodiment, and (b) is each movable role in the "super reach" production mode. (c) shows the relationship between the "weak pattern" and "strong pattern" of each movable role in the "special reach" production mode. It is a time chart showing. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the pending|holding information storage area in 3rd Embodiment, and execution information storage area. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing a hold display setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation production|presentation process performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the execution pattern change process performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the character product drive processing performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing a state just before the "ready-to-win display" appears in the main display area of the third symbol display device in the third embodiment, and (b) is from the state of (a). FIG. 12C is a diagram showing a state in which the sub-display area is erased and the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area, and (c) shows "super reach" in the main display area from the state of (b) (d) is a diagram showing a state in which each movable accessory is driven in the "strong pattern" from the state (c), (e ) is a diagram showing a state in which each movable accessory has returned to its original position from the state of (d), and (f) is a state just before the "big win display" appears from the state of (e). It is a figure showing. (a) is a diagram showing a state just before the "ready-to-win display" appears in the main display area of the third symbol display device in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is from the state of (a). FIG. 12C is a diagram showing a state in which the sub-display area is erased and the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area, and (c) shows "super reach" in the main display area from the state of (b) (d) shows a state in which the sub-display area is re-displayed from the state (c), and "missing display" appears in the main display area. It is a diagram showing. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a state in which a small cut-in display appears on the third pattern display device in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a large cut-in display on the third pattern display device. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing a state in which an in display appears; (a) is a diagram showing a state just before the "ready-to-win display" appears in the main display area of the third symbol display device in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is from the state of (a). FIG. 12C is a diagram showing a state in which the sub-display area is erased and the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area, and (c) shows "super reach" in the main display area from the state of (b) (d) is a diagram showing a state in which a large cut-in display appears from the state (c), (e) is a diagram showing a state in which (d ) is a diagram showing a state in which the large cut-in display is erased from the state of (f), and (f) is a diagram showing a state just before the "big win display" appears from the state of (e). It is the figure which showed typically an example of the scenario table for jackpots in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a failure scenario table in the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the pending|holding information storage area in 5th Embodiment, and execution information storage area. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a hold display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation production|presentation process performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the execution pattern change process performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing a state just before the "ready-to-win display" appears in the main display area of the third symbol display device in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram from the state of (a). FIG. 12C is a diagram showing a state in which the sub-display area is erased and the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area, and (c) shows "super reach" in the main display area from the state of (b) (d) is a diagram showing a state in which the variable element is being executed, and (d) is a production that suggests that the "missing display" will appear in the variable element of "super reach" from the state of (c). (e) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub-display area is re-displayed from the state of (d), and "missing display" appears in the main display area. , (f) is a diagram showing a state just before the appearance of the "big win display" in the variable effect suspended from the state of (e). FIG. 14 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of an audio lamp control device in a sixth embodiment; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a "weak pattern" and a "strong pattern" of reach patterns in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a reach pattern table. . (a) is a diagram showing a "weak pattern" of variable elements of "normal reach" in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a "strong pattern" of variable elements of "normal reach". , (c) is a diagram showing the "weak pattern" of the variable elements of "super reach", (d) is a diagram showing the "weak pattern" of the variable elements of "super reach", ( e) is a diagram showing a "weak pattern" of the variable elements of the "special reach", and (f) is a diagram showing a "strong pattern" of the variable elements of the "special reach". FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing variation pattern determination processing executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation production|presentation process performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing variation change processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing a state just before the "ready-to-win display" appears in the main display area of the third symbol display device in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is from the state of (a). FIG. 12C is a diagram showing a state in which the sub display area is erased and the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area, and (c) is the cockpit display area being erased from the state of (b), FIG. 10D is a diagram showing a state in which the “weak pattern” of the “super reach” variable element is executed in the main display area, and (d) shows the “missing pattern” in the “super reach” variable element from the state of (c) (e) is a diagram showing a state in which an effect suggesting that the "display" appears is being executed, and (e) shows the sub display area and the cockpit display area being redisplayed from the state of (d), and the main display area is displayed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which a “loss display” appears in the display area, and (f) is just before the “big win display” appears after the variable element of “re-variation” is executed from the state of (e). It is a diagram showing the state of.

<First Embodiment>
BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIGS. 1 to 33, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, 65a, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is performed by the balls flowing down the front surface of the game board 13 . The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6). A frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is a button that is pressed by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later. In addition, the frame button 22 is an operation button for allowing the player to select the effect content of the advance notice display executed in the variable display of the third symbol (hereinafter, the variable display of the third symbol is referred to as "variable effect"). Also used as

The variable effect is a effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and as will be described later, the ball fired to the front area of the game board 13 is a specific winning hole (first ball entrance 64 to be described later). See FIG. 2.) (Hereinafter, the entry of the ball into the first ball opening 64 may be referred to as "start winning"), and the pattern (the third pattern described later) is executed. This is an effect in which the player is presented with the result of the lottery (whether it is a big win or not) for the starting prize, depending on the combination of symbols stopped after being varied for a predetermined period of time.

A stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified. One stage is provided. Various effects such as the variable effects described above and the "ready-to-reach display" executed during the variable effects are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage.

It should be noted that the "ready-to-win display" refers to a display one step before the "big win display" indicating that a big win will occur in the variable effect executed by the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Specifically, the third symbols of the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 4) to be described later stop at the same symbol, and the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 4) continues to fluctuate without stopping. It refers to the state of being

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "ready-to-win display" is roughly classified into one unit of element for executing the "normal reach" effect (hereinafter, one unit of element for executing the effect is referred to as a "fluctuation element"), It is developed and executed from the "normal reach" variable element, and is developed and executed from the "normal reach" variable element, and the "super reach" variable element, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the "normal reach" variable element. In addition, a variable element of "special reach" having a higher expectation for a big hit than the variable element of "super reach" is prepared. Details of each “reach display” and “variable element” will be described later.

The stage is changed by pressing the frame button 22 by the player during a period in which the variable effect is not performed or during a "high-speed change" variable element in which the third symbol is changed at a high speed so that the third symbol cannot be visually recognized by the player. Each time the frame button 22 is operated, the stage is changed repeatedly in the order of "town stage"→"sky stage"→"island stage"→"town stage"→ . In addition, immediately after the power is turned on, the initial stage is set to "town stage".

In addition, when the variable element of "normal reach" is started in the variable performance performed by the third symbol display device 81, the variable element of "normal reach" to the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" , the selection screen of the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variable element of "normal reach". good.

Specifically, on the selection screen, a plurality of candidates that can be selected as variable elements of "Super Reach" or variable elements of "Special Reach" are displayed, and while the selection screen is displayed, the frame button 22 is pressed. The selected candidate is configured to be changed when the player performs a pressing operation. Then, based on the candidate selected when developing into the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach", the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach" is determined, According to the determination, the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" is executed in the third symbol display device 81.

In the first embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed. It may be constituted by an operating lever that can be tilted forward, backward, rightward and leftward. Then, based on the direction in which the control lever is tilted, the selection of the production stage may be changed, or the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" may be selected.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined "ready-to-win display" is performed, and play a role of enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light-emitting means such as light-emitting diodes (Light Emitting Diodes, hereinafter abbreviated as "LEDs") are provided on the periphery of the window part 14c. .

In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps. lights up or blinks to notify that the big win is in progress or that the "ready-to-win display" just before the big win is in progress. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error occurs is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electric decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (see FIG. ) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (hereinafter abbreviated as "ABS") is applied to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 with chrome plating. .) A plating member 36 made of resin is attached.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit.

A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to hit the ball to the front surface of the game board 13 is provided, and inside the operation handle 51 is a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 6). A touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of , a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the period of pressing operation, and a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by a change in electrical resistance. A variable resistor (not shown) for detection is built in.

When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of operation. A ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes with the movement of the ball, and is thereby hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails for guiding balls, pinwheels and rails 61 and 62, a general prize opening 63, a first A ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. FIG. The general prize winning port 63, the first ball receiving port 64, the variable prize winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and screwed from the front side of the game board 13 by wood screws. etc. is fixed. Also, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a winning opening is arranged and a shot ball is area).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin-made arc member 70 is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

A first pattern display device 37 provided with a plurality of LEDs 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, is disposed in the upper right portion of the game area in front view (the upper right portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37 displays the first symbol in accordance with each control performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 6), which will be described later (hereinafter, the variable display of the first symbol is referred to as "dynamic display"). is performed, and the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly displayed.

A plurality of LEDs 37a perform a dynamic display by indicating whether or not a change is in progress accompanying a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) by a lighting state, or stop after the change is completed. As a pattern, a pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the starting prize is indicated by the lighting state, or a ball that has not been changed among the balls entered in the first ball entrance 64 (holding ball). The number of held balls, which is the number of , is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error display. The LEDs 37a are configured to emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with a small number of LEDs by combining the emitted colors.

In the pachinko machine 10, whether a ball entered into the first ball entrance 64 is a big hit or not is determined (big win lottery), and when it is determined to be a big win, the type of the big win is also determined. As the types of jackpot determined here, "15R probability variable jackpot", "2R probability variable jackpot", and "15R normal jackpot" are prepared.

The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, but also indicates whether or not the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation executed with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64. , a pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot is shown.

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to the “probability fluctuation state” after the maximum round number of 15 rounds, and the “2R probability variable jackpot” means that the maximum number of rounds is 2 rounds. It is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to the “probability fluctuation state” after the jackpot. In addition, the "15R normal jackpot" shifts to the "time reduction state" after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and is in the "time reduction state" for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). It's a big hit.

In addition, the "probability fluctuation state" refers to a high probability state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during a so-called probability change. That is. The high-probability state (during variable probability, variable probability state) in the first embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol (to be described later) is increased and the ball is likely to enter the first ball entrance 64 .

On the other hand, the "normal game state" refers to the time of the low probability state that is not the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, the jackpot probability is higher than the "probability fluctuation state". is low. In addition, the "time reduction state (so-called time reduction state)" is a state in which the jackpot probability is low as in the "normal game state", and only the probability of winning the second symbol is increased and the first ball entrance It means a game state in which a ball is likely to enter 64.

Instead of changing the winning probability of the second symbol, depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10, the opening time of the electric accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 or It is also possible to change the number of times that is opened. Specifically, in the "time shortened state", the time for the electric role attached to the first entrance 64 to open is made longer than in the case other than the "time shortened state", or the electric role is The number of times the object is opened may be increased compared to the case other than the "time reduction state". In addition, in the "time reduction state", at least two of increasing the winning probability of the second symbol, increasing the opening time of the electric accessory, and increasing the number of times the electric accessory is opened are performed at the same time. can be

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the dynamic display on the first pattern display device 37, a liquid crystal that performs a variable effect of the third pattern. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") and a second symbol variably displayed (hereinafter referred to as a variation of the second symbol) triggered by the passage of the ball through the second ball entrance 67 A second pattern display device 83 is provided which is composed of an LED for displaying (referred to as "variable display"). A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 17-inch large liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 6), which will be described later. , are displayed.

Each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) is composed of a plurality of patterns, and these patterns are vertically scrolled for each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 to display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. It is designed to be displayed variably. In the third symbol display device 81 of the first embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 under the control of the main control device 110, whereas the first symbol display device 37 displays the game state. It is a decorative display according to the Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 4(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG.4(b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. Also, FIGS. 5(a) to 5(d) schematically show changes in the display content of the third symbol display device 81 when a "ready-to-win display" (to be described later) appears in the main display area Dm. It is a diagram.

The third pattern consists of 10 types of main patterns numbered from "0" to "9". Each main design consists of a back design made of a wooden box with a number from "0" to "9". , Large numbers are added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached designs that imitate characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. that fill the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the accessory pattern in a small green color so as to be displayed in front of the accessory pattern.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the result of the lottery by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6) to be described later is a big hit, a variable effect in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed, and the variable effect is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot occurs after the is over. After the jackpot ends, the transition to the "probability fluctuation state (variable probability state)" and a maximum of 15 rounds of jackpot are given, the main pattern with an odd number (equivalent to "high probability pattern") is aligned. done. Similarly, when the transition to the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot and the jackpot of up to 2 rounds is given, the main pattern (e.g., "341") of a specific pattern number combination (equivalent to the so-called "probability pattern") A fluctuating production is performed. On the other hand, when shifting to a "time reduction state (time reduction state)" after the end of the jackpot, a variable performance is performed in which main patterns (corresponding to "low probability patterns") with even numbers are aligned.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The upper one-third of the area is a sub-display area Ds for displaying an advance notice effect, characters, and the like. In addition, a cockpit display area Db for displaying the number of held balls and the like is provided in the central portion of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 on the lower base side.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle, and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, the left symbol row Z1 is displayed in the display area Dm1, and the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in the display area Dm2, A right symbol row Z3 is displayed in the display area Dm3.

The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform a variable effect. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third pattern is displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each variation effect. Stop is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols; "big winning display") is arranged on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is evenly divided into three sub-areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying characters and preview effect images, respectively. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a feeling of anticipation of a big win as a result of the variation effect performed in the main display area Dm. The cockpit display area Db includes a reserved pattern indicating the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which the variable effect has not been executed among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64, and the variable effect that is being executed. This is an area for displaying execution symbols related to.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4(b), a total of nine main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, in the left small area Ds1, a moving image such as the appearance of the notice pattern is displayed, and the variable effect performed in the main display area Dm is in a state where it is easier to transition to a big win than usual. Suggested to the player.

In the secondary display area Ds, in the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy wearing a headband in the first embodiment) normally performs a predetermined action, and the variable effect performed in the main display area Dm is performed. Based on this, a special action different from the predetermined action is performed, the color of the boy's hair, which is usually black, the color of the headband, which is usually white, changes, and another character appears. is done.

Furthermore, in the sub-display area Ds, in the right small area Ds3, a level meter (not shown) appears to indicate step by step whether or not a big win will occur in the variation effect performed in the main display area Dm. Is displayed. This level meter increases (adds) each time the expected occurrence of the "ready-to-win display" in the variable performance being executed and the expectation of the big win increase based on the appearance of the warning symbols etc. It is configured to indicate that a big win is confirmed when the display limit (MAX display) of the level meter is reached. Therefore, the sub-display area Ds has a function of suggesting the occurrence of "ready-to-reach display" in the main display area Dm.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable effect (dynamic display) is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball enters (Number of retained balls) is retained up to 4 times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and when the cockpit display area Db is displayed, the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4 provided in the cockpit display area Db and shown even if In the first to fourth reserved design display areas Db1 to Db4, one reserved design ("○" design (white circle design) in the normal display mode) is displayed for each reserved ball (one reserved ball). , the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved symbols displayed in the reserved design display areas Db1 to Db4.

That is, in the first to fourth reserved design display areas Db1 to Db4, when one reserved design is displayed in the first reserved design display area Db1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and the first・When a total of two reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the second reserved symbol display areas Db1 and Db2, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is two, and the first to third reserved symbol display areas Db1 When a total of three reserved patterns are displayed one each in ~Db3, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is three times, and each one is counted in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4. When four reserved symbols are displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is four. Further, when no reserved design is displayed in the first to fourth reserved design display areas Db1 to Db4, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0 and there is no reserved variable effect.

Further, the cockpit display area Db is provided with an execution symbol display area Db0 in which an execution symbol indicating that the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm is displayed. The execution symbol display area Db0 is provided on the left side of the first reserved symbol display area Db1 and is larger than the reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4. In addition, the reserved symbols displayed in the first reserved symbol display region Db1 are moved (shifted) and displayed as executed symbols in the executed symbol display area Db0.

When the reserved design displayed in the first reserved design display area Db1 is shifted to the executed design display area Db0 and displayed as an executed design, the reserved design displayed in the first reserved design display area Db1 is enlarged. It is configured to move and display and to be displayed as an execution symbol in the execution symbol display area Db0. Specifically, the executed symbols displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0 are configured to be displayed larger than the reserved symbols displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1 (for example, the radius is doubled). .

In addition, when shifting the reserved design from the first reserved design display area Db1 to the execution design display area Db0, the reserved design displayed in the first reserved design display area Db1 is displayed in addition to the mode of moving and displaying while enlarging. After temporarily disappearing from view, a pattern to be re-displayed as an execution pattern in the execution pattern display area Db0 or a reserved pattern displayed in the first reserved pattern display area Db1 is displayed as an execution pattern in the execution pattern display area Db0 while morphing. It may be configured as

The executed symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db are erased when the variable effect is completed, and as the executed symbols are erased, the displayed suspended symbols are moved and displayed as the lower side (left side) suspended symbols. be. Specifically, when the executed symbols displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0 are erased with the end of the variable effect, when the suspended symbols are displayed in the first suspended symbol display area Db1, the executed symbols are displayed. It is moved (shifted) and displayed as an execution symbol in the area Db0. Further, when a reserved design is displayed in the second reserved design display area Db2, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved design in the first reserved design display area Db1. Further, when a reserved design is displayed in the third reserved design display area Db3, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved design in the second reserved design display area Db2. Further, when a reserved design is displayed in the fourth reserved design display area Db4, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved design in the third reserved design display area Db3.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, while the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm, the execution symbols are continuously displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 (during the variable element of "super reach" or "special reach"). ). On the other hand, when the variable effect is finished, or when the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" is being executed, the execution pattern is erased. That is, when the executed symbols are displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, it indicates that the variable effect is being executed (continued) in the main display area Dm, and the executed symbols are displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0. If not, it indicates that the variable presentation is not executed (not continued) in the main display area Dm, or the variable element of 'super reach' or the variable element of 'special reach' is being executed.

Further, in the cockpit display area Db, the "holding change notice" can be executed by using the holding pattern and the execution pattern displayed in the cockpit display region Db. This "reserved change notice" means that the degree of expectation for a big hit to be executed in the main display area Dm is changed in a plurality of stages in the display colors of reserved symbols and executed symbols from before the execution of the variable performance to during the execution of the variable performance. It is a notice suggested by

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the "holding change notice", the display colors of the reserved symbols and the executed symbols are changed from white, which is the normal display mode, to "blue", which is the blue display mode, to "blue", which is the red display mode. It is configured to be changeable to "red" or "rainbow" in a rainbow color display mode. In this pachinko machine 10, when the "big win display" or "ready-to-win display" occurs in the variable effect, the selection ratio of the display colors of the pending symbols and the executed symbols is different. By changing the display color of the reserved pattern and the executed pattern from the normal display mode (white) to another display mode (for example, "blue"), in the variable effect indicated by the reserved pattern and the executed pattern "reach display ' or 'big win display' can be suggested to the player for each display color.

Specifically, in the "reserved change notice", when the reserved pattern and the executed pattern are in the "blue" display mode rather than the normal display mode (white), the variable effect indicated by the reserved pattern and the executed pattern The ratio of "reach display" and "jackpot display" is set high. In addition, when the reserved pattern and the executed pattern are in the display mode of "red" rather than "blue", the ratio of "reach display" and "jackpot display" in the variable effect indicated by the reserved pattern and the executed pattern is higher. set. Furthermore, when the reserved pattern and the executed pattern are in the display mode of "rainbow" rather than "red", the ratio of "reach display" and "jackpot display" in the variable effect indicated by the reserved pattern and the executed pattern is higher. set. The setting ratio and the like of the “holding change notice” will be described later.

In addition, when the display mode of the reserved design and the execution design is "red", the mode of production (hereinafter referred to as the main The mode of production is called "production mode"), "special reach" production mode or "special fluctuation" production mode (hereinafter, "super reach" production mode, "special reach" production mode or "special fluctuation" production mode This is sometimes collectively referred to as “super reach or higher”). Furthermore, when the display mode of the reserved pattern and the executed pattern is "rainbow", it is set so that the appearance of the "jackpot display" is confirmed in the variable effect indicated by the reserved pattern or the executed pattern of the "rainbow". there is Therefore, in the first embodiment, the display mode of the reserved symbols and the executed symbols is the current state of "reach display" and "jackpot display" in stages in the order of normal (white) → "blue" → "red" → "rainbow". It is set so that the expected output is high.

It should be noted that the display mode of the "rainbow" of the "suspended change notice" is set so as not to appear in the suspended symbols, but to appear only in the executed symbols. This is because, after displaying a “rainbow” display mode that confirms the occurrence of a big win with a reserved symbol, if the reserved symbol is not executed due to some abnormality (for example, power failure), the player can obtain Dissatisfaction due to not being able to get the jackpot that should be expected occurs. Therefore, in the pending symbols, the above dissatisfaction can be prevented in advance by configuring so as not to appear in advance the display mode of the "rainbow" which confirms the occurrence of the big win.

Further, due to this "reserved change notice", in a state where the display mode of the reserved design is changed, when the reserved design is shifted along with the execution (digestion) of the variable production, the display mode of the changed reserved design is shifted. It is configured to be inherited (inherited) and reflected to the previous reserved pattern or executed pattern. That is, when the display mode of the reserved design changes, even when the changed reserved design shifts to other reserved design display areas Db1 to Db3 or the execution design display area Db0 with the execution of the variable effect, the display before the shift The mode is configured to be maintained as it is as the display mode of the reserved pattern or the executed pattern after the shift.

Therefore, for example, when the display color of the reserved design changes to "red" in the fourth reserved design display area Db4, the reserved design is displayed in the third reserved design display area Db3, the second reserved design display area Db2, and the first reserved design. When shifting from the display area Db1 to the executed symbol display area Db0, the "red" reserved symbol or the executed symbol is continuously displayed. The details of this "pending change notice" will be described later.

In the first embodiment, the number of pending balls in the variable effect based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of held balls is four times. It is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls ( For example, they may be displayed in different colors or lighting patterns. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁It should be noted that, if the third symbol display device 81 does not display information about the number of pending balls (such as pending symbols), it is not possible to execute the "suspended change notice" by the pending symbols. It may be constructed such that by making it appear, a pre-reading notice similar to the "pending change notice" is executed.

Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state. In addition, when configured to display the number of pending balls by the pending lamp, by providing a plurality of types of display colors for the pending lamp, it is of course possible to execute a pre-reading notice similar to the "holding change notice" of the first embodiment. is possible.

Here, with reference to FIG. 5, the transition of the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the "normal reach" variable element and the "super reach" variable element appear in the variable effect will be described. FIG. 5(a) is a diagram showing a state just before (immediately before) "ready-to-win display (variable element of "normal reach")" appears in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. In FIG. 5(b), the "normal reach" variable element is started from the state of FIG. 5(a), the sub display area Ds is erased, and the "normal reach" variable element is executed in the main display area Dm. It is the figure which showed the state. In FIG. 5(c), the variable element of "super reach" is started from the state of FIG. 5(b), the cockpit display area Db is erased, and the variable element of "super reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. It is the figure which showed the state where it is. FIG. 5D shows a state in which the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed from the state of FIG. It is a diagram showing.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, when representing the third pattern, only the number pattern is used to express the main pattern in the figure, and the rear pattern made of a wooden box and the accessory pattern imitating the character are omitted. and omit its explanation. In addition, in FIG. 5, as a "reach display" that develops from the variable elements of "normal reach", the variable elements of "super reach" will be exemplified and explained, but the variable elements of "super reach" and the variable elements of "special reach" Although the effects such as the background display, character design, and variable time are different, the screen configuration (erasing or redisplaying, etc.) of the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db is the same. It is possible to replace the "Special Reach" variable with the "Special Reach" variable.

First, in FIG. 5A, the third symbol "7" is stopped in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and the third symbol "7" is displayed in the right display area Dm3. It is immediately before the stop display, and furthermore, the third pattern is still invisible in the middle display area Dm2 and is being "high-speed fluctuated". Therefore, it is a state just before (immediately before) the appearance of the so-called "ready-to-reach display" by the "7" symbol.

In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, the character pattern is displayed in the small central area Ds2 in a forewarning mode suggesting that the "ready-to-reach display" will appear. Specifically, the character design displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner as if the characters are cheering. A predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, and no character design or the like is displayed.

Further, in the cockpit display area Db, an executed symbol is displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, and reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Therefore, the execution symbol indicates that the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of pending balls of the variable effect is four.

In FIG. 5(b), from the state of FIG. 5(a), in the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stop-displayed and the "ready-to-win display" by the "7" symbol is displayed. is determined, and the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. In this “normal reach” variable, the main display area Dm is displayed as if it were enlarged. Specifically, in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3, the "7" symbol that is being stopped is displayed in an enlarged manner, and in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is displayed at a low speed so that it can be visually recognized. , scrolled at low speed from "5" pattern to "6" pattern).

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is erased as the main display area Dm expands due to the occurrence of the "normal reach" variable, and the sub-display area Ds becomes invisible. This is because, as described above, the secondary display area Ds has a function of suggesting whether or not the "ready-to-win display" will occur mainly in the variable effect in the main display area Dm. is generated, the significance of the existence of the sub-display area Ds is diminished.

Further, when the "ready-to-win display" occurs in the main display area Dm, the player pays attention to whether the result of the "ready-to-win display" is the "big win display" or the "losing display". There is, and the attention to the display contents of the sub-display area Ds suggesting the occurrence of the "ready-to-reach display" fades away.

Therefore, when the "ready-to-win display" occurs in the main display area Dm, the display content of the main display area Dm is enlarged so that the player can easily recognize the contents of the "ready-to-win display" that the player focuses on. It is configured to display and erase the sub-display area Ds along with the enlargement.

In the state of FIG. 5B, in the cockpit display area Db, as in the display state of FIG. Reserved symbols are displayed in the areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Therefore, as in FIG. 5(a), the execution symbol indicates that the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of pending balls of the variable effect is four. showing.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the display in the cockpit display area Db is not erased and is continuously displayed during the "normal reach" variable element. This is because the variable element of "normal reach" is often lost in the big winning lottery in the variable effect of only the variable element of "normal reach", and there is a high possibility that the "losing display" will appear. Then, when the variable element of "normal reach" becomes "losing display", the next variable effect is immediately started, so it is necessary to suggest to the player whether or not the next variable effect is pending. be. Therefore, the display of the cockpit display area Db is maintained (continuously displayed) during the execution of the variable elements of the "normal reach", and is configured to suggest to the player how many pending balls of the variable effect exist. ing.

In addition, since the cockpit display area Db is smaller than the sub-display area Ds, even if it continues to be displayed during the variable element of "normal reach", the performance of the variable element of "normal reach" is not hindered. Therefore, even if the cockpit display area Db is continuously displayed during the execution of the "normal reach" variable element, there is no actual harm.

Furthermore, the pending symbols and the execution symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db can execute the above-described "suspension change notice", and the "suspension change notice " is configured to take over (inherit) and display the display mode of the reserved pattern changed by ". That is, it is configured to be able to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the big hit of the variable effect being executed by the display mode of the executed symbols. Therefore, by having the player confirm the display mode of the execution pattern during the execution of the variable element of "normal reach", the variable element of "normal reach" during execution develops into the variable element of "super reach" and wins big. Whether or not the game is to be played can be predicted by the player, and the interest based on the prediction is given.

Specifically, for example, during the execution of the variable element of "normal reach", the execution pattern is displayed in "white", which is a normal display mode, and "blue", which is one level higher than the "white". If so, the player predicts that the "normal reach" variable element is unlikely to develop into a "super reach" variable element and result in a big win. On the other hand, when the execution pattern is displayed in "red" or "rainbow" during the execution of the variable element of "normal reach", the player can change the variable element of "normal reach" to the variable element of "super reach". It is predicted that it will develop into a big win, or that a "big win display" will appear even if the variable element of the "normal reach" remains as it is. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 equipped with the "holding change notice", the cockpit display area Db is continued during the execution of the "normal reach" variable element in order to give the player the above interest during the execution of the "normal reach" variable element. configured to display. The details of the "pending change notice" will be described later.

FIG. 5(c) shows a state in which the variable element of "super reach" is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 5(b). In this "super reach" variable element, a pattern indicating that a "reach display" based on the "7" pattern displayed in the "normal reach" variable element (hereinafter referred to as "reach display" occurred ) is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, in FIG. 5(c), a "battle effect" in which a plurality of character patterns compete for victory or defeat using almost the entire display screen of the third pattern display device 81 ("competition effect" as a variable element of "special reach"). is displayed. In this "battle effect", an effect (in the first embodiment, kickboxing) is executed in which the character pattern on the player side (for example, the character pattern on the left side) and the character pattern on the enemy side (for example, the character pattern on the right side) fight. . In the "battle presentation", if the character pattern on the player side wins, a big win is achieved, and the "big win display" appears as a display result of the variable element of the "super reach". On the other hand, in the "battle effect", if the character pattern on the enemy side wins, it is set to be a loss, and a "loss display" appears as a display result of the variable element of the "super reach".

Further, as shown in FIG. 5(c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the cockpit display area Db is erased during the execution of the "super reach" variable element, and instead, the third symbol display is performed. At the upper left of the display area of the device 81 and below the ready-to-win formation pattern, a number pattern ("4" in the first embodiment) indicating the number of pending balls in the variable effect is newly displayed. is configured to

In the variable performance being executed, if the variable element of "Super Reach", which has a higher expectation for a big hit than the variable element of "Normal Reach", occurs, the player will be able to determine the number of pending (waiting) variable performances. Also, we are paying attention to whether the variable effect being executed will be "big win display" or "losing display". For this reason, attention is not paid to the reserved pattern indicating the number of reserved balls of the variable effect before execution. Rather, if the reserved symbols are displayed in the cockpit display area Db during the execution of the variable element of "super reach", the player cannot concentrate on the effect of the variable element of "super reach". In some cases, the user may feel annoyed by the display of reserved symbols.

Further, the reserved symbols displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4 of the cockpit display area Db are not directly related to the variable effect being executed. Furthermore, the pending symbols displayed in the first to fourth pending symbol display areas Db1 to Db4 are set (lottery) processing different from the display control of the variable effect being executed (in the voice lamp control device 113, the variable effect is Variation effect processing (see FIG. 31), which will be described later, and a pending display setting process (see FIG. 30), which will be described later. On the other hand, during the execution of the variable element of "Super Reach", various character patterns are displayed and many effects are displayed for each character pattern, etc., which increases the processing load of display control. be. In such a situation, if display control is performed for a plurality of pending symbols that are not directly related to the variable effect being executed, the processing load on the display control of the entire third symbol display device 81 increases for each pending symbol. As a result, display abnormalities such as so-called dropped frames may occur.

Furthermore, the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db takes over (inherits) the display mode of the pending pattern changed by the "holding change notice", so it has a direct relationship with the variable effect being executed. However, the "suspended change notice" suggests the degree of expectation for the appearance of the "jackpot display" and the degree of expectation for the appearance of the "reach display". Therefore, when the variable element of "super reach" appears, it is in a state of fulfilling the suggestion of the degree of expectation for the appearance of the "reach display" as the "suspension change notice". In addition, when the variable element of "Super Reach" appears, by executing "Reach display" with a high expectation of big win, which is the variable element of "Super Reach", it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of appearance of "Super Reach display". It is a state in which a certain degree (for example, half) is satisfied. Furthermore, as described above, when the variable element of "super reach" appears, the player pays attention to the content of the effect of the variable element of "super reach", and the display of the "holding change notice" in the execution pattern Concern for mode is waning.

Therefore, during the execution of the variable element of "super reach", the reserved symbols and the executed symbols with low attention of the player are erased, and the effect of the variable element of "super reach" is mainly executed on the display screen. It is possible to make the person pay attention (concentrate) on the production of the variable element of "super reach". Further, by erasing the reserved symbols and the executed symbols that attract less attention from the player, the load on the display control can be reduced, and the occurrence of display abnormalities such as missing frames can be prevented.

In addition, in the state of FIG. 5(c), the reach formation pattern of the "7" pattern, which is the cause of the fluctuation factor of this "super reach", is reduced to the upper left of the display area of the third pattern display device 81. it's shown. The production of the variable element of "super reach" indicates whether the variable production being executed is "big hit display" or "losing display", but has a direct relationship with the display mode of the third symbol. Since it is performed by a character pattern that does not have a third pattern, if only the character pattern in the variable element of "super reach" is focused in a state where the third pattern is not displayed at all, the effect is "reach display" There are cases where it is not possible to recognize whether or not it is (for example, when it is misunderstood as a "demo screen"). In addition, since the effect of the variable element of "super reach" is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the player is asked which third symbol caused the "reach display" during the variable element of "super reach". may be forgotten. However, if the reach formation pattern is displayed large during the execution of the variable element of "Super Reach", the production of the variable element of "Super Reach" becomes difficult to see, and the production of the variable element of "Super Reach" itself is likely to hinder

Therefore, among the variable elements of "super ready-to-win", in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol, which is the cause of the variable element of "super ready-to-win", is displayed small. Configure. By configuring in this way, it is suggested to the player that the "ready-to-win display" is occurring without hindering the performance of the variable element of the "super ready-to-win", and the third symbol that has generated the "ready-to-win display". The player can be made to clearly suggest the type of

In addition, in the state of FIG. 5(c), at the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (under the "ready-to-reach display"), a number symbol (in the first embodiment, , “4”) are displayed. As described above, the display in the cockpit display area Db is erased during the execution of the variable elements of "Super Reach", so the player can completely cancel the number of times of the suspended variable effect depending on the display contents of the cockpit display area Db. It may not be recognized.

Therefore, instead of erasing the cockpit display area Db during the execution of the variable element of "Super Reach", a numerical pattern indicating the number of pending balls of the variable effect is displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third pattern display device 81. configured to By constructing in this way, the number of times of the variable performance held by the player can be indicated without obstructing the performance of the variable element of "super reach" during the performance of the variable element of "super reach". can be done.

In FIG. 5(d), from the state of FIG. 5(c), the production of the variable element of "super reach" fails (the enemy character pattern wins), and "failure display" appears in the main display area Dm. In addition, the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are displayed again on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. In this state, the character pattern in the central small region Ds2 of the sub-display region Ds and the execution patterns and reserved patterns in the cockpit display region Db are visible again. Note that the character design in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is displayed in a mode showing a disappointing expression due to the appearance of the "failed display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the variable element of "super reach" is finished and the variable effect is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the display state of the third symbol display device 81 is the initial state, that is, the main The display area Dm, the sub-display area Ds, and the cockpit display area Db are configured to be displayed. By configuring in this way, it is easy for the player to recognize that the variable performance has been stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and when there is a pending (waiting) variable performance, the next variable performance is smoothly performed. It is possible to execute. Therefore, when the variable element of "super reach" is finished, the executed symbols and the suspended symbols in the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed, which is a natural expression in the flow of the execution process of the variable effect. does not feel uncomfortable.

As described above, as shown in FIGS. 5(a) to 5(d), in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the display state of the main display area Dm is enlarged or reduced, and the sub-display area By displaying, hiding (erasing) or re-displaying the display state of Ds, and displaying, hiding (erasing) or re-displaying the display state of the cockpit display area Db, the display content with high importance at each timing can be displayed. It is configured so that it can be easily recognized by the player.

It should be noted that at each timing of the variable effect, the display state of the main display area Dm, the sub-display area Ds, or the cockpit display area Db may be appropriately rearranged to execute the variable effect. Specifically, for example, the main display area Dm and the sub-display area Ds may be displayed, and the cockpit display area Db may be erased to execute a variable effect, or the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db may be The main display area Dm may be displayed in a reduced size while the variable effect is executed.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. The second symbol display device 83 has a variable display that alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as display symbols (second symbols) each time the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67. It is something to do. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in the first embodiment), the first ball entrance 64 is activated for a predetermined period of time ( open).

The number of reserved balls in the second ball entrance 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed in the second symbol reservation lamp 84. . Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holdings are provided, and arranged symmetrically above the third symbol display device 81 . Then, the number of reservations is displayed according to the number of the second symbol reservation lamps 84 lit.

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device 83 as in the first embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, as with the first ball entrance 64, the maximum number of held balls passing through the second ball entrance 67 is not limited to four times, but may be three times or less, or five times or more (for example, , 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be performed.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first ball inlet 64, a first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball inlet switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is drawn by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 6), a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and a variable effect is executed by the third symbol display device 81. be. The first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

The first ball entrance 64 is provided with an electric accessory having two blades covering an opening through which a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 . The electric accessory opens and closes the two blades to open the first ball entrance 64 (enlarged state) or close it (reduced state). In normal times, the first ball entrance 64 is in a closed state in which the wings of the electric accessory are closed (the wings stand up), and the ball cannot enter the first ball entrance 64, or It is in a state where it is difficult to enter the ball.

On the other hand, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at the symbol "O", the electric accessory of the first ball entrance 64 is operated for a predetermined period of time. From the state in which the wings of the electric accessory stand up while the electric accessory is being operated. It will be in a state of being movable in a substantially V shape (inverted V shape), and the first ball entrance 64 will be in an open state. When the first ball entrance 64 is in the open state, the ball can enter the first ball entrance 64, or the ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64 compared to the closed state. That is, as a result of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83, the ball stops at the symbol "○" and wins, and when the first ball entrance 64 is opened, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. It is possible to make a state in which many big winning lotteries can be performed by entering a ball.

A variable prize winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular special prize winning opening (large open opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 6) results in a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big winning stop symbol will be displayed after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has passed. Along with lighting up, the third symbol display device 81 displays a stop symbol corresponding to the big win to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large open opening to be opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit in the first pattern display device 37 is lit, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is opened. A special game state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. You may make it form.

Second entrances 67 are provided on the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, respectively. A through-hole (not shown) through which a ball passes is vertically provided in the second ball inlet 67 . When the ball launched into the game area passes through the second ball entrance 67, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and the main controller 110 Then, a winning lottery for the second symbol (also called normal symbol) is performed.

As a result of the lottery of the second pattern (normal pattern) performed for the ball passing through the second ball entrance 67, if it is determined to be a hit, the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 "○ ' symbol is stopped and displayed, the electric accessory of the first ball entrance 64 is activated. As a result, the wings of the electric accessory, which make it difficult for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, are moved from a substantially vertical upright state to a substantially V shape (inverted V shape) for a predetermined period of time. A state in which a ball can enter the first ball entrance 64 or a state in which a ball can easily enter compared to the closed state is established.

Affixing spaces K1 and K2 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. can be viewed through a small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that have not entered any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out hole 66.例文帳に追加The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has a micro-processing unit (Micro-Processing Unit, hereinafter abbreviated as "MPU") as a one-chip microcomputer responsible for each control, a port for contacting various devices, and various lottery A random number generator used for the system, a clock pulse generator circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. are mounted as necessary.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a read only memory (hereinafter abbreviated as "ROM") 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a control program stored in the ROM 202. A random access memory (hereinafter abbreviated as "RAM") 203, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data, etc. when executing a program, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, Various circuits such as a data transmission/reception circuit are built in.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main controller 110 controls the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, setting of dynamic display and variable effect in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result of the variable display in the second symbol display device 83. perform the main processing of The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Also, the ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a pending number table 202c, a stop pattern table 202d, and a fluctuation pattern table 202e. Main controller 110 executes the main control described above by various counters stored in RAM 203 and various tables stored in ROM 202 .

Here, with reference to FIG. 7, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for the big hit lottery, the setting of the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37, the setting of the variable effect of the third symbol display device 81, and the display result of the variable display of the second symbol display device 83. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in order to perform a lottery or the like. Further, in the description of various counters, various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will also be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 13. FIG.

For the setting of the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37, and the setting of the variable effect of the third pattern display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the A first winning type counter C2 used for selecting a stop type, a stopping pattern selection counter C3 used for selecting a variable effect effect mode, and a first initial value random number used for initial value setting of the first random number counter C1. A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used.

Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 4 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 26). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 899"), and the maximum value (for example, "899" for a counter that can take a value of "0 to 899"). ) and then returns to “0”. In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1. The random number counter C1 is updated.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of "0 to 899", the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of "0 to 899". be. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 26).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in the first embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start win), It is stored in one of the first to fourth reserved areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. FIG. The jackpot random number value is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserve area is set by the jackpot random number table 202a. If it matches the set random number that will be a big hit, it will be determined as a big win.

Details of the jackpot random number table 202a will now be described with reference to FIG. 8(a). FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number table 202a is for the low probability state used when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the "normal game state" and the "shortened time state" (the period is not the "variable probability state"). , the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is divided into two types, one for the high probability state used in the case of the "probability fluctuation state (variable probability)" which is a high probability state in which the probability of winning a big win is higher than the low probability state. . The number of random numbers to be the big wins included in each of the low-probability state and the high-probability state is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter with a range of "0 to 899". In this first winning random number counter C1, the number of random number values (jackpot random number values) that become a jackpot in the low probability state is three, and the value "7,307,582" is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. It is

On the other hand, the number of random number values (jackpot random number values) that become a big hit in the case of a high probability state is 30. 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892" are stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. there is

In addition, in the first embodiment, the jackpot random number value for the low probability state and the jackpot random number value for the high probability state stored in the jackpot random number table 202a are set so as not to overlap each other. is set. Here, if there is a value that becomes a jackpot random value regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, so there is a possibility that the jackpot will be illegally awarded. On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high-probability state or a low-probability state), by changing the value of the random number that becomes a big win, Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the value of the random number that becomes , fraud can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description is continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines the jackpot type when the jackpot is won, and is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (eg, "0 to 99"), and the maximum value (eg, "0 In the case of a counter that can take a value of up to 99”, it returns to “0” after reaching “99”). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in the first embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). , stored in the same reservation area as the reservation area where the first winning random number counter C1 is stored among the first to fourth reservation areas provided in the reservation ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in one reservation area in the reservation ball storage area 203b is not a random number that becomes a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that becomes a loss, the variation pattern in the variation effect Also, the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") is the one at the time of losing. On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number for a big win, the variation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuation effect will be those at the time of the big win. . In this case, the variation pattern and stop type at the time of the big win are determined corresponding to the big win type indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same reservation area.

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of "0-99". The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM202. Here, with reference to FIG.8(b), the jackpot classification table 202b is demonstrated. FIG.8(b) is the figure which showed typically an example of the jackpot classification table 202b. As shown in FIG. 8B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot types and the values of the first hit type counter C2 are associated with each other.

As for the jackpot type, as described above, after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, the jackpot probability shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" in which the probability of the jackpot is high. "15R normal jackpot" in which the jackpot probability becomes a low probability state later, and shifts to "time reduction state" during 100 fluctuation times, and the maximum number of rounds shifts to "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot of 2 rounds. There is a "2R probability variable jackpot". In the following description, the 15-round jackpot of "15R probability variable jackpot" and "15R normal jackpot" may be described as "15R jackpot common".

In the jackpot type table 202b, each jackpot type is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 8 (b), the value "0 to 39" of the first per type counter C2 is associated with "15R probability variable jackpot", and the value of the first per type counter C2 with respect to "15R normal jackpot" The value "40-79" is associated, and the value "80-99" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the "2R probability variable jackpot".

When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is a value for a big win, the big winning type associated with the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same reservation area is determined from the big winning type table 202b. . For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20", "15R probability variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "60", the jackpot type is " If "15R normal jackpot" is determined and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90", "2R probability variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

Thus, in the first embodiment, in the case of a jackpot, the "15R variable jackpot" is selected with a probability of 40%, the "15R normal jackpot" is selected with a probability of 40%, and the "2R jackpot" is selected with a probability of 20%. "Variable jackpot" is selected. The probability that each jackpot type is selected when a jackpot is won is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table 202b.

In addition, the probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 . In this case, a jackpot type table 202b corresponding to each game state is prepared, and in each jackpot type table 202b, the number of values of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type may be changed.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters continues. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by "1" in sequence within a range of, for example, "0 to 99" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99").

In the first embodiment, depending on the pending number of suspended variable effects and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, the rough effect mode of the variable effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of the big hit and at the time of losing is determined. selected. Specifically, the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode or "non-reach (normal)" production mode in which the "reach display" does not occur, and the "normal reach" variable element as the "reach display" are executed. "Normal Reach" effect mode, "Super Reach" effect mode in which the variable element of "Normal Reach" is developed and the variable element of "Super Reach" is executed, and similarly, the variable element of "Normal Reach" is developed into "Special Reach". , and a ``special variation'' presentation mode that occurs when ``2R probability variable jackpot'' is selected.

Here, each effect mode will be described in detail. Among the production modes, the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode and the "non-reach (normal)" production mode are the display areas Dm1 to Dm3 (see FIG. 4A) of the main display area Dm. This is an effect mode in which the same third pattern does not stop in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3 after the variable element of "high-speed variation" is performed, and "ready-to-win display" is not generated.

Here, the variable elements of the "high-speed variation" are the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4(a)) in the variation effect performed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 4) of the third symbol display device 81. This means that the third pattern displayed in . In this "high-speed fluctuation" variable element, the third pattern is changed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the display contents of the third pattern, and the stop result of the previously stop-displayed variable effect is irregularly mixed (shuffled). (Do) is executed as a production.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "high speed variation" is performed, the variable element of "low speed variation" is performed except for a specific effect mode ("non-reach (shortening)" effect mode). It is configured to be The "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is the variable effect performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 4(a)). It refers to a state in which the third pattern is scrolled at a low speed at a possible speed. In this "low-speed fluctuation" variable element, the third symbols are displayed in the order of left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 4(a)) while making the player recognize the display contents of the third symbol. Stop displaying the pattern. When the same third symbol stops in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3, it is considered that the "ready-to-win display" occurs and develops into a variable element of "normal reach", while in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3. When the different third symbol stops, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, and the variable effect is terminated (except for the case where it develops into a "pseudo run" described later).

Therefore, in the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode, the "low-speed variation" variation element is performed after the "high-speed variation" variation element is performed. ) are stopped in order, and one variation effect is completed. On the other hand, in the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode, after the variable element of "high-speed variation" is performed, the variable element of "low-speed variation" is not performed, and after the variable element of "high-speed variation" is completed, each symbol Rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped at the same time, and 1 variation performance ends.

Among the production modes, the "normal reach" production mode is a variable production of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4(a)) in the main display area Dm. Immediately after the third symbol stops, the "normal reach" variable element is executed, and other "reach display", that is, the executed "reach" that does not develop into the variable element of "super reach" and the variable element of "special reach" It is one of the production modes of "display". In this "normal reach" variable element, as described above, the third symbols stopped and displayed in the left symbol row Z1 (left display area Dm1) and right symbol row Z3 (right display area Dm3) of the main display area Dm are Displayed larger than usual. Further, the third symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 (middle display area Dm2) are scrolled downward in the vertical direction of the display screen at a low speed, and displayed in a state in which the player can visually recognize the third symbols in the middle display area Dm2. . Furthermore, in this "normal reach" variable, the sub-display area Ds is erased as the main display area Dm is enlarged (see FIG. 5(b)).

Among the presentation modes, the "super reach" presentation mode is one of the presentation modes of "reach display" in which the variable elements of "super reach" are developed from the variable elements of "normal reach". In this "super reach" production mode, during execution of the "super reach" variable element, the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 4A) is erased from the display state of the "normal reach" variable element, and this " The reach formation pattern of the third pattern which was the cause of occurrence of "reach display" is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display of the main display area Dm changes from the variable element of "normal reach", and a plurality of character patterns are made to appear to perform "battle effect (kickboxing in the first embodiment)" (Fig. 5 ( c) see).

In the first embodiment, based on the result (win/lose) of the "battle effect", it is configured to suggest the suitability of the variable effect. Specifically, for example, in the above-mentioned "battle effect", when the character pattern on the player's side wins over the character pattern on the enemy's side, the variable effect is suggested to be a "big win display", When the character pattern on the side loses to the character pattern on the enemy side, it is configured to suggest that the variable effect becomes "losing display".

Among the presentation modes, the ``special reach'' presentation mode is one of the presentation modes of ``reach display'' in which the variable element of ``special reach'' is executed by developing from the variable element of ``normal reach''. In this "special reach" production mode, while the "special reach" variable element is being executed, the display state of the "normal reach" variable element changes from the display state of the "normal reach" variable element to the cockpit display area Db (Fig. 4 (a)) is erased, and the reach forming pattern of the third pattern which was the cause of occurrence of this "reach display" is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 4(a)) changes from the variable element of "normal reach", and a plurality of characters different from the variable element of "super reach" appear to create a "competition effect". (In the first embodiment, an automobile race)" is performed (not shown).

In the first embodiment, based on the result (win/lose) of the "competition effect", it is configured to suggest the propriety of the variable effect. Specifically, for example, in the above-mentioned "competition effect", when the character pattern on the player's side wins over the character pattern on the enemy's side, the variable effect is suggested to be "big win display". When the character pattern on the side loses to the character pattern on the enemy side, it is configured to suggest that the variable effect becomes "losing display".

Among the performance modes, the "special variation" performance mode is a performance mode that is executed without omission when the "2R probability variable jackpot" is won. In this "special variation" presentation mode, the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are erased, and the entire main display area Dm changes from the normal background display, suggesting that the "2R probability variable jackpot" will occur. A movie effect is displayed.

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in the first embodiment). It is stored in the same reservation area as the reservation area in which the first hit random number counter C1 is stored among the first to fourth reservation areas provided in the reservation ball storage area 203b.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is referred to according to whether the variable performance is appropriate, the current game state, and the number of variable performances currently pending (the number of pending balls). The stop pattern table 202d is configured differently. That is, the stop pattern table 202d is provided in a plurality of types, and is configured to be selected according to the number of variable effects during standby (the number of pending balls) and the like. In the first embodiment, when determining the detailed variation pattern of the variation effect, first, based on the reservation number table 202c provided in the ROM 202, the propriety of the variation effect, the current game state, and the current variation effect (the number of held balls) is selected. Then, based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a rough effect mode of the variable effect is selected. Thereafter, a detailed variation pattern (fluctuation time) of the variable performance is determined based on the selected performance mode and the value of the variation type counter CS1, which will be described later.

The plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are set so that the range of random numbers of the stop pattern selection counter C3 for selecting the effect mode differs for each stop pattern table 202d. The reason why a plurality of stop pattern tables 202d are prepared is to change the selection ratio of the effect mode of the variable effect according to the suitability of the variable effect, the game state and the number of reserved balls. That is, (1) whether a big hit occurs in the acquired third symbol variation effect, or (2) the current game state of the pachinko machine 10 is "probability change state", "time reduction state" or "normal game state". and (3) the number of reserved balls of the variable effect that are reserved, to change the selection ratio of the effect mode.

The first reason for this is to change the degree of expectation for a big win for each effect mode. That is, the ratio of selecting the "non-reach" production mode, the "normal reach" production mode, the "super reach" production mode, and the "special reach" production mode in the case of winning the big winning lottery and the case of losing the big winning lottery. are made different, the degree of expectation for a big win is changed for each performance mode. Specifically, for example, when winning the jackpot lottery, the ``super reach'' performance mode or the ``special reach'' performance mode is configured to be easily selected, and when the jackpot lottery is not won, the ``non-reach'' performance is configured. The mode and the "normal reach" presentation mode are configured to be easily selected. By configuring in this way, the ``super reach'' performance mode and the ``special reach'' performance mode can be a performance mode that makes it easy to hit a big hit, and the ``normal reach'' performance mode and the ``non-reach'' performance mode are less likely to hit a big hit. A performance or a performance without a big win can be provided, and the degree of expectation for a big win can be differentiated for each performance mode. Therefore, when a performance that makes it easy to win a big win appears in the variable performance, it is suggested to the player that the possibility of a big win is high while the performance that makes it easy to win a big win is being performed, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game. there is

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the acquired lottery result is a big win, the stop pattern table 202d (for example, Based on the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 11(a)), it is configured to select the effect mode of the variable effect. On the other hand, when the acquired lottery result is a loss, it is difficult to select an effect that makes it easy to win a big win, and the stop pattern table 202d (for example, the A table 202d1 or the B table 202d2 (see FIG. 10) that makes it easy to select an effect that makes it difficult to win a big win). (a) or see FIG. 10(b))). As a result, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the third symbol in the variable performance, if the performance that makes it easy to win a big win is executed, the performance that makes it easy to win a big win is executed in the variable performance, and the performance that makes it difficult to win a big win is executed. In the case of such a change, the variation performance makes it difficult for the big win to occur, and by providing a difference in the expected value of the big win for each performance mode, the amusement of the game can be enhanced during the execution of the variation performance.

The second reason is to reduce as much as possible the number of useless balls (so-called no lottery due to overflow winning) based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 in the state where the number of standby times of the variable effect has reached the upper limit. be. Specifically, the number of standby times of the variable effect is set to a maximum of 4 times, and the variable output is executed at least for a certain period of time. In a game state in which balls are likely to enter the 1-ball entrance 64, it is easy to reach the maximum number of reserved balls in the third symbol. In these game states, if a variable effect with a long variable time is selected, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 occurs frequently when the maximum number of balls held in the third symbol is reached, and the first ball entering is made. Even though the ball enters the mouth 64, the lottery opportunity for the third symbol cannot be acquired. In addition, even in the "normal game state", when the maximum number of reserved balls of the third pattern is reached, if a variable performance with a long fluctuation time is selected, the number of reserved balls of the third symbol is maintained during the execution of the variable performance. is not digested, even if a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 during that time, the lottery opportunity for the third symbol cannot be acquired. In such a state, the player judges that the game value cannot be obtained even if the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64, and the variable effect is terminated and the number of reserved balls can be acquired again. The shooting of the balls is stopped until the game is interrupted. When the game is interrupted, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered, which affects the management of the game parlor.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in a game state in which the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol is easily reached, or in the number of reserved balls close to (or matching) the maximum number of reserved balls, the fluctuation time is relatively short. Based on a stop pattern table 202d (for example, a B table 202d2 (see FIG. 10B)) that is likely to be selected, the effect mode of the variable effect is selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the first ball entrance 64 in the state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol has been reached.

Furthermore, the third reason is that the execution time of the variable performance in the third pattern display device 81 is set long to delay the end of the variable performance, thereby maintaining the state in which the variable performance is being executed for a long time. . Specifically, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is small (no), if the ball is not newly entered into the first ball entrance 64 within the variable time of the variable effect being executed, the next variable effect cannot be started, and the third symbol display device 81 must display a demonstration screen or the like. When the third symbol display device 81 does not perform a variable effect in spite of the fact that the player is playing the game by shooting the ball, the player can obtain the interest related to the lottery for the big win desired by the player. Instead, they lose interest in the game. Further, the player recognizes that the pachinko machine 10 is one in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 because the third symbol display device 81 does not perform a variable effect, and the player cannot obtain a game value. There is a possibility that the player may stop playing the pachinko machine 10 by judging that.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d (for example, the A table 202d1 (see FIG. 10A)) in which a relatively long variation time is likely to be selected when the number of pending balls in the variation effect is small. ), the effect mode of the variable effect is selected. As a result, a situation in which the third pattern display device 81 is not subjected to the variable performance can be made difficult to occur, and the execution state of the variable performance in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained for a long time.

Here, the details of the pending number table 202c and the stop pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 11. FIG. FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically showing the pending number table 202c. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when performing a variation effect based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, the number of reservations table 202c is referred to, and the variation effect one of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d4 is selected based on the validity of the game, the game state at that point of time, and the number of suspensions of the variable effect at that point of time. Then, based on one of the selected stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d4 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a rough effect mode of the variable effect is determined.

Specifically, as shown in the pending number table 202c in FIG. At the time of extracting a loss in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" and when the number of held balls is "1", the A table 202d1 (see FIG. 10A) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected. . In addition, when extracting a loss in the "normal game state" and the number of retained balls is "4", or when extracting a loss in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" and the number of retained balls is " In the case of "two or three" or "four", the B table 202d2 (see FIG. 10(b)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected. Furthermore, when extracting the "15R jackpot ("15R probability variable jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot"), regardless of the game state or the number of held balls, the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d (Fig. 11(a) ) is selected. Also, when extracting the "2R probability variable jackpot", the D table 202d4 (see FIG. 11(b)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the game state or the number of held balls.

That is, when one of the jackpots is won, the stop pattern table 202d (C table 202d3 or D table 202d4) is selected based only on the type of jackpot regardless of the number of pending balls or the game state at that time, Only when the jackpot is not won (that is, at the time of losing), the stop pattern table 202d (A table 202d1 or B table 202d2) is selected based on the number of reserved balls and the game state at that time.

It should be noted that the stop pattern table 202d may be configured to differ according to the number of reserved balls even when a jackpot is won. For example, when a big hit is won and the number of pending balls is large, a stop pattern table 202d in which a relatively short variation pattern is likely to be selected (for example, a "super reach" effect mode or " It may be configured to allow selection of the "Special Reach" effect mode, etc.). In this case, in each performance mode in which ``ready-to-reach display'' is executed, a performance mode in which only the time of the variable element part of ``high-speed fluctuation'' is changed from 7 seconds to 3 seconds is selected. By configuring in this way, for example, when the variation effect is started in a state where the maximum number of held balls is 4 times, even if the variable element of "high-speed variation" is performed in 3 seconds, the 3 seconds " When the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" ends (when it is recognized as "high-speed fluctuation" for 3 seconds), "reach display" may occur in the variable effect, and the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" for 3 seconds Even if is performed, by configuring so that the production mode in which the "reach display" other than "non-reach (shortened)" is executed is executed, the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" for 3 seconds At the time of execution of , it is possible to make it impossible to know whether the variable performance will result in a big win or a loss.

In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state", when the jackpot is not won and the number of held balls is small, a stop pattern table 202d (for example, A table) in which a relatively long fluctuation pattern is likely to be selected 202d1) may be selected. By configuring in this way, even in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the third pattern display device 81 is executing the fluctuation effect, and the third pattern display device 81 A situation in which the variable performance is not performed can be made difficult to occur, and the execution state of the variable performance in the third pattern display device 81 can be maintained for a long time.

Next, each stop pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a stop pattern table 202d that can be selected at the time of failure. FIG. 10(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of an A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d. b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of the big win, and FIG. 11(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d, FIG. 11B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), in the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode is set to "0" to "74". , the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "95" to " 97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98" and "99". In addition, in the A table 202d1, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (shortened)" rendering mode, and the "non-reach (shortened)" rendering mode is set so as not to be selected. ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10B, in the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (shortening)" effect mode is "0" to "74". , the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98, 99". In the C table 202d3, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (normal)" rendering mode, and the "non-reach (normal)" rendering mode is set so as not to be selected. ing.

That is, in the A table 202d1, the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode is 75%, the "normal reach" effect mode is 20%, the "super reach" effect mode is 3%, and the "special reach" effect mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio. In addition, in the B table 202d2, the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is 75%, the "normal reach" effect mode is 20%, the "super reach" effect mode is 3%, and the "special reach" effect mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio.

Therefore, on the A table 202d1, the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode is selected, and on the B table 202d2, the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is selected instead of the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode. is configured as Therefore, it can be said that the A table 202d1 tends to have a comparatively longer variation time of the selected variation effect than the B table 202d2. In other words, it can be said that the B table 202d2 tends to shorten the variation time of the selected variation effect as compared with the A table 202d1. The selection ratios of the "normal reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode and the "special reach" effect mode are set to be the same for the A table 202d1 and the B table 202d2.

In this way, when a losing lottery result is extracted, the production mode of the variable production is selected based on the number of pending balls of the variable production being held. For example, when the number of pending balls in the variable performance is large, it is made easy to select a "non-reach (shortened)" performance mode with a short variable performance time. Thus, when the number of pending balls of the variable performance is large, the execution time of the variable performance to be executed is shortened and the number of times of execution of the variable performance is increased, so that the execution efficiency of the variable performance can be improved.

In addition, for example, when the number of suspended balls in the variable effect is small, the variable effect time is longer than in the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode in order to secure the ball entry time to the first ball entrance 64. To make it easier to select a "non-reach (normal)" presentation mode. As a result, it is possible to perform the "non-reach (normal)" variable effect time longer than when the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is selected, so the ball entry time to the first ball entrance 64 is performed. can be easily ensured, and by increasing the possibility that a new start prize will be generated during the execution time of the variable performance in the third pattern display device 81, the situation in which the variable performance is executed can be maintained.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11(a), in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "0" to "4". The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "5" to "39", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "40" to " 99”. In the C table 202d3, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "special variation" rendering mode, and the "special variation" rendering mode is set not to be selected. Also, since the C table 202d3 is the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of the big win, the "non-reach" effect mode is not selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11(b), in the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned only to the "special variation" effect mode ("0" to "99"). , and other "reach display" are not assigned the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Therefore, the stop type selected when winning the "2R probability variable jackpot" is set to always be the "special variation" effect mode. Since the D table 202d4 is the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of the big win, the "non-reach" effect mode is not selected.

That is, in the C table 202d3, the selection ratio is set to 5% for the "normal reach" effect mode, 35% for the "super reach" effect mode, and 60% for the "special reach" effect mode. Further, in the D-table 202d4, the "special variation" rendering mode is set to have a selection rate of 100%.

Therefore, in the variation production at the time of winning the jackpot, the selection ratio is high in the order of “special reach” production mode > “super reach” production mode > “normal reach” production mode, and in the fluctuation production at the time of losing, “normal reach” production mode> The selection ratio is set to increase in the order of "super reach" effect mode > "special reach" effect mode. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win at the time of appearance of each "ready-to-win display" is high in the order of the "special ready-to-win" production mode>"super ready-to-win" production mode>"normal reach" production mode. configured to be Thus, the degree of expectation for the big win can be shown to the player by the performance mode of the variable performance, and the player can enjoy the exhilaration of the big win according to the performance mode of the executed variable performance.

In the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d selected based on the number of held balls of the variable effect is configured to be different in the selection of the effect mode in the variable effect of losing. The determination of the variable performance based on the entry of the ball into the ball 64 and the determination of the variable performance based on the start of the variable performance based on the entry are configured so that substantially the same performance mode is selected. . Specifically, in the case of a losing variable performance, either the A table 202d1 or the B table 202d2 is selected based on the number of pending balls in the variable performance, but the A table 202d1 and In the B table 202d2, the value of the stop pattern counter C3 allocated to the "non-reach (shortened)" performance mode or the "non-reach (normal)" performance mode is the same, and the value of the stop pattern counter C3 allocated to the other performance modes is the same. The values of the stop pattern counters C3 are also set to be the same.

That is, the only difference is whether the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode is selected or the "non-reach (normal)" production mode is selected based on the number of balls held in the variable production. The same presentation mode is selected. Therefore, the effect mode selected at the time of starting winning and the effect mode selected at the time of start of fluctuation are substantially essentially the same effect mode is selected. As a result, even if a pre-reading notice such as "holding change notice" is performed based on the presentation mode selected at the time of starting winning, in the variable effect that is the target of the pre-reading notice, the contents of the pre-reading notice On the other hand, it is possible to execute an effect that does not cause any discrepancies.

From the above, the state in which the game is performed by determining the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed based on the propriety of the variable effect, the game state at that time, and the number of balls held in the variable effect at that time By shortening the execution time of the variable performance and increasing the number of times of execution of the variable performance based on, it is possible to select a performance mode that enhances the execution efficiency of the variable performance.

In addition, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is large (for example, "4"), when "reach display" is selected, the stop pattern in which the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" of each "reach display" is shortened A table 202d may be provided. Further, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is large, a stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the variable element of "low speed change" is omitted in each effect mode. Furthermore, a stop pattern table 202d having completely different selection rates for each effect mode may be provided according to the number of pending balls in the variable effect. However, if the selection rate of each effect mode differs depending on the number of pending balls in the variable effect, in performing a pre-reading notice such as "holding change notice", the number of pending balls at the time of deciding the pre-reading notice execution The number of pending balls at the time of execution of the variable effect that is the target of the pre-reading notice may be different. In such a case, it is necessary to perform processing to maintain consistency between the content of the pre-reading notice and the content of the variable effect, which makes the processing complicated.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description continues. The fluctuation type counter CS1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by "1" in order within the range of "0 to 199" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "199"). The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 26).

The variation type counter CS1 is used for determining the detailed variation pattern of the variation effect. That is, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, in the effect mode selected by the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern selection counter C3, by the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM202, detailed Determining fluctuation patterns. Determination of the variation pattern is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the variation effect. The voice ramp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine pattern of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 A variation mode is determined, and the presence or absence of execution of the notice performance and the execution mode of the notice performance are determined.

In this way, MPU 201 of main controller 110 selects a rough variation pattern of the variation effect and determines only the variation time. By configuring in this way, in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, since it is not necessary to perform control such as detailed notice lottery necessary for executing the variable performance, the processing of the MPU 201 regarding the variable performance can be reduced. can. In addition, the main controller 110 does not need to prepare commands for all variation patterns of the variation effect, and the ROM capacity of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, in the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, based on the variation time (rough variation pattern) determined by the main control device 110, by determining the detailed variation pattern in the variation performance, the variation performance Increase freedom of choice. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the game state changes from moment to moment, it is possible to select or change the effect content of the variable effect at any time corresponding to the change, and to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state. can.

Here, the details of the variation pattern table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, as the variation pattern table 202e, a large winning variation pattern table 202e1 used at the time of a big win and a losing variation pattern table 202e2 used at the time of losing are prepared. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the big-hit variation pattern table 202e1 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG.

The big hit variation pattern table 202e1 is divided into groups based on the selected effect mode. Specifically, as the effect mode, "E5: normal reach" referred when the "normal reach" effect mode is determined, and "E6: super reach" referred when the "super reach" effect mode is determined for "reach", for "E7: special reach" that is referred to when the "special reach" production mode is determined, and "E8: special variation" that is referred to when the "special variation" performance mode is determined are divided into A value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is a value (big winning random number value) that becomes a big winning, the big winning type corresponding to the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same reservation area and the start winning point thereof. The stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the game state in , and the number of balls held at the time of starting winning, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reservation area and the stop pattern table 202d Based on this, the production mode is selected. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the big winning variation pattern table 202e1 is determined based on the effect mode. In the group (group) of the big win variation pattern table 202e1, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reservation area is determined as the variation pattern in the variation performance reserved in the reservation area. be done.

In the big hit variation pattern table 202e1, "E5: normal reach" includes "normal reach only" with an overall variation time of 20 seconds, "pseudo-gase + normal reach" with an overall variation time of 30 seconds, and the overall variation time is 40 seconds "Pseudo Reach 1 + Normal Reach", total fluctuation time 30 seconds "Normal Reach + Re-fluctuation", total fluctuation time 40 seconds "Pseudo Gase + Normal Reach + Re-fluctuation", total fluctuation Six variation patterns of "pseudo-run 1 + normal reach + re-fluctuation" with a duration of 50 seconds are selectably prepared, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

Here, with reference to FIG. 14, each variable element forming the variation pattern will be described. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of performance time for each variable element of the variable performance. A variable element constitutes a part of one variable effect, and one variable effect is configured by combining each variable element. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable elements include "high-speed fluctuation", "low-speed fluctuation", "pseudo-gase", "pseudo-run 1", "pseudo-run 2", "normal reach", "super reach", "Special Reach", "Revariation" and "Movie" are provided.

The "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is a variable element that scrolls and fluctuates at high speed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the content of the third symbol. The variable element of this "high-speed fluctuation" is performed for 3 seconds at the beginning of the variable production when the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode is selected (see FIG. 14). When the effect mode of the variable element (for example, "non-reach (normal)") is selected, it is performed for 7 seconds at the beginning of the variable effect (see FIG. 14). It should be noted that when the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element ends, the later-described "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is started (executed), or the variable effect ends as it is.

The variable element of "low-speed variation" is a variation that is started after the variable element of "high-speed variation" is executed for 7 seconds, and the third pattern is scrolled to make it visible and whether or not "ready-to-win display" is generated. is an element. This "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is not executed when the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode is selected, and production modes other than the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode (for example, "non-reach (normal )” production mode) is selected, it is performed for 3 seconds after the variable element of “high-speed variation”. That is, in the "non-reach (shortening)" production mode, after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Dm are displayed without passing through the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element. It is configured to stop rapidly (so-called bitter stop). In addition, when the variable element of this "low-speed fluctuation" ends, whether the variable element of "pseudo-gase" described later is started (executed) or the variable element of "normal reach" described later is started (executed) Alternatively, it is configured such that the variable production is terminated as it is.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode is a variation pattern including a "high-speed variation" variation element for 7 seconds and a "low-speed variation" variation element for 3 seconds. A variable performance is configured. In addition, in the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode, the variable effect is composed of a variation pattern of only the variable elements of "high-speed variation" for 3 seconds.

The variable elements of "pseudo-gase" are the variable elements of "pseudo-continued 1" or the variable elements of "pseudo-continued 2" (hereinafter referred to as the variable elements of "pseudo-continued 1" and the variable elements of "pseudo-continued 2") may be collectively referred to as ““pseudo-run” variable element”), but it is a variable element that does not generate the “pseudo-run” variable element.

A "pseudo-continuous" variable element is a variable element in which the start of a variable performance occurs multiple times (one or more pseudo-stops) in one variable performance. Specifically, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the third symbol display device 81, the variable element of "high speed variation" is started and switched to the variable element of "low speed variation", and then all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 A unit performance that the variable performance is terminated and a predetermined stop result (for example, a pseudo consecutive chance number “677”) is displayed is a variable element that is performed a plurality of times during one variable performance. This "pseudo-continuous" variable element is obtained by stopping the predetermined stop result at least once after the "low-speed variable" variable element, and the "high-speed variable" variable element starts again from the stop result, An effect is executed as if the variable effect was started once more.

In the "pseudo fake" variable element, an effect as to whether or not a predetermined stop result appears after the execution of the "low-speed variation" variable element (for example, the pattern forming the predetermined stop result is the effective line L1 (Fig. (See 4(a)) Effect of whether or not to stop by fluctuating back and forth above (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo-fluctuation") is performed, and the above-mentioned predetermined stop result does not appear in the "pseudo-fluctuation", It is a variable element that does not develop to the variable element of "pseudo-ren". Therefore, after the "pseudo fake" variable element is completed, the "normal reach" variable element develops, or a "losing display" appears (for example, "687" ), and the variable production ends as it is.

In the "pseudo continuation 1" variable element, a predetermined stop result appears after the "pseudo variation" is executed after the "low speed variation" variable element, and the second "high speed variation" variable element is executed again, In the subsequent second "pseudo-fluctuation", the predetermined stopping result does not appear again, and the fluctuation element develops into a "normal reach" fluctuation element. That is, the variable element of "pseudo-run 1" is a pseudo-variable stop (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo-stop") in which the pseudo-run chance is displayed once, and after that, a predetermined stop result is obtained at the pseudo-stop. appears and is the variable that initiates the "fast-moving" variable again. Therefore, after the variable element of "pseudo-run 1" ends, the variable element of "normal reach" develops, or the variable effect ends as it is.

In the "pseudo-continuous 2" variable element, a predetermined stop result appears after the "pseudo-variation" is executed after the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element, and the second "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is executed again. A predetermined stop result appears again in the second "pseudo-variation", the variable element of the third "high-speed change" is executed, and then the variable element develops into the "normal reach" variable element. That is, "pseudo run 2" is a variable element in which a total of two pseudo-stops are performed, a predetermined stop result appears at each pseudo-stop, and the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is started again. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable element of "pseudo-run 2" is set to the maximum number of times of pseudo-variation among the variable elements of "pseudo-run". Therefore, after the variable element of "Pseudo Reach 1" ends, the variable element of "Normal Reach" always develops.

Therefore, the "pseudo fake" variable element is an effect in which the pseudo consecutive chances do not stop after the first "low-speed variation" variable element, and is performed for a total of 10 seconds. The "pseudo-run 1" variation element stops after the first "slow variation" variation element, and then the "pseudo-variation" is performed. It is an effect in which a reach formation pattern appears without a hitch, and is performed for a total of 20 seconds. The "pseudo-continuous 2" variable element stops after the first "low-speed fluctuation" variable element, and then the first "pseudo-variable" is performed, and the first " Pseudo-variation" stops the pseudo consecutive chances again, and after that, the "pseudo-variation" is performed again and the ready-to-win pattern appears, which is performed for a total of 30 seconds (see FIG. 14).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of the "pseudo fake", a pattern in which a predetermined stop result is not displayed and a "failure display" is displayed as it is, and a predetermined stop There is prepared a pattern in which the reach formation pattern is stopped and a variable element of "normal reach" occurs although the result is not shown. In addition, after the execution of the variable element of "pseudo-continuation 1", similar to the variable element of "pseudo-gase", the pattern that does not show the predetermined stop result and displays the "loss display" as it is, and the predetermined stop result There is also a pattern in which the ready-to-win pattern does not appear, but the ready-to-win pattern stops and a variable element of "normal reach" occurs. Furthermore, after execution of the variable element of "pseudo-run 2", a pattern is prepared in which the "failure display" does not appear directly, but the ready-to-win pattern stops and "normal reach" occurs.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable element of "Pseudo-Ren 2" is configured to be selected only when the "Super Reach" production mode or the "Special Reach" production mode is selected. ing. Therefore, if the variable element of "pseudo-ren 2" is performed, it is confirmed that the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" will occur after that via the variable element of "normal reach" do.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the execution timing of the "holding change notice", from the start of the fluctuation of the variable effect to before the "ready-to-win display" is executed, that is, the variable element of the "high-speed fluctuation" , There is an execution timing "before reach" in which the execution pattern changes during the execution of the variable element of "low speed variation" or the variable element of "pseudo run", but the variable element of "pseudo run" is executed As a result, the period of "before reach" is extended, so that the player feels as if the execution timing of "holding change notice" has increased, and a big hit is made based on the execution of "pseudo reunion". Since the player can enjoy the interest of increased reliability and the interest of the increased possibility of execution of the "holding change notice", the interest of the game can be enhanced.

It should be noted that a variable element of "pseudo-run" may be provided in which the number of pseudo-stops (number of times of pseudo-run chance stops) is 3 or more. Further, it may be configured such that a predetermined stop result appears in the variable element of "low-speed variation" without executing "pseudo-variation" to develop an effect related to the variable element of "pseudo-run".

The variable element of "normal reach" is the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation", the variable element of "pseudo-gase", the variable element of "pseudo-continuous 1" or the variable element of "pseudo-continuous 2" (hereinafter referred to as "low-speed fluctuation" Variable elements, "pseudo-gase" variable elements, "pseudo-continuous 1" variable elements or "pseudo-continuous 2" variable elements are collectively referred to as "low-speed fluctuations, etc." This is a variable element for showing whether or not a big hit will occur as a result of the variation of the middle symbol row Z2 when the ready-to-win formation symbols are stopped and displayed in the row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3. This "normal reach" variable element is performed for 10 seconds after the variable element such as "low speed variation" (see FIG. 14).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of "normal reach", the pattern of directly displaying the "loss display", the pattern of directly displaying the "jackpot display", and the "super reach" There are prepared a pattern that develops into a variable element, a pattern that develops into a "special reach" variable element, and a pattern in which a "re-variation" variable element is executed after once displaying a "loss display".

The "super reach" variable element is developed and executed when the "loss display" does not stop in the "normal reach" variable element and the middle symbol row Z2 continues to change, and the "battle" is executed in the main display area Dm. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit will occur by performing "performance". This "Super Reach" variable is performed for 10 seconds after the "Normal Reach" variable is executed (see FIG. 14).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the "super reach" variable element, a pattern that directly displays the "loss display", a pattern that directly displays the "jackpot display", and a pattern that temporarily displays the "loss display" ” appears, and then the variable element of “re-variation” is executed.

The "special reach" variable element is developed and executed when the "loss display" does not stop in the "normal reach" variable element and the middle symbol row Z2 continues to change, and the "competition" in the main display area Dm. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit will occur by performing "performance". This "Special Reach" variable element is performed for 20 seconds after the execution of the "Normal Reach" variable element (see FIG. 14).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of "special reach", a pattern that directly displays the "loss display", a pattern that directly displays the "jackpot display", and a pattern that temporarily displays the "loss display" ” appears, and then the variable element of “re-variation” is executed.

In addition, it is configured to develop into a variable element of "super reach" or a variable element of "special reach" after the variable element of "normal reach" is executed, but instead of this configuration, a variable element of "low speed fluctuation" When the ready-to-reach formation pattern is stopped later, it may be constructed so that the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" suddenly develops without passing through the variable element of "normal reach". Further, the variable element of "special reach" may be performed after the variable element of "super reach" is executed.

The variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that develops and is executed after the "losing display" once appears in any of the "ready-to-win display", and the "jackpot display" appears. The variable element of this "re-variation" is performed for 10 seconds after any "reach display" (see FIG. 14).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, only patterns in which "big win display" appears after execution of the variable element of "re-variation" are prepared. That is, when the "re-variation" is executed, the "big win display" always appears after that.

The variable element of the "movie" is performed after the "low-speed variation" is executed when the "2R probability variable jackpot" is won, and is a variable element that causes the "jackpot display" corresponding to the "2R probability variable jackpot" to appear. . The variable element of this "movie" is performed for 40 seconds after the "low-speed variation" (see FIG. 14). (not shown).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after execution of the variable element of the "movie", only the pattern in which the "jackpot display" corresponding to the "2R probability variable jackpot" appears is prepared. That is, when the "movie" is executed, the "jackpot display" of the "2R probability variable jackpot" always appears after that.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description continues. In the example shown in FIG. 12, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "normal reach only (01H)", "pseudo fake + normal reach ( 02H)” for “10-19”, “20-59” for “pseudo ream 1 + normal reach (03H)”, “60-79” for “normal reach + revariation (04H)”, “pseudo "80 to 99" for "Gase + normal reach + re-fluctuation (05H)", and "100 to 199" for "pseudo ream 1 + normal reach + re-fluctuation (06H)".

That is, in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of the big hit, the variation pattern of "normal reach only (01H)" is 5%, the variation pattern of "pseudo gusset + normal reach (02H)" is 5%, and "pseudo consecutive 1 + normal reach (03H)". ” variation pattern is 20%, “normal reach + re-fluctuation (04H)” variation pattern is 10%, “pseudo-gase + normal reach + re-fluctuation (05H)” variation pattern is 10%, “pseudo continuous 1 + normal reach + re- It is set so that the variation pattern of "Variation (06H)" is selected at a rate of 50%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" effect mode selected at the time of the big hit, it is easy to select the variation pattern including the "re-variation" variable element (70% of the total), especially "pseudo ream 1 + normal reach + re-variation ( 06H)” is likely to be selected (50% of the total). However, by configuring it so that ``normal reach only (01H)'' and ``pseudo fake + normal reach (02H)'' that do not include the variable element of ``re-fluctuation'' are also selected, a game that can expect a big hit from any variation pattern. can provide sexuality.

In the big hit variation pattern table 202e1, "E6: Super Reach" includes "Super Reach Only (01H)" with a total variation time of 30 seconds and "Pseudo Gase + Super Reach (01H)" with a total variation time of 40 seconds. 02H)", "Pseudo-Ren 1 + Super Reach (03H)" with a total fluctuation time of 50 seconds, "Pseudo-Ren 2 + Super Reach (04H)" with a total fluctuation time of 60 seconds, and the total fluctuation time 40 seconds of "super reach + re-fluctuation (05H)", 50 seconds of "pseudo-gase + super reach + re-fluctuation (06H)" of 50 seconds of total fluctuation time, and "pseudo-ren 1 +" of 60 seconds of total fluctuation time Eight variation patterns are selectable, "Super Reach + Re-fluctuation (07H)" and "Pseudo Reach 2 + Super Reach + Re-fluctuation (08H)" with a total fluctuation time of 70 seconds, and for each variation pattern is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1.

In the example shown in FIG. 12, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E6: Super reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "Super reach only (01H)", "Pseudo fake + "10-19" for "Super Reach (02H)", "20-59" for "Pseudo-Ren 1 + Super Reach (03H)", "60- for "Pseudo-Ren 2 + Super Reach (04H)" 99”, “100 to 119” for “Super Reach + Revariation (05H)”, “120 to 139” for “Pseudo Gase + Super Reach + Revariation (06H)”, “Pseudo Reach 1 + Super Reach + re-fluctuation (07H)” is “140-169”, and “pseudo-ren 2 + super reach + re-fluctuation (08H)” is “170-199”.

That is, in the "super reach" production mode at the time of the big hit, the variation pattern of "super reach only (01H)" is 5%, the variation pattern of "pseudo-gase + super reach (02H)" is 5%, and the variation pattern of "pseudo-ream 1 + super reach" is 5%. Reach (03H)” variation pattern is 20%, “Pseudo-Ren 2 + Super Reach (04H)” variation pattern is 20%, “Super Reach + re-variation (05H)” variation pattern is 10%, “Pseudo Gase + Super reach + re-fluctuation (06H)" fluctuation pattern is 10%, "Pseudo-ren 1 + super reach + re-fluctuation (07H)" fluctuation pattern is 15%, "Pseudo-ren 2 + super reach + re-fluctuation (08H)" The variation pattern is set to be selected at a rate of 15%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" production mode selected at the time of the big hit, the variation pattern including the "re-variation" variation element and the variation pattern not including the "re-variation" variation element are equally selected (50% of each other). It has become so. In addition, variation patterns including the variation elements of “pseudo-run 2” are more likely to be selected (35%). However, by configuring it so that "super reach only (01H)" and "pseudo gase + super reach (02H)" that do not include the variable elements of "re-variation" and the variable elements of "pseudo-ren 2" are also selected , can provide a game property in which a big win can be expected from any variation pattern.

In the big hit variation pattern table 202e1, "E7: Special reach" includes "Special reach only (01H)" with an overall variation time of 40 seconds, and "Pseudo-gase + special reach (01H)" with an overall variation time of 50 seconds. 02H)", "Pseudo-Ren 1 + Special Reach (03H)" with a total fluctuation time of 60 seconds, "Pseudo-Ren 2 + Special Reach (04H)" with a total fluctuation time of 70 seconds, and the total fluctuation time 50 seconds of "special reach + re-fluctuation (05H)", 60 seconds of "pseudo-gase + special reach + re-fluctuation (06H)" of 60 seconds of total fluctuation, and "pseudo-ren 1 +" of 70 seconds of total fluctuation Eight variation patterns of "Special Reach + Re-fluctuation (07H)" and "Pseudo Reach 2 + Special Reach + Re-fluctuation (08H)" with a total fluctuation time of 80 seconds are selectable, and for each variation pattern is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1.

In the example shown in FIG. 12, the correspondence between the variation pattern in "E7: Special reach" and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "Special reach only (01H)", "Pseudo fake + "10-19" for "Special Reach (02H)", "20-39" for "Pseudo-Ren 1 + Special Reach (03H)", "40-" for "Pseudo-Ren 2 + Special Reach (04H)" 99", "100 to 109" against "Special Reach + Revariation (05H)", "110 to 119" against "Pseudo Gase + Special Reach + Revariation (06H)", "Pseudo Reach 1 + Special Reach + re-fluctuation (07H)” is “120-139”, and “pseudo-ren 2 + special reach + re-fluctuation (08H)” is “140-199”.

That is, in the "special reach" production mode at the time of the big hit, the variation pattern of "only special reach (01H)" is 5%, the variation pattern of "pseudo gasse + special reach (02H)" is 5%, and the variation pattern of "pseudo consecutive 1 + special Reach (03H)” variation pattern is 10%, “Pseudo-Ren 2 + Special Reach (04H)” variation pattern is 30%, “Special Reach + re-variation (05H)” variation pattern is 5%, “Pseudo Gase + The variation pattern of "Special reach + re-fluctuation (06H)" is 5%, the variation pattern of "Pseudo-ren 1 + special reach + re-fluctuation (07H)" is 10%, "Pseudo-ren 2 + special reach + re-fluctuation (08H)" The variation pattern is set to be selected at a rate of 30%.

Therefore, in the "special reach" production mode selected at the time of the big hit, the variation pattern including the "re-variation" variation element and the variation pattern not including the "re-variation" variation element are equally selected (50% of each other). It has become so. In addition, the variation pattern including the variation element of "pseudo-run 2" is likely to be selected (60%). However, by configuring it so that "special reach only (01H)" and "pseudo gase + special reach (02H)" that do not include the variable elements of "revariation" and the variable elements of "pseudo-ren 2" are also selected , can provide a game property in which a big win can be expected from any variation pattern.

In the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1, only one variation pattern of "movie (01H)" with a total variation time of 50 seconds is prepared for "E8: special variation". In the example shown in FIG. 12, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E8: special fluctuation" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 199" for "movie (01H)", and "movie (01H)" is set to be selectable. That is, when the jackpot stop type is "2R probability variable jackpot", "movie (01H)" is always selected as the variation pattern.

When "movie (01H)" is selected by main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113 and display controller 114 determine a detailed variation pattern corresponding to "movie (01H)". In the pachinko machine 10, characters such as "chicken" or "girl" are displayed in the small areas Ds1 and Ds3 of the third pattern display device 81 as detailed variation patterns corresponding to "movie (01H)". , Finally, the third pattern stops at a specific pattern (for example, "341") with a variation pattern, or with the lighting or blinking of a specific lamp, etc. Finally, the third pattern stops at a specific pattern Variation patterns, etc. are included.

Although the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined using only the variation type counter CS1, it may be determined using a plurality of other variation type counters. For example, whether or not to add a notice effect that foretells the start of a big hit or "reach display" before the start of the change or during the change effect may be determined by another variation type counter, or if the reach is established , It may be determined by another variation type counter how many symbols the third symbol that is to be stopped last is shifted and stopped (for example, one symbol is shifted before and after, etc.).

Also, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1, a group dedicated to "2R probability variable jackpot" is provided. is selected, there is no group dedicated to "2R probability variable jackpot", and in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1, the variation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern when "15R probability variable jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot" are obtained Only mappings may be defined. In this case, when "2R probability variable jackpot" is selected as the jackpot type, "movie (01H)" may be determined as the fluctuation pattern without referring to the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e1.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, only "movie (01H)" is selected when "2R probability variable jackpot" is achieved, but when "2R probability variable jackpot" is achieved, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected. A variation pattern may be selected. In this case, like the "15R jackpot common" group, even in the group dedicated to "2R probability variable jackpot", the fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponds to the fluctuation pattern selected when "2R probability variable jackpot" occurs. Additionally, a variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in a certain reservation area may be determined as the variation pattern in the variation performance reserved in that reservation area.

Next, the losing variation pattern table 202e2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the losing variation pattern table 202e2 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13, the losing variation pattern table 202e2 is grouped based on the selected effect mode.

Specifically, as the production mode, "E0: non-reach (shortened)" referred to when "non-reach (shortened)" is determined, and when "non-reach (normal)" is determined "E1: non-reach (normal)" to be referred to, "E2: normal reach" to be referred when "normal reach" is determined, and "E3" to be referred to when "super reach" is determined : Super Reach" and "E4: Special Reach" which is referred to when "Special Reach" is determined. A value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in a certain reservation area is not a value for a big win (random value for a big win), that is, it is a value for losing, the game state at that time and the value at that time. The stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the number of balls held in , and the effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the losing variation pattern table 202e2 is determined based on the effect mode. In the group (group) of the change pattern table 202e2 for loss, the change pattern associated with the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the same reservation area is determined as the change pattern in the change performance reserved in the reservation area. be done.

In the losing variation pattern table 202e2, only one variation pattern of "non-reach (shortening) only" with a total variation time of 3 seconds is prepared for "E0: non-reaching (shortening)". In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E0: non-reach (shortening)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 199 for "non-reach (shortening) only (01H)" ", and only "non-reach (shortening) only (01H)" is set to be selectable. That is, when the "non-reach (shortening)" effect mode is selected in the fluctuation pattern table 202e2 for losing, "non-reach (shortening)" for all values ("0 to 199") that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take only (01H)" is associated. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (shortening)" effect mode, "non-reach (shortening) only (01H)" is always selected as the variation pattern.

In the losing variation pattern table 202e2, "E1: non-reach (normal)" includes "non-reach (normal) only (01H)" with an overall variation time of 10 seconds and " Three variation patterns are selectable: pseudo-gase + non-reach (normal) (02H)” and “pseudo-continuation 1 + non-reach (normal) (03H)” with a total fluctuation time of 30 seconds. A value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E1: non-reach (normal)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 179 for "non-reach (normal) only (01H)" ”, “180 to 189” for “pseudo-gase + non-reach (normal) (02H)”, “190-199” for “pseudo-gase 1 + non-reach (normal) (03H)” .

That is, in the “non-reach (normal)” variation effect at the time of loss, the variation pattern of “non-reach (normal) only (01H)” is 90%, and the variation of “pseudo-gase + non-reach (normal) (02H)” The pattern is set to be selected at a rate of 5%, and the variation pattern of "pseudo run 1 + non-reach (normal) (03H)" is selected at a rate of 5%. Therefore, in the "non-reach (normal)" variation effect selected when losing, the "non-reach (normal) only (01H)" variation pattern is likely to be selected (90%).

In the change pattern table for losing 202e2, "E2: normal reach" includes "normal reach only (01H)" with an overall fluctuation time of 20 seconds and "pseudo-gase + normal reach (02H)" with an overall fluctuation time of 30 seconds. and "pseudo-run 1 + normal reach (03H)" with a total variation time of 40 seconds are selectably prepared, and each variation pattern is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1. .

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E2: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 49" for "normal reach only (01H)", "pseudo gusset + normal reach ( "50 to 149" for "Pseudo Reach 1 + Normal Reach (03H)", and "150 to 199" for "Pseudo Reach 1 + Normal Reach (03H)".

That is, in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of losing, the variation pattern of "normal reach only (01H)" is 25%, the variation pattern of "pseudo hitch + normal reach (02H)" is 50%, and "pseudo consecutive 1 + normal reach (03H)". ” is set to be selected at a rate of 25%. Therefore, in the variation effect including the variable element of "normal reach" selected when losing, the variation pattern of "pseudo fake + normal reach (02H)" is likely to be selected (50%).

In the losing variation pattern table 202e2, "E3: Super Reach" includes "Super Reach Only (01H)" with a total variation time of 30 seconds and "Pseudo Gusse + Super Reach (01H)" with a total variation time of 40 seconds. 02H)”, “Pseudo-Ren 1 + Super Reach (03H)” with a total fluctuation time of 50 seconds, and “Pseudo-Ren 2 + Super Reach (04H)” with a total fluctuation time of 60 seconds. Each variation pattern is prepared to be selectable, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: Super reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 49" for "Super reach only (01H)", "Pseudo fake + "50 to 99" for "Super Reach (02H)", "100 to 179" for "Pseudo Ren 1 + Super Reach (03H)", "180 ~ for "Pseudo Ren 2 + Super Reach (04H)" 199”.

That is, in the "super reach" production mode at the time of losing, the variation pattern of "super reach only (01H)" is 25%, the variation pattern of "pseudo gusset + super reach (02H)" is 25%, and the variation pattern of "pseudo ream 1 + super reach" is 25%. It is set so that the variation pattern of "Reach (03H)" is selected at a rate of 40% and the variation pattern of "Pseudo-Ren 2 + Super Reach (04H)" is selected at a rate of 10%. Therefore, in the "super reach" effect mode selected when losing, the variation pattern of "pseudo run 1+super reach (03H)" is likely to be selected.

In the change pattern table for losing 202e2, "E4: Special reach" includes "Special reach only (01H)" with a total change time of 40 seconds and "Pseudo-gase + special reach (01H)" with a total change time of 50 seconds. 02H)”, “Pseudo-Ren 1 + Special Reach (03H)” with an overall variation time of 60 seconds, and “Pseudo-Ren 2 + Special Reach (04H)” with an overall variation time of 70 seconds. Each variation pattern is prepared to be selectable, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the variation pattern in "E4: Special reach" and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 79" for "Special reach only (01H)", "Pseudo fake + "80-159" for "Special Reach (02H)", "160-179" for "Pseudo-Ren 1 + Special Reach (03H)", "180-" for "Pseudo-Ren 2 + Special Reach (04H)" 199”.

That is, in the "special reach" production mode at the time of losing, the variation pattern of "only special reach (01H)" is 40%, the variation pattern of "pseudo gusset + special reach (02H)" is 40%, and the variation pattern of "pseudo consecutive 1 + special It is set so that the variation pattern of "Reach (03H)" is selected at a rate of 10% and the variation pattern of "Pseudo-Ren 2 + Special Reach (04H)" is selected at a rate of 10%. Therefore, in the "special reach" production mode selected at the time of losing, the fluctuation pattern of "only special reach (01H)" and the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo fake + special reach (02H)" are selected equally (40% of each other). is becoming easier.

In this way, when a big win is won, a comparatively long variation pattern is easily selected, thereby enhancing the performance contents of the variation performance in which a big win occurs, thereby improving the amusement of the game. be able to. In addition, when the jackpot is not won, that is, in the case of a loss, a relatively short variation pattern is configured to be easily selected, thereby shortening the performance contents of the variation performance at the time of the loss and performing the variation performance. It can be digested efficiently.

It should be noted that the variation pattern at the time of failure is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be selected using a plurality of variation type counters (selecting the presence or absence of advance notice display, etc.).

Returning to FIG. 7, the second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially adds 1 within the range of, for example, "0 to 250" and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "250"). It is Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4.

In the first embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) is performed to indicate that the ball has passed through either the left or right second ball entrance (through gate) 67. Acquired when detected. There are 149 random numbers to be won, and the range is "5 to 153". That is, when the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 153", it is determined that a winning is occurring, and the second symbol display device 83 displays a "○" symbol as a stop symbol (second symbol). Along with the lighting display, the electric accessory of the first ball entrance 64 is operated, and the first ball entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = "0 to 250"), and is It is updated once and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 26).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 controls the jackpot lottery and the dynamic drawing of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting of display and variable effect, and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description is continued. The RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, as well as various flags, counters, input/output buffers, etc., in addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. and a work area (work area) in which values such as input/output (hereinafter abbreviated as "I/O") are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main processing (see FIG. 26) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 19) when the power is turned on. A non-maskable interrupt (hereinafter abbreviated as "NMI") terminal of the MPU 201 is designed to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

The RAM 203 further has at least a reserved ball number counter 203a, a reserved ball storage area 203b, and a reserved ball execution area 203c.

The pending ball number counter 203a counts the number of balls entered into the first ball entrance 64 (hereinafter referred to as "start winning") detected in timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20) which is periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. ) based on the dynamic display performed by the first symbol display device 37 (variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81). This reserved ball counter 203a is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process (S613 in FIG. 25) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of pending balls for dynamic display (variable effect) increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (see S203 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, the number of pending balls counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time a dynamic display (variation effect) is executed (see S305 in FIG. 22).

The value of the pending ball number counter 203a (that is, the pending ball number) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the pending ball number command (see S205 in FIG. 21). The pending ball count command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the start winning is detected and the pending ball counter 203a is incremented by one.

The voice lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of pending balls of the dynamic display (variation effect) that is suspended by the main control unit 110 by the pending number of balls command. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 can manage the suspension count of the dynamic display (variation effect) without accessing the main control device 110 . In addition, every time the start winning is detected, by transmitting a pending ball count command from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, the dynamic display (variation effect) managed by the audio lamp control device 113 is suspended. Even if the number of balls deviates from the number of reserved balls in the actual dynamic display (fluctuation effect) reserved by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the number of reserved balls will be changed by the next received number of reserved balls command. , the deviation can be corrected.

The audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display reserved ball number command for notifying the reserved ball number to the display control device 114 each time the internally managed reserved ball number changes. The display control device 114 displays the reserved design in the cockpit display area Db of the third design display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the main controller 110 transmits a pending ball number command to the sound lamp control device 113, only the value of the pending ball number counter 203a incremented by 1 is used in the pending ball number command. However, in accordance with the above-mentioned start winning that triggered the addition of the number of pending balls counter 203a, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) Each value of counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1 is also included.

That is, when there is a starting prize, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in the main control device 110 , is communicated to the audio ramp controller 113 by the number of pending pitches command.

In the voice ramp control device 113, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 transmitted by the pending ball number command is changed based on each value. Pre-reading is performed before the performance is executed, and it is determined before the execution of the variable performance how the variable performance will be (whether or not a big hit will occur, how the variable time will be, etc.). Then, based on the result of determination by the look-ahead, it is possible to determine the execution of various effects, and to determine the contents and execution timing (timing) of the "holding change notice".

It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which a pending ball number command indicating the pending ball number of the variable effect and a command indicating the value of the first hit random number counter C1 or the like are separately transmitted. As a command indicating the value of the first hit random number counter C1 or the like, which is different from the reserved ball number command, a reserved ball number command is generated at the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and A command similar to the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command (advance fluctuation pattern command and advance stop type command) may be generated and transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 . In this case, regarding the program for generating the advance variation pattern command and the advance stop type command, by using the program for the variation pattern command and the stop type command, it is possible to easily create the program.

The reserved ball storage area 203b stores the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) upon detection of the start winning. A memory for storing each value. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are retrieved from the counter buffer. It is acquired and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The reserved ball storage area 203b is divided into four reserved areas (first reserved to first 4 areas) (see FIG. 7).

The reserved ball execution area 203c stores data (counters C1 to C3, CS1 each value).

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable effect, the big winning lottery, the dynamic display of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and the setting of the variable effect are executed. Of the data corresponding to each starting prize stored in the above-described reserved ball storage area 203b (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1), the data corresponding to one starting prize is stored in this reserved ball execution area 203c. shift to Note that the shift in the first embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

Here, with reference to FIG. 7 again, the details of the reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c will be described. The reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to set the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the variable effects. used by

For setting the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and the variable effect, a first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first random number counter C1 used for determining the jackpot type are used. A hit type symbol counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine the effect mode of the variable effect, and a change type counter CS1 used to determine the change pattern are used. The reserved ball storage area 203b stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer by the MPU 201 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning).

The reserved ball storage area 203b is composed of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). Each of the four reservation areas (reservation first to fourth areas) has a first winning random number counter storage area 203b1 that stores the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and a first winning type counter C2 that stores the value. A per type counter storage area 203b2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203b4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

In the first embodiment, the first winning random number counter storage area 203b1, the first winning type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, and the variation type counter storage area 203b4 are stored as one holding ball. Although provided in the area 203b, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided, and each of the four areas 203b1, 203b2, 203b3, and 203b4 may be provided in one of the reserved ball storage areas.

As described above, in the reserved ball storage area 203b, up to four data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) obtained at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is stored. In that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 reserved areas (1st to 4th reserved areas). . That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest starting prize is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest starting prize.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203c is composed of only one area. In this reserved ball execution area 203c, similarly to the reserved ball storage area 203b, a first winning random number counter storage area 203c1 for storing the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the value of the first winning type counter C2 are stored. A first hit type counter storage area 203c2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203c4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable effect, the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) stored in the first reserved area of the reserved ball storage area 203b are stored in this reserved ball. It shifts to each area 203c1 to 203c4 of the execution area 203c. Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c is referred to in the variation start process (see FIG. 23), and a big winning lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. decide. In the first symbol display device 37, dynamic display is performed under the control of the main controller 110 based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

Further, the variation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by a variation pattern command and a stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The details of data shift will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable effect, the random value in the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1 of the first reservation area is transferred to the first hit random number counter storage area 203c1 of the reservation ball execution area 203c. shift. Similarly, the random number in the first winning type counter storage area 203b2 is shifted to the first winning type counter storage area 203c2, and the random number in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3. , the random number in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 is shifted to the fluctuation type counter storage area 203c4.

When the shift of the data to the holding ball execution area 203c is completed, the holding first area becomes empty, so that each area (second to fourth) of the holding ball storage area 203b stores (holds). Shift processing is performed to pack the data into areas (first to third) whose area number is one smaller. In the present embodiment, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (held) in the reserved ball storage area 203b.

Here, the data shift performed for each reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b will be described. For example, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a when it is determined to start the variable effect is "4", and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the pending ball storage area 203b. do. In this state, the data in the first reserved area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c, and when the first reserved area becomes empty, the MPU 201 transfers the data in the other areas (second to fourth) to the area Shift to area (1st to 3rd) with number 1 smaller. That is, the data in the second reserved area is shifted to the first reserved area, the data in the third reserved area is shifted to the second reserved area, and the data in the fourth reserved area is shifted to the third reserved area.

Further, for example, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the variable effect is performed is "2", the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the second pending area to the first pending area. , to finish shifting the data. As described above, in the present embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the reserved areas (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (held), so the number of data shifts can be reduced. can reduce the control burden.

Note that regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the reserved areas (second to fourth) may be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller. In that case, it becomes unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (retained) in the reserving areas (second to fourth), making it easier to create a program.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description is continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Also, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch 217 for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch 217 is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, changes production and continuous It controls the setting of the display mode of the effect performed by the third pattern display device 81 such as the advance notice effect.

The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 425 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 425 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, it changes the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 so as to change the presentation mode such as "reach".

When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

When the frame button 22 is operated for a purpose other than changing the stage, such as changing the effect mode of “Super Reach”, a frame button operation command is transmitted to the display control device 114 . The display control device 114 displays an image corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 on the third pattern display device 81 by receiving the frame button operation command.

Here, with reference to FIG. 15, detailed electrical configurations of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 15 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. In the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, in addition to various control programs executed by the MPU 221, as fixed value data, a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, a fluctuation pattern table 222d, a pending change table 222e, at least a scenario table 222f is stored. Of these tables 222a to 222f, tables 222a to 222d are all the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, jackpot type table 202b, stop pattern table 202d, and variation pattern table 202e provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. be.

The sound lamp control device 113 acquires from the counter buffer in accordance with the start winning in the main control device 110 and transmits the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 by the reserved ball number command. And based on each value of the variation type counter CS1, the jackpot random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the variation pattern table 222d, the prefetching process is executed.

Then, by this look-ahead processing, what kind of performance will result from the pending variable performance that is the target of the look-ahead processing (whether it will be a big hit, what will be the variable time, etc.) is determined before the execution of, and control to determine the execution of various effects, or to determine the contents of the effect and the execution timing (timing) of the "holding change notice" is executed. Details of the pending change table 222e and the scenario table 222f will be described later.

The RAM 223 is provided with at least a fluctuation start flag 223a, a sub-reserved ball number counter 223b, a reserving change counter 223c, a scenario counter 223d, a reserving information storage area 223e, and an execution information storage area 223f.

The fluctuation start flag 223a is a flag indicating that the fluctuation performance should be started in the ON state. The fluctuation start flag 223a is set to OFF as an initial value when power is turned on, and is turned ON when a stop type command output from main controller 110 is received (see S1207 in FIG. 29). Then, it is turned off when the variable effect setting in the third symbol display device 81 is performed (see S1401 in FIG. 31). When the variation start flag 223a is turned on, the MPU 221 performs a variation performance process (see FIG. 31) for executing the variation performance during standby when there is a variation performance during standby.

The sub-reserved ball number counter 223b, like the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (dynamic display) performed by the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), It is a counter that counts up to 4 times the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect that is being held in the main controller 110 .

As described above, the audio ramp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the pending ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 . Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of pending balls based on the command transmitted from the main control unit 110, and manages the number of pending balls by the sub pending ball number counter 223b. there is

Specifically, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the number of pending balls of the variable effect is added, and the value of the pending ball counter 203a is added in the main controller 110. When the command for the number of held balls sent from the main controller 110 is received, the value after the addition of the number of held balls counter 203a of the main controller 110 included in the command for the number of held balls (that is, the value held by the main controller 110 The number of retained balls of the variable effect that has been made) is stored in the sub-retained ball number counter 223b (see S1301 in FIG. 30).

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the pending ball number counter 203a is subtracted in the main control device 110, and upon receipt thereof, the third symbol When the aspect of the variable effect in the display device 81 is set, 1 is subtracted from the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1411 in FIG. 31). In this way, in accordance with the command transmitted from the main controller 110 in accordance with the update of the pending ball number counter 203a, the voice lamp control unit 113 updates the value of the sub pending ball number counter 223b. While synchronizing with the ball number counter 203a, the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b can be updated.

The value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved symbols on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to receiving the number of reserved balls command in the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b, or changes the number of sub-held balls in response to reception of the variation pattern command. At the timing of updating the value of the counter 223b, in order to notify the display control device 114 of the stored or updated value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b, a display reserved ball number command is sent to the display control device 114. Send (see S1313 in FIG. 30 or S1412 in FIG. 31).

Further, the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is referred to for determining the timing of executing the "reserved change notice" when performing the "reserved change notice" to be described later. Specifically, when it is determined in the hold display setting process (see FIG. 30) to be described later that the "hold change notice" is to be executed, the execution timing of the "hold change notice" is determined by the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f (to be described later). The value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is referenced when determining, and the number of reserved balls in the variable effect at that time is determined.

When the display control unit 114 receives this display pending ball number command, the value of the pending ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the sub pending ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control unit 113, is displayed in the pending ball number pattern. is displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third pattern display device 81, the drawing of the image is controlled.

As described above, the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the number of pending symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the pending ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, it is possible to cause the third symbol display device 81 to accurately display the number of held balls for which the variable effect is held.

The pending change counter 223c is a counter for determining whether or not to execute the "holding change notice" in the pending symbols and the execution symbols in the cockpit display area Db. In the first embodiment, as described above, as the "suspension change notice", the display colors of the suspended symbols and the executed symbols are changed from the normal display mode of white to the blue display mode of "blue" and the red display mode. or "rainbow" in a rainbow color display mode.

As described above, the sound ramp control device 113 controls each of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 according to the pending ball number command received from the main control device 110. Prefetching can be performed based on the values, the jackpot random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the fluctuation pattern table 222d. In the look-ahead processing, the performance mode of the variable performance indicated by the pending ball number command is grasped, and based on the performance mode, a lottery is drawn as to whether or not to carry out the "suspension change notice" by the suspension change counter 223c and the suspension change table 222e. .

This pending change counter 223c is incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99") in the counter updating process (see S1111 in FIG. 28) of the main process of the sound lamp control device 113, and reaches the maximum value. (For example, in the case of a counter that can take a value from "0 to 99", it returns to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the pending change counter 223c is updated (eg, incremented by 1) once (see S1111 in FIG. 28) each time the main process loops. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the performance mode of the variable performance indicated by the reserved ball number command is grasped, and a pending change counter is based on the performance mode. By referring to the value of 223c and the pending change table 222e, whether or not to execute the "holding change notice" and the display mode are determined (see S1303 in FIG. 30).

Here, the pending change table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the pending change table 222e. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a pending ball number command from the main control device 110, it refers to the pending change table 222e based on the value of the pending change counter 223c at that time, and performs "holding change notice". and the display mode of the "suspended change notice" are determined. As shown in FIG. 16, the pending change table 222e is grouped based on the selected effect mode.

Specifically, for the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode at the time of loss, for the "non-reach (normal)" production mode at the time of loss, for the "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss, and at the time of loss " For "super reach" production mode, for "special reach" production mode at the time of losing, for "normal reach" production mode at the time of big win, for "super reach" production mode at the time of big win, and "special reach" at the time of big win It is divided into the effect mode and the "special change" effect mode at the time of the big hit. A possible value of the pending change counter 223c is associated with each divided group.

In the pending change table 222e, the color of the pending symbol or the executed symbol changes from the normal display mode ("white") to "none" and to blue in the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode at the time of losing. Two display modes of "blue" are selectably prepared, and each display mode is associated with the value of the pending change counter 223c. In the first embodiment, when "none", in which the color of the reserved symbol or the executed symbol does not change, is selected, the "suspended change notice" is not executed.

In addition, for the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode at the time of losing, the display mode of "red" that changes the color of the reserved pattern or the executed pattern to red and "rainbow" that changes to rainbow color is not selected. As such, the value of the pending change counter 223c is not associated. This is because, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the color of the reserved pattern or the executed pattern is "red" in the "reserved change notice", the variable effect indicated by the reserved pattern or the executed pattern is "super This is to confirm that the “reach or more” effect mode is executed. Also, in the "reserved change notice", if the color of the reserved pattern or the executed pattern is "rainbow", in order to confirm that the "jackpot display" appears in the variable effect indicated by the reserved pattern or the executed pattern is. Therefore, in the ``non-reach (shortened)'' presentation mode in which ``super reach or more'' and ``jackpot display'' do not appear, ``red'' or ``rainbow'' of ``suspension change notice'' is set not to be selected.

In the example shown in FIG. 16, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223c and the "hold change notice" in the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode at the time of losing is "0 to 98" for "none", It is "99" for "blue". Since no values are assigned to "red" and "rainbow", they are indicated as "-".

That is, when the production mode of "non-reach (shortened)" at the time of losing is selected, the display mode of "no change notice" is 99%, the display mode of "blue" is 1%, and the display mode of "red" is 99%. ” and “Rainbow” are set to be selected at a rate of 0%.

Therefore, in the "hold change notice" selected when "non-reach (shortened)" at the time of loss, the display mode of "none" is easily selected (99%), and the "hold change notice" itself does not occur. It is a difficult setting.

In the pending change table 222e, in the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode at the time of losing, the color of the pending symbol or the executed symbol changes from the normal display mode ("white") to "none" and changes to blue. Two display modes of "blue" are selectably prepared, and each display mode is associated with the value of the pending change counter 223c. In addition, in the "non-reach (normal)" production mode at the time of loss, "super reach or more" and "jackpot display" do not appear, as in the case of "non-reach (shortened)" at the time of loss. Therefore, the value of the pending change counter 223c is associated so that the display mode of "red" where the color of the pending symbol or the executed symbol changes to red and "rainbow" which changes to rainbow is not selected. do not have.

In the example shown in FIG. 16, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223c and the "hold change notice" in the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode at the time of losing is "0 to 98" for "none", It is "99" for "blue". Since no values are assigned to "red" and "rainbow", they are indicated as "-".

That is, when the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode at the time of losing is selected, the display mode of "pending change notice" is 99%, the display mode of "blue" is 1%, and "red" and "Rainbow" are set to be selected at a rate of 0%.

Therefore, in the "hold change notice" selected in the "non-reach (normal)" production mode at the time of losing, the "none" display mode is easily selected (99%), and the "hold change notice" itself It is a setting that makes it difficult for this to occur.

In the pending change table 222e, in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of losing, the color of the pending symbol or the executed symbol is "none" which does not change from the normal display mode ("white"), and "blue" which changes to blue. and are selectably prepared, and each display mode is associated with the value of the pending change counter 223c. In addition, in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss, "super reach or more" and "big win display" do not appear, like the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode at the time of loss. Therefore, the value of the pending change counter 223c is associated so that the display mode of "red" where the color of the pending symbol or the executed symbol changes to red and "rainbow" which changes to rainbow is not selected. do not have.

In the example shown in FIG. 16, the value of the hold change counter 223c in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of losing and the "hold change notice" are associated with "0 to 79" and "blue" for "none". On the other hand, it is "80 to 99". Since no values are assigned to "red" and "rainbow", they are indicated as "-".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of losing is selected, the display mode of "no pending change notice" is 80%, the display mode of "blue" is 20%, "red" and "rainbow" is set to be selected at a rate of 0%.

Therefore, in the "hold change notice" selected during the "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss, the "none" display mode is likely to be selected (80%), but the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode at the time of loss and The setting (1% → 20%) makes it easier to select the “blue” display mode than the “non-reach (normal)” presentation mode when losing.

In the pending change table 222e, the "super reach" effect mode at the time of losing includes "none" where the color of the pending symbol or the executed symbol does not change from the normal display mode ("white") and "blue" where the color changes to blue. and "red" which changes to red are selectably prepared, and the value of the pending change counter 223c is associated with each display mode. In addition, in the "super reach" production mode at the time of loss, as in the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode at the time of loss, the "jackpot display" does not appear, so the color of the pending pattern or the execution pattern is rainbow color. The value of the pending change counter 223c is not associated so that the changing "rainbow" display mode is not selected. On the other hand, the "super reach" production mode at the time of losing is to execute the variable element of "super reach", so that the "red" display mode suggesting "over super reach" is selected. values are associated.

In the example shown in FIG. 16, the value of the pending change counter 223c in the "super ready-to-win" production mode at the time of losing and the "holding change notice" are associated with "0 to 19" and "blue" for "none". "20 to 89" for "red" and "90 to 99" for "red". Since no value is assigned to "rainbow", it is written as "-".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of losing is selected, the display mode of "no pending change notice" is 20%, the display mode of "blue" is 70%, and the display mode of "red" is set to be selected at a rate of 10%, and the display mode of "rainbow" is selected at a rate of 0%.

Therefore, in the "holding change notice" selected in the "super reach" production mode at the time of losing, the "blue" display mode is set (70%) to be more likely to be selected than the "none" display mode. In addition, the display mode of "red", which has a higher expectation for a big win than the display mode of "blue", is also set to be selectable.

In the pending change table 222e, in the "special ready-to-win" effect mode at the time of losing, the color of the pending symbol or the executed symbol does not change "none (white)", changes to blue "blue", and changes to red. Three display modes of "red" are selectably prepared, and each display mode is associated with the value of the pending change counter 223c. In addition, in the "special reach" production mode at the time of loss, as in the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode at the time of loss, the "jackpot display" does not appear, so the color of the pending pattern or execution pattern is rainbow color. The value of the pending change counter 223c is not associated so that the changing "rainbow" display mode is not selected. On the other hand, the "special reach" production mode at the time of losing is the holding change counter 223c so that the "red" display mode suggesting "super reach or higher" is selected in order to execute the variable element of "special reach". values are associated.

In the example shown in FIG. 16, the value of the hold change counter 223c and the "hold change notice" in the "special reach" effect mode at the time of losing are associated with "0 to 9" and "blue" for "none". "10 to 49" for "red" and "50 to 99" for "red". Since no value is assigned to "rainbow", it is written as "-".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of losing is selected, the "hold change notice" is "none" display mode is 10%, "blue" display mode is 40%, and "red" display mode is set to be selected at a rate of 50% and the display mode of "rainbow" is selected at a rate of 0%.

Therefore, in the "hold change notice" selected in the "special reach" production mode at the time of losing, the "red" display mode is set (50%) to be more likely to be selected than the "blue" or "none" display mode. ing.

In the pending change table 222e, in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of the big win, the color of the pending symbol or the executed symbol is "none" which does not change from the normal display mode ("white"), and "blue" which changes to blue. , and “Rainbow”, which changes to a rainbow color, are selectably prepared, and each display mode is associated with the value of the pending change counter 223c. In addition, in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of the big hit, "super reach or more" does not appear, so that the "red" display mode in which the color of the reserved pattern or the executed pattern changes to red is not selected. 223c value is not associated.

In the example shown in FIG. 16, the value of the hold change counter 223c in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of the big win and the "hold change notice" are associated with "0 to 9" and "blue" for "no". "10 to 89" for "Rainbow" and "90 to 99" for "Rainbow". Since no value is assigned to "red", it is written as "-".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of the big hit is selected, the "holding change notice" is 10% of the display mode of "none", 80% of the display mode of "blue", and 80% of the display mode is "red". It is set to be selected at a rate of 0% and the "rainbow" display mode at 10%.

Therefore, in the "holding change notice" selected in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of the big win, the "blue" display mode is likely to be selected (80%), and the "rainbow" display mode is also selected. (10%).

In the pending change table 222e, the "super reach" effect mode at the time of the big win includes "no" where the color of the pending symbol or the executed symbol does not change from the normal display mode ("white") and "blue" where the color changes to blue. , "red" that changes to red, and "rainbow" that changes to rainbow color are selectably prepared, and each display mode is associated with the value of the pending change counter 223c. there is

In the example shown in FIG. 16, the correspondence between the value of the pending change counter 223c and the "holding change notice" in the "super reach" effect mode at the time of the big win is "0 to 9" and "blue" for "none". "10 to 39" for "Red", "40 to 89" for "Rainbow", and "90 to 99".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of the big hit is selected, the display mode of "no pending change notice" is 10%, the display mode of "blue" is 30%, and the display mode of "red". is set to be selected at a rate of 50%, and the display mode of "rainbow" is selected at a rate of 10%.

Therefore, in the "hold change notice" selected in the "super reach" production mode at the time of the big win, the "red" display mode is likely to be selected (40%), and the "blue" display mode is also likely to be selected ( 30%), and the display mode of "rainbow" is also selected (10%), so that the "hold change notice" is set to occur easily.

In the pending change table 222e, the "special reach" effect mode at the time of the big win includes "no" where the color of the pending symbol or the executed symbol does not change from the normal display mode ("white") and "blue" where the color changes to blue. , "red" that changes to red, and "rainbow" that changes to rainbow color are selectably prepared, and each display mode is associated with the value of the pending change counter 223c. there is

In the example shown in FIG. 16, the value of the hold change counter 223c in the "special reach" effect mode at the time of the big win and the "hold change notice" are associated with "0 to 9" and "blue" for "none". "10-19" for "Red", "20-89" for "Rainbow", and "90-99" for "Rainbow".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of the big hit is selected, the "holding change notice" is 10% in the display mode of "none", 10% in the "blue" display mode, and 10% in the "red" display mode. is set to be selected at a rate of 70%, and the display mode of "rainbow" is selected at a rate of 10%.

Therefore, in the "hold change notice" selected in the "special reach" production mode at the time of the big hit, the "red" display mode is easily selected (70%), and the "blue" display mode is also selected (10%). %), and the display mode of "rainbow" is also selected (10%), so that the "hold change notice" is set to occur easily.

In the pending change table 222e, the "special change" effect mode at the time of the big win includes "no" where the color of the pending symbol or the executed symbol does not change from the normal display mode ("white") and "blue" where the color changes to blue. , "red" that changes to red, and "rainbow" that changes to rainbow color are selectably prepared, and each display mode is associated with the value of the pending change counter 223c. there is

In the example shown in FIG. 16, the correspondence between the value of the pending change counter 223c and the "holding change notice" in the "special change" production mode at the time of the big win is "0 to 69" and "blue" for "none". "70-79" for "Red", "80-89" for "Rainbow", and "90-99" for "Rainbow".

That is, when the "special variation" production mode at the time of the jackpot is selected (when the "2R probability variation jackpot" is won), the display mode of "no pending change notice" is 70%, and the display of "blue" The display mode is set to be selected at a rate of 10%, the "red" display mode at 10%, and the "rainbow" display mode at 10%.

Therefore, in the "suspended change notice" selected in the "special change" production mode at the time of the big win, the "none" display mode is likely to be selected (70%), and the "blue", "red" or "rainbow" are set to be selected evenly (10%), it is difficult for the "holding change notice" to occur.

Therefore, the appearance probability of the "suspended change notice" at the time of losing is, for example, when the number of retained balls in the "normal game state" is the first, that is, when the effect mode is selected by the A table 202d1, The "pending change notice" is selected at a rate of 91.05% for no change, 7.65% for "blue", and 1.3% for "red". In addition, the appearance probability of the "suspended change notice" at the time of the big win is, for example, when the "15R probability variable jackpot" is won, that is, when the effect mode is selected by the C table 202d3, the "suspended change notice" is 10% of unchanged "none", 20.5% of "blue", 59.5% of "red", and 10% of "rainbow" are selected. Therefore, when winning the jackpot lottery with the third symbol, "red" and "rainbow" are likely to be selected, and "none" and "blue" are less likely to be selected from the "holding change notice", while the jackpot lottery In the case of a failure, "none" and "blue" are more likely to be selected, and "red" is less likely to be selected ("rainbow" is not selected in the event of a failure).

In this way, the sound lamp control device 113, when receiving the pending ball number command from the main control device 110, grasps the propriety of the variable effect indicated by the pending ball number command and the effect mode, and based on the propriety and the effect mode It is configured to determine whether or not execution of the "suspension change notice" is possible and the display mode. By configuring in this way, the result of the variable performance is suggested to the player by the pending symbol before the variable performance is executed, and the variable performance reserved for the player is displayed until the variable performance is executed. By predicting whether or not a jackpot will be achieved, the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

The holding change information of the "holding change notice" determined (selected) based on the values of the holding change table 222e and the holding change counter 223c is stored in a holding information storage area 223e described later indicated by the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b. is stored in the pending change information storage area 223e5 (see FIG. 19). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, "suspension change notice" is executed in pending symbols or execution symbols based on the pending change information stored in the pending change information storage area 223e5 and scenario data described later.

Returning to FIG. 15, the description continues. The scenario counter 223d is a counter for determining the execution timing of the determined "suspension change notice". As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to execute the “holding change notice” and the display mode based on the number-of-holding-balls command received from the main control device 110 . In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when execution of the "holding change notice" is determined, the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is determined by the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f.

This scenario counter 223d is incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99") in the counter update processing (see S1111 in FIG. 28) of the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113, and the maximum value ( For example, in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 99", it is configured to return to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the scenario counter 223d is updated (eg, incremented by 1) once each time the main process loops (see S1111 in FIG. 28). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a pending ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the effect mode of the variable effect indicated by the pending ball number command is grasped, and based on the effect mode, "holding Whether or not execution of "prediction of change" and display mode are determined. Then, when the execution of the "holding change notice" is determined, the value of the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f are referred to determine the execution timing of the "holding change notice" (see S1305 in FIG. 30).

Here, the scenario table 222f will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the sound ramp control device 113 refers to the value of the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f when execution of the "hold change notice" is determined. , to determine the execution timing of the "suspension change notice". In this case, even with the same ``pending change notice (for example, ``blue''), the execution timing of the ``holding change notice'' at the time of losing is made different from the execution timing of the ``holding change notice'' at the time of the big win. By doing so, the degree of expectation for a big win is configured to differ depending on the difference in execution timing of the "holding change notice". FIG. 17 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot scenario table 222f1.

In the jackpot scenario table 222f1 of FIG. 17, each of A total of 12 types of situation patterns are classified according to the display mode of "holding change notice" (three patterns of "blue", "red", and "rainbow") for each number of held balls. In addition, as the timing at which the horizontal row executes (starts) the "holding change notice", 4 patterns at the time of display or shift to each number of holding balls (number of holding balls "1" to "4") and holding balls A total of 8 types of timing patterns, including 4 patterns of "start (shift time)", "before reach", "after reach" or "after pending deletion" in the number "0" (during the execution of the variable effect) are separated from each other. A possible value of the scenario counter 223d is associated with each of the divided groups.

The "holding change notice" in the first embodiment is executed (appears) in the timing pattern determined by the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f for each situation pattern. is set to

Specifically, for example, when the execution timing of the "suspension change notice" is "0" in the number of pending balls and "at the start" is selected, the variable effect that determines the "suspension change notice" is started. The "suspension change notice" is executed at the timing when the change is made. In addition, when the execution timing of the "suspension change notice" is "0" pending balls and "before reach" is selected, it is during the variable performance in the variable performance that determines the "suspension change notice" Before the "reach display" appears (for example, when the left symbol column Z1 is stopped during the execution of the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element or the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element, etc.) Change Notice” is executed. In addition, when the execution timing of the "suspension change notice" is the number of pending balls "0" and "after reach" is selected, it is during the variable performance in the variable performance that determined the "suspension change notice" The "suspension change notice" is executed at the timing during execution of the "reach display" (for example, during execution of the variable element of the "normal reach"). In addition, when the execution timing of the "suspension change notice" is "0" on hold balls and "after deletion of the hold" is selected, it is during the variable production in the variable production that determined the "hold change notice" At the timing when the cockpit display area Db after the execution of the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" is redisplayed (timing before the variable element of "re-variation" is executed), the "suspended change notice" ” is executed.

Further, for example, when the number of pending balls "1" is selected as the execution timing of the "holding change notice", the holding symbol indicating the variable effect for which the "holding change notice" is determined is displayed in the first holding symbol display area Db1. The "suspended change notice" is executed at the timing displayed to or at the shifted timing. Further, when the execution timing of the "suspension change notice" is selected with the number of pending balls "2", the pending symbol indicating the variable effect for which the "suspension change notice" is determined is displayed in the second pending symbol display area Db2. The "holding change notice" is executed at the shifted timing or at the shifted timing. Further, when the execution timing of the "suspension change notice" is selected with the number of pending balls "3", the pending symbol indicating the variable effect for which the "suspension change notice" is determined is displayed in the third pending symbol display area Db3. The "holding change notice" is executed at the shifted timing or at the shifted timing. Further, when the execution timing of the "suspended change notice" is selected with the number of "4" pending balls, the pending symbol indicating the variable effect for which the "suspended change notice" is determined is displayed in the fourth pending symbol display area Db4. The "suspension change notice" is executed at the specified timing.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a pending ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, the voice lamp A lottery for "holding change notice" is performed in the control device 113, and it is determined whether or not to execute the "holding change notice". When execution of the "holding change notice" is determined, first, the number of holding balls at the time of the decision and the display mode of the decided "holding change notice" are grasped. Then, when the variable effect indicated by the pending ball number command is a big win, the value of the scenario counter 223d and the big win scenario table 222f1 are referred to, and the execution timing (appearance timing) of the "holding change notice" at the time of the big win ) is determined.

As shown in FIG. 17, in the jackpot scenario table 222f1, situation patterns of the number of pending balls of the variable effect at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" and each display mode of the "holding change notice" are prepared. A value of the scenario counter 223d is associated with the situation pattern.

First, a case will be described where the number of pending balls in the variable effect is "1" at the time when the "holding change notice" of the big win is determined. In this case, the number of held balls "2" to "4" does not exist when the number of held balls "1" occurs. That is, when the number of reserved balls "1" occurs, the reserved symbols of the number of reserved balls "2" to "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, when the number of pending balls is "1" when the "holding change notice" is determined, the number of holding balls becomes "2" to "4" when the "holding change notice" is executed. No value is assigned to the scenario counter 223d (see FIG. 17).

First, as shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of pending balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 4" for "starting" with "0" pending balls, and "before reaching" with "0" pending balls. 5 to 9”, “10 to 14” for “after reach” with “0” retained balls, “15 to 49” for “after deletion” with “0” retained balls, retained balls It is "50 to 99" for the number "1".

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 5% "at the start", 5% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 5% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 5% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls It is set so that the selection ratio is 35% for "after pending deletion" and 50% for the number of pending balls "1" (that is, when the pending pattern is displayed).

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variation effect of the big hit is The timing at the time of display is the most likely to be selected (50%), and the timing at the time of re-display after the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db are erased due to the variable factors of "super reach" etc. is the second most likely to be selected (35%). %) is set as

In the first embodiment, when determining the execution timing of the "suspension change notice", the effect mode of the corresponding variable effect is not determined. Therefore, for example, even if the execution timing of "after pending deletion" is selected, when the variable production is in the "normal reach" production mode, "hold change notice" is executed at the execution timing of "after pending deletion" Situations may arise where it is not possible. However, in such a case, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the performance mode is such that the "holding change notice" cannot be performed at the determined execution timing, another execution timing that can be executed (eg, "after reach") (see FIG. 32). Therefore, when the lottery for execution of the "holding change notice" is won, the "holding change notice" can be reliably executed at any timing. Therefore, when determining the execution timing of the "suspension change notice", even if the execution timing is determined without grasping the performance mode of the variable performance, the "suspension change notice" can be reliably executed, and the game is improved. You can increase your interest. Details of change control will be described later.

Then, as shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "starting" when the number of pending balls is "0", and "before reaching" when the number of pending balls is "0". 10 to 19”, “20 to 29” for “after reach” with “0” retained balls, “30 to 89” for “after deletion of retained” with “0” retained balls, retained balls It is "90 to 99" for the number "1".

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "1" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% "at the start", 10% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls The selection ratio is set such that "after pending deletion" is 60% and the number of pending balls "1" (that is, when the pending pattern is displayed) is 10%.

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "1" and the display mode is "red", "super reach , etc. are set so that they are most likely to be selected (60%) at the timing of redisplay after the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db have been erased.

Then, as shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "rainbow", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 4" for "starting" with "0" pending balls, and "before reaching" with "0" pending balls. 5 to 9”, “10 to 49” for “after reach” with “0” pending balls, and “50 to 99” for “after elimination” with “0” pending balls. there is It should be noted that the display mode of the "rainbow" of the "suspended change notice" does not appear in the pending symbols, and can appear only in the executed symbols. The value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to the execution timing.

That is, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "rainbow", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is the number of pending balls "0". 5% "at the start", 5% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 40% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 40% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls The selection ratio is set such that "after pending deletion" is 50% and the number of pending balls "1" (that is, when the pending pattern is displayed) is 0%.

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "1" and the display mode is "rainbow", "super reach ”, etc., is most likely to be selected at the timing of redisplay after the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db are erased (50%), and the next most likely to be selected is the timing during execution of the “ready-to-win display” (40% ) is set as It should be noted that the display mode of the "rainbow" of the "suspension change notice" at the time of the big win is set to the above selection ratio regardless of the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "suspension change notice". Therefore, the description of the display mode of the "rainbow" of the "holding change notice" at the time of the big hit with the number of "2" to "4" holding balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is omitted.

Next, a case will be described where the number of pending balls in the variable effect is "2" at the time when the "holding change notice" of the big win is determined. In this case, the number of held balls "3" or "4" does not exist when the number of held balls "2" occurs. That is, when the number of reserved balls is "2", the reserved symbols with the number of reserved balls of "3" or "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, when the number of pending balls is "2" when the "holding change notice" is determined, the number of holding balls becomes "3" or "4" when the "holding change notice" is executed. No value is assigned to the scenario counter 223d (see FIG. 17).

As shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of pending balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 4" for "starting" with "0" pending balls, and "5 to 4" for "before reaching" with "0" pending balls. 9", "10 to 14" for "after reach" with "0" pending balls, "15 to 39" for "after erasing" with "0" pending balls, number of pending balls " "40 to 49" for 1" and "50 to 99" for the number of held balls "2".

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 5% "at the start", 5% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 5% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 5% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls Selection ratio of 25% for "after deletion of pending", 10% for "1" pending balls (i.e., when shifting pending patterns), and 50% for "2" pending balls (i.e., when displaying pending patterns) is set to be

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variation effect of the big hit is It is most likely to be selected at the time of display (50%), and next most likely to be selected (25%) is the timing of re-display after the reserved design in the cockpit display area Db is erased by "super reach" etc. is set to

Then, as shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "starting" when the number of pending balls is "0", and "before reaching" when the number of pending balls is "0". 10 to 19”, “20 to 29” for “after reach” with “0” retained balls, “30 to 79” for “after deletion of retained” with “0” retained balls, retained balls It is "80 to 89" for the number "1" and "90 to 99" for the number of held balls "2".

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "2" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% "at the start", 10% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls Selection ratio of 50% for "after pending deletion", 10% for "1" pending balls (i.e., when shifting pending patterns), and 10% for "2" pending balls (i.e., when displaying pending patterns) is set to be

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "2" and the display mode is "red", "super reach , etc. are set so that the timing of re-display after erasure of the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db is most likely to be selected (50%).

Next, a case will be described where the number of pending balls in the variable effect is "3" at the time when the "holding change notice" of the big win is determined. In this case, the number of held balls "4" does not exist when the number of held balls "3" occurs. That is, when the number of reserved balls is "3", the reserved symbols with the number of reserved balls of "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, when the number of pending balls is "3" when the "holding change notice" is determined, the scenario counter 223d for the number of holding balls "4" when the "holding change notice" is executed is not assigned (see FIG. 17).

As shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of pending balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 4" for "starting" with "0" pending balls, and "5 to 4" for "before reaching" with "0" pending balls. 9", "10 to 14" for "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, "15 to 29" for "after deleting pending" with "0" pending balls, number of pending balls " "30 to 39" for 1", "40 to 49" for the number of held balls of "2", and "50 to 99" for the number of held balls of "3".

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 5% "at the start", 5% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 5% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 5% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls "After pending deletion" is 15%, the number of pending balls is "1" (that is, at the time of pending pattern shift) is 10%, the number of pending balls is "2" (that is, at the time of pending pattern shift) is 10%, the number of pending balls It is set so that the selection ratio is 50% for "3" (that is, when the reserved symbols are displayed).

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variation effect of the big hit is "blue". The timing at the time of display is the most likely to be selected (50%), and the timing at the time of re-display after erasing the reserved design in the cockpit display area Db by "Super Reach" etc. is the most likely to be selected (15%). is set to

Then, as shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "starting" when the number of pending balls is "0", and "before reaching" when the number of pending balls is "0". 10 to 19”, “20 to 29” for “after reach” with “0” retained balls, “30 to 69” for “after deletion of retained” with “0” retained balls, retained balls "70 to 79" for the number "1", "80 to 89" for the number of held balls "2", and "90 to 99" for the number of held balls "3".

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "3" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% "at the start", 10% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls "After pending deletion" is 40%, the number of pending balls is "1" (i.e., when shifting the pending pattern) is 10%, the number of pending balls is "2" (i.e., when shifting the pending pattern) is 10%, the pending pattern is " 3" (that is, when the reserved symbols are displayed) is set to have a selection ratio of 10%.

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "3" and the display mode is "red", "super reach , etc. are set so that the timing of re-display after erasure of the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db is most likely to be selected (40%).

Next, a case will be described where the number of pending balls in the variable effect is "4" at the time when the "holding change notice" of the big win is determined.

As shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 4" for "starting" with "0" pending balls, and "5 to 4" for "before reaching" with "0" pending balls. 9", "10 to 14" for "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, "15 to 19" for "after deleting pending" with "0" pending balls, number of pending balls " "20 to 29" for 1", "30 to 39" for the number of held balls "2", "40 to 49" for the number of held balls "3", "4" for the number of held balls It is "50 to 99" for each.

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 5% "at the start", 5% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 5% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 5% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls "After pending deletion" is 5%, the number of pending balls is "1" (i.e. when shifting the pending pattern) is 10%, the number of pending balls is "2" (i.e. when shifting the pending pattern) is 10%, the number of pending balls The selection ratio is set to 10% for "3" (that is, when the reserved symbols are shifted) and 50% for "4" reserved symbols (that is, when the reserved symbols are displayed).

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variation effect of the big hit is The display timing is set so that it is most likely to be selected (50%).

Then, as shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "starting" when the number of pending balls is "0", and "before reaching" when the number of pending balls is "0". 10 to 19”, “20 to 29” for “after reach” with “0” retained balls, “30 to 59” for “after deletion of retained” with “0” retained balls, retained balls "60 to 69" for the number "1", "70 to 79" for the number of "2" held balls, "80 to 89" for the number of "3" held balls, "80 to 89" for the number of held balls " 4” and “90 to 99”.

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "3" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% "at the start", 10% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls "After pending deletion" is 30%, the number of pending balls is "1" (that is, when shifting the reserved pattern) is 10%, the number of pending balls is "2" (that is, when shifting the reserved pattern) is 10%, and the reserved pattern is " The selection ratio is set to 10% for 3" (that is, when the reserved symbols are shifted) and 10% for 4" reserved symbols (that is, when the reserved symbols are displayed).

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "4" and the display mode is "red", "super reach , etc. are set so that the timing of re-display after erasure of the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db is most likely to be selected (30%).

In this way, when the "suspended change notice" is performed in the reserved symbols and the executed symbols indicating the variable effect that generates the big hit, the executed symbols displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db due to "super reach" etc. The ``suspension change notice'' can appear (execute) at the timing when the performance of ``super reach'' ends and the execution pattern of the execution pattern display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed. As a result, it is possible to directly change and notify the notice object (changeable object; in the first embodiment, the execution pattern) which is always visible, or to make the notice object appear anew. Compared to the case of notifying, it is possible to casually change the display mode of the notice object while making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change of the notice object. By temporarily hiding the announcement object and then casually changing it, the player is first given a sense of discomfort, and then the player is made to recognize that the source of the sense of discomfort is directly linked to the game value (for example, a big win). As a result, it is possible to diversify the presentation while providing the player with an unexpected presentation, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, by allocating the execution timing of "holding change notice" to the second half of the variable production ("after reach" and "after holding erasure"), the expectation of the jackpot will increase even in the latter half of the variable production. The player can play the game while anticipating the occurrence (appearance) of the pending change notice. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting a big win until the second half of the variable presentation, so that the player can be entertained for a long period of time.

Next, the losing scenario table 222f2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the losing scenario table 222f2. In the losing scenario table 222f2 of FIG. 18, similarly to the big win scenario table 222f1, each number of holding balls of the variable effect at the time when the vertical row determines "holding change notice" (4 patterns of 1 to 4 holding balls) ), a total of 12 types of situation patterns are classified according to the display mode (3 patterns of “blue”, “red”, and “rainbow”) of “holding change notice” for each number of holding balls. there is In addition, as the timing at which the horizontal row executes (starts) the "holding change notice", 4 patterns at the time of display or shift to each number of holding balls (number of holding balls "1" to "4") and holding balls A total of 8 types of timing patterns, including 4 patterns of "start (shift time)", "before reach", "after reach" or "after pending deletion" in the number "0" (during the execution of the variable effect) are separated from each other. A possible value of the scenario counter 223d is associated with each of the divided groups.

As shown in FIG. 18, in the scenario table 222f2 for losing, situation patterns of the number of pending balls of the variable effect at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" and each display mode of the "holding change notice" are prepared. A value of the scenario counter 223d is associated with the situation pattern. It should be noted that the "rainbow" in the display mode of the "holding change notice" indicates the occurrence of a big win when the "rainbow" display mode appears, and is not selected in the event of a loss. Therefore, in the "rainbow" situation pattern of the losing scenario table 222f2, the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to any of the pending numbers of the variable effects at the time when the "pending change notice" is determined. are omitted.

First, a case will be described where the number of pending balls in the variable effect is "1" at the time when the "holding change notice" for losing is determined. In this case, the number of held balls "2" to "4" does not exist when the number of held balls "1" occurs. That is, when the number of reserved balls "1" occurs, the reserved symbols of the number of reserved balls "2" to "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this losing scenario table 222f2, when the number of pending balls is "1" when the "holding change notice" is determined, the number of holding balls becomes "2" to "4" when the "holding change notice" is executed. No value is assigned to the scenario counter 223d (see FIG. 18).

As shown in the example of FIG. 18, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "starting" with "0" pending balls, and "10 to 9" for "before reach" with "0" pending balls. 19", "20 to 29" for "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, "-" for "after deleting pending" with "0" pending balls, and "1" pending balls It is "30 to 99" for each.

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% "at the start", 10% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls The selection ratio is set such that "after pending deletion" is 0% and the number of pending balls is "1" (that is, when the pending pattern is displayed) is 70%.

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variation effect of the big hit is The display timing is set so that it is most likely to be selected (70%).

In the losing scenario table 222f2, the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to the execution timing of "after pending deletion" when the number of pending balls is "0". This is because in order to perform the "suspension change notice" at the execution timing of "after deletion of suspension", it is necessary to perform some kind of effect such as the variable element of "re-fluctuation" after the effect of "reach display" is executed. be. In the first embodiment, after the "ready-to-win display" is performed, the effect of the variable element of "re-fluctuation" is not performed except for the case of a big win, and the "loss display" is determined. Therefore, in the change effect of losing, there is no change element of "re-variation" that confirms the jackpot after the effect of "reach display", so the execution pattern (holding pattern) is re-displayed after "reach display" If the "holding change notice" is executed at the timing of , a discrepancy in the performance will occur. Therefore, in order to prevent such an event from occurring, the scenario counter 223d is set not to be allocated to the execution timing of "after pending erase".

Then, as shown in the example of FIG. 18, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 19" for "at the start" of "0" pending balls, and "before reach" for "0" pending balls. 20 to 39", "40 to 59" for "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, "-" for "after deleting pending" with "0" pending balls, number of pending balls " 1” is “60 to 99”.

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "1" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". "At the start" of 20%, 20% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 20% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 20% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls The selection ratio is set such that "after pending deletion" is 0% and the number of pending balls is "1" (that is, when the pending pattern is displayed) is 40%.

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "1" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variable effect of the loss is "red". The display timing is set so that it is most likely to be selected (40%).

Next, a case will be described in which the number of pending balls in the variable effect is "2" at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" for losing. In this case, the number of held balls "3" or "4" does not exist when the number of held balls "2" occurs. That is, when the number of reserved balls is "2", the reserved symbols with the number of reserved balls of "3" or "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this losing scenario table 222f2, when the number of pending balls is "2" when the "holding change notice" is determined, the number of holding balls becomes "3" or "4" when the "holding change notice" is executed. No value is assigned to the scenario counter 223d (see FIG. 18).

As shown in the example of FIG. 18, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "starting" with "0" pending balls, and "10 to 9" for "before reach" with "0" pending balls. 19", "20 to 29" for "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, "-" for "after deleting pending" with "0" pending balls, and "1" pending balls It is "30 to 39" for 1, and "40 to 99" for the number of held balls "2".

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% "at the start", 10% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls Selection ratio of 0% for "after deletion of pending", 10% for "1" pending balls (i.e., when shifting pending patterns), and 60% for "2" pending balls (i.e., when displaying pending patterns) is set to be

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variable effect of losing is "blue". The display timing is set so that it is most likely to be selected (60%).

Next, when the number of pending balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" shown in the example of FIG. 18 is "2" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing and scenario of the "holding change notice" Correlation with the value of the counter 223d is "0 to 19" for "starting" when the number of held balls is "0", and "20 to 39" for "before reaching" when the number of held balls is "0". ", "40 to 59" for "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, "-" for "after erasing" with "0" pending balls, "1" pending balls "60 to 69" for the number of balls held, and "70 to 99" for the number of held balls "2".

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "2" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". "At the start" of 20%, 20% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 20% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 20% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls Selection ratio of 0% for "after deletion of pending", 10% for "1" pending balls (i.e., when shifting pending patterns), and 30% for "2" pending balls (i.e., when displaying pending patterns) is set to be

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "2" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variable effect of the loss is "red". The display timing is set so that it is most likely to be selected (30%).

Next, a case will be described in which the number of pending balls in the variable effect is "3" at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" of loss. In this case, the number of held balls "4" does not exist when the number of held balls "3" occurs. That is, when the number of reserved balls is "3", the reserved symbols with the number of reserved balls of "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this losing scenario table 222f2, when the number of pending balls is "3" when the "holding change notice" is determined, the scenario counter 223d for the number of holding balls of "4" when the "holding change notice" is executed is not assigned (see FIG. 18).

As shown in the example of FIG. 18, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "starting" with "0" pending balls, and "10 to 9" for "before reach" with "0" pending balls. 19", "20 to 29" for "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, "-" for "after deleting pending" with "0" pending balls, and "1" pending balls "30 to 39" for 1, "40 to 49" for the number of held balls "2", and "50 to 99" for the number of held balls "3".

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% "at the start", 10% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls "After pending deletion" is 0%, the number of pending balls is "1" (that is, at the time of pending pattern shift) is 10%, the number of pending balls is "2" (that is, at the time of pending pattern shift) is 10%, the number of pending balls It is set so that the selection ratio is 50% for "3" (that is, when the reserved symbols are displayed).

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variable effect of the loss is "blue". The display timing is set so that it is most likely to be selected (50%).

Then, as shown in the example of FIG. 18, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 19" for "at the start" of "0" pending balls, and "before reach" for "0" pending balls. 20 to 39", "40 to 59" for "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, "-" for "after deleting pending" with "0" pending balls, number of pending balls " "60 to 69" for 1", "70 to 79" for the number of held balls of "2", and "80 to 99" for the number of held balls of "3".

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "3" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". "At the start" of 20%, 20% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 20% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 20% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls "After pending deletion" is 0%, the number of pending balls is "1" (i.e., when shifting the pending pattern) is 10%, the number of pending balls is "2" (i.e., when shifting the pending pattern) is 10%, the pending pattern is " 3" (that is, when the reserved symbols are displayed) is set to have a selection ratio of 20%.

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "3" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variable performance of the loss is "red". It is set so that the timing at the time of display and "at the start", "before reach" or "after reach" of the variable effect are easily selected (each 20%).

Next, a case will be described where the number of pending balls in the variable effect at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" for losing is "4".

As shown in the example of FIG. 18, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "starting" with "0" pending balls, and "10 to 9" for "before reach" with "0" pending balls. 19", "20 to 29" for "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, "-" for "after deleting pending" with "0" pending balls, and "1" pending balls "30 to 39" for 1 ball, "40 to 49" for 2 balls on hold, 50 to 59 for 3 balls on hold, 4 balls on hold On the other hand, it is "60 to 99".

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% "at the start", 10% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls "After pending deletion" is 0%, the number of pending balls is "1" (that is, at the time of pending pattern shift) is 10%, the number of pending balls is "2" (that is, at the time of pending pattern shift) is 10%, the number of pending balls The selection ratio is set to 10% for "3" (that is, when the reserved symbols are shifted) and 40% for "4" reserved symbols (that is, when the reserved symbols are displayed).

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variable effect of the loss is "blue". The display timing is set so that it is most likely to be selected (40%).

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 18, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 19" for "at the start" of "0" pending balls, and "before reach" for "0" pending balls. 20 to 39", "40 to 59" for "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, "-" for "after deleting pending" with "0" pending balls, number of pending balls " "60 to 69" for 1", "70 to 79" for the number of held balls "2", "80 to 89" for the number of held balls "3", "4" for the number of held balls It is "90 to 99" for each.

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "3" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". "At the start" of 20%, 20% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 20% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 20% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls "After pending deletion" is 0%, the number of pending balls is "1" (i.e., when shifting the pending pattern) is 10%, the number of pending balls is "2" (i.e., when shifting the pending pattern) is 10%, the pending pattern is " The selection ratio is set to 10% for 3" (that is, when the reserved symbols are shifted) and 10% for 4" reserved symbols (that is, when the reserved symbols are displayed).

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "4" and the display mode is "red", the variable effect "At the start", "before reaching" or "after reaching" are set to be easily selected (each 20%).

In this way, even if the same "pending change notice (for example," blue ")" is different at the time of losing the variable production and at the time of the big hit, the execution timing (appearance timing) is different, so that the "pending change notice , and the timing at which the display mode appears. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the suggested content of the degree of expectation for a big win by the "suspension change notice" according to the display mode and appearance timing of the "suspension change notice", thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 15, the description continues. The pending information storage area 223e stores information for performing the prefetching process, that is, the first win random number counter C1 and the first hit random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer in accordance with the start winning in the main controller 110 and transmitted by the pending ball number command. Each value of the hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, the pending change information indicating the display mode of the "holding change notice", the scenario data indicating the execution timing of the "holding change notice", and the fluctuation This is an area for storing pending erasure information indicating whether or not the cockpit display area Db is to be erased in the effect, and re-variation information indicating whether or not "re-variation" is to be performed in the variation effect.

The sound lamp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold information storage area 223e and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222 to perform prefetch processing (hold display setting processing ( See FIG. 30)) is executed. In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the pending change information, scenario data, pending erase information and re-change information obtained by the pre-reading process in the pending change information storage area 223e5, the scenario data storage area 223e6, and the pending change information storage area 223e5 of the pending information storage area 223e. Stored in the pending deletion information storage area 223e7 and the re-change information storage area 223e8, respectively, and executes the "suspended change notice" based on the values stored in the respective areas 223e5 to 223e8.

The execution information storage area 223f is the information for performing the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, that is, the main control device 110 acquires from the buffer for the counter along with the start winning, and the first Each value of the winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, the pending change information indicating the display mode of the "holding change notice", and the execution timing of the "holding change notice" , pending deletion information indicating whether or not the cockpit display area Db is deleted in the variable effect, and re-variation information indicating whether or not "re-variation" is performed in the variable effect. area.

When the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable effect, it is stored in the first pending information storage area of the above-described pending information storage area 223e in order to execute the setting of the variable effect. Information (values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, etc.) for performing the variable effect that is stored is shifted to the execution information storage area 223f.

Details of the pending information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the pending information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f. The pending information storage area 223e has four areas of pending information storage first to fourth areas. Each of the pending information storage first to fourth areas, respectively, the first hit random number counter storage area 223e1 in which the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is stored, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is stored A per type counter storage area 223e2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, a variation type counter storage area 223e4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored, and a "suspended change A pending change information storage area 223e5 for storing pending change information indicating the display mode of the "notice", a scenario data storage area 223e6 for storing scenario data indicating the execution timing of the "notice of pending change", and a cockpit display in the variable effect. A pending deletion information storage area 223e7 for storing pending deletion information indicating whether or not the region Db is to be deleted, and re-variation information for storing re-variation information indicating whether or not "re-variation" is performed in the variation effect. At least a storage area 223e8 is provided.

The execution information storage area 223f contains the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the variable performance currently being executed, the pending change information indicating the display mode of the "holding change notice", and the execution timing of the "holding change notice". scenario data indicating, pending erasure information indicating whether or not the cockpit display area Db is erased in the variable effect, and re-variation information indicating whether or not "re-variation" is performed in the variable effect are stored. It is an area for

In addition, the holding information storage first to fourth areas respectively hold values of respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to a maximum of four suspended variable effects, and a holding indicating the display mode of "holding change notice". Change information, scenario data indicating execution timing of "suspended change notice", pending deletion information indicating whether or not the cockpit display area Db is deleted in the variable effect, and whether "re-variation" is performed in the variable effect This is an area for storing re-change information indicating whether or not.

Specifically, the execution information storage area 223f is an area corresponding to the variable performance currently being executed, and the pending information storage first area is the variation that is first suspended in terms of time among the suspended variable performances. It is an area corresponding to performance, the second area for storing reserved information is an area corresponding to the second oldest suspended variable performance among the suspended variable performances, and the third area for storing reserved information is: This is an area corresponding to the temporally third oldest suspended variable performance among the suspended variable performances, and the fourth area for storing the suspension information is the fourth temporally suspended variable performance among the suspended variable performances. It is an area corresponding to the variable performance.

When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the pending ball count command from the main control device 110, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are held. Extract from the number of balls command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the values of the extracted counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in the areas corresponding to the number of pending balls included in the number of pending balls command among the first to fourth areas for storing the pending information. Stored in the random number counter storage area 223e1, the first winning type counter storage area 223e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3, and the variation type counter storage area 223e4.

Specifically, if the number of pending balls included in the pending ball number command is X (1 ≤ X ≤ 4), the number of variable effects suspended at that time is X, and the pending ball count command The values of the included counters C1 to C3 and CS1 correspond to the X-th suspended variable performance in terms of time among the suspended variable performances, so each counter storage area of the X-th storage area for storage of suspension information. The values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to 223e1 to 223e4 are stored. At this time, the main controller 110 stores the values of the respective counters C1 to C3, CS1 included in the reserved ball number command in the reserved No. X area of the reserved ball storage area 203b. That is, the same values as those of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reservation X area of the main controller 110 are stored in the reservation information storage X area.

In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 performs pre-reading processing (holding display setting processing (see FIG. 30)) based on each value stored in each counter storage area 223e1 to 223e4 of the holding information storage X area. The pending change information, scenario data, pending erase information and re-change information generated based on the result of the processing are stored in the storage areas 223e5 to 223e8 of the same pending information storage X area. That is, in each hold information storage X area, whether or not the "hold change notice" is executed in each variable effect, the execution timing when the "hold change notice" is executed, and the cockpit display area Db in each change effect Whether or not an effect to be deleted is included, and whether or not "re-variation" is performed in each variable effect are stored.

On the other hand, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command and a stop type command meaning the start of the variation effect from the main control device 110, shift processing is performed in the pending information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f. That is, the suspended variable performance is reduced by one, and the execution of the variable performance suspended first in terms of time is started, so that the first area for storing the suspended information corresponding to the first suspended variable performance is stored. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e8 and various information (data) are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f8 of the execution information storage area 223f corresponding to the variable performance currently being executed. Let

In addition, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e8 of the pending information storage second area and various information (data) are stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e8 of the pending information storage first area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and various information (data) stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e8 of the third pending information storage area are stored in the respective storage areas 223e1 to 223e8 of the second pending information storage area. , and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e8 of the fourth pending information storage area and various information (data) are stored in the respective storage areas 223e1 to 223e1 of the third pending information storage area. 223e8.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223f stores the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203c of the main controller 110. FIG. In addition, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first to fourth holding areas of the holding ball storage area 203b of the main controller 110 are stored in the first to fourth holding information storage areas. will be That is, in the sound lamp control device 113, counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the variable effects being executed and held by the main control device 110 are stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the hold information storage area 223e. be.

The sound lamp control device 113 grasps the number of pending variable effects (the number of pending balls) from the sub-holding ball number counter 223b when performing the look-ahead processing (holding display setting processing (see FIG. 30)). Then, based on the number of pending balls, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the areas where the variable performance is suspended among the first to fourth areas for storing the pending information are read in advance, and in the variable performance, It is determined whether or not it will be a big hit, and the fluctuation time and the like. For example, if the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b is "1", the number of holding balls of the variable effect is 1, so for the holding information storage first area, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored Read ahead the value and make a judgment. Further, if the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b is "4", the number of holding balls of the variable effect is 4 times, so for the holding information storage fourth area, the stored counters C1 to C3, CS1 Read ahead the value and make a judgment.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that commands are transmitted only in one direction from the main controller 110 to the voice ramp controller 113, and the voice ramp controller 113 accesses the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 and the like. can't. On the other hand, the audio lamp control device 113 is provided with a pending information storage area 223e, and the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the variable effects suspended by the main control device 110 are also stored in the audio ramp control device 113. Therefore, by referring to the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold information storage area 223e, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute the prefetching process. That is, when the suspended variable performance is executed, the result of the variable performance (whether it will be a big hit, what the variable time will be, etc.) is determined before the variable performance is executed, The audio lamp control device 113 can determine the execution of various effects and control the execution mode and execution timing of the "holding change notice".

The above-described shift processing in the holding information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f is based on the number of held balls when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received (the update based on the reception of the variation pattern command and the stop type command is performed. Based on the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b before being changed), the data is moved (shifted) only for the area corresponding to the reserved variable effect among the first to fourth areas storing the reserved information.

For example, when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received, the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b before updating is "4", and all areas of the holding information storage area 223e (holding information storage first to fourth areas ) is stored with data. In this case, the data in the first hold information storage area is shifted to the execution information storage area 223f, the data in the second hold information storage area is shifted to the first hold information storage area, and the data in the third hold information storage area is held. The data is shifted to the second information storage area, and the data in the fourth pending information storage area is shifted to the third pending information storage area.

On the other hand, if the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b before updating when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received is "2", the data in the first reservation information storage area is shifted to the execution information storage area 223f. , the data in the second hold information storage area is shifted to the first hold information storage area, and the data shift ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the data shift processing is not performed for the third and fourth storage information storage areas where the variable effect is not suspended, the number of data shifts can be reduced. Control burden can be reduced.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the pending information storage first to fourth areas is shifted to an area with an area number smaller by 1 (the execution information storage area 223f or the pending information storage first to third areas). It may be configured as follows. In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (reserved) for each of the first to fourth reservation information storage areas, thereby facilitating the creation of a program.

Returning to FIG. 15, the description continues. The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed.

The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 29) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes and continues the third pattern. It controls the advance notice effect. The display control device 114 has an MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. there is

The audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input port 238 , and the display control device 114 sends a command to the audio lamp control device 113 to instruct the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 determined by the audio lamp control device 113 . receive from MPU 231 , program ROM 232 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are also connected to input port 238 via bus line 240 . A video RAM 236 is connected to the image controller 237 and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third pattern display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Note that even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different jackpot lottery probabilities and the number of prize balls paid out per jackpot, there are models with exactly the same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

The MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on commands input from the sound lamp control device 113 . The program ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs.

The character ROM 234 has a character storage area 234a in which image data of each sprite such as a pattern (background pattern or decorative pattern) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored. In the character storage area 234a, the above image data is stored in a compressed format in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In the first embodiment, the image data before compression consists of approximately 1024 Mbytes, and the image data of approximately 1024 Mbytes is compressed to approximately 768 Mbytes and stored in the character storage area 234a.

The video RAM 236 is a memory having two frames of frame buffer areas for storing one frame of images displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

The image controller 237 generates one frame of image data in accordance with the drawing list, writes it into one frame buffer area of the video RAM 236, and reads the one frame of image data written into the other frame buffer area of the video RAM 236. , and outputs the read image data to the third pattern display device 81 through the output port 239, thereby causing the third pattern display device 81 to continuously display a plurality of frame images.

The image controller 237 reads the sprite image data (compressed image data) specified in the drawing list from the character storage area 234a according to the order described in the drawing list, decompresses the image data, and draws the data. Processing is performed according to the drawing information specified in the list, and the image data of the sprite is written in one frame buffer area of the video RAM 236 at the display position coordinates specified in the drawing list. Image data to be displayed in one frame is generated by decompressing, processing, and writing image data for all sprites defined in the drawing list.

The writing of one frame of image data into one of the frame buffer areas and the reading of one frame of image data from the other frame buffer area are performed in parallel, and both are completed in 20 milliseconds. When one frame of image data has been read out from the other frame buffer area, the one frame of image data previously written in one frame buffer area is read out. Image data for the next one frame is written into the frame buffer area of .

By alternately writing image data into and reading out image data from one frame buffer area and the other frame buffer area, a plurality of frame images can be continuously displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can be displayed.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description is continued. The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 24). Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 20 to 26. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into start-up processing (see FIG. 25) that is started when the power is turned on, main processing (see FIG. 26) that is executed after the start-up processing, and periodic processing (first embodiment). There are a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) that is started with a period of 4 milliseconds) and an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) that is started by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Here, for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt processing and the NMI interrupt processing will be explained first, and then the start-up processing and main processing will be explained.

FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 4 milliseconds. The MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt processing to perform various types of processing that should be executed periodically.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In timer interrupt processing and main processing, based on various processing, commands to be transmitted to payout control device 111, sound lamp control device 113, etc. are generated and temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203. . In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device).

For example, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 a pending ball number command set in the later-described start winning process (see FIG. 21). In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. set in the variation process (see FIG. 22) and the variation start process (FIG. 23) which is one process of the variation process. In addition, a ball shooting signal set for shooting a ball in the process of S111, which will be described later, is transmitted to the shooting control device 112. FIG.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then, in the case of the jackpot state, the specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened or closed. A large-opening opening/closing process for opening the door is executed (S103). That is, the specific winning hole 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning hole 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning hole 65a. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, display control processing of a second symbol (for example, a symbol of "o" or "x") by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S105). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 Variable display is performed at . Then, a lottery for the second symbol is carried out according to the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is in a winning state, the electric accessary attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined period of time.

Next, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S106). That is, it reads the states of various switches 208 connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches 208, and saves detection information (winning detection information). Also, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 based on the winning detection information. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted toward the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S107). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to "0" when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("899" in the first embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203 . Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("250" in the first embodiment), it is cleared to "0" and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared to "0". The updated value of the counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S108). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values. ("899", "99", "99", "198" and "250" respectively in the first embodiment) are cleared to "0" respectively. Also, when the first winning random number counter C1 or the second winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the value of the first winning random number counter C1 or the second random number counter CINI2. The initial value of the second winning random number counter C4 is read, and the initial value is set to the first winning random number counter C1 or the second winning random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a process for performing dynamic display by the first design display device 37 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third design by the third design display device 81 are executed (S109). A starting prize winning process is executed when the ball mouth 64 wins a prize (S110). The details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 22, and the details of the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the starting prize winning process (S110), the firing control process is executed (S111), and further, other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Then, when the ball shooting is on, in order to send the ball shooting signal to the shooting control device 112 , the information of the ball shooting signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 . As a result, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next.

Next, the starting winning process (S110), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S110). In the starting winning process, it is determined whether or not a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), and if there is a starting winning, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. Execute the process to hold (suspend). Further, the processing for transmitting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be held together with the number of held balls to the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the starting winning process (S110), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S201). Here, based on the output signal of the first ball entrance switch (not shown) that detects the entry (winning) of the ball into the first ball entrance 64, read in the switch reading process (S106 in FIG. 20), A ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing.

When it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (the starting prize has been awarded) (S201: Yes), the value of the pending ball number counter 203a (the value of the suspended ball number counter 203a) It is determined whether or not the number of balls (N) is less than the upper limit (4 in the first embodiment) (S202). Then, whether there is no winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S201: No), or even if there is a prize to the first ball entrance 64, if the number of operation pending balls N<4 (S202: No) , returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S201: Yes) and if the number of reserved balls N<4 (S202: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N) is 1 is added (S203). Then, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) and provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Among the reserved first to fourth areas, the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1, the first hit type counter storage area 203b2, and the stop pattern selection counter storage area of the area corresponding to the value indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a 203b3 and the fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 (S204).

Specifically, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a after the addition by the process of S203 is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in the respective storage areas of the first pending area. Also, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a after addition is "2", each storage area in the second pending area, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a after addition is "3", the third storage area If the value of the pending ball number counter 203a after addition is "4", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the storage areas of the fourth pending area.

Next, the value of the retained ball number counter 203a after addition by the processing of S203 (the number of retained balls N), the first winning random number counter C1 stored (reserved) in the retained ball storage area 203b by the processing of S204, the first winning In order to transmit the pending ball number command including the respective values of the type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 to the sound lamp control device 113, the pending ball number command is sent to the command transmission ring provided in the RAM 203. Set in the buffer (S205). As a result, the pending ball number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. After completing the process of S205, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20).

In the process of S205, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the number-of-holds-balls command may be the values read from the counter buffer in the process of S204. A value read out from the value stored (reserved) in 203b may be used.

Next, the variation process (S109), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing this variation process (S109). The variation processing (S109) controls the dynamic display in the first symbol display device 37 and the variation effect performed in the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

In this variation process (S109), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently in progress (S301). During the big win includes the middle of the big win game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the big win and the middle of the predetermined time after the end of the big win game. As a result of determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S301: Yes), this process is terminated.

If the jackpot is not in progress (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is dynamic display (S302), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is dynamic display. If not (S302: No), then it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has passed after the dynamic display on the first pattern display device 37 has stopped (S303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed since the dynamic display was stopped (S303: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20). As a result, the stationary symbols in the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) are displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined period of time, so that the player can visually recognize the stationary symbols. can.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S303, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display was stopped (S303: Yes), the value of the pending ball number counter 203a (dynamic display suspended in the main controller 110 (fluctuation It is determined whether or not the number of pending balls N) of the performance) is greater than "0" (S304). As a result, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a (the pending ball number N) is not "0" (S304: Yes), it is determined that it is time to start executing the variable effect, and first, the value of the pending ball number counter 203a is determined. (Number of held balls N) is subtracted by 1 (S305). This is because the variation start process (S307) starts the execution of one of the suspended variable effects, so that the number of suspended balls is reduced by one.

Next, shift processing is performed on the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b (S306). This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b toward the reserved ball execution area 203c. The data in each area is shifted such as area 203c, reserved second area→reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on.

After the data shift process of S306, the variation start process for the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the data shift process. (S307), returning to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20). Note that the fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 23 .

In the processing of S304, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved balls counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N) is "0" (S304: No), the third symbol display device 81 is in a state where a demonstration effect is being performed. It is determined whether or not, that is, whether or not a demonstration is being performed (S308). In this determination process, after transmitting the demo command to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, it is determined that the value of the pending ball number counter 203a (the pending ball number N) is greater than "0". The period up to is determined to be during the demonstration.

If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S308: No), the demo command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S309), and the process returns to timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20). On the other hand, if it is determined that the demonstration is being performed (S309: Yes), the process returns to timer interrupt processing. The demo command set in the process of S309 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice It is sent to the lamp control device 113 .

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, it transmits the display demo command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 displays the demo on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display demo command. Control is performed to display the production.

Here, the demo command is set when, as described above, there is not even a single held ball when the predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, if the variable effect is not started even after the predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation is stopped, the third symbol display device 81 displays the demonstration effect.

If it is determined in the process of S308 that the demonstration is not being performed (S308: No), a process of determining whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation is stopped is performed. After the fluctuation is stopped, the process of S309 may be executed to set the demonstration command when the second predetermined time has passed. Thus, when there is no reserved ball after the fluctuation is stopped, the stop pattern of the stopped fluctuation performance can be shown to the player for a relatively long time without immediately starting the demonstration performance.

In the processing of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is in dynamic display (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S310). The display time during the dynamic display of the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If it has not elapsed (S310: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S311), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20).

In the first embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the dynamic display to the elapse of the fluctuation time, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red The green LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. A display mode is set in which the LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the variation process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the variation processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches "100" , to change the lighting color of the LED. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to "0" when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has passed (S310: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set for the first symbol display device 37 (S312). The stop symbols are set in advance by the variation start process (S307), which will be described later with reference to FIG. In the fluctuation start process, whether or not a big win is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the process of S306. Depending on the value of , after the big hit, it is determined whether it is a pattern of "15R probability variable jackpot", a pattern of "2R probability variable jackpot", or a pattern of "15R normal jackpot".

In the first embodiment, when the "15R probability variable jackpot" is reached after the jackpot, the blue LED is lit, and when the "2R probability variable jackpot" is reached, the red LED is lit, and when the "15R normal jackpot" is reached. , a red LED and a blue LED are lit. In addition, when it is a loss, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. Each LED is turned off when the next dynamic display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S312, the stop symbol of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED on the first symbol display device 37. In order to confirm and display, a confirmation command is set (S313), and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20). The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variable effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81 . Upon receiving this confirmation command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display confirmation command to the display control device 114 . The display control device 114 is configured to stop the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 and to confirm and display the stop symbol by receiving the confirmation command for display.

Next, the fluctuation start process (S307), which is one process of the fluctuation process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start process (S307). In this fluctuation start process (S307), based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c, a lottery for a big hit or a loss (big hit lottery) is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device are executed. The dynamic display and the dynamic pattern (variation pattern and stop type) of the dynamic display performed in 81 and the like are determined.

In the fluctuation start process (S307), first, whether or not the game is a big hit is determined based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c and the big hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 8(b)). A judging big hit lottery (win/fail judgment) process is performed (S401).

Whether or not it is a big win is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, in the jackpot random number table 202a, when the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in the normal low probability state ("normal game state" or "time reduction state"), "7,307 , 582” is defined as the jackpot random value. In addition, when the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in the high probability state (“probability fluctuation state”), “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892” are defined as jackpot random numbers.

In the process of S401, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c is compared with the jackpot random number value defined in the jackpot random number table 202a, and if they match. , is determined to be a jackpot. As a result of the process of S401, when it is determined that it is a jackpot (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c and the jackpot type table 202b (FIG. 8(b) ), the display mode at the time of the big win is set (S402).

In this process, according to the jackpot type table 202b, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c, that is, the maximum number of rounds after the jackpot of 15 rounds "Probability fluctuation "15R probability variable jackpot" that shifts to "state", "15R normal jackpot" that shifts to "time reduction state" after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, or "probability variable state" after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds It is determined whether it is a “2R probability variable jackpot” that shifts to “. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) at the time of the jackpot in the first symbol display device 37 is set.

In addition, in the third symbol display device 81, in order to stop and display various jackpot patterns corresponding to the jackpot types, the jackpot types ("15R probability variable jackpot", "2R probability variable jackpot", "15R normal jackpot") are used as stop types as they are. By setting, the display mode at the time of the big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is set.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S403), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the effect mode is selected based on the display mode (stop type) at the time of the big win and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time. Then, the variable time of the variable performance is determined based on the value of the variable type counter CS1 from among the selected performance modes. In determining the variation pattern at the time of the big win, first, the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 11(a) or (b)) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the big win.

Then, in the process of S402, when "15R probability variable jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot" is set as the jackpot type, it is stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the selected stop pattern table 202d (C table 202d3). A performance mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is selected. That is, in this case, one of the "normal reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode, or the "special reach" effect mode is selected (see FIG. 11(a)).

When the "normal reach" effect mode is set as the effect mode, the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the group "E5: normal reach" of the big hit variation pattern table 202e1 (see FIG. 12) Select the variation pattern associated with the value of That is, in this case, "only normal reach", "pseudo-gase + normal reach", "pseudo-gase 1 + normal reach", "normal reach + re-variation", "pseudo-gase + normal reach + re-variation" or "pseudo-gase 1 + normal reach + re-variation" is selected (see FIG. 12). Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time (see FIG. 12).

When the "super reach" effect mode is set as the effect mode, the variation type stored in the held ball execution area 203c in the "E6: super reach" group of the big hit variation pattern table 202e1 (see FIG. 12) A variation pattern associated with the value of the counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, "only super reach", "pseudo catch + super reach", "pseudo run 1 + super reach", "pseudo run 2 + super reach", "super reach + revariation", "pseudo catch + super reach + Re-fluctuation", "pseudo-run 1 + super reach + re-fluctuation" or "pseudo-run 2 + super reach + re-fluctuation" is selected (see Fig. 12). Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time (see FIG. 12).

When the "special reach" effect mode is set as the effect mode, the variation type stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the "E7: special reach" group of the big hit variation pattern table 202e1 (see FIG. 12). A variation pattern associated with the value of the counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, "only special reach", "pseudo hitch + special reach", "pseudo hitch 1 + special reach", "pseudo hitch 2 + special reach", "special reach + re-variation", "pseudo hitch + special reach + Re-fluctuation", "pseudo-run 1 + special reach + re-fluctuation" or "pseudo-run 2 + special reach + re-fluctuation" is selected (see Fig. 12). Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time (see FIG. 12).

Also, when "2R probability variable jackpot" is set as the jackpot type in the process of S402, the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c in the selected stop pattern table 202d (D table 202d4) Select an effect mode associated with the value. That is, when the "2R probability variable jackpot" is won, the "special variation" is selected without exception. Then, referring to the selected effect mode and the big hit variation pattern table 202e1, a variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203c is selected. In the first embodiment, only "movie" is selected in this case (see FIG. 12). Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time (see FIG. 12).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S401 that it is not a big hit (S401: No), the display mode at the time of losing is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the retained ball execution area 203c and the retained ball number counter 203a are set. Based on the value of and the current game state, as the effect mode to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81, "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode, "non-reach (normal)" effect mode, "normal reach" effect mode , "super reach" effect mode, or "special reach" effect mode is set. In the first embodiment, as described above, depending on whether the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the "probability fluctuation state", the "time reduction state", or the "normal game state", each effect The stop pattern table 202d (A table 202d1 or B table 202d2) is set so that the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the mode differs.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of losing is determined (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until stop display of the missing symbol is determined. At this time, if the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the "normal game state", the A table 202d1 or B table 202d2 ( Either of FIG. 10(a) or FIG. 10(b) is selected. Further, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the "time reduction state" or "probability fluctuation state", the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d corresponding to the number of pending balls at that time indicated by the number of pending ball counter 203a Alternatively, one of the B table 202d2 (see FIG. 10(a) or FIG. 10(b)) is selected.

Then, in the processing of S404, when the "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode is set as the presentation mode, in the group of "E0: non-reach (shortened)" of the change pattern table for losing 202e2, the reserved ball execution area 203c Select the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in . That is, in this case, "only non-reach (shortening)" is selected, and no other variation pattern is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time (see FIG. 13).

Further, when the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode is set as the effect mode in the process of S404, the holding ball execution area 203c is displayed in the "E1: non-reach (normal)" group of the change pattern table for losing 202e2. Select the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in . That is, in this case, "non-reach (normal) only", "pseudo-gase + non-reach (normal)", or "pseudo-gase 1 + non-reach (normal)" is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time (see FIG. 13).

Further, when the "normal reach" effect mode is set as the effect mode in the process of S402, the variation type counter stored in the held ball execution area 203c in the group "E2: normal reach" of the change pattern table 202e2 for loss. Select the variation pattern associated with the value of CS1. That is, in this case, "only normal reach", "pseudo-gase+normal reach", or "pseudo-ream 1+normal reach" is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time (see FIG. 13).

Further, when the "super reach" effect mode is set as the effect mode in the processing of S402, the variation stored in the held ball execution area 203c in the "E3: super reach" group of the change pattern table for losing 202e2 A variation pattern associated with the value of the type counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, "only super reach", "pseudo-gase+super reach", "pseudo-start 1+super reach", or "pseudo-start 2+super reach" is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time (see FIG. 13).

Further, when the "special reach" effect mode is set as the effect mode in the process of S402, the variation stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the "E4: special reach" group of the change pattern table for losing 202e2 A variation pattern associated with the value of the type counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, "only special reach", "pseudo-gase+special reach", "pseudo-rep 1+special reach", or "pseudo-rep 2+special reach" is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time (see FIG. 13).

In this way, the setting processing of the performance mode and the variation pattern at the time of the big win and the setting processing of the performance mode and the variation pattern at the time of losing are determined by the same determination program using the same random numbers C3 and CS1. , the program can be shared, and the number of man-hours required for development can be reduced.

In the processing of S406, based on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the processing of S403 and S405, the display control device 114 is notified of the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern via the audio lamp control device 113. A pattern command is set (S406). Specifically, for example, when a jackpot is won and a 30-second variation pattern of "super reach only" is selected, "E601H" is set as the variation pattern command. Further, when the big hit is lost and the variation pattern of 30 seconds of "super reach only" is selected, "E301H" is set as the variation pattern command. In this way, even if the variable effect has the same variable time, by setting together the propriety of the variable effect and the contents of the rough variation pattern in the variation pattern command, the sound ramp control device 113 can achieve the effect mode including the propriety. By grasping the contents of and the variation time, it is possible to determine the variation pattern of the variation effect in more detail based on the information.

Also, the stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the processing of S402 or S404 is set (S407), and the process proceeds to the change processing (see FIG. 22). return. Specifically, for example, if you win a jackpot and the content of the jackpot is "15R probability variable jackpot", without specifying the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "7" symbol etc.) A stop type command indicating "15R probability variable jackpot" is set. In addition, if a jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is "15R normal jackpot", the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "4" pattern, etc.) is not specified, and "15R normal jackpot" is selected. Set a stop type command that indicates that Furthermore, if the jackpot is not won and the "super reach" production mode is selected, the stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "787" etc.) is not specified, and the " Set a stop type command indicating that it is a "super reach" production mode (so-called front and back loss). In addition, if the jackpot is not won and the "normal reach" production mode is selected, the stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "737" etc.) is not specified, and the "normal reach" at the time of losing is selected. ” Set a stop type command indicating that it is in the production mode (so-called loss other than front and back). Furthermore, if the jackpot is not won and the "non-reach" production mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "258" etc.) is not specified, and " Set a stop type command indicating that it is a "non-reach" production mode (so-called complete loss). Thus, by setting a rough stop type based on the propriety of the variable effect to the stop type command, the audio lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) grasps the stop type based on the propriety, Based on this information, it is possible to determine the result of stopping the variable presentation in more detail.

These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are voiced in the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing (Fig. It is sent to the lamp controller 113 . Upon receiving the variation pattern command and the stop type command, the audio ramp control device 113 generates a display variation pattern command and a display type command based thereon, and transmits them to the display control device 114 .

FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S501), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

Incidentally, the above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, wait processing (1 second in the first embodiment) is executed. (S602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S603).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S604), and if it is turned on (S604: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605), and if not stored (S605: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case also, the process proceeds to S611.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S606). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed.

Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will also be described in S706 of FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S611, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S611). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process of RAM 203 (S612, S613).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 is initialized (S612, S613). Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S612, S613) is executed in the same way. . In the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S612, S613), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to "0" (S612), and then the initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S613). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S610.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S605: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S607: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S608). Then, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power interruption is transmitted (S609), and the process proceeds to S610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes possible to start the ball payout control while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the process of S610, interrupts are permitted (S610). Then, the process shifts to the main process (see FIG. 26), which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing this main process. This main process is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S701). If the RAM 203 does not store power failure occurrence information (S701: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S702, S703).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S702). Specifically, when the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and the counter values reach the maximum values ("899" and "250" in the first embodiment), , clear to "0". Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S703) by the same method as the process of S108 (see FIG. 20), and the process proceeds to S701.

Here, while this main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 20 is activated and executed at predetermined time intervals (4 milliseconds in the first embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed according to the state of the game. For example, during the jackpot, the execution of controlling the opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is performed, and if the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67, the display control of the second pattern by the second pattern display device 83 is performed. done. Also, in the jackpot lottery executed when the dynamic display on the first pattern display device 37 is started, the jackpot random value to be compared with the obtained first hit random number counter C1 is determined depending on whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. the numbers will be different. Therefore, the time taken to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, but changes according to the state of the game at that time.

The processes of S702 and S703, which are one process of the main process, are executed during the remaining time of this timer interrupt process. That is, the remaining time is used to repeatedly update the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated randomly. . In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, the first winning random number counter C1 and the second winning random number counter C2 are updated using these as initial values for updating. can have randomness.

In addition, in the process of S701, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S701: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 24 has been executed, so the power-off process after S704 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S704), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) and transmit (S705). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S706), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S707), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

Note that the process of S701 is executed at the timing when one cycle of the processes of S702 and S703 performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) ends. As a result, in the main processing of the main controller 110, at the timing when various settings by the timer interrupt processing are finished and when the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are finished updating, information on occurrence of power failure is confirmed. . Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the process can be started from the process of S701 after the start-up process (see FIG. 25) ends. That is, the process can be started from the process of S701, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process.

Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is saved in the initialization processing (S601). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S701 can be started. As a result, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110 .

In the first embodiment, the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20) is executed periodically to perform processing, and the main processing updates the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 during the remaining time of the timer interrupt processing. Although the case has been described, part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing may be configured to be executed in the main processing every predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds). For example, in the first embodiment, the timer interrupt processing was performed by the timer interrupt processing to read the prize ball count signal and payout abnormality signal read processing (S102), the large opening opening and closing processing (S103), the second symbol control processing (S105), and the switch A part or all of the reading process (S106) may be configured to be executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

In this case, a step for determining whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has passed is provided in the main processing, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has passed, the processing to be executed at predetermined time intervals is executed. The counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be updated regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is updated during the remaining time of the processing executed every predetermined time. Since the time required for the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be updated at random even with such a configuration.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 32. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing (see FIG. 27) that is activated upon power-on and main processing (see FIG. 28) that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 27, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S1115 (see FIG. 28) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 28, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S1112 in FIG. 28), it executes power-off processing in S1115. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S1115 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1002: No), the current start-up process was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S1115. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), it will transfer to S1004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1115 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started after the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the process proceeds to S808.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process of S1115, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process proceeds to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to "0".

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of S1008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1115 is executed (see S1114 in FIG. 28). That is, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S1115 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1115 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared in order to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1009), and after setting the initial values of the RAM 223 (S1010), an interrupt Permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S1008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1010, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1010), interrupt permission is set. Then (S1011), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason why the clearing process of S1009 is skipped is that when the process of S1008 is reached from S1004 via the process of S1006, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the process of S1101 was executed last time (S1101), and if 1 millisecond or more has not passed (S1101: No). , S1102 to S1108 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1109. In the processing of S1101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has passed because S1102 to S1108 do not need to be processed in a short period (within 1 millisecond), whereas the fluctuation effect processing of S1109 This is because the command determination processing in step S1110 is preferably performed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1110 in a short period, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S1109 in a short period, the command received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

In the process of S1101, if it is determined that 1 millisecond or more has passed since the process of S1101 was executed last time (S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1102. If the process of S1101 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 27, the process proceeds directly to S1102.

In the processing of S1102, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1103 to S1111 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1106 described later (S1103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

Next, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1105). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the variation effect is not executed or during the "high-speed variation" period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and instead of the frame button operation command, the display control device 114 is displayed. Sets the image change command. By including information about the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image change command, the display control device 114 changes the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to an image corresponding to the stage. A process to change to is performed. In addition, when the advance notice character appears at the start of the variable production, by pressing the frame button 22, the expected value of the big win due to this change is displayed, or by pressing the frame button 22 during the "reach display", the expectation for the big win is displayed. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be changed to a decision button for selecting one ready-to-win effect from a plurality of ready-to-win effects. Note that if the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S1105 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S1105) ends, the lamp editing processing is executed (S1106), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S1107). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1107, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1108), and the process proceeds to S1109. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation effect performed by the third pattern display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S1106 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound editing/output process of S1107 is also synchronized with the time required for the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81. executed in time.

In the process of S1109, in order to display the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variable effect process which is a process for starting the variable effect based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110 to run. The details of this variation effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variable presentation process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1110), and the process proceeds to S1111. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In S1111, counter update processing is executed to update the pending change counter 223c and the scenario counter 223d provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1111). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the pending change counter 223c and the scenario counter 223d, and their counter values are set to their maximum values (both "99" in the first embodiment).
”) are cleared to “0” respectively. Of the counters 223c and 223d updated in this way, as described above, the pending change counter 223c is used for executing the "holding change notice" and selecting the display mode, and the scenario counter 223d is used for the "holding change notice". is used to select the execution timing of

When the process of S1111 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1112). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1112 (S1112: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1114), and the power-off processing is executed (S1115). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S1116), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1112 (S1112: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1113), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1113: No), the process returns to S1101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1113: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.

Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call a pachinko hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S1110). This command determination process (S1110) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. .

In the command determination process (S1110), first, from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read out and analyzed. is received (S1201). Then, when it is determined that a variation pattern command has been received (S1201: Yes), a variation pattern is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1202). The variation pattern extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and based on the variation pattern, a display variation pattern command for notifying the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern is set for the display control device 114 (S1203). , return to the main processing (see FIG. 28).

The display variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (S1102 in FIG. 28). . As a result, the display control device 114 executes processing to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation effect of the variation pattern determined by the sound lamp control device 113 .

On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1201: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S1204). Then, when it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S1203: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1205). The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and based on the stop type, a display stop type command for notifying the stop type of the variable effect is set to the display control device 114 (S1206), and the variable effect is started. The flag 223a is set to ON (S1207), and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

The display stop type command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S1102 in FIG. 28) of the main processing. . The display control device 114 sets a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command when the variable effect to be executed by the display change pattern command set by the processing of S1206 is to be displayed. do.

It should be noted that the stop type command indicates the stop type of the variable effect in which the variation pattern is indicated by the variation pattern command after the main controller 110 transmits the variation pattern command when starting the variable effect. This command is always sent from 110 . By setting the fluctuation start flag 223a to ON by the process of S1206, in the fluctuation production process to be executed later, the fluctuation of the fluctuation production extracted based on the value of each counter C1 or the like included in the pending ball number command. It is determined whether or not the pattern matches the variation pattern of the variation performance extracted from the received variation pattern command. In addition, whether or not the variable effect stop type extracted based on the value of each counter C1 etc. previously included in the pending ball number command matches the variable effect stop type extracted from the received stop type command judgment is made. As a result of those determinations, in one variation production, if the variation pattern based on the number of pending balls command and the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command do not match, or the stop type and stop type command based on the number of pending balls command If it does not match the stop type based on the above, it is determined that some abnormality (for example, command reception abnormality due to noise) has occurred, an error command for display indicating the abnormality is generated, and transmitted to the display control device 114 (See FIG. 31).

As a result of the processing of S1204, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S1204: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1208). Then, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S1208: Yes), the pending display setting process is performed (S1209), and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28). In this hold display setting process (S1209), control related to "hold change notice" is performed based on various information (for example, the value of the first hit random number counter C1, etc.) included in the received hold ball number command. The details of this pending display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

As a result of the process of S1208, if it is determined that the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S1208: No), then it is determined whether or not a confirmation command has been received from main controller 110 (S1210). The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variable effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81 . If it is determined that the confirmation command has been received (S1210: Yes), the display confirmation command for notifying the reception of the confirmation command is set to the display control device 114 (S1211), and the main processing (Fig. 28).

The display confirmation command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1002 in FIG. 28). . In the display control device 114, by receiving the confirmation command for display, the variable effect being executed by the third pattern display device 81 is stopped, and the stop type corresponding to the stop type command for display is previously indicated. By displaying the stop pattern, it is determined and displayed.

As a result of the process of S1210, if it is determined that the confirmation command has not been received (S1210: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed. (S1212), the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 28). For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. A command is set to be sent to the device 114 . The demonstration command received from the main controller 110 is set as a display demonstration command by the processing of S1212, and after being temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, the command output processing of the main processing (Fig. 28)) to the display control device 114.

Here, the pending display setting process (S1209) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the pending display setting process (S1209). In this pending display setting process (S1209), first, the value of the pending ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110 included in the received pending ball number command (that is, the pending variable effect pending ball number) is extracted, This is stored in the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1301).

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), so each time there is a starting winning, the process of S1301 , the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, even if the value of the sub pending ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the pending ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the voice ramp control device 113 The value of the sub-retained ball number counter 223b can be corrected to match the value of the retained ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110.

Next, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 included in the received pending ball number command is extracted, and the pending information in the pending information storage area 223e. Of the first to fourth storage areas (see FIG. 19), it stores in the area corresponding to the number of reserved balls extracted from the number of reserved balls command by the processing of S1301 (S1302). That is, when the number of held balls is X (1≤X≤4), each value of the extracted first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1. are stored in the first winning random number counter storage area 223e1, the first winning type counter storage area 223e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3, and the variation type counter storage area 223e4 of the X-th area for storing pending information.

The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the pending ball number command are obtained from the counter buffer in the main controller 110 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). , is the value stored in the X-th reserved area of the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main controller 110 when the number of reserved balls included in the reserved ball number command is X. In other words, the same information (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) as in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main controller 110 is stored in the reserved information storage area 223e of the sound ramp controller 113. FIG. The sound lamp control device 113 can execute pre-reading processing by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold information storage area 223e. That is, when the suspended variable performance is executed, the result of the variable performance (whether it will be a big hit, what the variable time will be, etc.) is determined before the variable performance is executed, The sound lamp control device 113 performs control such as determining execution of various effects, determining whether or not to execute the "holding change notice" and display mode, and determining the execution (start) timing of the "holding change notice". can be run

Next, in the processing of S1303, it is determined whether or not the execution lottery for "holding change notice" has been won based on various information indicated by the number of holding balls command received this time (S1303). As described above, the execution lottery for the "suspension change notice" is based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the X-th area storing the suspension information. Appropriateness of the variable performance indicated by the command and the mode of performance are extracted. Then, based on the extracted success/failure and presentation mode, the value of the pending change counter 223c at that time and the pending change table 222e (see FIG. 16) are referred to, and whether or not the "holding change notice" is executed and displayed. determine the mode.

As a result of the process of S1303, if the execution lottery for "hold change notice" is won (S1303: Yes), a hold indicating the display mode (for example, "blue" etc.) that is the result of the "hold change notice" execution lottery The change information is stored in the pending change information storage area 223e5 of the X-th pending information storage area (S1304). As a result, whether or not to execute the "hold change notice" can be stored for each X-th area storing the hold information.

Next, in the process of S1304, the value of the scenario counter 223d at that time is determined in order to determine the execution timing of the "suspended change notice", that is, the display timing at which the "suspended change notice" is reflected in the executed symbols or the suspended symbols. , and the scenario table 222f to determine the execution timing of the "suspension change notice", and store the scenario data indicating the determined execution timing in the scenario data storage area 223e6 of the suspension information storage area X ( S1305). As a result, the execution timing of the "hold change notice" can be stored for each X-th area storing the hold information.

Next, in the processing of S1306, it is determined whether or not the variable effect indicated by the command for the number of pending balls received this time includes a variable element of "super reach or more" (S1306). As described above, in the "super reach" variable element, the "special reach" variable element, or the "special variable" variable element, the cockpit display area Db of the third pattern display device 81 is executed during execution of the variable element. The symbols and reserved symbols are erased. Therefore, if it is a variable production that includes the variable element of "Super Reach", the variable element of "Special Reach", or the variable element of "Special Variation", "After Suspension Elimination" is included as the execution timing of "Suspend Change Notice" It is executable even if Therefore, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the X-th area storing the pending information, whether or not the variation element of "super reach or higher" is included in the variation effect. determine.

As a result of the processing of S1306, if the variable effect includes a variable element of "super reach or higher" (S1306: Yes), the pending deletion indicating that the execution pattern and the suspended pattern in the cockpit display area Db are deleted by the variable effect. The information is stored in the pending deletion information storage area 223e7 of the X-th pending information storage area (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1309. On the other hand, if it is a variable effect that does not include a variable element of "super reach or higher" (S1306: No), the executed symbols and reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db are not erased in the variable effect, so the reserved information storage area X. Data (hereinafter referred to as "null data") indicating that no information is stored (blank) is stored in the pending deletion information storage area 223e7 (S1308), and the process proceeds to S1309. In the processing of S1308, by writing Null data to the pending deletion information storage area 223e7, for example, redundant use of the pending deletion information related to the "pending change notice" stored in the pending information storage area X before writing is prevented. be able to.

In the processing of S1309, it is determined whether or not the variation element of "re-variation" is included in the variation effect indicated by the command for the number of pending balls received this time (S1309). If "after deletion of suspension" is selected as the execution timing of "suspension change notice", even if it is a variable effect in which the cockpit display area Db is deleted due to the variable element of "super reach", etc., the "super If there is no effect after the variable elements of "reach", there is no point in performing "hold change notice" after "hold erasure".

Specifically, for example, even if the execution symbol "suspension change notice" is executed after the variable element of "super reach" is executed and the "big win display" is confirmed, the player is not given any interest. Rather, the meaningless production will make you lose interest. Also, for example, even if the execution symbol "hold change notice" is executed after the "super reach" variable element is executed and the "losing display" is confirmed, the "losing display" is confirmed as it is, and the next fluctuation effect is started, the discrepancies in the presentation give the player a sense of distrust in the game. Therefore, determine whether there is a variable element of "re-variation" that is a variable element that is executed after the variable element of "super reach", etc., and execute "pending change notice" after "pending deletion" Check if it is possible.

As a result of the processing of S1309, if the variation effect includes "re-variation" (S1309: Yes), re-variation information indicating that the variable element of "re-variation" is performed in the variation effect is stored in the Xth The information is stored in the area re-change information storage area 223e8 (S1310), and the process proceeds to S1313. On the other hand, if the variation effect does not include the variable element of "re-variation" (S1309: No), Null data is stored in the re-variation information storage area 223e8 of the X-th area of the reserved information (S1311), and the process proceeds to S1313. Transition. Through the processing of S1307 and S1310, it can be recognized that the "suspended change notice" can be executed at the execution timing of "after pending erasure". Also, in the process of S1311, by writing Null data to the re-change information storage area 223e8, it is possible to prevent duplicate use of the re-change information stored in the pending information storage area X before writing, for example.

In addition, in the process of S1303, if the execution lottery for the "hold change notice" is not won (S1303: No), the "hold change notice" is not executed. Null data is stored in each of the pending change information storage area 223e5, the scenario data storage area 223e6, the pending deletion information storage area 223e7, and the re-change information storage area 223e8 of the information storage area X (S1312), and the process proceeds to S1313. In the process of S1312, by writing Null data into each of the storage areas 223e5 to 223e8, it is possible to prevent, for example, redundant use of the information related to the "holding change notice" stored in the pending information storage area X before writing. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a discrepancy in the production (for example, the “holding change notice” is “rainbow” despite the variable production of the “loss display”).

In the process of S1313, a display pending ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the sub pending ball number counter 223b updated by the process of S1301 is set (S1313), and the process proceeds to S1314. In the processing of S1314, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is the time of displaying the holding pattern (acquired holding change timing) in the variable effect indicated by the number of holding balls command received this time (S1314). This determination is made when the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223e6 of the X-th area for storing the pending information is the same as the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b, and the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is a pending pattern. is displayed.

As a result of the determination in S1314, if the execution timing of the "suspended change notice" is when the reserved pattern is displayed (S1314: Yes), the display mode of the determined "suspended change notice" is performed at the timing when the reserved pattern is displayed. A change command for display lighting pending change is set for notifying the display control device 114 of this (S1315), and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28). On the other hand, if the execution timing of the "suspended change notice" is not the time when the suspended symbol is displayed (S1314: No), the process of S1315 is skipped and the process returns to the main process.

The display pending ball number command and the display lighting pending change command set in S1313 and S1315 are temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and are then processed for command output in the main process (S1102 in FIG. 28). is transmitted to the display control device 114 by. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the command for the number of reserved balls for display executes processing to display the number of reserved balls symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, the display control device 114 that has received the display lighting pending change command performs display control so as to display the pending pattern in the display mode of the determined "holding change notice" when displaying the pending pattern. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the variation effect processing (S1109) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing this variation effect processing (S1109).

This variable production process (S1109) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28), and in order to confirm whether or not to normally display the variable production in the third symbol display device 81, first, the reservation information storage area Various information stored in the pending information storage first area 223e is shifted to the execution information storage area 223f, and information stored in the pending information storage second to fourth areas is shifted to the pending information storage first to third areas. process. In addition, when the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main controller 110 do not match the contents (information) stored in the execution information storage area 223f, an error command for display is generated, and this command is displayed and controlled. Processing is performed to set for transmission to the device 114 . Furthermore, when it is the execution timing of the "holding change notice" in the execution pattern and the holding pattern, to generate various commands regarding each execution timing of the "holding change notice" and to transmit these commands to the display control device 114 Perform processing to set to .

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command from the sound lamp control device 113, the display processing regarding the variation effect based on the command is performed. It does not start immediately, but waits for a predetermined time (for example, 1 millisecond) to see if a command indicating a change in the variable effect, such as the error command for display described above, is transmitted. When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command from the audio lamp control device 113 and immediately executes the display processing related to the variation effect based on the command, the audio lamp control device 113 If the error command for display is transmitted after that, the display processing related to the above-mentioned variation effect must be stopped, and the display corresponding to the error based on the error command for display (for example, default variation) must be replaced. Therefore, even if the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, the display control device 114 does not immediately execute the display processing related to the variation effect based on the command, and displays from the sound lamp control device 113. Execution of the display processing relating to the variation effect based on the command is waited for a predetermined time during which there is a possibility that the error command for the command will be transmitted. By configuring in this way, the display control device 114 can prevent the occurrence of a processing burden caused by executing useless processing in the display processing related to the variable effect.

In the first embodiment, 1 millisecond was exemplified as the predetermined time during which the display control device 114 may receive the display error command from the audio lamp control device 113. Any method may be used as long as the display processing in 1 is not delayed. Specifically, for example, the display control device 114 is configured to perform display processing and drawing processing for one frame every 20 milliseconds. After the command determination process (see FIG. 29) is executed, the variation effect process (see FIG. 31) is executed within several milliseconds. Therefore, after transmitting the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command based on the reception of the variation pattern command and the stop type command, the sound lamp control device 113 generates and transmits the display error command in the variation effect process. It is possible to reliably generate and transmit an error command for display if there is at least a few milliseconds of time. Therefore, after receiving the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, the display control device 114 waits for at least the above several milliseconds, and if there is a display error command, it is configured to be able to receive it. there is Therefore, by waiting for a time shorter than the time required for display processing and drawing processing for one frame (20 milliseconds), it is possible to execute display processing related to fluctuation effects without delay, so the third symbol display device It is possible to prevent an event in which the display processing of the variable effect to 81 is clearly delayed.

In the fluctuation effect process (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1401). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is not on (that is, it is off) (S1401: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this fluctuation effect processing. and return to the main process (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is on (S1401: Yes), since both the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received, the fluctuation start flag 223a is turned off to start the fluctuation effect. (S1402), next, the data contained in the pending information storage first area provided in the pending information storage area 223e is shifted to the execution information storage area 223f (S1403), and further, the pending data stored in the pending information storage area 223e The data contained in the second to fourth information storage areas are shifted to the first to third hold information storage areas (S1404), and the process proceeds to S1405.

That is, in this case, the suspended variable performance is reduced by one, and the execution of the variable performance suspended first in terms of time is started. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e8 of one area and various information (data) are stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f8 of the execution information storage area 223f corresponding to the variable effect being executed. move to In addition, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e8 of the pending information storage second area and various information (data) are stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e8 of the pending information storage first area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and various information (data) stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e8 of the third pending information storage area are stored in the respective storage areas 223e1 to 223e8 of the second pending information storage area. , the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e8 of the fourth pending information storage area and various information (data) are stored in the respective storage areas 223e1 to 223e1 of the third pending information storage area. 223e8.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223f stores the same values as the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c of the main controller 110. The same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main controller 110 are stored in the 4 areas.

Next, in the process of S1405, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223f, the variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed from now on is obtained (S1405). Then, the variation pattern stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the variation pattern in the variation performance extracted from the variation pattern command stored in the RAM 223 in the processing of S1202 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 29) match. It is determined whether or not there is an address (S1406). If the information on the variable performance indicated by the variation pattern command received this time is different from the information on the variable performance previously stored in the execution information storage area 223f (reserved information storage area 223e), some abnormality (noise, etc.) ), it is not possible to execute a normal variation effect (variation pattern). Therefore, by this determination process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined, and it is confirmed whether or not a normal variation effect can be executed.

As a result of the determination of S1406, if it is determined that the variation pattern stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the variation pattern stored in the RAM 223 do not match (S1406: No), some abnormality related to the variation performance to be executed has occurred, a display error command for notifying the display control device 114 of the abnormality is generated and set (S1407), and the process proceeds to S1408.

The display error command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 28). . By receiving this display error command, the display control device 114 recognizes that some abnormality has occurred in relation to the variation effect, and switches the third symbol display device 81 to display corresponding to the error (for example, default variation). , to start controlling the display of that error indication.

On the other hand, in the process of S1406, if it is determined that the variation pattern stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the variation pattern stored in the RAM 223 match (S1406: Yes), there is no abnormality regarding the variation performance to be executed. Since it has not occurred, the process of S1407 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1408.

Next, in the process of S1408, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223f, the stop type of the variable effect to be executed from now on is obtained (S1408). Then, the stop type stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command stored in the RAM 223 in the process of S1205 of the command determination process (see FIG. 29) match. It is determined whether or not there is an address (S1409). If the information on the variable performance indicated by the stop type command received this time is different from the information on the variable performance stored in the execution information storage area 223f (holding information storage area 223e) before that, some abnormality (such as noise ), the normal variable effect (stop type) cannot be executed. Therefore, by this determination process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined, and it is confirmed whether or not a normal variation effect can be executed.

As a result of the determination in S1409, if it is determined that the stop type stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the stop type stored in the RAM 223 do not match (S1409: No), some abnormality related to the variable performance to be executed has occurred, a display error command for notifying the display control device 114 of the abnormality is generated and set (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411.

In the first embodiment, when the variation pattern based on the value stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command do not match, an error command for display is generated and transmitted, and the execution information When the stop type based on the value stored in the storage area 223f and the stop type indicated by the stop type command do not match, a display error command is generated and transmitted, and a maximum of 2 display error commands are transmitted. is configured to Alternatively, if the variation pattern based on the value stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command do not match, or stop based on the value stored in the execution information storage area 223f If the type and the stop type indicated by the stop type command do not match, if either one does not match, one error command for display may be transmitted. With this configuration, the number of command transmissions can be reduced, so the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be reduced.

The display error command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 28). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display error command, it recognizes that some abnormality has occurred regarding the variation effect, switches the third symbol display device 81 to error display (for example, default variation), and displays the error Starts display control of the display.

On the other hand, in the process of S1409, if it is determined that the stop type stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the stop type stored in the RAM 223 match (S1409: Yes), there is no abnormality in the variable performance to be executed. Since it has not occurred, the process of S1410 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1411.

After receiving the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, the display control device 114 waits for a predetermined time to determine whether or not the display error command is received, and then starts the variation effect. good too. By configuring in this way, the error display can be performed immediately without preparation for display control (development processing of character patterns, etc.) related to the variable effect, so the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

Next, in the process of S1411, the value of the sub-retained ball number counter 223b is adjusted in accordance with the consumption of the held ball (that is, setting of the variable production corresponding to the held ball) along with the start of the variable production. is reduced by 1 (S1411), and a display pending ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the pending ball number indicated by the updated value of the sub pending ball number counter 223b is set (S1412), and the process to S1413.

Next, in the process of S1413, it is determined whether or not it is the execution timing for displaying the "holding change notice" in the execution symbols displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 (S1413). This determination is made by confirming the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 provided in the execution information storage area 223f. ”, “after reach”, or “after pending deletion” (hereinafter abbreviated as “at start” to “after pending deletion”).

As a result of the determination in S1413, the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f indicates that the number of pending balls is "0" and indicates any of "at the start" to "after pending deletion". If it is data (S1413: Yes), an execution symbol change process is performed (S1414) in order to execute the "suspension change notice" in the execution symbol, and the process proceeds to S1415.

On the other hand, in the process of S1413, the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f is the number of pending balls "0" and any one of "at the start" to "after pending deletion". If it is not data to indicate (S1413: No), the process of S1414 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1415. The executed symbol change processing of S1414 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, in the processing of S1415, it is determined whether or not it is the execution timing for displaying the "holding change notice" in the reserved symbols displayed in the first to third reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db3 (S1415). This determination is made for each scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223e6 provided in the first to third pending information storage areas of the pending information storage area 223e. That is, whether each scenario data in each scenario data storage area 223e6 is the execution timing of "holding change notice" in the shifted holding symbol display areas Db1 to Db3 (for example, it is shifted to the holding information storage first area and stored It is determined whether or not the scenario data stored in the stored scenario data storage area 223e6 is data indicating the number of held balls "1".

As a result of the processing of S1415, if there are the first to third pending information storage areas storing the scenario data corresponding to the execution timing (S1415: Yes), the corresponding pending pattern is displayed to be stored in the pending change information storage area 223e5. In order to execute "suspension change notice" in the mode, set a display shift hold change command including information on the corresponding hold pattern toward the display control device 114 (S1416), main processing (see FIG. 28) back to

Specifically, if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223e6 of the first pending information storage area is data indicating the pending number "1", the pending change information storage area 223e5 of the first pending information storage area generates and sets a display-shift hold change command for notifying execution of "hold change notice" in the display mode stored in . Also, if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223e6 of the second pending information storage area is data indicating the pending number "2", it is stored in the pending change information storage area 223e5 of the second pending information storage area. Generate and set a hold change command for shift display for notifying that "hold change notice" is to be executed in the display mode shown in FIG. Furthermore, if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223e6 of the third pending information storage area is data indicating the pending number "3", it is stored in the pending change information storage area 223e5 of the third pending information storage area. Generate and set a hold change command for shift display for notifying that "hold change notice" is to be executed in the display mode shown in FIG.

The display shift hold change command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and sent to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 28). sent. The display control device 114 that has received the hold change command during shift for display performs display control so as to display the corresponding hold design in the display mode of the determined "hold change notice" when shift-displaying the hold design. .

On the other hand, in the processing of S1415, if scenario data corresponding to the execution timing is not stored in each of the scenario data storage areas 223e6 of the first to third pending information storage areas of the pending information storage area 223e (S1415: No), Skip the processing of S1416 and return to the main processing (see FIG. 28).

In this way, at the time of shift display of the executed symbols and the reserved symbols associated with the start of the execution of the variable effect, the scenario data stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the reserved information storage area 223e are confirmed, and the "pending change notice" is displayed. When there is scenario data corresponding to the execution timing, it is possible to make the "holding change notice" appear at the time of shift display of the holding symbols and the execution symbols. As a result, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the "holding change notice" appears and enhance the interest of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 32, the executed symbol change process (S1414) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the executed symbol change process (S1414).

This executed symbol change process (S1414) is executed in the variation effect process (see FIG. 31) executed in the main process (see FIG. 28), and is displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0 of the third symbol display device 81. This is done to execute the "holding change notice" in the execution pattern. In this executed symbol change process, first, the timing of changing the executed symbols, that is, the execution timing of displaying the "suspended change notice" in the executed symbols is discriminated (S1501). This determination is made by confirming the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f.

As a result of the determination in S1501, if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f is data indicating that the number of pending balls is "0" and indicates "at the start" (S1501: "Start time"), at the timing of displaying (shifting) the execution symbol in the execution symbol display area Db0, to the display control device 114 to execute the "suspension change notice" in the display mode stored in the suspension change information storage area 223f5. A change command at the start of display is set toward the player (S1502), the execution symbol change process is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 31).

The display start time change command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 28). be done. The display control device 114 that has received the change command at the start of display displays the executed symbols in the determined display mode of "holding change notice" when shift-displaying the executed symbols in the executed symbol display area Db0. control.

As a result of the determination in S1501, if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f is data indicating that the number of pending balls is "0" and "before reach" (S1501: "reach Before”), at the timing before the “reach display” of the variable effect appears (for example, when the left symbol column Z1 is stopped during the variable element of “high speed variation” or during the variable element of “low speed variation”) In order to execute the "suspension change notice" in the display mode stored in the suspension change information storage area 223f5 of the execution information storage area 223f, a pre-reach change command for display is set to the display control device 114 (S1503). , returns to the variable effect processing (see FIG. 31).

The pre-reach change command for display set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 28). be done. The display control device 114, which has received the before-ready-for-display change command, changes the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 to the timing before the "ready-to-reach display" of the variable effect appears (for example, "high-speed fluctuation ”, or when the left symbol column Z1 stops during the variable element of “low speed variation”, etc.), the execution symbol is changed to the display mode of the determined “holding change notice” (for example, “normal (white )” to “blue”).

As a result of the determination in S1501, if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f is data indicating that the number of pending balls is "0" and "after reach" (S1501: "reach After"), in order to confirm whether it is possible to execute the "hold change notice" at the timing after the "reach display" of the variable production appears (for example, during the execution of the variable element of "normal reach"), the variable production , it is determined whether or not "ready-to-reach display" appears (S1504). This determination is performed by determining the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command stored in the RAM 223 in the processing of S1202 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 29).

As a result of the determination in S1504, if it is determined that the "reach display" appears in the variable effect (S1504: Yes), the timing after the initially set "reach display" of the variable effect appears (for example, " During the execution of variable elements of "Normal Reach", etc.), the "suspended change notice" can be executed. Therefore, in order to execute the "suspended change notice" in the display mode stored in the pending change information storage area 223f5 of the execution information storage area 223f, a post-reach change command for display is set to the display control device 114 (S1505). ), and returns to the variable effect processing (see FIG. 31).

The post-reach change command for display set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 28). be done. The display control device 114 that has received the after-read-for-display change command changes the timing (during appearance) of the "ready-to-win display" of the variable effect to the execution symbols displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0. For example, during the execution of variable elements of "normal reach"), display control to change the execution pattern to the display mode of the determined "pending change notice" (for example, from "normal (white)" to "blue") conduct.

On the other hand, in the process of S1504, if it is determined that the "reach display" does not appear in the variable effect (S1504: No), the "hold change notice" is changed to " Unable to execute after leech. Therefore, in order to change the “holding change notice” set to “after reaching” to “before reaching” which is an executable timing, the process proceeds to S1503, and the Reach front change command is set (S1503), and it returns to fluctuation production processing (refer to Figure 31).

By configuring in this way, even if it is a variable effect that cannot execute the initially set "after reach" "hold change notice", change to the executable "before reach" execution timing and "hold change notice" ” can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of cases where the ``holding change notice'' is not executed even though the lottery for executing the ``holding change notice'' is won, so that the execution rate of the ``holding change notice'' can be increased and the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, even if the lottery process of the "holding change notice" and the lottery process of the variable effect are performed by different processes, it is possible to adjust so that there is no discrepancy between the contents of the mutual effect. Therefore, each lottery process is performed by a program of a different system, so that the design of each program can be facilitated, and a consistent effect can be executed.

As a result of the determination in S1501, if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f is data indicating that the number of pending balls is "0" and "after pending deletion" (S1501: " After suspension deletion"), this determination is based on the processing of S1309 of the suspension display setting process (see FIG. 30), and the determination of the re-change information stored in the re-change information storage area 223f8 of the execution information storage area 223f. conduct.

As a result of the determination in S1506, if the re-change information is stored in the re-change information storage area 223f8 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1506: Yes), the change in which "re-change" is executed after "reach display" Since it is an effect, next, at the timing after the cockpit display area Db is erased in the variable effect (for example, after executing the variable element of "Super Reach" or after executing the variable element of "Special Reach") Determine whether or not the cockpit display area Db is erased by executing the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach" in the variable effect ( S1507). This determination is performed by determining the pending deletion information stored in the pending deletion information storage area 223f7 of the execution information storage area 223f in the processing of S1307 of the pending display setting processing (see FIG. 30).

As a result of the determination in S1507, if the pending deletion information is stored in the pending deletion information storage area 223f7 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1507: Yes), the "suspended change notice" can be executed "after pending deletion". Therefore, in order to execute the "suspended change notice" in the display mode stored in the pending change information storage area 223f5 of the execution information storage area 223f, a post-erase change command for display is set to the display control device 114 ( S1508), and returns to the variation effect processing (see FIG. 31).

The post-erase change command for display set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 28). be done. The display control device 114 that has received the post-delete change command for display has a variable element of "super reach" or a variable element of "special reach" of the variable effect with respect to the executed symbols displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0. After the end and before the execution of the variable element of "re-variation", the execution pattern is changed to the display mode of the determined "pending change notice" (for example, from "normal (white)" to "blue" ) is displayed.

By configuring in this way, when the "reserved change notice" is performed in the reserved symbols and the executed symbols indicating the variable effect that generates the big win, the executed symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db due to the variable element of "super reach" etc. is erased, and at the timing when the variable element of the "super reach" ends and the execution pattern of the execution pattern display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed, the "suspension change notice" appears. (execution) configure to enable. As a result, it is possible to directly change and notify the notice object (changeable object; in the first embodiment, the execution pattern) which is always visible, or to make the notice object appear anew. Compared to the case of notifying, it is possible to casually change the display mode of the notice object while making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change of the notice object. By temporarily hiding the announcement object and then casually changing it, the player is first given a sense of discomfort, and then the player is made to recognize that the source of the sense of discomfort is directly linked to the game value (for example, a big win). As a result, it is possible to diversify the presentation while providing the player with an unexpected presentation, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the display of the cockpit display area Db, and the executed symbols and reserved symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db, are always displayed except during the execution of the variable element of "super reach or higher", so that the player can see the current variation. It is intended to inform the execution suggestion of the production and the presence or absence of the variable production during standby. In addition, even if the cockpit display area is erased due to the execution of the "super reach or higher" variable element, it is configured to be immediately redisplayed as soon as the "super reach or higher" variable element ends. Therefore, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the re-display. That is, the player recognizes that the executed symbols and the suspended symbols in the cockpit display area Db should be displayed originally as the display contents of the third symbol display device 81, and this is an exceptional event ("super reach or higher"). ”), it will immediately return to its original form when the exceptional event ends. In the first embodiment, at the timing of returning to its original form, by casually changing the display mode of the execution pattern from before it is erased, the change is intentionally made difficult to notice, and when the change is noticed, it is unexpected. Surprise is increased by sex. By constructing in this manner, it is possible to diversify the presentation while providing the player with an unexpected presentation, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

In addition, by allocating the execution timing of the "suspension change notice" to the second half of the variable production ("after reach" or "after deletion of the suspension"), the expectation of the jackpot increases even in the second half of the variable production. A player can play a game while anticipating the occurrence (appearance) of the change notice. Therefore, the player can play the game while anticipating a big win until the second half of the variable presentation, so that the player can be entertained for a long period of time.

On the other hand, in the process of S1506, if it is determined that the re-variation information is not stored in the re-variation information storage area 223f8 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1506: No), the variation element of "re-variation" in the variation effect , so there is no point in performing a "pending change notice" after "pending erase". Specifically, for example, even if the execution symbol "pending change notice" is executed after the "super reach" variable element is executed and the "jackpot display" is confirmed, after the "super reach" variable element Since no performance is generated, the player cannot be given any interest, but rather, the meaningless performance will arouse the interest of the player. Also, for example, even if the execution symbol "hold change notice" is executed after the "super reach" variable element is executed and the "losing display" is confirmed, the "losing display" is confirmed as it is, and the next fluctuation effect is started, the discrepancies in the presentation give the player a sense of distrust in the game.

Further, in the process of S1507, when it is determined that the pending deletion information is not stored in the pending deletion information storage area 223f7 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1507: No), the cockpit display area Db is erased in the variable effect. Since the production is not performed, it is not possible to execute the "holding change notice" after "holding erasure".

Therefore, if it is determined in S1506 that the re-change information is not stored in the re-change information storage area 223f8 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1506: No), or in the process of S1507, if the execution information storage area 223f If it is determined that the pending deletion information is not stored in the pending deletion information storage area 223f7 (S1507: No), the "holding change notice" cannot be executed "after pending deletion", so the "holding change notice" is executed. In order to confirm the possible timing, the process proceeds to S1504.

By configuring in this way, even if it is a variable effect that cannot execute the "hold change notice" of the initially set "after hold erasure", at the executable execution timing ("after reach" or "before reach") It can be changed to execute a "pending change notice". Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of cases where the ``holding change notice'' is not executed even though the lottery for executing the ``holding change notice'' is won, and the execution rate of the ``holding change notice'' can be increased, thereby improving the amusement of the game. In addition, even if the lottery process of the "holding change notice" and the lottery process of the variable effect are performed by different processes, it is possible to adjust so that there is no discrepancy between the contents of the mutual effect. Therefore, by performing each lottery process with a program of a different system, it is possible to facilitate the design of each program and to execute a consistent effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, an example of execution of "suspended change notice" after "suspended deletion" will be described. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a situation in which a "suspended change notice" after "suspended erasure" is performed in the variable effect executed by the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Specifically, FIG. 33(a) is a diagram showing a state just before the "reach display" appears in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. FIG. 33(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub-display area Ds is erased from the state of FIG. 33(a) and the "normal reach" variable element is executed in the main display area Dm. FIG. 33(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the cockpit display area Db is erased from the state of FIG. 33(b) and the "super reach" variable element is executed in the main display area Dm. FIG. 33(d) is a diagram showing a state in which an effect is being executed to suggest that a "loss display" will appear in the variable element of "super reach" from the state of FIG. 33(c). FIG. 33(e) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed from the state of FIG. be. FIG. 33(f) is a diagram showing a state just before the "big win display" appears after the "re-fluctuation" is executed from the state of FIG. 33(e). In addition, in FIGS. 33(a) to 33(f), the display mode of the third pattern is omitted.

In FIG. 33(a), in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol "7" is stop-displayed, and in the right display area Dm3, the third symbol "7" is stop-displayed. In addition, in the middle display area Dm2, the third pattern is still unrecognizably "high-speed fluctuating". Therefore, it is a state just before (immediately before) the appearance of the so-called "ready-to-reach display" by the "7" symbol.

In the sub-display area Ds, the character pattern is displayed in the small central area Ds2 in a forewarning mode suggesting that the "ready-to-reach display" will appear. Specifically, the character pattern displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner as if the player is cheering. A predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, and no character design or the like is displayed.

Further, in the cockpit display area Db, an executed symbol is displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, and reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Therefore, the execution symbol indicates that the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of pending balls of the variable effect is four.

In FIG. 33(b), in the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 33(a), the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stop-displayed and the "reach display" by the "7" symbol is displayed. is determined, and the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. In this “normal reach” variable, the main display area Dm is displayed as if it were enlarged. Specifically, in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3, the "7" symbol that is being stopped is displayed in an enlarged manner, and in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is displayed at a low speed so that it can be visually recognized. , scrolled at low speed from "5" pattern to "6" pattern).

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is erased as the main display area Dm expands due to the occurrence of the "normal reach" variable, and the sub-display area Ds becomes invisible. This is because, as described above, the secondary display area Ds has a function of suggesting whether or not the "ready-to-win display" will occur mainly in the variable effect in the main display area Dm. is generated, the significance of the existence of the sub-display area Ds is diminished. Further, when the "ready-to-win display" occurs in the main display area Dm, the player pays attention to whether the result of the "ready-to-win display" is the "big win display" or the "losing display". There is, and the attention to the display contents of the sub-display area Ds suggesting the occurrence of the "ready-to-reach display" fades away. Therefore, when the "ready-to-win display" occurs in the main display area Dm, the display content of the main display area Dm is enlarged so that the player can easily recognize the contents of the "ready-to-win display" that the player focuses on. is displayed, and the sub-display area Ds is erased along with the enlargement.

In the state of FIG. 33(b), in the cockpit display area Db, similar to the display state of FIG. Reserved symbols are displayed in the areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Therefore, as in FIG. 33(a), the execution symbol indicates that the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of suspended balls in the variable effect is four. showing.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the display in the cockpit display area Db is not erased and is continuously displayed during the "normal reach" variable element. This is because the "normal reach" variable elements are often lost in the jackpot lottery in the variable performance of only the "normal reach" variable elements, and there is a high possibility that the "losing display" will appear. Then, when the variable element of "normal reach" becomes "losing display", the next variable effect is immediately started, so it is necessary to suggest to the player whether or not the next variable effect is pending. be. Therefore, the display of the cockpit display area Db is maintained (continuously displayed) during the execution of the variable elements of the "normal reach", and is configured to suggest to the player how many pending balls of the variable effect exist. ing.

In addition, since the cockpit display area Db is smaller than the sub-display area Ds, even if it continues to be displayed during the execution of the "normal reach" variable element, the performance of the "normal reach" variable element is not hindered. Therefore, even if the cockpit display area Db is continuously displayed during the execution of the "normal reach" variable element, there is no actual harm.

Furthermore, the pending symbols and the execution symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db can execute the above-described "suspension change notice", and the "suspension change notice " is configured to take over (inherit) and display the display mode of the reserved pattern changed by ". That is, it is configured to be able to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the big hit of the variable effect being executed by the display mode of the executed symbols. Therefore, by having the player confirm the display mode of the execution pattern during the execution of the variable element of "normal reach", the variable element of "normal reach" during execution develops into the variable element of "super reach" and wins big. Whether or not the game is to be played can be predicted by the player, and the interest based on the prediction is given.

FIG. 33(c) shows a state in which the variable element of "super reach" is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 33(b). In the "super reach" variable element, the "7" symbol displayed in the "normal reach" variable element is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁

In addition, in FIG. 33(c), a "battle effect" in which a plurality of character patterns compete for victory or defeat using almost the entire display screen of the third pattern display device 81 ("competition effect" as a variable element of "special reach"). is displayed. In this "battle effect", an effect (in the first embodiment, kickboxing) is executed in which the character pattern on the player side (for example, the character pattern on the left side) and the character pattern on the enemy side (for example, the character pattern on the right side) fight. . In the "battle presentation", if the character pattern on the player side wins, a big win is achieved, and the "big win display" appears as a display result of the variable element of the "super reach". On the other hand, in the "battle effect", if the character pattern of the enemy side wins, it is set to be a loss, and a "loss display" appears as a display result of the variable element of the "super reach".

Further, as shown in FIG. 33(c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the cockpit display area Db is erased during the execution of the "super reach" variable element, and instead, the third symbol display is performed. A number pattern (“4” in the first embodiment) indicating the number of pending balls in the variable effect is newly displayed on the upper left of the display area of the device 81 .

In the variable performance being executed, if the variable element of "Super Reach", which has a higher expectation for a big hit than the variable element of "Normal Reach", occurs, the player will be able to determine the number of pending (waiting) variable performances. Also, we are paying attention to whether the variable effect being executed will be "big win display" or "losing display". For this reason, attention is not focused on the reserved design indicating the number of reserved balls in the variable production. Rather, if the reserved symbols are displayed in the cockpit display area Db during the execution of the "super reach" variable element, the player cannot concentrate on the effect of the "super reach" variable element. In some cases, the user may feel annoyed by the display of reserved symbols.

Further, the reserved symbols displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4 of the cockpit display area Db are not directly related to the variable effect being executed. Furthermore, the pending symbols displayed in the first to fourth pending symbol display areas Db1 to Db4 are processed in a different system from the display control of the variable effect being executed (in the voice lamp control device 113, pending display setting processing (Fig. 30))). During the execution of the variable element of "Super Reach", various additional effects are performed for many sprites by making various character patterns appear and displaying many effects on each character pattern. Therefore, the processing load of display control is increasing. In such a situation, if display control is performed for a plurality of reserved symbols that are not directly related to the variable effect being executed, the number of sprites of each reserved symbol is related to the display control of the third symbol display device 81 as a whole. The processing load increases, and display abnormalities such as so-called dropped frames may occur.

Furthermore, the execution symbols displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db take over (inherit) the display mode of the pending symbols changed by the "suspension change notice", and the execution symbols are displayed in that display mode. In order to indicate the degree of expectation for the big hit of the variable performance, it has a direct relationship with the variable performance being executed. However, the "suspended change notice" suggests the expected degree of appearance of the "jackpot display" as well as the expected degree of appearance of the "ready-to-win display". Therefore, when "super reach" appears, it is in a state of fulfilling the suggestion of the degree of expectation for the appearance of "reach display" as "suspension change notice". In addition, when the "super reach" appears, by executing the "reach display" with a high jackpot expectation of "super reach", the suggestion of the appearance expectation of the "jackpot display" is given to a certain extent (for example, half ) is satisfied. Furthermore, as described above, when "super reach" appears, the player focuses on the effect content of "super reach", and the interest in the display mode of "holding change notice" in the execution pattern is fading. there is

Therefore, during the execution of "Super Ready-to-Win", the reserved symbols and the executed symbols that attract less attention of the player are erased, and the effect of "Super Ready-to-Win" is mainly executed on the display screen, thereby making the player "Super Ready-to-Win". It is possible to draw attention (concentration) to the production of. In addition, by eliminating the reserved symbols and the executed symbols that attract less attention from the player, the load on the display control can be eliminated in advance, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable with the game, and preventing the dropping of frames and the like. It is possible to prevent display abnormalities from occurring.

In the state shown in FIG. 33(c), the "7" symbol that caused the occurrence of "super reach" is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. there is The effect of "super reach" indicates whether the variable effect being executed is "big hit display" or "losing display", but has a direct relationship with the display mode of the third symbol. Therefore, if only the character pattern in "super reach" is focused while the third pattern is not displayed at all, it will be recognized whether or not the effect is "reach display". There are cases where it is not possible (for example, when it is misunderstood as a "demo screen"). In addition, since the effect of "super reach" is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the player may forget which third pattern caused the "reach display" during the "super reach". be. On the other hand, if the ready-to-win formation pattern is displayed large during the execution of "super reach", the effect of "super reach" becomes difficult to see, and the third pattern hinders the effect of "super reach" itself. There is a risk.

Therefore, during the "super reach", the third pattern that caused the "super reach" is displayed small in the upper left corner of the display area of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加By configuring in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player that the "ready-to-win display" is occurring without interfering with the effect of "super ready-to-win", and to indicate the type of the third symbol that caused the "ready-to-win display". The player can be made to clearly suggest.

In addition, in the state of FIG. 33(c), at the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (below the "ready-to-reach display"), a number symbol indicating the number of pending balls of the variable effect (in the first embodiment, , “4”) are displayed. As described above, the display in the cockpit display area Db is erased during the execution of the "Super Reach", so the player may not be able to recognize the number of suspended variable presentations depending on the display contents of the cockpit display area Db. be.

Therefore, during execution of "Super Reach", instead of erasing the cockpit display area Db, a numerical pattern indicating the number of pending balls in the variable effect is displayed on the upper left of the display area of the third pattern display device 81. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to show the player the number of suspensions of the variable production during the production of the "super reach" without interfering with the production of the "super reach".

In FIG. 33(d), from the state of FIG. 33(c), in the "battle effect" in the "super reach", the player's character design (left character design) changes to the enemy's character design (right character design). A lost state is displayed. Therefore, when the player recognizes the display contents of FIG. 33(d), the player loses the character pattern in the "battle effect" of the "super reach", and the "big win display" is displayed in the "super reach". ” does not appear and “failure display” appears.

Also, in FIG. 33(d), as in FIG. 33(c), the "super reach" is being executed, so the cockpit display area Db is maintained in an erased state.

In FIG. 33(e), from the state of FIG. 33(d), the effect of "super reach" is lost (the enemy's character pattern wins), and "failure display (787)" is displayed in the main display area Dm. appears, and the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are re-displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 . In this state, the character pattern in the central small region Ds2 of the sub-display region Ds and the execution patterns and reserved patterns in the cockpit display region Db are visible again. Note that the character pattern in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is displayed in a disappointing manner due to the appearance of the "missing display". That is, in the main part of the third symbol display device 81, the chance down state is displayed.

In FIG. 33(e), the execution pattern displayed in the cockpit display area Db has changed from the display mode ("white", see FIG. 33(b)) before being erased by the execution of "Super Reach". It is displayed in a display mode (“red”). That is, the "suspended change notice" is performed at the execution timing of "after pending erasure". In other words, in the non-main portion (that is, the non-main portion) of the third symbol display device 81, the state in which the chance is up is displayed. Therefore, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the chance is down in the main part (main display area Dm and sub-display area Ds), and the chance is up in the non-main part (cockpit display area Db). is displayed at the same time.

When the player sees the state of FIG. 33(e) for the first time, the player loses in the fact that the ``failure display (787)'' appears in the main display area Dm and the ``battle effect'' in the ``super reach''. Based on this impression, as predicted at the time of FIG. 33(d), the "big win display" does not appear in this variable effect, and the "loss display" appears, and it is assumed that the "loss display" is confirmed as it is. , the state in which the interest is shifted to the next variable performance. Then, when the player looks at the pending symbols in the cockpit display area Db to focus on the contents of the next variable effect, the "suspended change notice" is performed in the executed symbols in the executed symbol display area Db0 indicating the current variable effect. , recognizes that the execution pattern has changed to "red".

A player who sees this "hold change notice" for the first time "after hold erasure" first notices the difference in the display mode of the execution pattern from before the execution of the "battle effect" of "super ready-to-win". Feel something is wrong. Then, he recognizes that the source of the discomfort is the "red" execution symbol. Then, it examines when the "reservation change notice" of the "red" execution pattern was made based on its own memory. As a result of examination, it is understood that the "pending change notice" was not performed before the execution of the "super reach", but was performed after the "super reach" was finished. At this moment, the player expects that some event will occur due to the "red" execution symbol in the variable performance being executed.

FIG. 33(f) shows a state in which "re-fluctuation" is being performed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 33(e). In this "re-fluctuation", the main display area Dm is enlarged and displayed, the sub-display area Ds is erased, and "787" and the "failed display", which had been stopped and displayed in each of the display areas Dm1 to Dm3, are again changed. , and finally stopped at "777", which is the "jackpot display". The player is surprised at the occurrence of the "re-fluctuation" and, as guessed at the stage of FIG. You can get a sense of happiness and satisfaction from the appearance of

In addition, a player who has once experienced the "reservation change notice" after "reservation deletion" will not be able to perform the "super reach" from the next time even if the "loss display" appears in the "super reach". Also, it is confirmed whether or not the executed symbols have been changed in the executed symbol display area Db0 of the re-displayed cockpit display area Db. Therefore, even after the execution of "Super Reach", the interest of confirming the display mode of the execution pattern that is redisplayed is born, and it is expected that the "jackpot display" will appear until the variable effect is confirmed and displayed. You can play while playing. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be maintained until the variable effect is definitely displayed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db executes the "suspension change notice" after "suspension deletion". First, an effect (for example, "super reach") for erasing the cockpit display area Db is performed. Then, at the timing of re-displaying the cockpit display area Db after execution of the effect, and at the timing of re-displaying the execution symbol in the execution symbol display area Db0, the "suspension change notice" is executed. After that, when the ``pending change notice'' is executed at the time of re-display, the ``re-fluctuation'' in which the ``loss display'' changes to the ``jackpot display'' is performed. By configuring in this way, the player is surprised at the fact that a big win is given in the variable performance that was initially predicted to be a loss, and at the same time, the variable performance is as expected at the stage of recognizing the change in the execution pattern. It is possible to obtain a sense of happiness and satisfaction from the appearance of the "big win display" without being determined by the "losing display". As a result, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In addition, the player who has once experienced the "reservation change notice" after "reservation erasure" will be able to perform the effect of erasing the cockpit display area Db from the next time (for example, "super reach"), even if the effect is "losing". Even if "display" appears, it is checked whether or not the executed symbols have been changed in the executed symbol display area Db0 of the re-displayed cockpit display area Db. Therefore, even after the execution of the above effect, there is an interest in confirming the display mode of the executed symbols that are redisplayed, and the game is played while expecting the "jackpot display" to appear until the variable display is confirmed and displayed. It can be performed. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be maintained until the variable effect is definitely displayed.

Furthermore, in the case of performing the "suspended change notice" after "suspended deletion" in the executed symbols, the executed symbols displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db are erased, and the executed symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is erased. ``Holding change notice'' can be displayed (executed) at the timing when the execution pattern of is redisplayed. As a result, it is possible to directly change and notify the notice object (changeable object; in the first embodiment, the execution pattern) which is always visible, or to make the notice object appear anew. Compared to the case of notifying, it is possible to casually change the display mode of the notice object while making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change of the notice object. By temporarily hiding the announcement object and then casually changing it, the player is first given a sense of discomfort, and then the player is made to recognize that the source of the sense of discomfort is directly linked to the game value (for example, a big win). As a result, it is possible to diversify the presentation while providing the player with an unexpected presentation, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the display of the cockpit display area Db, and the executed symbols and reserved symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db, are always displayed except during the execution of the variable element of "super reach or higher", so that the player can see the current variation. It is intended to inform the execution suggestion of the production and the presence or absence of the variable production during standby. In addition, even if the cockpit display area is erased due to the execution of the "super reach or higher" variable element, it is configured to be immediately redisplayed as soon as the "super reach or higher" variable element ends. Therefore, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the re-display. That is, the player recognizes that the executed symbols and the suspended symbols in the cockpit display area Db should be displayed originally as the display contents of the third symbol display device 81, and this is an exceptional event ("super reach or higher"). ”), it will immediately return to its original form when the exceptional event ends. In the first embodiment, at the timing of returning to its original form, by casually changing the display mode of the execution pattern from before it is erased, the change is intentionally made difficult to notice, and when the change is noticed, it is unexpected. Surprise is increased by sex. By constructing in this manner, it is possible to diversify the presentation while providing the player with an unexpected presentation, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

In addition, by allocating the execution timing of the "suspension change notice" to the second half of the variable production ("after reach" or "after deletion of the suspension"), the expectation of the jackpot increases even in the second half of the variable production. A player can play a game while anticipating the occurrence (appearance) of the change notice. Therefore, the player can play the game while anticipating a big win until the second half of the variable presentation, so that the player can be entertained for a long period of time.

Also, if the execution of the "suspension change notice" is determined and the execution timing is "after pending deletion", it is confirmed whether or not the "suspension change notice" can be executed at the execution timing, and it is determined that it cannot be executed. If it is, the execution timing is changed to executable execution timing ("after reach" or "before reach") and "holding change notice" is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the number of cases where the execution lottery for the "holding change notice" is not executed even though the lottery is won, so that the execution rate of the "holding change notice" can be increased and the interest of the game can be increased. can be improved. In addition, even if the lottery process for the "pending change notice" and the lottery process for the variable effect are performed by different processes (different systems), adjustments will be made so that there is no discrepancy between the contents of the mutual effects. Therefore, by performing each lottery process with a different (different system) program, it is possible to easily design each program and to execute a consistent effect.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, when executing the "holding change notice" after "holding erasure", the "holding change notice" can be executed at the initially set execution timing ("after holding erasure"). Determine whether it is a production or not, and if it is a variable production that can be executed, perform a "suspension change notice" at the execution timing ("after erasing the suspension") as originally set, On the other hand, if it is a variable production that cannot be executed is configured to change the initially set execution timing of the "holding change notice", determine the timing at which the "holding change notice" can be executed, and then execute the "holding change notice". there is

However, even if the "holding change notice" of "after pending deletion" is selected, the "holding change notice" of "after pending deletion" can be executed (including "re-variation"). If not, even though the "hold change notice" was selected "after hold deletion", it is difficult to execute the "hold change notice" at that timing, and the conventional "hold change notice" occurs frequently. , there is a risk that the interest in the game cannot be improved.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when executing the "holding change notice" after "holding erasure", it is possible to execute the "holding change notice" at the initially set execution timing. If it is a variable effect that cannot be executed, change the contents of the variable effect so that the "hold change notice" of "after pending deletion" can be executed, and It is configured to execute "change notice".

Specifically, when "holding change notice" of "after pending deletion" is selected in the variable production, "holding change notice" cannot be executed at the execution timing of "after pending deletion" in the variable production. When it is determined to be a production mode (variable element), the variable element of "pseudo-gase" or the variable element of "pseudo-gase 1" (hereinafter, the variable element of "pseudo-gase" or the variable element of "pseudo-gase 1" is collectively referred to It determines whether there is a variable element related to the variable element of "pseudo production"). Then, when it is determined that the variable element of the "pseudo effect" is included, all (or part) of the variable element of the "pseudo effect" is replaced with the "super reach" which is the variable element that erases the cockpit display area Db. Convert to a variable or "Special Reach" variable.

In order to change the variable element, the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 determines only the rough variation pattern and variation time of the variation performance, transmits the determined content to the voice ramp control device 113, and controls the voice ramp. Since the device 113 determines the detailed variation pattern of the variation performance based on the rough variation pattern and the variation time of the variation performance received from the main controller 110, it is configured to be changeable. In other words, if the audio ramp control device 113 can execute a variation effect that is consistent within the variation time determined by the main control device 110, the detailed variable elements and the like can be freely determined by the audio ramp control device 113 side. can be selected and determined. Specifically, for example, in the audio ramp control device 113, when trying to change the variable element of the variable effect, for example, when there are two variable elements with the same variable time, one variable element is changed to the other variable Even if it is changed to an element, the consistency of the variable time in the variable performance can be obtained. Therefore, even if the variable element is changed by the audio ramp control device 113 so as to correspond to the variation time determined by the main controller 110, no problem occurs, and an appropriate variation within the variation time determined by the main controller 110 will occur. can perform the performance.

In the second embodiment, when "after deletion of suspension" is initially selected as the execution timing of "suspension change notice", when there is no variable element for erasing the cockpit display area Db, variation of "pseudo effect" The cockpit display area Db can be erased by changing the portion corresponding to the element to a variable element that erases the cockpit display area Db (for example, a variable element of "super reach"). Therefore, by adding the variable element for erasing the cockpit display area Db, it is possible to execute the "suspended change notice" "after pending erasure". By configuring in this way, when the ``suspension change notice'' of ``after suspension erasure'' is selected, the ``suspension change notice'' can be easily executed at the execution timing of the ``after suspension erasure''. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the performance while providing the player with an unexpected performance, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, the hold information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the pending information storage area 223e and execution information storage area 223f in the second embodiment. In the configuration of the pending information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f in the second embodiment, the difference from the first embodiment is that the pending information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f each have a "pseudo effect". The point is that pseudo effect information storage areas 223e9 and 223f9 are provided for storing pseudo effect information indicating execution. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, description thereof will be omitted.

When receiving the pending ball count command, the audio lamp control device 113 performs pre-reading processing (holding display setting processing (see FIG. 36) based on each value stored in each counter storage area 223e1 to 223e4 of the pending information storage X area. ) is performed, and the pending change information, scenario data, pending erasure information, re-variation information and pseudo effect information generated based on the result of this prefetching process are stored in the storage areas 223e5 to 223e9 of the same pending information storage X area, respectively. Store.

On the other hand, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command and a stop type command meaning the start of the variation effect from the main control device 110, shift processing is performed in the pending information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f. That is, the suspended variable performance is reduced by one, and the execution of the variable performance suspended first in terms of time is started, so that the first area for storing the suspended information corresponding to the first suspended variable performance is stored. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e8 and various types of information (data) are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f9 of the execution information storage area 223f corresponding to the variable performance currently being executed. Let

In addition, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e9 of the pending information storage second area and various information (data) are stored in the respective storage areas 223e1 to 223e9 of the pending information storage first area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and various information (data) stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e9 of the third pending information storage area are stored in the respective storage areas 223e1 to 223e9 of the second pending information storage area. , the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e9 of the fourth pending information storage area and various information (data) are stored in the respective storage areas 223e1 to 223e1 of the third pending information storage area. 223e9.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223f stores the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203c of the main controller 110. FIG. In addition, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first to fourth holding areas of the holding ball storage area 203b of the main controller 110 are stored in the first to fourth holding information storage areas. will be That is, in the sound lamp control device 113, counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the variable effects being executed and held by the main control device 110 are stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the hold information storage area 223e. be.

Next, referring to FIG. 35, a pre-change variable effect that includes a "pseudo effect" and does not erase the cockpit display area Db, and a pre-change variable effect that has the same variation time as the pre-change variable effect and the cockpit display area Db. will be described. FIG. 35(a) is a time chart showing the relationship between "pseudo-gase + normal reach + re-fluctuation (C505H)" and "normal reach + super reach + re-fluctuation (C605H)", and FIG. It is a time chart showing the relationship between "Pseudo Reach 1 + Normal Reach + Revariation (C506H)" and "Normal Reach + Special Reach + Revariation (C705H)".

As shown in FIG. 35(a), "pseudo-gase + normal reach + re-fluctuation (C505H)" and "normal reach + super reach + re-fluctuation (C605H)" both consist of a total fluctuation time of 40 seconds. there is Specifically, "pseudo-gase + normal reach + re-variation (C505H)" is a 7-second "high-speed variation" variation element, a 3-second "low-speed variation" variation element, and a 10-second "pseudo-gase" variation element. , a 10-second "normal reach" variable element, and a 10-second "re-variation" variable element are combined in order, and the variation pattern is performed for a total of 40 seconds. Therefore, in "pseudo hook + normal reach + re-variation (C505H)", the variable element of "pseudo hook" that is the variable element of "pseudo effect" is executed, but the "super reach" that erases the cockpit display area Db is executed. Variable elements, etc. are not executed. Therefore, this "pseudo fake + normal reach + re-variation (C505H)" is a variation pattern in which the "suspension change notice" after "suspension erasure" cannot be executed.

On the other hand, "normal reach + super reach + re-variation (C605H)" is a 7-second "fast fluctuation" variable element, a 3-second "low-speed fluctuation" variable element, and a 10-second "normal reach" variable element. , a 10-second “super reach” variable element and a 10-second “re-variation” variable element are combined in order, and the variation pattern is performed for a total of 40 seconds. Therefore, "normal reach + super reach + re-variation (C605H)" does not include the variable element of "pseudo production", but the variable element of "super reach" which is the same variable time as the variable element of "pseudo gase" is included, and the cockpit display area Db is erased by executing the "super reach" variable element. Therefore, this "normal reach + super reach + re-variation (C605H)" is a variation pattern that can execute "suspension change notice" after "suspension erasure".

As a result, "pseudo-gase + normal reach + re-fluctuation (C505H)" and "normal reach + super reach + re-fluctuation (C605H)" have different fluctuation elements, but the total fluctuation time is the same (40 seconds), Consistency is obtained even if one variation pattern is replaced with the other variation pattern in the audio ramp control device 113 . As a result, even if there is a command (for example, a confirmation command) transmitted from main controller 110 later, no problem occurs in the control timing of the command. In other words, "pseudo-gase + normal reach + re-fluctuation (C505H)" and "normal reach + super reach + re-fluctuation (C605H)" are mutually replaceable fluctuation patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 35(b), both “Pseudo Reach 1 + Normal Reach + Revariation (C506H)” and “Normal Reach + Special Reach + Revariation (C705H)” are configured with a total variation time of 50 seconds. It is Specifically, "pseudo continuation 1 + normal reach + re-variation (C506H)" is a 7-second "fast fluctuation" fluctuation element, a 3-second "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element, and a 20-second "pseudo continuation 1 ”, a 10-second “normal reach” variable element, and a 10-second “re-variation” variable element are combined in order, and the variation pattern is performed for a total of 50 seconds. Therefore, in "pseudo-ream 1 + normal reach + re-variation (C506H)", the variable element of "pseudo-ream 1", which is the variable element of "pseudo production", is executed, but "super reach" that erases the cockpit display area Db , etc. are not executed. Therefore, this "pseudo continuation 1 + normal reach + re-variation (C506H)" is a variation pattern in which the "suspension change notice" after "suspension erasure" cannot be executed.

On the other hand, "normal reach + special reach + re-variation (C705H)" is a 7-second "high-speed variation" variation element, a 3-second "low-speed variation" variation element, and a 10-second "normal reach" variation element. , 20 seconds of "special reach" variable elements and 10 seconds of "re-variation" variable elements are combined in order, and the total variation pattern is performed for 50 seconds. Therefore, "normal reach + special reach + re-variation (C705H)" does not include the variable element of "pseudo production", but the variation of "special reach" which is the same variable time as the variable element of "pseudo continuous 1" The element is included, and the cockpit display area Db is erased by the "special reach". Therefore, this "normal reach + special reach + re-variation (C705H)" is a variation pattern that can execute "suspension change notice" after "suspension erasure".

Therefore, "Pseudo Reach 1 + Normal Reach + Re-fluctuation (C506H)" and "Normal Reach + Special Reach + Re-fluctuation (C705H)" have different fluctuation elements, but the total fluctuation time is the same (50 seconds), so the voice Even if one variation pattern is replaced with the other variation pattern in the lamp control device 113, consistency is obtained. As a result, even if there is a command (for example, a confirmation command) transmitted from main controller 110 later, no problem occurs in the control timing of the command. That is, "pseudo-run 1 + normal reach + re-fluctuation (C506H)" and "normal reach + special reach + re-fluctuation (C705H)" are mutually replaceable fluctuation patterns.

Next, the pending display setting process (S1209) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing a hold display setting process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 performs this pending display setting process when the pending ball number command is received, and when execution of "holding change notice" is determined, holding change information, scenario data , the pending deletion information and the re-change information are stored in the respective storage areas 223e5 to 223e8 of the X-th area for storing the pending information indicated by the pending pitch number command. Further, in the pending display setting process, it is determined whether or not the variable effect indicated by the pending ball number command includes a variable element of "pseudo effect". As a result of the determination, when the variable element of the "pseudo effect" is included, the pseudo effect information indicating execution of the variable element of the "pseudo effect" is stored in the pseudo effect information storage area 223e9. there is

Specifically, in the process of S1303 of the pending display setting process (S1209), it is determined whether or not the execution lottery for the "holding change notice" has been won based on the various information indicated by the pending ball number command received this time ( S1303). As a result of the determination, if the execution lottery for the "holding change notice" is not won (S1303: No), the "holding change notice" is not executed. Null data is stored in each of the pending change information storage area 223e5, the scenario data storage area 223e6, the pending deletion information storage area 223e7, the re-change information storage area 223e8, and the pseudo effect information storage area 223e9 of the X area (S1354), and the process is executed. The process proceeds to S1313.

On the other hand, in the process of S1303, if the execution lottery for "suspension change notice" is won (S1303: Yes), the processes of S1304 to S1311 are performed as in the first embodiment, and the suspension change information, scenario data, The erasing information or the re-variation information is stored in each of the storage areas 223e5 to 223e8 of the X-th area for storing the pending information indicated by the pending ball count command, and the process proceeds to S1351.

In the processing of S1351, it is determined whether or not the variation element of "pseudo effect" is included in the variable effect indicated by the pending ball number command received this time (S1351). As a result of the determination, if a variable element of "pseudo effect" is included (S1351: Yes), pseudo effect information indicating that the variable element of "pseudo effect" is performed in the variable effect, the number of pending balls command Stored in the pseudo effect information storage area 223e9 of the X-th holding information storage area shown (S1352), and the process proceeds to S1313. By the processing of S1352, it can be recognized that the variable element of "pseudo effect" can be replaced with the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach". In addition, in the process of S1351, if it is determined that the variable element of "pseudo effect" is not included (S1351: No), Null data is stored in the pseudo effect information storage area 223e9 of the X-th area storing the pending information. (S1353), the process proceeds to S1313. In the process of S1353, by writing Null data to the pseudo effect information storage area 223e9, for example, redundant use of the pseudo effect information related to the variable elements of the "pseudo effect" stored in the pending information storage area X before writing is prevented. can be prevented.

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the execution symbol change process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing execution symbol change processing executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 of the second embodiment. This execution symbol change process is executed in the variation effect process (see FIG. 31) executed in the main process (see FIG. 28), and the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the third symbol display device 81. in order to perform a "pending change notice".

In the execution symbol change process (S1414) of the second embodiment, as a result of the determination in S1501, the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f is "0" and " If it is data indicating "after pending deletion" (S1501: "after pending deletion"), in order to confirm whether or not "hold change notice" can be executed after the "reach display" of the variable performance, "replay It is determined whether or not the variable element of "Variation" is executed (S1506). This determination is based on the process of S1309 of the pending display setting process (see FIG. 30), and the re-change information stored in the re-change information storage area 223f8 of the execution information storage area 223f is determined.

In the process of S1506, if it is determined that the re-variation information is not stored in the re-variation information storage area 223f8 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1506: No), the variation element of "re-variation" is included in the variation effect. Therefore, there is no point in executing the "pending change notice" after "pending erasure". Specifically, for example, even if the execution symbol "suspension change notice" is executed after the variable element of "super reach" is executed and the "big win display" is confirmed, the player is not given any interest. Rather, the meaningless production will make you lose interest. Also, for example, even if the execution symbol "hold change notice" is executed after the "super reach" variable element is executed and the "losing display" is confirmed, the "losing display" is confirmed as it is, and the next fluctuation effect is started, the discrepancies in the presentation give the player a sense of distrust in the game.

Therefore, when it is determined in S1506 that the re-change information is not stored in the re-change information storage area 223f8 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1506: No), the "hold change notice" is executed after "after hold deletion". Since it is not possible, the process proceeds to S1504 in order to confirm the timing at which the "holding change notice" can be executed.

On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S1506, if the re-change information is stored in the re-change information storage area 223f8 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1506: Yes), the variable element of "re-change" after "reach display" is executed, the timing after the cockpit display area Db is erased in the variable effect (for example, after the execution of the variable element of "Super Reach" or the execution of the variable element of "Special Reach" later), whether or not the cockpit display area Db is erased by executing the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach" in the variable effect in order to confirm whether or not the "Presentation of Change in Hold" can be executed. (S1507). This determination is performed by determining the pending deletion information stored in the pending deletion information storage area 223f7 of the execution information storage area 223f in the processing of S1307 of the pending display setting processing (see FIG. 30).

As a result of the determination in S1507, if the suspended deletion information is stored in the suspended deletion information storage area 223f7 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1507: Yes), the "suspended change notice" can be executed "after suspended deletion". Therefore, in order to execute the "suspended change notice" in the display mode stored in the pending change information storage area 223f5 of the execution information storage area 223f, a post-erase change command for display is set to the display control device 114 ( S1508), and returns to the variation effect processing (see FIG. 31).

The post-erase change command for display set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 28). be done. The display control device 114 that has received the post-delete change command for display, after the "super reach" or "special reach" of the variable effect is completed with respect to the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0. , and performs display control so as to change the execution pattern (for example, from 'normal (white)' to 'blue') to the display mode of the determined 'suspension change notice' at the timing before execution of 'revariation'.

On the other hand, in the process of S1507, if it is determined that the pending deletion information is not stored in the pending deletion information storage area 223f7 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1507: No), the "reach display" performed in the variable effect is Since it is a "normal reach" and the effect of erasing the cockpit display area Db is not performed, the "suspended change notice" after "suspended erasure" cannot be executed. Therefore, the process proceeds to S1551 in order to confirm whether or not it is possible to change the variable element of the variable effect and execute the "holding change notice" after "holding erasure".

In the processing of S1551, it is determined whether or not the variable element of "pseudo effect" is selected in the variable effect (S1551). This determination is made by determining the pseudo effect information stored in the pseudo effect information storage area 223f9 of the execution information storage area 223f in the process of S1352 of the pending display setting process (see FIG. 36).

As a result of determination in S1551, if the pseudo effect information is not stored in the pseudo effect information storage area 223f9 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1551: No), the execution symbol is executed without setting a command to change the execution symbol. The change process (S1414) is ended, and the process returns to the change effect process (see FIG. 31). That is, when "hold change notice" after "hold erasure" is selected, "re-fluctuation", "super reach or more", and "pseudo production" are not performed In the variable production, in the execution pattern Configure not to run "pending change notice". By configuring in this way, if the performance timing is not appropriate for the execution timing of the "suspension change notice", by configuring so as not to execute the "suspension change notice" of the execution pattern, there will be a discrepancy in the production contents. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a well-matched performance.

In the process of S1551, when it is determined that the pseudo effect information is not stored in the pseudo effect information storage area 223f9 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1551: No), for example, the process proceeds to S1504, It may be configured to determine whether or not there is an execution timing at which the "holding change notice" can be performed for the executed symbols. By configuring in this way, the selected "pending change notice" can be reliably executed at any execution timing. can be reduced, the execution rate of the "suspension change notice" can be increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S1551, if the pseudo effect information is stored in the pseudo effect information storage area 223f9 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1551: Yes), the variable element to be changed according to the contents of the "pseudo effect" , it is determined whether or not the "pseudo effect" stored in the pseudo effect information storage area 223f9 is "pseudo fake" (S1552). As a result of the determination, if "pseudo fake" is stored as the pseudo effect information stored in the pseudo effect information storage area 223f9 (S1552: Yes), the display variation pattern command that has been transmitted to the display control device 114 at this time. is canceled, and the variable element of "pseudo-gase" is changed to the variable element of "super reach", and "pending change notice" after "pending deletion" is executed. A pseudo false change super command for changing the variable element and executing the "super reach" variable element is set to the display control device 114 (S1553), and the process proceeds to S1508.

When the display control device 114 receives the pseudo glitch change super command from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 replaces the received display change pattern command with the pseudo glitch change super command, and executes display control of the variable effect. is configured to As described above, when the display control device 114 receives the display change pattern command and the display stop type command from the sound lamp control device 113, it does not immediately start the display processing related to the variable effect based on the command, It is configured to wait for a predetermined time (for example, 1 millisecond) whether or not a command indicating a change in the variable effect, such as the above-described display error command or super command for changing the pseudo false appearance, is transmitted.

When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command from the audio lamp control device 113 and immediately executes the display processing related to the variation effect based on the command, the audio lamp control device 113 If an error command for display is transmitted after that, the display processing related to the variable effect must be stopped, and replaced with a variable display based on the pseudo-gase change super command or the like. Therefore, even if the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, the display control device 114 does not immediately execute the display processing related to the variation effect based on the command, and displays from the sound lamp control device 113. Execution of the display processing related to the variable effect based on the command is waited for a predetermined time during which there is a possibility that an error command for use or a super command for changing a false falsehood, etc. may be transmitted. By configuring in this way, the display control device 114 can prevent the occurrence of a processing burden caused by executing useless processing in the display processing related to the variable effect.

In the second embodiment, 1 millisecond was exemplified as the predetermined time during which the display control device 114 may transmit the pseudo false change super command from the sound lamp control device 113, but this standby time is Any delay may be used as long as the display processing in 114 is not delayed. Specifically, for example, the display control device 114 is configured to perform display processing and drawing processing for one frame every 20 milliseconds. After the command determination process (see FIG. 29) is executed, the executed symbol change process (S1414) in the variable effect process (see FIG. 31) is executed within several milliseconds.

Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113, after transmitting the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command based on the reception of the variation pattern command and the stop type command, generates and generates a pseudo fake change super command in the execution symbol change process. If there is at least several milliseconds before transmission, the generation and transmission of the pseudo false change supercommand can be executed without fail. Therefore, after receiving the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, the display control device 114 waits for at least the above several milliseconds, and if there is a pseudo-gase change super command, it is configured to be able to receive it. ing. Therefore, by waiting for a time shorter than the time required for display processing and drawing processing for one frame (20 milliseconds), it is possible to execute display processing related to fluctuation effects without delay, so the third symbol display device It is possible to prevent an event in which the display processing of the variable effect to 81 is clearly delayed.

In addition, in the processing of S1552, when "pseudo-gase" is not stored as the pseudo-effect information stored in the pseudo-effect information storage area 223f9 (S1552: No), "pseudo-continuation 1" is stored as the pseudo-effect information. Therefore, the display variation pattern command that has already been sent to the display control device 114 at this time is canceled, and the variable element of "pseudo-ren 1" is changed to the variable element of "special reach", and the variable element of "after pending deletion" is changed. In order to execute a variable performance capable of executing a "holding change notice", a pseudo-continuation 1 change special command for changing the "pseudo-continuation 1" and executing a "special reach" is set toward the display control device 114 (S1554). , the process proceeds to S1508.

The pseudo-gase change super command or pseudo-continue change special command set in the processing of S1553 or S1554 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed in the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 28). ) to the display control device 114 .

The display control device 114, which received the pseudo-gaze change super command, initially tried to execute the variation effect of "pseudo-gaze + normal reach + re-variation (C505H)" indicated by the display variation pattern command, but the pseudo-gaze change super command was attempted. By receiving the command, the "pseudo-gase + normal reach + re-fluctuation (C505H)" is changed (replaced) to "super reach + re-fluctuation (C605H)" to perform display control.

In addition, the display control device 114 that received the pseudo-continuation 1 change special command initially tried to execute the variation effect of "pseudo-continuation 1 + normal reach + re-variation (C506H)" indicated by the display variation pattern command, but the pseudo-continuation 1 By receiving the run 1 change special command, the "pseudo run 1 + normal reach + re-variation (C506H)" is changed (replaced) to "special reach + re-variation (C705H)" to perform display control.

In the second embodiment, the variable element of "pseudo performance" is configured to be changeable to other variable elements (for example, "super reach" for "pseudo fake") that are configured with the same variable time. there is The variable element of the "pseudo performance" is performed in the first half of the variable performance, and the "jackpot display" does not appear. On the other hand, "Super Reach" and "Special Reach" are variable elements that can bring about "big win display". Therefore, the player tends to focus on "super reach" and "special reach" among the variable elements of the variable effect, and does not pay attention to the display result for the "pseudo effect". ' is executed or not. That is, regarding the degree of importance of effects, it can be said that the degree of importance of "pseudo effect" is low, and the degree of importance of "super reach" and "special reach" is high.

Then, as in the second embodiment, when the "hold change notice" of "after hold erase" is selected, the "hold change notice" of "after hold erase" cannot be executed with the initially selected variable effect. At this time, it is checked whether or not there is a "pseudo effect" of low importance. Then, if there is a "pseudo effect", it can be changed to "super reach" or "special reach" with a higher degree of importance than the "pseudo effect", and the "hold change notice" can be executed "after the hold is erased". configured as follows. By constructing in this way, by changing a performance with a low importance to a performance with a high importance, a player is made to pay attention to the result of the variable performance, and ``reservation change notice'' is performed ``after suspension deletion''. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected production, diversify the production, and increase the interest in the game.

After transmitting the display variation pattern command to the display control device 114 in the command determination processing (see S1110 in FIG. 28) in the main processing, the sound lamp control device 113 performs the variation effect processing in the next main processing (see FIG. 28 (see S1109 of )), a pseudo-gase change super command or a pseudo-continue 1 change special command is transmitted to the display control device 114 . Further, even when the display variation pattern command is received, the display control device 114 controls the display of the variation effect based on the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command for a predetermined time (for example, 1 milliseconds), and the third pattern display device 81 is configured not to immediately perform display based on the display variation pattern command. Further, the display control device 114 is configured to receive the pseudo-gase change super command or the pseudo-continue 1 change special command within the predetermined time after receiving the display variation pattern command. Therefore, after receiving the display variation pattern command, the display control device 114, before starting the variation effect based on the display variation pattern command on the third symbol display device 81 Can receive special commands. Therefore, in the variable performance of the third symbol display device 81, the variable performance can be executed without making the player recognize that the variable element has been changed. As a result, a smooth variation effect can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

It should be noted that the variation rendering process of the main process (see S1109 of FIG. 28) may be configured to be executed after the command determination process of the main process (S1110 of FIG. 28). By configuring in this way, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits the pseudo-gase change super command or the pseudo-continuation 1 change special command to the display control device 114 immediately after transmitting the display variation pattern command to the display control device 114. It becomes possible to Therefore, the display control device 114 can receive the pseudo false change super command or the pseudo continuous 1 change special command immediately after receiving the display variation pattern command, and can quickly change the contents of the variable effect. can recognize. As a result, the display control after the change can be performed without performing the display control of the variable effect before the change, so that the display control load of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the execution symbol change process (see FIG. 37) for generating the pseudo-gase change super command and the pseudo-continue 1 change special command (see FIG. 37) is performed in the command determination process (see FIG. 29). It is configured to be executed after generating a stop type command and turning on the fluctuation start flag 223a. That is, the sound lamp control device 113 does not transmit the pseudo-gase change super command or the pseudo-continuation 1 change special command until after the display change pattern command and the display stop type command have been sent to the display control device 114. It is configured. Therefore, the display control device 114, for example, does not receive the pseudo false change super command without receiving the display change pattern command. can do.

In the process of S1508, the "hold change notice" can be executed "after hold erasure" based on the process of S1507, S1553 or S1554. In order to execute the "suspended change notice" in the mode, a change command after erasing for display is set toward the display control device 114 (S1508), and the process returns to the fluctuation effect processing (see FIG. 31).

The post-erase change command for display set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 28). be done. The display control device 114 that has received the post-delete change command for display, after the "super reach" or "special reach" of the variable effect is completed with respect to the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0. , and performs display control so as to change the execution pattern (for example, from 'normal (white)' to 'blue') to the display mode of the determined 'suspension change notice' at the timing before execution of 'revariation'.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when "suspension change notice" of "after pending deletion" is selected in the variable performance, "after pending deletion" in the variable performance When it is determined that the performance mode (variable element) cannot execute the "pending change notice" at the execution timing, first, a variable element that can be changed to a variable element that erases the cockpit display area Db (for example, "pseudo effect" Determines whether there is a variable factor related to Then, when it is determined that a changeable variable element (for example, a "pseudo effect" variable element) is included, the changeable variable element (for example, all or part of the "pseudo effect") is displayed in the cockpit It converts to a variable element of a variable element (for example, "super reach") that erases the area Db.

Therefore, by adding the variable element for erasing the cockpit display area Db, it becomes possible to execute the "suspended change notice" after "suspended erasure". By configuring in this way, when the ``suspension change notice'' of ``after suspension erasure'' is selected, the ``suspension change notice'' can be easily executed at the execution timing of the ``after suspension erasure''. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the performance while providing the player with an unexpected performance, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

In addition, when the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" is selected, when the "hold change notice" of "after hold deletion" cannot be executed with the initially selected variation effect, the variable element of low importance (For example, "pseudo production") is confirmed. Then, if there is a variable element with a low degree of importance (for example, "pseudo production"), a variable element with a higher degree of importance than the variable element with low importance (for example, "pseudo production") Reach" or "Special Reach"), and configure it so that "pending change notice" after "pending erasure" can be executed. By constructing in this way, a variable element with a low degree of importance is changed to a variable element with a high degree of importance, and the variable element with a high degree of importance draws the player's attention to the result of the variable presentation while the degree of importance is high. By performing ``reservation change notice'' ``after reservation deletion'' after the end of the variable element, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance, diversify the performance, and increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the display variation pattern command toward the display control device 114 in the command determination processing (see S1110 in FIG. 28) in the main processing, and then changes the variation effect processing in the next main processing ( 28), a pseudo false change super command or a pseudo continuous 1 change special command is transmitted to the display control device 114 . In addition, even when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 waits for a predetermined time (for example, 20 milliseconds) to respond to the display variation pattern command in the third symbol display device 81 due to the preparation of the display control process. It is configured so that it cannot perform display based on Further, the display control device 114 is configured to receive the pseudo-gase change super command or the pseudo-continue 1 change special command within the predetermined time after receiving the display variation pattern command. Therefore, after receiving the display variation pattern command, the display control device 114, before starting the variation effect based on the display variation pattern command on the third symbol display device 81 Can receive special commands. Therefore, in the variable performance of the third symbol display device 81, the variable performance can be executed without making the player recognize that the variable element has been changed. As a result, a smooth variation effect can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment has the same effects as the first embodiment due to the same configuration.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 52. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when the "holding change notice" of "after pending deletion" is selected in the variable performance, the "holding change notice" is executed at the execution timing of "after pending deletion" in the variable performance. When it is determined that the variable performance of the variable element that cannot be executed is determined, it is determined whether or not there is a variable element related to the variable element of the "pseudo performance". Then, when it is determined that the variable element of "pseudo effect" is included, all (or part) of the variable element of "pseudo effect" is replaced by the variable element of "super reach" that erases the cockpit display area Db or " It is converted into a variable element of "Special Reach".

However, in the variable presentation, if the variable element for erasing the cockpit display area Db does not include a changeable variable element, the variable element cannot be changed. It is configured so that the "holding change notice" is not performed "after the holding erasure". Specifically, if the variable effect does not include the variable element of the "pseudo effect" that is the source of the change, the variable element of the "pseudo effect" is changed to the variable element of "super reach" or the change of "special reach" Since it cannot be replaced with an element, it is configured not to execute the "holding change notice" after "holding erasure" in the execution pattern. Therefore, even though the "reservation change notice" is selected "after the reservation is erased", the "reservation change notice" cannot be executed at that timing, and there is a risk that the interest in the game cannot be improved. .

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, a movable accessory capable of partially covering the third pattern display device 81 is used to make the cockpit display area Db invisible (difficult to see). configured to be drivable. Then, in the state where the cockpit display area Db is covered with the movable accessory, the "suspension change notice" is executed in the execution pattern. After that, when the movable accessory returns from the state of covering the cockpit display area Db to the original state, the player becomes able to visually recognize the executed symbols again, and the "suspended change notice" is displayed in the executed symbols. It becomes possible to recognize that it is being executed.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, on the left side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a left movable accessory 87 (see FIG. 38) that can be reciprocated on the display screen is arranged. In addition, a right movable accessory 88 (see FIG. 38) that can be reciprocated on the display screen is arranged on the right side of the display screen. The left movable accessory 87 and the right movable accessory 88 are configured such that the presence or absence of driving and the drive pattern are determined by a drive lottery in the variable presentation. Also, the cockpit display area Db is constructed so that any variable element is always displayed during execution of the variable effect. Further, when the left movable role 87 is driven in a predetermined driving mode ("strong pattern" in the third embodiment; hereinafter, the predetermined driving mode is expressed as a "strong pattern"), the left movable role The object 87 covers the cockpit display area Db, and the left movable accessory 87 prevents the player from visually recognizing the cockpit display area Db. Then, in the state where the left movable accessory 87 is driven in the "strong pattern", the "holding change notice" is executed in the execution pattern (hereinafter, the execution timing of the "holding change notice" at the time of the "strong pattern" is After that, when the left movable accessory 87 returns to its original position, the execution pattern for which the "suspension change notice" has been executed is made visible again to the player. Configure.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the "hold change notice" of "after strong pattern driving" is selected in the variable effect, the "strong pattern" of the left movable accessory 87 is selected in the variable effect. When it is not selected, it is determined whether or not the content of the variable performance is such that the left movable accessory 87 can be driven in the "strong pattern". As a result of the determination, if the left movable accessory 87 can be driven in the variable effect (variable element), the left movable accessory 87 is driven in the "strong pattern", and the left movable accessory 87 is placed in the cockpit display area Db. cover the Then, in a state in which the left movable accessory 87 is driven in the "strong pattern", that is, in a state in which the execution pattern in the cockpit display area Db is covered by the left movable accessory 87, the execution pattern is "strong pattern driven , and after that, when the left movable accessory 87 returns to its original position, the execution pattern for which the "holding change notice" has been executed can be visually recognized again by the player. Configure.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to directly change and notify an announcement object (changeable object; in the third embodiment, an execution pattern) that is always visible, or to notify a new announcement object. The display mode of the notice object can be casually changed while making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change of the notice object compared to the case of making the notice object appear. By temporarily hiding the announcement object and then casually changing it, the player is first given a sense of discomfort, and then the player is made to recognize that the source of the sense of discomfort is directly linked to the game value (for example, a big win). As a result, it is possible to diversify the presentation while providing the player with an unexpected presentation, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Also, when making the execution pattern that is the object of execution of the "holding change notice" invisible, instead of changing the effect content (variable element) of the third pattern display device 81, the third pattern display device 81 is different. By changing the drive pattern of the movable accessory (the left movable accessory 87), it is possible to make the execution symbol, which is the target of execution of the "suspension change notice", invisible. Therefore, an additional command or the like is sent to the display control device 114 that controls the third pattern display device 81 to make the execution pattern invisible without replacing the effect content, etc. Since the "notice" can be performed, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance without increasing the control load of the display control device 114, diversify the performance, and increase the interest of the game.

In the third embodiment, a "weak pattern" drive pattern having a smaller drive range than the "strong pattern" drive pattern is provided as a drive pattern other than the "strong pattern" for each of the movable accessories 87 and 88. there is Specifically, in the "strong pattern" drive pattern, each movable accessory 87, 88 tilts from the standing state (90°) of the initial position to the horizontal state (0°), and the left movable accessory 87 moves the cockpit. It is configured to cover the display area Db. On the other hand, in the "weak pattern" drive pattern, each movable accessory 87, 88 is tilted slightly (60°) from the upright state of the initial position, and depending on each movable accessory 87, 88, the cockpit display area It is configured so that Db is not covered.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment or the second embodiment. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 38, regarding the transition of the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the variable element of "normal reach" and the variable element of "super reach" appear in the variable effect of the third embodiment. explain.

FIG. 38(a) is a diagram showing a state just before (immediately before) the “ready-to-win display (“normal reach”)” appears in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. In FIG. 38(b), the occurrence of the "normal reach" variable element is confirmed from the state of FIG. 38(a), the sub display area Ds is erased, and the "normal reach" variable element is executed in the main display area Dm. It is the figure which showed the state where it is. FIG. 38(c) is a diagram showing a state in which a variable element of "super reach" is generated from the state of FIG. 38(b) and the variable element of "super reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. . FIG. 38(d) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub-display area Ds is re-displayed from the state of FIG. 38(c), and the third pattern "missing display" appears in the main display area Dm.

First, in FIG. 38(a), the third symbol "7" is stopped in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and the third symbol "7" is displayed in the right display area Dm3. It is immediately before the stop display, and furthermore, in the medium display area Dm2, the third symbol is still invisible and the variable element of "high-speed variation" is being executed. Therefore, it is a state just before (immediately before) the appearance of the so-called "ready-to-reach display" by the "7" symbol.

In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, the character pattern is displayed in the small central area Ds2 in a forewarning mode suggesting that the "ready-to-reach display" will appear. Specifically, the character design displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner as if the characters are cheering. A predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, and no character design or the like is displayed.

Further, in the cockpit display area Db, an executed symbol is displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, and reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Therefore, the execution symbol indicates that the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of pending balls of the variable effect is four.

A left movable accessory 87 imitating a sword is arranged on the left side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and a right movable accessory 88 imitating a sword is also arranged on the right side of the display screen. are arranged. The left movable accessory 87 and the right movable accessory 88 (hereinafter, the left movable accessory 87 and the right movable accessory 88 may be abbreviated as "each movable accessory 87, 88") are normally set to their initial positions. Located at the origin position, they are arranged upright on both left and right sides of the third pattern display device 81, respectively.

At the initial position of each movable accessory 87, 88, the front side of each movable accessory 87, 88 is visible to the player, and the third pattern display device 81 is almost covered by each movable accessory 87, 88. The display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is almost visible.

The movable accessories 87 and 88 are configured to be reciprocally driven on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by a drive motor (not shown) when winning a drive lottery in the variable performance. Specifically, when the movable accessories 87 and 88 are not driven, which is the initial position of the movable accessories 87 and 88, the movable accessories 87 and 88 are held on both the left and right sides of the third pattern display device 81 in an upright state (90°). be.

Here, with reference to FIG. 39, the driving mode of each movable accessory 87, 88 will be specifically described. FIG. 39(a) is a diagram schematically showing the drive pattern by the "weak pattern" of the left movable accessory 87 and the right movable accessory 88 in the third embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a drive pattern of the "strong pattern" of the accessory 87 and the right movable accessory 88;

When the left movable accessory 87 is driven from the initial position (the left position of the third symbol display device 81. Upright state (90°)), the third symbol is displayed with the lower end of the left movable accessory 87 as the axis. The screen of the display device 81 is rotated to the right (clockwise). In this rotational drive, in the "weak pattern" drive mode, the third pattern display device 81 rotates to a predetermined position (predetermined angle (60°)) at the center of the screen and stops (see FIG. 39(a)). ), and in the "strong pattern" drive mode, the third symbol display device 81 rotates to the bottom (0°) of the screen and stops (see FIG. seconds or 2 seconds). Thereafter, the left movable accessory 87 stopped at each stop position is driven to rotate leftward (counterclockwise) on the screen of the third symbol display device 81 around the lower end of the left movable accessory 87. to return to the initial position (the left side of the third pattern display device 81, upright (90°)).

When the right movable accessory 88 is driven from the initial position (the right side position of the third symbol display device 81. Upright state (90°)), the third symbol is displayed with the lower end of the right movable accessory 88 as the axis. The screen of the display device 81 is rotated to the left (counterclockwise). In this rotational drive, in the "weak pattern" drive mode, the third pattern display device 81 rotates to a predetermined position (predetermined angle (60°)) at the center of the screen and stops (see FIG. 39(a)). ), and in the "strong pattern" drive mode, the third symbol display device 81 rotates to the bottom (0°) of the screen and stops (see FIG. seconds or 2 seconds). Thereafter, the right movable accessory 88 stopped at each stop position is driven to rotate right (clockwise) on the screen of the third symbol display device 81 around the lower end of the right movable accessory 88. , the initial position (the right side of the third pattern display device 81, upright (90°)).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is configured to be driven by a drive pattern selected by lottery at the timing when one of the "ready-to-win displays" is being executed. there is That is, when the "ready-to-win display" is being executed, the degree of expectation for the big win is set differently depending on which drive pattern each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is driven. The game is played by paying attention to which drive pattern each movable accessory 87, 88 is driven during execution of "ready-to-win display".

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the left movable accessory 87 and the right movable accessory 88 are configured to be driven at the same time regardless of whether the drive pattern is the "weak pattern" or the "strong pattern." It is Therefore, when the movable parts 87 and 88 are driven in the "strong pattern", the trajectories of the movable parts 87 and 88 interfere with each other. They are driven slightly earlier than the object 88 and are driven and controlled so as not to collide with each other.

Returning to FIG. 38, the description continues. In FIG. 38(b), from the state of FIG. 38(a), in the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stop-displayed and the "ready-to-win display" by the "7" symbol is displayed. is determined, and the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. In this “normal reach” variable, the main display area Dm is displayed as if it were enlarged. Specifically, in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3, the "7" symbol that is being stopped is displayed in an enlarged manner, and in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is displayed at a low speed so that it can be visually recognized. , scrolled at low speed from "5" pattern to "6" pattern).

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is erased as the main display area Dm expands due to the occurrence of the "normal reach" variable, and the sub-display area Ds becomes invisible. When the "ready-to-win display" occurs in the main display area Dm, the display contents of the main display area Dm are enlarged so that the player can easily recognize the contents of the "ready-to-win display" that the player focuses on. is displayed, and the sub-display area Ds is erased along with the enlargement.

In the state of FIG. 38(b), in the cockpit display area Db, similar to the display state of FIG. Reserved symbols are displayed in the areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Therefore, as in FIG. 38(a), the execution symbol indicates that the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of suspended balls in the variable effect is four. showing.

Also, in FIG. 38(b), as in FIG. 38(a), the movable accessories 87 and 88 are not driven and are stopped at their initial positions (upright positions).

FIG. 38(c) shows a state in which the variable element of "super reach" is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 38(b). In the "super reach" variable element, the "7" symbol displayed in the "normal reach" variable element is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁

Also, in FIG. 38(c), almost the entire display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is used to display a "battle effect" in which a plurality of character patterns compete for victory or defeat. In this "battle effect", an effect is executed in which the character pattern on the player side (for example, the character pattern on the left side) fights with the character pattern on the enemy side (for example, the character pattern on the right side). In the "battle presentation", if the character pattern on the player side wins, a big win is achieved, and the "big win display" appears as a display result of the variable element of the "super reach". On the other hand, in the "battle effect", if the character pattern on the enemy side wins, it is set to be a loss, and a "loss display" appears as a display result of the variable element of the "super reach".

In the state of FIG. 38(c), in the cockpit display area Db, as in the display states of FIGS. Reserved symbols are displayed in the to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Therefore, as in FIGS. 38(a) and 38(b), the execution symbols indicate that the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of pending balls in the variable effect is 4 times.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the cockpit display area Db is smaller than the sub-display area Ds. It does not significantly hinder the production of the variable element of "super reach" compared to the case of continuing. Therefore, during execution of the variable element of "super reach", the execution pattern of the cockpit display area Db is continuously displayed.

In addition, the pending symbols and the execution symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db can execute the "suspension change notice", and even in the execution symbols suggesting the content of the variable effect being executed, the "suspension change notice" It is configured to take over (inherit) and display the changed display mode of the reserved design. That is, it is configured to be able to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the big hit of the variable effect being executed by the display mode of the executed symbols. Therefore, by having the player confirm the display mode of the execution pattern during the execution of the variable element of "Super Reach", the player can predict whether the variable element of "Super Reach" will be a big hit or not. , and gives interest based on the prediction.

Also, in FIG. 38(c), similarly to FIGS. 38(a) and 38(b), the movable accessories 87 and 88 are not driven and are stopped at their initial positions (upright positions). is.

In the state shown in FIG. 38(c), the "7" pattern that caused the occurrence of "super reach" is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third pattern display device 81. there is

In addition, in the state of FIG. 38(c), at the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (below the "ready-to-reach display"), a number symbol (in the first embodiment, "4" is displayed) is not displayed. This is because the cockpit display area Db is always displayed in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, so that the player can recognize the number of variable effects by checking the display contents of the cockpit display area Db. is.

In FIG. 38(d), from the state of FIG. 38(c), the variable element of "super reach" is lost (the character pattern on the enemy side wins), and "failure display" appears in the main display area Dm. It shows a state in which the sub-display area Ds is re-displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 as well. In this state, the character pattern in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is visible again. Note that the character pattern in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is displayed in a disappointing manner due to the appearance of the "missing display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the variable element of "super reach" ends and the variable effect is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the display state of the third symbol display device 81 is the initial state, that is, the main The display area Dm, the sub-display area Ds, and the cockpit display area Db are configured to be displayed. By configuring in this way, it is easy for the player to recognize that the variable performance has been stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and when there is a pending (waiting) variable performance, the next variable performance is smoothly performed. It is possible to execute.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 38(a) to 38(d), in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the display states of the main display area Dm and the sub-display area Ds are enlarged or reduced at each timing in the variable effect. , is erased or redisplayed so that the player can easily recognize the display contents of high importance at each timing. In addition, by always displaying the execution symbols and the pending symbols to the player in the cockpit display area Db, the player can be made to clearly recognize how many variable displays are pending.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, two types of drive patterns, "weak pattern" and "strong pattern", are provided for the respective movable accessories 87 and 88. FIG. Incidentally, the lottery ratio of the "weak pattern" and the "strong pattern" of each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 will be described later.

In the "weak pattern" of each of the movable accessories 87 and 88, the cockpit display area Db is not covered, and the execution pattern and the reserved pattern are visible. Although not shown, when each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is driven in the "weak pattern", the third pattern display device 81 displays a predetermined character pattern in conjunction with the driving of the movable accessories 87 and 88. A first production (for example, production of fighting while dodging the movable accessories 87 and 88) is performed. Therefore, when the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven in the "weak pattern", the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display weak pattern command to notify the display control device 114 of the driving mode. It is configured. When the display control device 114 receives the weak pattern command for display, it recognizes that the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven in the "weak pattern", and the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven in the "weak pattern". The display control of the first effect is executed according to the timing of driving by.

In the "strong pattern" of each movable accessory 87, 88, the cockpit display area Db is covered with the left movable accessory 87, and the executed symbols and reserved symbols cannot be visually recognized. Although not shown, when each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is driven in the "strong pattern", the third pattern display device 81 displays a predetermined character pattern in conjunction with the driving of the movable accessories 87 and 88. It is configured such that a second effect (for example, effect of being cut by each of the movable accessories 87 and 88) is performed. Therefore, when the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven in the "strong pattern", the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display strong pattern command to notify the display control device 114 of the driving mode. It is configured. When the display control device 114 receives the strong pattern command for display, it recognizes that the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven in the "strong pattern", and the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven in the "strong pattern". The display control of the second effect is executed in accordance with the timing of driving by.

In this way, each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is configured such that the drive pattern of the "weak pattern" is extended to form the "strong pattern" drive pattern. That is, the "strong pattern" drive pattern of each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is driven with the content including the "weak pattern" drive pattern. Therefore, when each of the movable roles 87 and 88 is driven, the player determines whether the drive pattern ends with the "weak pattern" or whether the drive is extended to the "strong pattern". Focusing on the drive pattern of the objects 87 and 88, interest is generated in which drive pattern the drive pattern becomes.

It should be noted that three or more types of drive patterns may be provided for the respective movable accessories 87 and 88 instead of the two types of "weak pattern" and "strong pattern". Specifically, a "middle pattern" may be provided, and three stages of drive patterns may be used to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win.

Also, the drive patterns of the movable accessories 87 and 88 may be configured with completely different drive patterns. Specifically, the movable accessories 87 and 88 may be configured in a pattern in which they rotate around the tip of the sword and in a pattern in which they rotate around the tip of the handle.

Furthermore, each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 may be arranged at a position invisible to the player at the initial position. By constructing in this manner, the movable accessories 87 and 88, which were not visible at first, appear on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, so that the appearance surprises the player and provides a powerful performance. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, detailed electrical configurations of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 40 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third embodiment. The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment stores a scenario table 222f different from the scenario table 222f of the ROM 222 of the first or second embodiment, and furthermore, at least a character lottery table 222g is stored. stored.

Here, the scenario table 222f of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. FIG. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is configured to be able to execute the "holding change notice" at the execution timing after driving with the "strong pattern" for the executed symbols. Therefore, the sound ramp control device 113 is configured to be able to select the execution timing of "after strong pattern driving" as the execution timing of the "suspension change notice" for the execution pattern. Specifically, when it is decided to execute the “holding change notice”, the sound lamp control device 113 refers to the value of the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f to determine the execution timing of “after strong pattern driving”. 1 execution timing is determined from the execution timings of the "holding change notice" including . FIG. 41 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot scenario table 222f1 of the third embodiment.

In the jackpot scenario table 222f1 in FIG. 41, each number of holding balls (four patterns of the number of holding balls “1” to “4”) of the variable effect at the time when the vertical row determines “prediction of change in reservation”, each A total of 12 types of situation patterns are classified according to the display mode of "holding change notice" (three patterns of "blue", "red", and "rainbow") for each number of held balls. In addition, as the timing at which the horizontal row executes (starts) the "holding change notice", 4 patterns at the time of display or shift to each number of holding balls (number of holding balls "1" to "4") and holding balls A total of 8 types of timing patterns, including 4 patterns of "start (shift time)", "before reach", "after reach" or "after pending deletion" in the number "0" (during the execution of the variable effect) are separated from each other. A value of the scenario counter 223d is associated with each divided group.

The "holding change notice" in the third embodiment is executed (appears) in a timing pattern determined by the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f for each situation pattern. is set to

Specifically, for example, as the timing of executing (starting) the "holding change notice", when "strong pattern driving" in the number of holding balls "0" (during the execution of the variation effect) is selected, A state in which the left movable accessory 87 is driven in the "strong pattern" during the variable presentation in which the "suspension change notice" is determined, that is, the execution pattern of the cockpit display area Db by the left movable accessory 87 is covered, the "hold change notice" of "after strong pattern driving" is executed in the execution pattern, and after that, when the left movable accessory 87 returns to its original position, the "hold change notice" is executed. It is configured so that executed symbols can be visually recognized again by the player.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the "holding change notice" is a holding ball count command sent from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64. In this case, a lottery is held in the audio lamp control device 113 to determine whether or not to execute the "holding change notice". When execution of the "holding change notice" is determined, first, the number of holding balls at the time of the decision and the display mode of the decided "holding change notice" are grasped. Then, when the variable effect indicated by the pending ball number command is a big win, the value of the scenario counter 223d and the big win scenario table 222f1 are referred to, and the execution timing (appearance timing) of the "holding change notice" at the time of the big win ) is determined.

As shown in FIG. 41, in the jackpot scenario table 222f1, situation patterns of the number of pending balls in the variable effect at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" and each display mode of the "holding change notice" are prepared. A value of the scenario counter 223d is associated with the situation pattern.

First, a case will be described where the number of pending balls in the variable effect is "1" at the time when the "holding change notice" of the big win is determined. In this case, the number of held balls "2" to "4" does not exist when the number of held balls "1" occurs. That is, when the number of reserved balls "1" occurs, the reserved symbols of the number of reserved balls "2" to "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, when the number of pending balls is "1" when the "holding change notice" is determined, the number of holding balls becomes "2" to "4" when the "holding change notice" is executed. No value is assigned to the scenario counter 223d (see FIG. 41).

As shown in the example of FIG. 41, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 4" for "starting" with "0" pending balls, and "5 to 4" for "before reaching" with "0" pending balls. 9”, “10 to 14” for “after reach” with “0” retained balls, “15 to 49” for “after strong pattern drive” with “0” retained balls, number of retained balls It is "50 to 99" for "1".

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 5% "at the start", 5% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 5% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 5% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls The selection ratio is set such that "after strong pattern drive" is 35% and the number of reserved balls "1" (that is, when the reserved pattern is displayed) is 50%.

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variation effect of the big hit is The timing at the time of display is the most likely to be selected (50%), and next, after the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven in the "strong pattern" and the executed patterns and reserved patterns in the cockpit display area Db become invisible. It is set so that the timing at which it becomes visible again is likely to be selected (35%).

Then, as shown in the example of FIG. 41, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "starting" when the number of pending balls is "0", and "before reaching" when the number of pending balls is "0". 10 to 19”, “20 to 29” for “after reach” with “0” held balls, “30 to 89” for “after strong pattern drive” with “0” held balls, hold It is "90 to 99" for the number of balls "1".

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "1" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% "at the start", 10% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls The selection ratio is set such that "after strong pattern driving" is 60% and the number of reserved balls "1" (that is, when the reserved pattern is displayed) is 10%.

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "1" and the display mode is "red", each movable role is The timing at which the objects 87 and 88 are driven in the "strong pattern" and the executed symbols and the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db become invisible and then become visible again is set to be most likely to be selected (60%). there is

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 41, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "rainbow", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 4" for "starting" with "0" pending balls, and "before reaching" with "0" pending balls. 5 to 9”, “10 to 49” for “after reach” with “0” held balls, and “50 to 99” for “after strong pattern drive” with “0” held balls. ing. It should be noted that the display mode of the "rainbow" of the "suspended change notice" does not appear in the pending symbols, and can appear only in the executed symbols. The value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to the execution timing.

That is, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "rainbow", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is the number of pending balls "0". 5% "at the start", 5% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 40% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 40% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls The selection ratio is set such that "after strong pattern drive" is 50% and the number of reserved balls "1" (that is, when the reserved pattern is displayed) is 0%. It should be noted that the display mode of the "rainbow" of the "suspended change notice" does not appear in the pending symbols, and can appear only in the executed symbols. The value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to the execution timing.

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "1" and the display mode is "rainbow", each movable role is The timing at which the objects 87 and 88 are driven in the "strong pattern" and the executed symbols and the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db become invisible and then become visible again is the most likely to be selected (50%). It is set so that the timing during the execution of "reach display" is likely to be selected (40%). It should be noted that the display mode of the "rainbow" of the "suspension change notice" at the time of the big win is set to the above selection ratio regardless of the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "suspension change notice". Therefore, the description of the display mode of the "rainbow" of the "holding change notice" at the time of the big hit with the number of "2" to "4" holding balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is omitted.

Next, a case will be described where the number of pending balls in the variable effect is "2" at the time when the "holding change notice" of the big win is determined. In this case, the number of held balls "3" or "4" does not exist when the number of held balls "2" occurs. That is, when the number of reserved balls is "2", the reserved symbols with the number of reserved balls of "3" or "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, when the number of pending balls is "2" when the "holding change notice" is determined, the number of holding balls becomes "3" or "4" when the "holding change notice" is executed. No value is assigned to the scenario counter 223d (see FIG. 41).

As shown in the example of FIG. 41, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 4" for "starting" with "0" pending balls, and "5 to 4" for "before reaching" with "0" pending balls. 9”, “10 to 14” for “after reach” with “0” retained balls, “15 to 39” for “after strong pattern drive” with “0” retained balls, number of retained balls It is "40 to 49" for "1" and "50 to 99" for the number of held balls "2".

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 5% "at the start", 5% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 5% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 5% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls ``After strong pattern driving'' is 25%, the number of held balls is '1' (that is, when the reserved pattern is shifted) is 10%, and the number of held balls is '2' (that is, when the reserved pattern is displayed) is 50%. set as a percentage.

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variation effect of the big hit is The timing at the time of display is the most likely to be selected (50%), and next, after the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven in the "strong pattern" and the executed patterns and reserved patterns in the cockpit display area Db become invisible. It is set so that the timing at which it becomes visible again is likely to be selected (25%).

Then, as shown in the example of FIG. 41, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "starting" when the number of pending balls is "0", and "before reaching" when the number of pending balls is "0". 10 to 19”, “20 to 29” for “after reach” with “0” held balls, “30 to 79” for “after strong pattern drive” with “0” held balls, hold It is "80 to 89" for the number of balls "1" and "90 to 99" for the number of held balls "2".

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "2" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% "at the start", 10% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls Selection of 50% for "after strong pattern drive", 10% for the number of held balls of "1" (that is, when shifting the reserved pattern), and 10% for the number of held balls of "2" (that is, when the reserved pattern is displayed). set as a percentage.

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "2" and the display mode is "red", each movable role is The timing at which the objects 87 and 88 are driven in the "strong pattern" and the executed symbols and the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db become invisible and then become visible again is set to be most likely to be selected (50%). there is

Next, a case will be described where the number of pending balls in the variable effect is "3" at the time when the "holding change notice" of the big win is determined. In this case, the number of held balls "4" does not exist when the number of held balls "3" occurs. That is, when the number of reserved balls is "3", the reserved symbols with the number of reserved balls of "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, when the number of pending balls is "3" when the "holding change notice" is determined, the scenario counter 223d for the number of holding balls "4" when the "holding change notice" is executed is not assigned (see FIG. 41).

As shown in the example of FIG. 41, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 4" for "starting" with "0" pending balls, and "5 to 4" for "before reaching" with "0" pending balls. 9”, “10 to 14” for “after reach” with “0” retained balls, “15 to 29” for “after strong pattern drive” with “0” retained balls, number of retained balls "30 to 39" for "1", "40 to 49" for the number of held balls "2", and "50 to 99" for the number of held balls "3".

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 5% "at the start", 5% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 5% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 5% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls "After strong pattern driving" is 15%, the number of retained balls is "1" (that is, when the retained pattern is shifted) is 10%, the number of retained balls is "2" (that is, when the retained pattern is shifted) is 10%, retained balls The selection ratio is set such that the number "3" (that is, when the reserved symbols are displayed) is 50%.

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variation effect of the big hit is "blue". The timing at the time of display is the most likely to be selected (50%), and next, after the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven in the "strong pattern" and the executed patterns and reserved patterns in the cockpit display area Db become invisible. It is set so that the timing at which it becomes visible again is likely to be selected (15%).

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 41, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "starting" when the number of pending balls is "0", and "before reaching" when the number of pending balls is "0". 10 to 19”, “20 to 29” for “after reach” with “0” held balls, “30 to 69” for “after strong pattern drive” with “0” held balls, hold "70 to 79" for the number of "1" balls, "80 to 89" for the number of "2" held balls, and "90 to 99" for the number of "3" held balls. .

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "3" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% "at the start", 10% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls "After strong pattern driving" is 40%, the number of retained balls "1" (that is, when the retained pattern is shifted) is 10%, the number of retained balls is "2" (that is, when the retained pattern is shifted) is 10%, the retained pattern It is set so that the selection rate is 10% for "3" (that is, when the reserved symbols are displayed).

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "3" and the display mode is "red", each movable role is The timing at which the objects 87 and 88 are driven in the "strong pattern" and the executed symbols and the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db become invisible and then become visible again is set to be most likely to be selected (40%). there is

Next, a case will be described where the number of pending balls in the variable effect is "4" at the time when the "holding change notice" of the big win is determined.

As shown in the example of FIG. 41, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 4" for "starting" with "0" pending balls, and "5 to 4" for "before reaching" with "0" pending balls. 9”, “10 to 14” for “after reach” with “0” retained balls, “15 to 19” for “after strong pattern drive” with “0” retained balls, number of retained balls "20 to 29" for "1", "30 to 39" for "2" held balls, "40 to 49" for "3" held balls, "4" for held balls " is "50 to 99".

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 5% "at the start", 5% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 5% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 5% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls "After strong pattern driving" is 5%, the number of retained balls is "1" (that is, when the retained pattern is shifted) is 10%, the number of retained balls is "2" (that is, when the retained pattern is shifted) is 10%, retained balls The selection ratio is set such that the number "3" (that is, when the reserved symbols are shifted) is 10% and the reserved symbols "4" (that is, when the reserved symbols are displayed) is 50%.

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variation effect of the big hit is The display timing is set so that it is most likely to be selected (50%).

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 41, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "starting" when the number of pending balls is "0", and "before reaching" when the number of pending balls is "0". 10 to 19”, “20 to 29” for “after reach” with “0” held balls, “30 to 59” for “after strong pattern drive” with “0” held balls, hold "60 to 69" for "1" ball, "70 to 79" for "2" held ball, "80 to 89" for "3" held ball, "80 to 89" for held ball It is "90 to 99" for "4" pieces.

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "4" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% "at the start", 10% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls "After strong pattern driving" is 30%, the number of retained balls is "1" (that is, when the retained pattern is shifted) is 10%, the number of retained balls is "2" (that is, when the retained pattern is shifted) is 10%, the retained pattern. The selection ratio is set to 10% for "3" (that is, when the reserved symbols are shifted) and 10% for "4" reserved symbols (that is, when the reserved symbols are displayed).

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "4" and the display mode is "red", each movable role is The timing at which the objects 87 and 88 are driven in the "strong pattern" and the executed symbols and the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db become invisible and then become visible again is set so that it is most likely to be selected (30%). there is

In this way, when the "reserved change notice" is performed in the reserved patterns and the executed patterns showing the variable effect that generates the big win, the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven in the "strong pattern" to drive the executed patterns in the cockpit display area Db. And, after the reserved pattern becomes invisible, the "holding change notice" can appear (execute) at the timing when it becomes visible again. As a result, it is possible to directly change and notify the notice object (changeable object; in the third embodiment, the execution pattern) which is always visible, or to make a new notice object appear. Compared to the case of notifying, it is possible to casually change the display mode of the notice object while making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change of the notice object. In other words, by temporarily hiding the notice object and then casually changing it, first, the player is given a sense of discomfort, and then the root of the sense of discomfort is directly linked to the game value (for example, a big win). By recognizing this, it is possible to diversify the presentation while providing the player with an unexpected presentation, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Next, the losing scenario table 222f2 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the losing scenario table 222f2 of the third embodiment. In the losing scenario table 222f2 of FIG. 42, similarly to the big win scenario table 222f1, each number of holding balls of the variable effect at the time when the vertical row determines "holding change notice" (4 patterns of 1 to 4 holding balls) ), a total of 12 types of situation patterns are classified according to the display mode (3 patterns of “blue”, “red”, and “rainbow”) of “holding change notice” for each number of holding balls. there is In addition, as the timing at which the horizontal row executes (starts) the "holding change notice", 4 patterns at the time of display or shift to each number of holding balls (number of holding balls "1" to "4") and holding balls A total of 8 types of timing patterns, including 4 patterns of "start (shift time)", "before reach", "after reach" or "after pending deletion" in the number "0" (during the execution of the variable effect) are separated from each other. A value of the scenario counter 223d is associated with each divided group.

As shown in FIG. 42, in the scenario table 222f2 for losing, situation patterns of the number of pending balls in the variable effect at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" and each display mode of the "holding change notice" are prepared. A value of the scenario counter 223d is associated with the situation pattern. It should be noted that the "rainbow" in the display mode of the "holding change notice" indicates the occurrence of a big win when the "rainbow" display mode appears, and is not selected in the event of a loss. Therefore, in the "rainbow" situation pattern of the losing scenario table 222f2, the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to any of the pending numbers of the variable effects at the time when the "pending change notice" is determined. are omitted.

First, a case will be described where the number of pending balls in the variable effect is "1" at the time when the "holding change notice" for losing is determined. In this case, the number of held balls "2" to "4" does not exist when the number of held balls "1" occurs. That is, when the number of reserved balls "1" occurs, the reserved symbols of the number of reserved balls "2" to "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this losing scenario table 222f2, when the number of pending balls is "1" when the "holding change notice" is determined, the number of holding balls becomes "2" to "4" when the "holding change notice" is executed. No value is assigned to the scenario counter 223d (see FIG. 42).

As shown in the example of FIG. 42, when the number of pending balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "starting" with "0" pending balls, and "10 to 9" for "before reach" with "0" pending balls. 19”, “20 to 29” for “after reach” with “0” held balls, “30 to 39” for “after strong pattern drive” with “0” held balls, number of held balls It is "40 to 99" for "1".

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% "at the start", 10% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls The selection ratio is set such that "after strong pattern drive" is 10% and the number of reserved balls "1" (that is, when the reserved pattern is displayed) is 60%.

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variable performance of the loss is "blue". The display timing is set so that it is most likely to be selected (60%).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the value of the scenario counter 223d was not assigned to "after pending deletion" in the losing scenario table 222f2, but in the losing scenario table 222f2 of the third embodiment, It is set to allocate the scenario counter 223d to the execution timing "after strong pattern driving". This is because each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 can be executed even in the variable effect of losing, and even if the "strong pattern" of each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is executed, the "big win display" is not confirmed. is.

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 42, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 19" for "at the start" of "0" pending balls, and "before reach" for "0" pending balls. 20 to 39”, “40 to 59” for “after reach” with “0” held balls, “60 to 69” for “after strong pattern drive” with “0” held balls, hold It is "70 to 99" for the number of balls "1".

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "1" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". "At the start" of 20%, 20% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 20% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 20% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls The selection ratio is set such that "after strong pattern drive" is 10% and the number of reserved balls "1" (that is, when the reserved pattern is displayed) is 30%.

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "1" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variable effect of the loss is "red". The display timing is set so that it is most likely to be selected (30%).

Next, a case will be described in which the number of pending balls in the variable effect is "2" at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" for losing. In this case, the number of held balls "3" or "4" does not exist when the number of held balls "2" occurs. That is, when the number of reserved balls is "2", the reserved symbols with the number of reserved balls of "3" or "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this losing scenario table 222f2, when the number of pending balls is "2" when the "holding change notice" is determined, the number of holding balls becomes "3" or "4" when the "holding change notice" is executed. No value is assigned to the scenario counter 223d (see FIG. 42).

As shown in the example of FIG. 42, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "starting" with "0" pending balls, and "10 to 9" for "before reach" with "0" pending balls. 19”, “20 to 29” for “after reach” with “0” held balls, “30 to 39” for “after strong pattern drive” with “0” held balls, number of held balls It is "40 to 49" for "1" and "50 to 99" for the number of held balls "2".

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% "at the start", 10% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls Selection of 10% for "after strong pattern drive", 10% for the number of held balls "1" (that is, when the reserved pattern is shifted), and 50% for the number of held balls of "2" (that is, when the reserved pattern is displayed). set as a percentage.

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variable effect of losing is "blue". The display timing is set so that it is most likely to be selected (50%).

Next, when the number of pending balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" shown in the example of FIG. 42 is "2" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing and scenario of the "holding change notice" Correlation with the value of the counter 223d is "0 to 19" for "starting" when the number of held balls is "0", and "20 to 39" for "before reaching" when the number of held balls is "0". ”, “40 to 59” for “after reach” with “0” retained balls, “60 to 69” for “after strong pattern drive” with “0” retained balls, number of retained balls “ It is "70 to 79" for 1" and "80 to 99" for the number of held balls "2".

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "2" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". "At the start" of 20%, 20% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 20% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 20% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls ``After strong pattern driving'' is 10%, the number of held balls is '1' (that is, when the held pattern is shifted) is 10%, and the number of held balls is '2' (that is, when the held pattern is displayed) is 20%. set as a percentage.

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "2" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variable effect of the loss is "red". It is set so that the timing at the time of display and "at the start", "before reach" or "after reach" of the variable effect are easily selected (each 20%).

Next, a case will be described in which the number of pending balls in the variable effect is "3" at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" of loss. In this case, the number of held balls "4" does not exist when the number of held balls "3" occurs. That is, when the number of reserved balls is "3", the reserved symbols with the number of reserved balls of "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this losing scenario table 222f2, when the number of pending balls is "3" when the "holding change notice" is determined, the scenario counter 223d for the number of holding balls of "4" when the "holding change notice" is executed is not assigned (see FIG. 42).

As shown in the example of FIG. 42, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "starting" with "0" pending balls, and "10 to 9" for "before reach" with "0" pending balls. 19”, “20 to 29” for “after reach” with “0” held balls, “30 to 39” for “after strong pattern drive” with “0” held balls, number of held balls "40 to 49" for "1", "50 to 59" for the number of held balls "2", and "60 to 99" for the number of held balls "3".

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% "at the start", 10% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls "After strong pattern driving" is 10%, the number of retained balls is "1" (that is, when the retained pattern is shifted) is 10%, the number of retained balls is "2" (that is, when the retained pattern is shifted) is 10%, retained balls The selection ratio is set such that the number "3" (that is, when the reserved symbols are displayed) is 40%.

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variable effect of the loss is "blue". The display timing is set so that it is most likely to be selected (40%).

Then, as shown in the example of FIG. 42, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 19" for "at the start" of "0" pending balls, and "before reach" for "0" pending balls. 20 to 39”, “40 to 59” for “after reach” with “0” held balls, “60 to 69” for “after strong pattern drive” with “0” held balls, hold "70 to 79" for the number of "1" balls, "80 to 89" for the number of "2" held balls, and "90 to 99" for the number of "3" held balls. .

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "3" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". "At the start" of 20%, 20% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 20% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 20% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls "After strong pattern driving" is 10%, the number of retained balls is "1" (that is, when the retained pattern is shifted) is 10%, the number of retained balls is "2" (that is, when the retained pattern is shifted) is 10%, the retained pattern. It is set so that the selection ratio is 10% for "3" (that is, when the reserved symbols are displayed).

Therefore, when the "reservation change notice" of the execution pattern or the reservation design corresponding to the change performance of the loss is "3" and the display mode is "red", the variation performance "At the start", "before reach" or "after reach" are set to be easily selected (each 20%).

Next, a case will be described where the number of pending balls in the variable effect at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" for losing is "4".

As shown in the example of FIG. 42, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "starting" with "0" pending balls, and "10 to 9" for "before reach" with "0" pending balls. 19”, “20 to 29” for “after reach” with “0” held balls, “30 to 39” for “after strong pattern drive” with “0” held balls, number of held balls "40 to 49" for "1", "50 to 59" for "2" held balls, "60 to 69" for "3" held balls, "4" for held balls " is "70 to 99".

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 10% "at the start", 10% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls "After strong pattern driving" is 10%, the number of retained balls is "1" (that is, when the retained pattern is shifted) is 10%, the number of retained balls is "2" (that is, when the retained pattern is shifted) is 10%, retained balls The selection ratio is set such that the number "3" (that is, when the reserved symbols are shifted) is 10% and the reserved symbols "4" (that is, when the reserved symbols are displayed) is 30%.

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variable effect of the loss is "blue". The display timing is set so that it is most likely to be selected (30%).

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 42, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 19" for "at the start" of "0" pending balls, and "before reach" for "0" pending balls. 20 to 39”, “40 to 49” for “after reach” with “0” held balls, “50 to 59” for “after strong pattern drive” with “0” held balls, hold "60 to 69" for "1" balls, "70 to 79" for "2" held balls, "80 to 89" for "3" held balls, "80 to 89" for held balls It is "90 to 99" for "4" pieces.

That is, when the number of pending balls when the "holding change notice" is determined is "4" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "0". 20% "at the start", 20% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, 10% "0" pending balls "After strong pattern driving" is 10%, the number of retained balls is "1" (that is, when the retained pattern is shifted) is 10%, the number of retained balls is "2" (that is, when the retained pattern is shifted) is 10%, the retained pattern The selection ratio is set to 10% for "3" (that is, when the reserved symbols are shifted) and 10% for "4" reserved symbols (that is, when the reserved symbols are displayed).

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "4" and the display mode is "red", the variable effect It is set so that "at the start" or "before reaching" is likely to be selected (20% each).

In this way, even if the same "holding change notice (for example," blue ")" is different at the time of losing the variable production and at the time of the big hit, the execution timing (appearance timing) is different, so that the "holding change notice , and the timing at which the display mode appears. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the suggested content of the degree of expectation for a big win by the "suspension change notice" according to the display mode and appearance timing of the "suspension change notice", thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 40, the description continues. In addition to the RAM 223 of the first or second embodiment, the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the third embodiment includes at least a drive lottery counter 223g, a normal weak flag 223h, a super weak flag 223i, and a super strong flag 223j. is provided.

The driving lottery counter 223g is a counter for lottery of whether or not each movable accessory 87, 88 is driven and the driving pattern. As described above, the sound ramp control device 113 controls each of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 according to the pending ball number command received from the main control device 110. Prefetching can be performed based on the values, the jackpot random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the fluctuation pattern table 222d. In the look-ahead processing, the performance mode of the variable performance indicated by the reserved ball number command is grasped, and based on the performance mode, the driving lottery counter 223g and the role lottery table 222g determine whether or not the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven and the driving pattern. is selected.

This drive lottery counter 223g is incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99") in the counter update process (see S1111 in FIG. 28) of the main process of the sound lamp control device 113, and reaches the maximum value. (For example, in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 99", it returns to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the drive lottery counter 223g is updated (eg, incremented by 1) once (see S1111 in FIG. 28) each time the main process loops. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when a reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the performance mode of the variable performance indicated by the reserved ball number command is grasped, and a driven lottery counter is based on the performance mode. With reference to the value of 223g and the accessory lottery table 222g, the presence or absence of driving of each movable accessory 87, 88 and the drive pattern are selected by lottery (see S1363 in FIG. 48).

Here, with reference to FIG. 43, the role lottery table 222g will be described. FIG. 43 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the accessory lottery table 222g. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pending ball number command from the main control device 110, it refers to the accessory lottery table 222g based on the value of the driving lottery counter 223g at that time, and selects each movable accessory 87, Whether or not to drive 88 and the drive pattern are determined. As shown in FIG. 43, the accessory lottery table 222g is grouped based on the selected effect mode.

Specifically, for "non-reach" that is referred to when the "non-reach (shortened and normal)" production mode at the time of loss is determined, and "normal reach" at the time of loss. For "Normal Reach: Normal" and "Super Reach: Normal" and "Super Reach: Super" to be referenced when the "Super Reach" production mode at the time of loss is determined, and at the time of loss For "Special Reach: Normal" and "Special Reach: Special" referred to when the "Special Reach" production mode is determined, and "Normal Reach" at the time of the jackpot Reference when the performance mode is determined For "normal reach: normal time", and "super reach: normal time" and "super reach: super time" to be referred to when the "super reach" production mode at the time of the jackpot is determined, and at the time of the jackpot It is divided into ``special reach: normal time'' and ``special reach: special time'', which are referred to when the ``special reach'' production mode is determined, and ``special variation'' at the time of the big hit. A possible value of the drive lottery counter 223g is associated with each divided group.

In addition, in the accessory lottery table 222g, the value of the drive lottery counter 223g is not assigned to the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of losing. This is because when trying to drive each movable accessory 87, 88 with a "weak pattern" or a "strong pattern", a certain driving time is required from the start of driving to the end of driving in either driving pattern. . The "non-reach" effect mode at the time of losing is set with a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, 3 seconds in the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode, 10 seconds in the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode). , does not have the effect range for driving the movable accessories 87 and 88 .

Here, with reference to FIG. 44, an effect time for each variable element in the variable effect will be described. FIG. 44(a) is a diagram showing an example of performance time for each variable element of the variable performance, and FIG. It is a figure showing an example of drive time. A variable element constitutes a part of one variable effect, and one variable effect is configured by combining each variable element. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, as the variable elements, the variable element of "high-speed variation", the variable element of "low-speed variation", the variable element of "pseudo-gase", the variable element of "pseudo-run 1", the variable element of "pseudo-run 2" variable element, "normal reach" variable element, "super reach" variable element, "special reach" variable element, "re-variable" variable element, and "movie" variable element are provided.

As shown in FIG. 44(a), the variable element of "high-speed variation" in the third embodiment is performed for 3 seconds at the beginning of the variable performance when the "non-reach (shortened)" performance mode is selected. When a performance mode other than the "non-reach (shortened)" performance mode (for example, the "non-reach (normal)" performance mode) is selected, the variation performance is performed for 7 seconds at the beginning.

The variable element of "low speed fluctuation" in the third embodiment is not executed when the "non-reach (shortening)" production mode is selected, and production modes other than the "non-reach (shortening)" production mode (for example, " If the non-reach (normal) effect mode) is selected, it will be performed for 3 seconds after the variable element of "high-speed variation".

The variable element of the "pseudo-gase" of the third embodiment is that the variable element of "pseudo-variation" is performed for 10 seconds after the variable element of the first "low-speed fluctuation", and the variable element of "pseudo-run 1" is 1 After the variation element of "low speed variation" for the second time, it is performed for 20 seconds together with the variation element of "pseudo variation", and the variation element of "pseudo continuous 2" is performed after the variation element of It is performed for 30 seconds in conjunction with the "Variation" variable element.

The variable element of "normal reach" in the third embodiment is performed for 5 seconds after the variable element of "low speed variation, etc.". In addition, the "super reach" variable element of the third embodiment is performed for 10 seconds after the execution of the "normal reach" variable element. Furthermore, the "special reach" variable element of the third embodiment is performed for 20 seconds after the execution of the "normal reach" variable element. Further, the variable element of "re-variation" in the third embodiment is performed for 10 seconds after any "reach display". Furthermore, the "movie" variation element of the third embodiment is performed for 40 seconds after the "slow variation" variation element.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44(b), the "weak pattern" of each movable accessory 87, 88 is driven from the initial position (upright position) to the driving position (tilted position), and then again in the initial position (upright position). It is a drive pattern that takes 3 seconds to return to the position). Specifically, the "weak pattern" of each movable accessory 87, 88 is 1 second to move from the initial position to the driving position, 1 second to maintain the state of the driving position, and 1 second to move from the driving position to the initial position. This is a drive pattern that is performed for a total of 3 seconds.

Further, the "strong pattern" of each movable accessory 87, 88 is driven from the initial position (upright position) to the driving position (tilted position), and then it takes 8 seconds to return to the initial position (upright position). It's a pattern. Specifically, the "strong pattern" of each movable accessory 87, 88 is 2 seconds to move from the initial position to the driving position, 4 seconds to maintain the state of the driving position, and 2 seconds to move from the driving position to the initial position. This is a drive pattern that is performed for a total of 8 seconds.

Therefore, since the driving time of the "weak pattern" of each movable accessory 87, 88 is as short as 3 seconds, each variation such as the variable element of "normal reach" and the variable element of "super reach" shown in FIG. It is executable on the element. On the other hand, since the driving time of the "strong pattern" of each movable accessory 87, 88 is as long as 8 seconds, the variable element of "high speed variation", the variable element of "low speed variation" and the variable element of "normal reach" are executed. It is a drive pattern that cannot be

Here, with reference to FIG. 45, the drive patterns and drive timings of the movable accessories 87 and 88 in the variable performance will be described. FIG. 45 is a time chart showing the driving time and driving timing of each movable accessory 87, 88 in each variable performance. FIG. FIG. 45B is a time chart showing the relationship between the "weak patterns" of the role objects 87 and 88, and FIG. 45(c) is a time chart showing the relationship between "weak pattern" and "strong pattern" of each movable accessory 87, 88 in the variable element of "special reach". is.

As shown in FIG. 45(a), "normal reach only ("E201H" or "E501H")" includes, as variable elements, a "high-speed fluctuation" variable element, a "low-speed fluctuation" variable element, and a "normal reach" variable element. It consists of the variable elements of Then, the drive pattern and drive timing of each movable accessory 87, 88 in this "normal reach only ("E201H" or "E501H")" is one type of "weak pattern" only when the variable element of "normal reach" is executed. is provided. This is because in the variable performance of "normal reach only ("E201H" or "E501H")", the variable element of "normal reach" is executed for only 5 seconds, so the "strong pattern (8 seconds)" of each movable accessory 87, 88 ' cannot be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 45(b), "only super reach ("E301H" or "E601H")" includes, as variable elements, a "high-speed variation" variable element, a "low-speed variation" variable element, It consists of a “normal reach” variable element and a “super reach” variable element. Then, the drive pattern and drive timing of each movable accessory 87, 88 in this "only super reach ("E301H" or "E601H")" are the "weak pattern" at the time of execution of the variable element of "normal reach" and the " Three types of "weak pattern" or "strong pattern" are provided at the time of execution of the variable element of "super reach". This is because in the variable effect of "only super reach ("E301H" or "E601H")", the "strong pattern" of each movable accessory 87, 88 cannot be executed with the variable element of "normal reach", This is because the "strong pattern" of each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 can be executed in the variable element of "super reach" because the variable element of "super reach" is performed for 10 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 45(c), "only special reach ("E401H" or "E701H")" includes, as variable elements, a variable element of "high-speed variation", a variable element of "low-speed variation", It consists of "Normal Reach" variable elements and "Special Reach" variable elements. Then, the drive pattern and drive timing of each movable accessory 87, 88 in this "only special reach ("E401H" or "E701H")" are the "weak pattern" at the time of execution of the variable element of "normal reach" and the " Three types of "weak pattern" or "strong pattern" are provided at the time of execution of the variable element of "special reach". This is because in the variable effect of "only special reach ("E401H" or "E701H")", the "strong pattern" of each movable accessory 87, 88 cannot be executed with the variable element of "normal reach", This is because the "strong pattern" of each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 can be executed in the variable element of "special reach" because the variable element of "special reach" is performed for 20 seconds.

Therefore, the "weak pattern" drive pattern of each movable accessory 87, 88 can be driven when the "normal reach" variable element, the "super reach" variable element, and the "special reach" variable element are executed. The “strong pattern” drive pattern is configured to be drivable only when the “super reach” variable element and the “special reach” variable element are executed.

In this way, since the drive pattern of each movable accessory 87, 88 is completed in each variable element (initial position→drive position→initial position), the performance content of each variable element and the effect of each movable accessory 87, 88 An effect interlocked with the driving contents can be executed, and an easy-to-understand powerful effect can be executed with the third pattern display device 81 and each of the movable accessories 87 and 88.例文帳に追加

It should be noted that the driving pattern of each movable accessory 87, 88 may be provided with a driving pattern that is executed across variable elements. By configuring in this way, it is possible to freely set the start of driving of each movable accessory 87, 88, making it difficult to predict when each movable accessory 87, 88 will start to move, providing an unexpected performance. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 43, the description continues. As described above, in the accessory lottery table 222g, the value of the driving lottery counter 223g is not assigned to the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of losing. Therefore, in the third embodiment, the movable accessories 87 and 88 are set not to be driven in the "non-reach" production mode.

Next, in the accessory lottery table 222g, only "normal time" is selectable as the driving timing for the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of losing. In the example shown in FIG. 43, the value of the drive lottery counter 223g and the drive pattern in the "normal reach" presentation mode are associated with "0 to 89" for "none" and "weak pattern" for "normal". On the other hand, it is "90-99". Since no value is assigned to the "strong pattern", it is written as "-".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of failure is selected, the pattern of "none" in which the movable accessories 87 and 88 are not driven is 90%, and the drive pattern of "weak pattern" at "normal time" is 10%. %, and the "strong pattern" drive pattern in the "normal mode" is set to be selected at a rate of 0%. Therefore, in the drive pattern of each movable accessory 87, 88 selected in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of failure, the "none" pattern in which the movable accessory 87, 88 is not driven is likely to be selected (90%). It has become.

Next, in the accessory lottery table 222g, "normal time" and "super time" are selectable as the drive timing for the "super reach" effect mode at the time of losing. In the example shown in FIG. 43, the value of the drive lottery counter 223g and the drive pattern in the "super ready-to-win" effect mode are associated with "0 to 69" for "none" and "weak pattern" for "normal". ``70 to 79'' for the ``weak pattern'' of the ``super hour'', ``80 to 89'' for the ``strong pattern'' of the ``super hour'', and ``90 to 99''. Since no value is assigned to the "strong pattern" of "normal", it is indicated as "-".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of failure is selected, the pattern of "none" in which the movable accessories 87 and 88 are not driven is 70%, and the drive pattern of "weak pattern" at "normal time" is. 10%, 0% for "strong pattern" drive pattern in "normal time", 10% for "weak pattern" drive pattern in "super mode", 10% for "strong pattern" drive pattern in "super mode" , is set to be selected at a rate of Therefore, in the drive pattern of each movable accessory 87, 88 selected in the "super reach" effect mode at the time of failure, the "none" pattern in which the movable accessory 87, 88 is not driven is easily selected (70% ).

Next, in the accessory lottery table 222g, "normal" and "special" are selectable as the drive timing for the "special reach" effect mode at the time of losing. In the example shown in FIG. 43, the value of the drive lottery counter 223g and the drive pattern in the "special reach" presentation mode are associated with "0 to 49" for "none" and "weak pattern" for "normal". ``50 to 79'' for the ``weak pattern'' of ``special'', ``80 to 89'' for the ``strong pattern'' of ``special'', and ``90 to 99''. Since no value is assigned to the "strong pattern" of "normal", it is indicated as "-".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of failure is selected, the pattern of "no" in which the movable accessories 87 and 88 are not driven is 50%, and the drive pattern of "weak pattern" at "normal time" is. 30%, 0% for "strong pattern" drive pattern "in normal", 10% for "weak pattern" drive pattern in "special", 10% for "strong pattern" drive pattern in "special" , is set to be selected at a rate of Therefore, in the drive pattern of each movable accessory 87, 88 selected in the "special reach" production mode at the time of losing, the "none" pattern in which the movable accessory 87, 88 is not driven is easily selected (50% ).

Next, in the accessory lottery table 222g, only the drive timing of "normal time" is prepared so as to be selectable in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of the big win. In the example shown in FIG. 43, the value of the drive lottery counter 223g and the drive pattern in the "normal reach" rendering mode are "0 to 29" for "none" and "weak pattern" for "normal". On the other hand, it is "30 to 99". Since no value is assigned to the "strong pattern", it is written as "-".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of the big hit is selected, the pattern of "none" in which the movable accessories 87 and 88 are not driven is 30%, and the drive pattern of "weak pattern" at "normal time" is 70%. %, and the drive pattern of "strong pattern" in "normal mode" is set to be selected at a rate of 0%. Therefore, among the drive patterns of the movable accessories 87 and 88 selected in the "normal reach" presentation mode at the time of the big win, the drive pattern in which the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven in the "weak pattern" in the "normal time" is selected. It is set (70%) so that it is easy to

Next, in the accessory lottery table 222g, "normal time" and "super time" are selectable as drive timings for the "super reach" effect mode at the time of the big win. In the example shown in FIG. 43, the value of the drive lottery counter 223g and the drive pattern in the "super ready-to-win" rendering mode are associated with "0 to 19" for "none" and "weak pattern" for "normal". ``20 to 49'' for the ``weak pattern'' of the ``super hour'', ``50 to 69'' for the ``strong pattern'' of the ``super hour'', and ``70 to 99''. Since no value is assigned to the "strong pattern" of "normal", it is indicated as "-".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of the big hit is selected, the pattern of "none" in which the movable accessories 87 and 88 are not driven is 20%, and the drive pattern of "weak pattern" at "normal time" is. 30%, 0% for "strong pattern" drive pattern in "normal time", 20% for "weak pattern" drive pattern in "super mode", 30% for "strong pattern" drive pattern in "super mode" , is set to be selected at a rate of Therefore, in the drive pattern of each movable accessory 87, 88 selected in the "super reach" effect mode at the time of the big win, the drive pattern to be driven in the "weak pattern" at "normal time" and the drive pattern to be driven in "strong pattern" at "super time". Pattern” is set so that the drive pattern driven by “Pattern” is easily selected (each 30%).

Next, in the accessory lottery table 222g, the "special ready-to-win" effect mode at the time of the big win is prepared so that the driving timing can be selected between "normal" and "special". In the example shown in FIG. 43, the value of the drive lottery counter 223g and the drive pattern in the "special reach" rendering mode are associated with "0 to 9" for "none" and "weak pattern" for "normal". ``10 to 19'' for the ``weak pattern'' of ``special'', ``20 to 49'' for the ``strong pattern'' of ``special'', and ``50 to 99''. Since no value is assigned to the "strong pattern" of "normal", it is indicated as "-".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of the big hit is selected, the pattern of "none" in which the movable accessories 87 and 88 are not driven is 10%, and the drive pattern of "weak pattern" at "normal time" is selected. 10%, 0% for "strong pattern" drive pattern in "normal time", 30% for "weak pattern" drive pattern in "special time", 50% for "strong pattern" drive pattern in "special time" , is set to be selected at a rate of Therefore, in the drive pattern of each movable accessory 87, 88 selected in the "special reach" presentation mode at the time of the big win, the drive pattern driven in the "strong pattern" at the time of "special" is easily selected (50%). It has become.

Next, in the accessory lottery table 222g, the value of the drive lottery counter 223g is not assigned to the "special variation" effect mode at the time of the big win. Therefore, in the third embodiment, the movable accessories 87 and 88 are set not to be driven in the "special variation" rendering mode. This is because, in the "special variation" effect mode, the "movie" variable element is executed, and the effect of the "movie" variable element is the "battle effect" of the "super reach" variable element, or the "special reach" effect. This is because it is not an effect corresponding to the driving mode of each movable accessory 87, 88 like the "competitive effect" of the variable element. Therefore, when the "special variation" presentation mode at the time of the big win is selected, the movable accessories 87 and 88 are configured not to be driven.

In this way, by using the accessory lottery table 222g and the drive lottery counter 223g, the drive pattern and the drive timing of each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 are selected from a plurality of patterns set in advance, and at the time of the big win and the loss. To diversify suggested content of the degree of expectation for a big win by driving the movable accessories 87 and 88 according to the driving pattern and the driving timing of the movable accessories 87 and 88 by changing the respective selection ratios depending on the time. It is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 40, the description is continued. The pending information storage area 223e stores information for performing the prefetching process, that is, the first win random number counter C1 and the first hit random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer in accordance with the start winning in the main controller 110 and transmitted by the pending ball number command. Each value of the hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, the hold change information indicating the display mode of the "hold change notice", the scenario data showing the execution timing of the "hold change notice", and each This is an area for storing drive pattern information indicating the drive pattern of the movable accessories 87 and 88 .

The sound lamp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold information storage area 223e and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222 to perform prefetch processing (hold display setting processing ( See FIG. 48)) is executed. Also, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the pending change information, scenario data and drive pattern information obtained by the pre-reading process in the pending change information storage area 223e5, the scenario data storage area 223e6 and the drive pattern information storage area 223e5 of the pending information storage area 223e. The values are stored in the areas 223e10, and the "holding change notice" is executed based on the values stored in the areas 223e5, 223e6, and 223e10.

Details of the pending information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f of the third embodiment will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the pending information storage area 223e and execution information storage area 223f of the third embodiment. The configuration of the pending information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f in the third embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that each movable accessory 87 is stored in the pending information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f. , 88 for storing drive pattern information, and pending erase information storage areas 223e7 and 223f7 and re-variation information storage areas 223e8 and 223f8. There is no point and there is. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, description thereof will be omitted.

The pending deletion information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f of the third embodiment are not provided with the pending deletion information storage areas 223e7 and 223f7 and the re-change information storage areas 223e8 and 223f8. The storage capacity is reduced compared to the information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pending ball number command, the value of the sub pending ball number counter 223b updated by the pending ball number command in the pending information storage areas 1 to 4 of the pending information storage area 223e. Based on the values of the respective counter storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the X-th area storing the pending information corresponding to , the prefetching process (holding display setting process (see FIG. 48)) is performed, and based on the result of this prefetching process, The pending change information, scenario data and drive pattern information thus obtained are stored in storage areas 223e5, 223e6 and 223e10 of the same X-th area for storing pending information.

On the other hand, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command and a stop type command meaning the start of the variation effect from the main control device 110, shift processing is performed in the pending information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f. That is, the suspended variable performance is reduced by one, and the execution of the variable performance suspended first in terms of time is started, so that the first area for storing the suspended information corresponding to the first suspended variable performance is stored. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e6 and 223e10 and various types of information (data) are stored in the execution information storage areas 223f corresponding to the variable performance currently being executed. , 223f10.

In addition, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e6 and 223e10 of the pending information storage second area and various information (data) are stored in the respective storage areas 223e1 to 223e1 of the pending information storage first area. 223e6 and 223e10, and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e6 and 223e10 of the third pending information storage area and various information (data) are transferred to the second pending information storage area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e6 and 223e10 of the fourth storage area 223e1 to 223e6 and 223e10 and various information (data) are stored as the suspension information It is moved to each of the storage areas 223e1 to 223e6 and 223e10 of the third storage area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223f stores the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203c of the main controller 110. FIG. In addition, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first to fourth holding areas of the holding ball storage area 203b of the main controller 110 are stored in the first to fourth holding information storage areas. will be That is, in the sound lamp control device 113, counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the variable effects being executed and held by the main control device 110 are stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the hold information storage area 223e. be.

In the third embodiment, in the pre-reading process when the pending ball number command is received, the value of each counter C1 etc. indicated by the pending ball number command is determined, and each movable accessory 87, 88 is determined based on the determination result. The driving pattern information is stored in the driving pattern information storage area 223e10. Instead of this, when receiving the variation pattern command and the stop type command, determine each movable accessory 87, 88 indicated by the variation pattern command and the stop type command, and execute various processes based on the determination result may be configured. By configuring in this way, it becomes impossible to store the driving patterns of the movable accessories 87 and 88 in the pre-reading process. 223e10 and 223f10 are no longer required, and the storage capacity of the RAM 223 can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 40, the description continues. A normal weak flag 223h, a super weak flag 223i and a super strong flag 223j provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment are flags indicating the drive timing of each movable accessory 87, 88 in the ON state. . The normal weak flag 223h, the super weak flag 223i and the super strong flag 223j are set to off as initial values when the power is turned on.

In the third embodiment, when the number of reserved balls command is received, a drive lottery for each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is performed (see S1362 in FIG. 48). The information is stored in the drive pattern information storage area 223e10 of the X-th area for storage of suspension information indicated by the number of suspension balls command. Then, at the start of the variable effect, the winning driving timing is determined, and one of the normal weak flag 223h, the super weak flag 223i, or the super strong flag 223j is turned on for each driving timing (S1453 to S1455 in FIG. 49). reference). Further, after driving each movable accessory 87, 88 based on the normal weak flag 223h, the super weak flag 223i or the super strong flag 223j, the normal weak flag 223h, the super weak flag 223i or the super strong flag 223j is set to off. (See S1606, S1611 and S1615 in FIG. 51).

The audio ramp control device 113 of the third embodiment, when executing the variable effect, in the character product driving process (see S1151 in FIG. 28), which will be described later, which is executed in the main process (see S1151 in FIG. 28) The element and the normal weak flag 223h, the super weak flag 223i or the super strong flag 223j are confirmed, and the drive control of each movable accessory 87, 88 is performed.

Specifically, a timer (not shown) is provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the MPU 221 grasps the variation pattern and variation time of the variation performance to be executed. Then, when the weak normal flag 223h is turned on, the MPU 221 determines that the fluctuation element of "normal reach" is being executed (for example, one second from the start of the fluctuation element of "normal reach") according to the grasped fluctuation pattern and fluctuation time. later), set a value (eg, "11000") so that the timer times out. Then, the value of the timer is updated (subtracted) at the start of the variable performance, and each movable accessory 87, 88 is driven in the "weak pattern" at the timing when the timer times up (for example, "0"). do.

In addition, when the super weak flag 223i is turned on, the MPU 221 is executing the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" (for example, "super reach ” or 1 second after the start of the variable element of “Special Reach”), set a value (for example, “16000”) so that the timer times out. Then, the value of the timer is updated (subtracted) at the start of the variable performance, and each movable accessory 87, 88 is driven in the "weak pattern" at the timing when the timer times up (for example, "0"). do.

In addition, when the super strong flag 223j is turned on, the MPU 221 is executing the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" (for example, "super reach ” or 1 second after the start of the variable element of “Special Reach”), set a value (for example, “16000”) so that the timer times out. Then, the value of the timer is updated (subtracted) at the start of the variable performance, and each movable accessory 87, 88 is driven with the "strong pattern" at the timing when the timer times up (for example, "0").

In addition, the driving start timing of the "weak pattern" and "strong pattern" of each movable accessory 87, 88 is driven at the timing after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has passed from the start of the variable element of each reach. However, instead of this configuration, the start timing may be different for each drive pattern. With this configuration, the player plays the game while expecting whether or not the movable accessories 87 and 88 will be driven at each timing, so that the chances of getting interested can be increased.

The input/output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, the left movable accessory 87, the right movable accessory 88, and the like. connected to each other.

The MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 drives the left movable accessory 87 by a left accessory motor (not shown) in accordance with the settings of the normal weak flag 223h, super weak flag 223i and super strong flag 223j. In addition, the right movable accessory 88 is driven by a motor (not shown) for the right accessory.

As described above, the "strong pattern" drive pattern of each movable accessory 87, 88 is configured to be executed only when the "super reach" or "special reach" variable element is executed. By configuring in this way, for example, the execution timing of "hold change notice", by allocating more to the second half of the variable effect ("after reach" or "after strong pattern drive"), in the second half of the variable effect It is possible to make the player play while expecting the occurrence (appearance) of the "reservation change notice" that increases the expectation of the big win even if it becomes. Therefore, the player can play the game while anticipating a big win until the second half of the variable presentation, so that the player can be entertained for a long period of time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, main processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to perform the role product driving process (S1151) in the main process in order to drive and control the movable accessories 87 and 88.

Specifically, in the process of S1101 of the main process of the third embodiment, if it is determined that 1 millisecond or more has passed since the process of S1101 was last executed (S1101: Yes), As in the case of the form, after performing the processing of S1102 to S1108, the processing proceeds to S1151. In the process of S1151, a role drive process for driving each of the movable roles 87 and 88 is performed (S1151), and then the process proceeds to a variable effect process of S1109. Details of this accessory driving process (S1151) will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, this variation effect processing (S1109) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the pending display setting process (S1209) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a hold display setting process, which is one process of the command determination process (see S1110 in FIG. 47) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113, when receiving the number of pending balls command, performs this pending display setting process, when the execution of the "holding change notice" is determined, pending change information and scenario The data are stored in the respective storage areas 223e5 and 223e6 of the X-th area for storing reserved information indicated by the number-of-held-balls command. Also, the audio lamp control device 113 determines whether or not each movable accessory 87, 88 is driven in the variable effect indicated by the reserved ball number command. As a result of determination, when each movable accessory 87, 88 is driven in the variable performance, drive pattern information indicating the drive pattern of each movable accessory 87, 88 is stored in the drive pattern information storage area 223e10. It is configured.

Specifically, in the process of S1303 of the pending display setting process (S1209), it is determined whether or not the execution lottery for the "holding change notice" has been won based on the various information indicated by the pending ball number command received this time ( S1303). As a result of the determination, if the execution lottery for the "holding change notice" is not won (S1303: No), the "holding change notice" is not executed. Null data is stored in the pending change information storage area 223e5 and the scenario data storage area 223e6 of the X area (S1361), and the process proceeds to S1362.

On the other hand, in the process of S1303, if the execution lottery for the "hold change notice" is won (S1303: Yes), the processes of S1304 and S1305 are performed as in the first embodiment, and the hold change information and the scenario data are Stored in the storage areas 223e5 and 223e6 of the X-th storage area for storage information indicated by the number-of-holds-balls command, and the process proceeds to S1362.

In the process of S1362, it is determined whether or not the drive lottery for driving each movable accessory 87, 88 in the variable effect indicated by the pending ball number command received this time has been won (S1362). This determination is made by referring to the drive lottery counter 223g and the role lottery table 222g, and when the value of the drive lottery counter 223g corresponds to "None" in the role lottery table 222g corresponding to the effect mode of the corresponding variable effect. determines that the driving lottery has not been won, and if the value of the driving lottery counter 223g corresponds to the "weak pattern" or "strong pattern" of the accessory lottery table 222g, it is determined that the driving lottery has been won. .

As a result of the determination, if the drive lottery for each movable accessory 87, 88 is won (S1362: Yes), each movable accessory 87, 88 is driven by the variation effect, so drive pattern information indicating the drive pattern. is stored in the drive pattern information storage area 223e10 of the X-th area for storage of reservation information indicated by the number-of-holds-balls command (S1363), and the process proceeds to S1313. By the processing of S1363, it is possible to recognize the driving mode and driving timing of each movable accessory 87, 88 in the variable production. In the process of S1362, if it is determined that the drive lottery for each movable accessory 87, 88 has not been won (S1362: No), each movable accessory 87, 88 is not executed. Null data is stored in the driving pattern information storage area 223e10 of the X-th area for storing reserved information in order to erase the information about the driving of 87 and 88 (S1364), and the process proceeds to S1313.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when the command for the number of pending balls is received, the pending deletion information indicating whether or not the cockpit display area Db is deleted in the variable effect, and the variable element of "re-variation" are performed in the variable effect. It does not discriminate and store re-variation information indicating whether or not it will be changed. This is because, in the third embodiment, the "suspended change notice" can be executed at the timing when the cockpit display area Db is made invisible by the movable accessories 87 and 88, and the "suspended change notice" can be executed as in the first embodiment. This is because there is no need to perform processing for determining pending deletion information or re-change information in order to determine whether or not "suspended change notice" can be executed after deletion. As a result, the capacity of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced, and the control load of the MPU 221 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the variation effect processing (S1109) of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing the variation effect processing (S1109) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment.

This variable effect processing is executed in the main process (see FIG. 47), and in order to display the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, first, it is stored in the first pending information storage area of the pending information storage area 223e. Various information is shifted to the execution information storage area 223f, and the information stored in the pending information storage second to fourth areas is shifted to the pending information storage first to third areas. In addition, when the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main controller 110 do not match the contents (information) stored in the execution information storage area 223f, an error command for display is generated, and the command is displayed. Processing is performed to set for transmission to the device 114 . Furthermore, when the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven in the variable performance to be executed, the normal weak flag 223h, the super weak flag 223i or the super strong flag 223j are set according to the driving pattern. In addition, when it is the execution timing of the "holding change notice" in the execution pattern and the holding pattern, to generate various commands related to each execution timing of the "holding change notice" and to transmit these commands to the display control device 114 Perform processing to set to .

In the fluctuation effect process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1401). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is not on (that is, it is off) (S1401: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this fluctuation effect processing. and return to the main process (see FIG. 47).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is ON (S1401: Yes), both the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received, so the processes of S1402 to S1410 are performed as in the first embodiment. , the process proceeds to S1451.

In the process of S1451, it is determined whether or not each movable accessory 87, 88 is driven in the variable performance to be executed (S1451). This determination is made based on drive pattern information stored in the drive pattern information storage area 223f10 of the execution information storage area 223f. As a result of determination, when it is determined that each movable accessory 87, 88 will be driven in the variable performance to be executed from now on (S1451: Yes), next, the drive pattern and drive timing of each movable accessory 87, 88 are determined. (S1452).

As a result of determination in S1452, if the drive pattern and drive timing of each movable accessory 87, 88 are "weak pattern" in "normal time" (S1452: "normal time weak pattern"), the normal weak flag 223h is turned on. set (S1453), and the process proceeds to S1411. Also, if the drive pattern and drive timing of each movable accessory 87, 88 is a "weak pattern" in "super time" (S1452: "super time weak pattern"), the super weak flag 223i is set to ON (S1454 ), and the process proceeds to S1411. Furthermore, if the drive pattern and drive timing of each movable accessory 87, 88 are the "strong pattern" in "super mode" (S1452: "strong pattern in super mode"), the super strong flag 223j is set to ON (S1455 ), and the process proceeds to S1411. As a result, the flags 223h to 223j that have been set are referred to in the accessory driving process (see S1151 in FIG. 47), which will be described later, and each movable accessory 87, 88 is driven at the set timing.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 displays the movable symbols 87 and 88 and the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the movable symbols 87 and 88 are driven. It is configured to execute an effect (first effect or second effect) in which character designs and the like are interlocked. Therefore, when changing the drive pattern of each movable accessory 87, 88, the sound lamp control device 113 displays and controls a display drive pattern change command indicating that the drive pattern of each movable accessory 87, 88 has been changed. configured to transmit to device 114; By receiving the display drive pattern change command, the display control device 114 recognizes that each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 has been changed from the "weak pattern" to the "strong pattern". , 88 according to the "strong pattern", the display control of the second effect is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the execution symbol change process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing execution symbol change processing executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 of the third embodiment. This execution symbol change process is executed in the variation effect process (see FIG. 49) executed in the main process (see FIG. 47), and the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the third symbol display device 81. in order to perform a "pending change notice".

In the execution pattern change process of the third embodiment, as a result of the determination in S1501, the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f is "0" in the number of pending balls and "strong pattern drive". If it is data indicating "after" (S1501: "after strong pattern driving"), it is confirmed whether or not "suspension change notice" can be executed after driving each movable accessory 87, 88 in "strong pattern". , determines whether or not each movable accessory 87, 88 is executed in the "strong pattern" in the variable production (S1561). This determination is based on the process of S1363 of the pending display setting process (see FIG. 48), and the drive pattern information stored in the drive pattern information storage area 223f10 of the execution information storage area 223f is determined.

As a result of the determination in S1561, if the driving pattern information of the "strong pattern" is stored in the driving pattern information storage area 223f10 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1561: Yes), the movable accessories 87 and 88 of "strong pattern" are stored. Since the "pending change notice" can be executed after driving the "pattern", the display control device Towards 114, a change command after a strong pattern for display is set (S1562), and the process returns to the variation effect processing (see FIG. 49).

The post-strong pattern change command for display set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and sent to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 47). sent. The display control device 114 that has received the post-strong pattern change command for display displays the execution symbol display area Db0 at the timing when the movable parts 87 and 88 are driven in the "strong pattern" in the variable effect and the cockpit display area Db is covered. display control is performed so as to change the execution pattern (for example, from "normal (white)" to "blue") to the display mode of the determined "suspension change notice". Specifically, the movable accessories 87 and 88 start driving one second after the start of the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach", and two seconds after the start of the driving, the cockpit display area Db is covered, and the state in which the cockpit display area Db is covered by the left movable accessory 87 is maintained for three seconds. Therefore, at the timing when the cockpit display area Db is covered with the left movable accessory 87, the display mode of the execution pattern is changed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1561, if it is determined that the drive pattern information of the "strong pattern" is not stored in the drive pattern information storage area 223f10 of the execution information storage area 223f (S1561: No), a variable effect is performed. Since the cockpit display area Db is not covered by the movable accessories 87 and 88, it is not possible to execute the "hold change notice" after "strong pattern driving". Therefore, the process proceeds to S1563 in order to confirm whether or not it is possible to change the driving patterns of the movable accessories 87 and 88 and execute the "hold change notice" after "strong pattern driving".

In the processing of S1563, it is determined whether or not a variable element of "super reach or more" is selected in the variable effect (S1563). This determination determines the variation pattern in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command stored in the RAM 223 in the processing of S1202 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 29).

As a result of the determination in S1563, when the variation element of "super reach or more" is not selected in the variation effect (S1563: No), this execution symbol change process (S1414) without setting a command to change the execution symbol. , and returns to the variable effect processing (see FIG. 49). That is, when "holding change notice" after "strong pattern driving" is selected, "super reach or more" is not performed in the variable performance, so that "holding change notice" is not executed in the execution pattern. do. By configuring in this way, if the performance timing is not appropriate for the execution timing of the "suspension change notice", by configuring so as not to execute the "suspension change notice" of the execution pattern, there will be a discrepancy in the production contents. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a well-matched performance.

In addition, in the process of S1563, if the variable element of "super reach or more" is not selected in the variable effect (S1563: No), for example, the process of S1504 is performed, and the execution pattern is "hold change notice may be configured to determine whether or not there is an execution timing at which " can be performed. By configuring in this way, the selected "pending change notice" can be reliably executed at any execution timing. can be reduced, the execution rate of the "suspension change notice" can be increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S1563, when a variable element of "super reach or more" is selected in the variable effect (S1563: Yes), each movable accessory 87, 88 can be driven with a "strong pattern" variable element Therefore, in order to change the drive pattern of each movable accessory 87, 88, the super strong flag 223j is set to ON (S1564). Next, the normal weak flag 223h and the super weak flag 223i are cleared (set to OFF) (S1565), and the process proceeds to S1562. In S1562, as described above, the display strong pattern post-change command is set to the display control device 114. FIG. The display control device 114, which has received the post-strong pattern change command for display, displays the execution symbols in the execution symbol display area Db0 at the timing when each movable role 87, 88 is driven in the "strong pattern" in the variable effect. , display control is performed so as to change the execution pattern (for example, from "normal (white)" to "blue") to the display mode of the determined "suspension change notice".

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when "holding change notice" of "after strong pattern driving" is selected in the variable effect, "after strong pattern driving" is executed in the variable effect. When the "hold change notice" cannot be executed at the timing, that is, when the movable accessories 87 and 88 are not driven with the "strong pattern", the variable element (for example, , variable factors related to “super reach or higher”). Then, when it is determined that a variable element capable of executing the "strong pattern" drive pattern (for example, a variable element of "super reach or higher") is included, the drive pattern of each movable accessory 87, 88 is changed to the "strong pattern". ”.

Therefore, since the "strong pattern" is not initially selected as the drive pattern for each of the movable accessories 87 and 88, even if "after the strong pattern is driven" is selected as the execution timing of the "suspension change notice", the "strong pattern" is not selected. Even if it is not possible to execute at the execution timing and it is changed to another execution timing (for example, "after reaching"), the variable production that can drive each movable accessory 87, 88 with a "strong pattern". If so, change the drive pattern of each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 to the "strong pattern", make the cockpit display area Db invisible to the player, and then "hold change notice" after "strong pattern drive" ” can be executed. By configuring in this way, when the "suspended change notice" is selected "after the strong pattern drive", it is possible to easily execute the "suspended change notice" at the execution timing of "after the strong pattern drive". can. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the performance while providing the player with an unexpected performance, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Further, in the case of performing the "suspension change notice" in the execution pattern, the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is hidden by the movable accessories 87 and 88, and the execution pattern in the cockpit display area Db is hidden. When it becomes visible again, the "suspended change notice" is constructed so that it can appear (execute). As a result, it is possible to directly change and notify the notice object (changeable object; in the third embodiment, the execution pattern) which is always visible, or to make a new notice object appear. Compared to the case of notifying, it is possible to casually change the display mode of the notice object while making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change of the notice object. In particular, since the driving of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is an effect in which the object moves directly, the player pays attention to the movements of the movable accessories 87 and 88. By casually changing the announcement object while paying attention to the movement of each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 (while the announcement object is hidden from view), first, the player feels uncomfortable, After that, by making the player recognize that the root of the sense of incongruity is directly linked to the game value (for example, a big win), the player is provided with an unexpected performance, and the performance is diversified to enhance the interest of the game. be able to.

Furthermore, when making the execution pattern (or the reservation pattern) that is the object of execution of the "suspension change notice" invisible, instead of changing the effect content of the third design display device 81, the third design display device 81 By changing the drive pattern of each of the different movable accessories 87 and 88, it is possible to make invisible the execution pattern (or the reservation pattern) that is the execution target of the "suspension change notice". Therefore, when there is no changeable variable element in the variable performance, the ``suspension change notice'' is executed at the initially set execution timing of the ``suspension change notice'' without changing the execution timing of the ``suspension change notice''. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of performing an unexpected performance for the player, diversify the performance, and enhance the interest of the game.

Here, the character product driving process (S1151) of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing the character product driving process (S1151) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, this role drive process (S1151) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 47), and each movable role 87, 88 is driven with a drive pattern set based on the content of the variable effect. In order to drive, first, it is confirmed whether or not the variation effect is being varied (executed) on the third symbol display device 81 (S1601). If the variable effect is not fluctuating in the third symbol display device (S1601: No), the character product driving process (S1151) is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1601, if the third symbol display device 81 is fluctuating (S1601: Yes), then it is determined whether or not "normal reach" is being executed in the fluctuating effect (S1602). This determination is performed using a timer or the like as described above. As a result of determination, if "normal reach" is being executed in the variable effect (S1602: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the weak normal flag 223h is ON (S1603), each movable during the execution of the "normal reach" It is confirmed whether or not the accessories 87 and 88 are to be driven in the "weak pattern". As a result of determination, if the normal weak flag 223h is turned on (S1603: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the driving timing of each movable accessory 87, 88 in the "weak pattern" in the "normal reach" (S1604). ). This determination is made, for example, by determining whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has passed since the start of the "normal reach" variable element. If the predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable element of "normal reach" (S1604: Yes), it is the driving timing of each movable accessory 87, 88 in "weak pattern" in "normal reach", so each movable accessory 87 , 88 are driven in the "weak pattern" (S1605). Thereafter, the weak normal flag 223h is set to OFF (S1606), and the process proceeds to S1607.

If it is determined in the process of S1602 that the "normal reach" is not being executed (S1602: No), in the process of S1603, if the weak normal flag 223h is not set to ON (S1603: No), or , in the process of S1604, if the driving timing of each movable accessory 87, 88 in the "weak pattern" in "normal reach" is not reached (S1604: No), each movable accessory 87, 88 in the "weak pattern" Since it is not the driving timing, the processing of S1605 and S1606 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1607.

In the processing of S1607, it is determined whether or not "Super Reach" or "Special Reach" is being executed in the variable effect during fluctuation (S1607). As a result of determination, if "super reach" or "special reach" is being executed in the variable effect (S1607: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the super weak flag 223i is on (S1608), and the "super reach" is determined. ' or 'Special Reach' is executed to confirm whether or not each movable accessory 87, 88 is to be driven in the 'weak pattern'. As a result of determination, if the super weak flag 223i is turned on (S1608: Yes), then whether it is the driving timing of each movable accessory 87, 88 in the "weak pattern" in the "super reach" or "special reach". (S1609). This determination is performed, for example, by determining whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the start of the variable element of "super reach" or "special reach". If a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable element of "super reach" or "special reach" (S1609: Yes), the "weak pattern" of each movable accessory 87, 88 in "super reach" or "special reach" , the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven with the "weak pattern" (S1610). After that, the super weak flag 223i is set to OFF (S1611), this accessory driving process (S1151) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 47).

On the other hand, in the process of S1608, if the super weak flag 223i is not turned on (S1608: No), then it is determined whether or not the super strong flag 223j is turned on (S1612). It is confirmed whether or not each movable accessory 87, 88 is to be driven in the "strong pattern" during execution of "reach". As a result of the determination, if the super strong flag 223j is turned on (S1612: Yes), then whether it is the driving timing of each movable accessory 87, 88 in the "strong pattern" in "super reach" or "special reach". (S1613). This determination is performed, for example, by determining whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the start of the variable element of "super reach" or "special reach". If a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable element of "super reach" or "special reach" (S1613: Yes), the "strong pattern" of each movable accessory 87, 88 in "super reach" or "special reach" , the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven with the "strong pattern" (S1614). After that, the super strong flag 223j is set to OFF (S1615), this accessory driving process (S1151) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 47).

In the processing of S1607, if it is determined that "Super Reach" or "Special Reach" is not being executed (S1607: No), it is not the driving timing of each movable accessory 87, 88 in the variable effect, This accessory driving process (S1511) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 47). In addition, in the process of S1609, if it is not the driving timing of each movable accessory 87, 88 in the "weak pattern" of "super reach" or "special reach" (S1609: No), each movable accessory 87, 88 Since it is not the drive timing in the "weak pattern" of , the processing of S1610 and S1611 is skipped, this accessory drive processing (S1511) is ended, and the process returns to the main processing. Furthermore, in the process of S1612, if the super strong flag 223j is not set to ON (S1612: No), the driving lottery for each movable accessory 87, 88 is lost and the movable accessory 87, 88 is not driven. Since it is a variable effect, the processing of S1613 to S1615 is skipped, this accessory driving processing (S1511) is ended, and the processing returns to the main processing. In addition, in the process of S1613, if it is not the driving timing of each movable accessory 87, 88 in the "strong pattern" of "super reach" or "special reach" (S1613: No), each movable accessory 87, 88 Since it is not the driving timing in the "strong pattern" of , the processing of S1614 and S1615 is skipped, the character product driving processing (S1511) is ended, and the processing returns to the main processing.

Here, with reference to FIG. 52, an execution example of "holding change notice" "after strong pattern driving" in which the execution pattern changes after each movable accessory 87, 88 is driven in "strong pattern" will be described. FIG. 52 shows the "strong pattern" drive mode of each movable accessory 87, 88 and the "suspended change" after "strong pattern drive" in the variable effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 of the third embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a situation in which "announcement" is performed.

Specifically, FIG. 52(a) is a diagram showing a state just before the "ready-to-win display" appears in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. FIG. 52(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub-display area Ds is erased from the state of FIG. 52(a) and "normal reach" is performed in the main display area Dm. FIG. 52(c) is a diagram showing a state in which "super reach" is performed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 52(b). FIG. 52(d) shows a state in which the movable parts 87 and 88 are driven in the "strong pattern" from the state of FIG. 52(c) and the cockpit display area Db is covered by the movable parts 87 and 88. It is a figure showing. In FIG. 52(e), after the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven in the "strong pattern" from the state in FIG. 52(d), they return to their initial positions, and the cockpit display area Db becomes visible again. It is the figure which showed the state. FIG. 52(f) is a diagram showing a state just before the "big win display" appears from the state of FIG. 52(e). In addition, in FIGS. 52(a) to 52(f), the display mode of the third pattern is omitted.

In FIG. 52(a), in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol "7" is stop-displayed, and in the right display area Dm3, the third symbol "7" is stop-displayed. In addition, in the middle display area Dm2, the third pattern is still unrecognizably "high-speed fluctuating". Therefore, it is a state just before (immediately before) the appearance of the so-called "ready-to-reach display" by the "7" symbol.

In the sub-display area Ds, the character pattern is displayed in the small central area Ds2 in a forewarning mode suggesting that the "ready-to-reach display" will appear. Specifically, the character pattern displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner as if the player is cheering. A predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, and no character design or the like is displayed.

Further, in the cockpit display area Db, an executed symbol is displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, and reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Also, since the movable accessories 87 and 88 are stopped at the initial position (upright position), the cockpit display area Db is not covered by the movable accessories 87 and 88 . Therefore, the execution symbol indicates that the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of pending balls of the variable effect is four.

In addition, each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 maintains the state of the initial position (arranged upright on both left and right sides of the third pattern display device 81), and almost all of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. is visible to the player.

In FIG. 52(b), in the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 52(a), the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stop-displayed and the "ready-to-win display" by the "7" symbol is displayed. is determined, and "normal reach" is being executed in the main display area Dm. In this "normal reach", it is displayed as if the entire main display area Dm were enlarged. Specifically, in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3, the "7" symbol that is being displayed in a stopped state is enlarged and displayed, and in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is displayed at a low speed so that it can be visually recognized. , scrolled at low speed from "5" pattern to "6" pattern).

The sub-display area Ds is erased as the main display area Dm expands due to the occurrence of "normal reach", and the sub-display area Ds becomes invisible.

In the cockpit display area Db, as in the display state of FIG. 52(a), the execution symbols are displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. It is Also, since the movable accessories 87 and 88 are stopped at the initial position (upright position), the cockpit display area Db is not covered by the movable accessories 87 and 88 . Therefore, as in FIG. 52(a), the execution symbol indicates that the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of suspended balls in the variable effect is four. showing.

52(a), each movable accessory 87, 88 maintains its initial position (arranged upright on both left and right sides of the third symbol display device 81). Almost all of the display screen of the symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player.

FIG. 52(c) shows a state in which "super reach" is performed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 52(b). In this "super reach", the reach formation pattern of the "7" pattern displayed in the "normal reach" is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁

Also, in FIG. 52(c), a "battle effect" ("competition effect" in "special reach") in which a plurality of character patterns compete for victory or defeat using almost the entire display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. ing.

In the state of FIG. 52(c), in the cockpit display area Db, as in the display states of FIGS. Reserved symbols are displayed in the to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Therefore, as in FIGS. 52(a) and 52(b), the execution symbols indicate that the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of pending balls in the variable effect is It shows that it is 4 times.

Note that each movable accessory 87, 88 maintains its initial position (arranged upright on both left and right sides of the third pattern display device 81) as in the states of FIGS. 52(a) and 52(b). Almost all of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player.

In addition, in the state of FIG. 52(c), the reach forming pattern of the "7" pattern that caused the occurrence of this "super reach" is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third pattern display device 81. there is

In FIG. 52(d), from the state of FIG. 52(c), the movable parts 87 and 88 are driven in the "strong pattern" during the "super reach", and the movable parts 87 and 88 drive the cockpit display area. Db is shown covered. In this state, based on the fact that the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven in the "strong pattern", the character pattern on the player side wins in the "battle effect" of the "super reach". We look forward to the appearance of the “jackpot display result” in the variable production.

Further, the entire cockpit display area Db is covered with the movable accessories 87 and 88, and both the executed symbols and the reserved symbols are invisible to the player. Therefore, the player pays attention to the execution contents of "Super Reach" and the driving mode of each movable accessory 87, 88, and the attention to the invisible cockpit display area Db is fading.

In FIG. 52(e), from the state of FIG. 52(d), the driving of the movable accessories 87 and 88 in the "strong pattern" is completed, and the movable accessories 87 and 88 are in their initial positions ( It is placed upright on both left and right sides of the third pattern display device 81). Also, the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is the display mode ("white") before the movable parts 87 and 88 are driven in the "strong pattern" (see FIG. 52(c)). ) is displayed in a different display mode (“red”). That is, it indicates that the "holding change notice" was performed at the execution timing "after strong pattern driving".

A player who sees this "holding change notice" after "strong pattern driving" for the first time, at this time, first, the display mode of the execution pattern before driving the "strong pattern" of each of the movable accessories 87, 88. Notice the difference and feel discomfort. Then, he recognizes that the source of the discomfort is the "red" execution symbol. Then, it examines when the "reservation change notice" of the "red" execution pattern was made based on its own memory. As a result of examination, it was found that the "holding change notice" is not performed before driving the movable accessories 87 and 88, but is performed after the driving of the movable accessories 87 and 88 in the "strong pattern" is finished. understand that it is At this moment, the player, in the variable performance being executed, changes the "super reach" variable element, drives the movable accessories 87 and 88 in the "strong pattern", and changes to the "red" execution pattern. It is speculated that the expectation value for the "jackpot display" was further increased by performing in combination with and in the variable effect.

FIG. 52(f) shows a state just before the "big win display" appears in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 52(e). In this state, "777", which is the "jackpot display", is stopped and displayed in each of the display areas Dm1 to Dm3. As guessed at the stage of FIG. 52(e), the player can obtain a feeling of happiness and satisfaction from the appearance of the "big win display" in the variable presentation.

Also, the player who has once experienced the "suspension change notice" after "strong pattern driving" will be able to see each movable accessory 87 when the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven with the "strong pattern" from the next time. , 88, when the cockpit display area Db becomes visible again, it is confirmed whether or not the execution pattern of the cockpit display area Db is changed. Therefore, after driving the movable accessories 87 and 88 in the "strong pattern", there is interest in checking the display mode of the execution pattern. Joy) and the interest (joy) in which the execution patterns change can be enjoyed in combination without interruption, and the interest in the game can be dramatically improved.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, by driving the movable accessories (for example, each of the movable accessories 87 and 88) (for example, driving in the "strong pattern") in the variable effect , After making the cockpit display area Db invisible to the player, it is configured to perform "holding change notice" at the timing when it becomes visible again. By configuring in this way, it is possible to directly change and notify an announcement object (changeable object; in the third embodiment, an execution pattern) that is always visible, or to notify a new announcement object. The display mode of the notice object can be casually changed while making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change of the notice object compared to the case of making the notice object appear. By casually changing the announcement object, first, the player feels uncomfortable, and then the player recognizes that the root of the uncomfortable feeling is directly linked to the game value (for example, a big win). To increase the interest of a game by diversifying the performance while providing the performance with unexpectedness.

In particular, since the driving of the movable accessories (the movable accessories 87 and 88) is an effect that directly moves the object, the player pays attention to the movement of the movable accessories (the movable accessories 87 and 88). easy. While paying attention to the movement of the movable accessories (each of the movable accessories 87 and 88), by casually changing the notice object that has become invisible due to the movable accessories, first, the player feels uncomfortable. Then, by making the player recognize that the root of the sense of incongruity is directly linked to the game value (for example, a big win), the player is provided with an unexpected performance, and the performance is diversified to diversify the interest of the game. can increase

In addition, the player who has once experienced the "suspension change notice" after driving this movable role ("after driving the strong pattern") will not be able to use the next movable role ("strong pattern" of each movable role 87, 88). ) is driven, after the cockpit display area Db becomes invisible due to the movable accessories (each of the movable accessories 87 and 88), when the cockpit display area Db becomes visible again, the cockpit display area Db It will be confirmed whether or not the notice object (execution pattern) of is changed. Therefore, there is interest in confirming the display mode of the notice object after driving the movable accessories (the "strong pattern" of each of the movable accessories 87 and 88). The interest (joy) caused by the driving of the "pattern") and the interest (joy) caused by the change of the notice object can be combined without interruption, and the interest of the game can be dramatically improved. .

Furthermore, when the "suspension change notice" after driving the movable role ("after strong pattern driving") is selected in the variable production, after driving the movable role ("after strong pattern driving") in the variable production If the "suspension change notice" cannot be executed at the execution timing of , that is, if the movable accessories are not driven (the movable accessories 87 and 88 are in the "strong pattern"), the movable accessories are driven (" It is determined whether or not there is a variable element (for example, a variable element related to "super reach or higher") that can execute the "strong pattern" drive pattern. Then, when it is determined that a variable element (for example, a variable element of "super reach or more") that can execute the driving of the movable role ("strong pattern" driving pattern) is included, the movable role is driven. (the drive pattern of each movable accessory 87, 88 is changed to "strong pattern").

Therefore, when "after strong pattern driving" is initially selected as the execution timing of the "suspension change notice", the cockpit display area Db is not covered by the movable accessories 87 and 88, so the "strong pattern Even in a situation where the "hold change notice" could not be executed at the execution timing of "after driving" and was changed to another execution timing (for example, "after reaching"), each movable accessory 87, 88 can be "strengthened". Confirm whether or not it is a variable effect that can be driven by "pattern". Then, when the variable effect is such that the movable accessories 87 and 88 can be driven in the "strong pattern", the drive pattern of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is changed to the "strong pattern" to control the cockpit. After making the display area Db invisible to the player, it is possible to execute the "suspended change notice" after "strong pattern driving". By configuring in this way, when the "suspended change notice" is selected "after the strong pattern drive", it is possible to easily execute the "suspended change notice" at the execution timing of "after the strong pattern drive". can. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the performance while providing the player with an unexpected performance, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

In addition, when the execution pattern (or the reservation pattern) that is the target of execution of the "suspension change notice" is made invisible, instead of changing the effect content of the third symbol display device 81, the movable accessories 87 and 88 By changing the drive pattern to the "strong pattern", it is possible to make invisible the execution pattern (or the reservation pattern) which is the execution target of the "suspension change notice". Therefore, when there is no changeable variable element in the variable performance, the ``suspension change notice'' is executed at the initially set execution timing of the ``suspension change notice'' without changing the execution timing of the ``suspension change notice''. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of performing an unexpected performance for the player, diversify the performance, and enhance the interest of the game.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, when "hold change notice" after "strong pattern driving" is selected in the variable effect, the drive pattern of each movable accessory 87, 88 is initially set to " When "strong pattern" is not selected, it is checked whether or not there is a variable element capable of executing the "strong pattern" drive pattern of each movable accessory 87, 88 in the variable performance. Then, when there is a variable element in the variable production that allows the movable accessories 87 and 88 to be driven in the "strong pattern", the driving patterns of the movable accessories 87 and 88 are changed to the "strong pattern". At the same time, the initially set "hold change notice" after "strong pattern driving" was executed.

However, if the variable effect does not include a variable element capable of executing the "strong pattern" of each movable accessory 87, 88, the "strong pattern" of each movable accessory 87, 88 cannot be performed, It is configured so as not to change the drive pattern of each movable accessory 87, 88 and not to execute the "suspension change notice" in the execution pattern. Therefore, even though the "holding change notice" is selected after "strong pattern driving", the "holding change notice" cannot be executed at that timing, and a variable effect is performed. There is a risk that the game will end up being monotonous and that the interest in the game will not be improved.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, a large character cut-in image Dc2 (see FIG. The display time of the character cut-in image Dc2 is configured to be shorter than the execution time of any variable element of the variable presentation. In addition, the cockpit display area Db is constructed so that any variable element can always be displayed during execution of the variable effect. Further, in the variable effect, the cockpit display area Db is not visible to the player while the large character cut-in image Dc2 is being displayed. After that, when the large character cut-in image Dc2 disappears and the cockpit display area Db becomes visible again, the "holding change notice" is executed "after the large cut-in display" in which the display mode of the execution pattern changes. configured to

With this configuration, the execution pattern displayed in the cockpit display area Db is hidden by the large character cut-in image Dc2 with a display time shorter than the execution time of each variable element, and executed when the hiding is released. By performing a "reservation change notice" after "reservation deletion" for the pattern, when directly changing the notice object (change object) that is always visible and notifying it, or a new notice It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the change of the notice object and to casually change the display mode of the execution pattern compared to the case where the object is made to appear and notified. By casually changing the execution pattern, first, the player feels uncomfortable, and then, by making the player realize that the root of the uncomfortable feeling is directly linked to the game value (for example, a big win), the player is surprised. To increase the interest of a game by diversifying the performance while providing the performance with quality.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to third embodiments. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first to third embodiments, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 53, the transition of the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when "normal reach" and "super reach" appear in the variable effect of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 53(a) is a diagram showing a state just before (immediately before) "ready-to-win display (normal reach)" appears in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. FIG. 53(b) shows a state in which the occurrence of "normal reach" is confirmed from the state of FIG. 53(a), the sub-display area Ds is erased, and the "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. It is a diagram. FIG. 53(c) is a diagram showing a state in which "super reach" occurs from the state of FIG. 53(b) and "super reach" is being executed in the main display area Dm. FIG. 53(d) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub-display area Ds is re-displayed from the state of FIG. 53(c), and the third pattern "missing display" appears in the main display area Dm.

First, in FIG. 53(a), in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol "7" is stopped and displayed, and in the right display area Dm3, the third symbol "7" is displayed. It is immediately before the stop display, and furthermore, the third pattern is still invisible in the middle display area Dm2 and is being "high-speed fluctuated". Therefore, it is a state just before (immediately before) the appearance of the so-called "ready-to-reach display" by the "7" symbol.

In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, the character pattern is displayed in the small central area Ds2 in a forewarning mode suggesting that the "ready-to-reach display" will appear. Specifically, the character design displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner as if the characters are cheering. A predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, and no character design or the like is displayed.

Further, in the cockpit display area Db, an executed symbol is displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, and reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Therefore, the execution symbol indicates that the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of pending balls of the variable effect is four.

In FIG. 53(b), from the state of FIG. 53(a), in the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stop-displayed and the "ready-to-win display" by the "7" symbol is displayed. is determined, and the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. In this “normal reach” variable, the main display area Dm is displayed as if it were enlarged. Specifically, in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3, the "7" symbol that is being stopped is displayed in an enlarged manner, and in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is displayed at a low speed so that it can be visually recognized. , scrolled at low speed from "5" pattern to "6" pattern).

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is erased as the main display area Dm expands due to the occurrence of the "normal reach" variable, and the sub-display area Ds becomes invisible. When the "ready-to-win display" occurs in the main display area Dm, the display contents of the main display area Dm are enlarged so that the player can easily recognize the contents of the "ready-to-win display" that the player focuses on. is displayed, and the sub-display area Ds is erased along with the enlargement.

In the state of FIG. 53(b), in the cockpit display area Db, similar to the display state of FIG. Reserved symbols are displayed in the areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Therefore, as in FIG. 53(a), the execution symbol indicates that the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of suspended balls in the variable effect is four. showing.

FIG. 53(c) shows a state in which the variable element of "super reach" is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 53(b). In the "super reach" variable element, the "7" symbol displayed in the "normal reach" variable element is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁

Further, in FIG. 53(c), almost the entire display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is used to display a "battle effect" in which a plurality of character patterns compete for victory or defeat. In this "battle effect", an effect (in the fourth embodiment, kickboxing) is executed in which the character pattern on the player side (for example, the character pattern on the left side) and the character pattern on the enemy side (for example, the character pattern on the right side) fight. . In the "battle presentation", if the character pattern on the player side wins, a big win is achieved, and the "big win display" appears as a display result of the variable element of the "super reach". On the other hand, in the "battle effect", if the character pattern on the enemy side wins, it is set to be a loss, and a "loss display" appears as a display result of the variable element of the "super reach".

In the state of FIG. 53(c), in the cockpit display area Db, as in the display states of FIGS. Reserved symbols are displayed in the to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Therefore, as in FIGS. 53(a) and 53(b), the execution symbols indicate that the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of pending balls in the variable effect is 4 times.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the cockpit display area Db is a display smaller than the sub-display area Ds. It does not hinder the production of the variable element of the "super reach". Therefore, the cockpit display area Db is configured to be continuously displayed during execution of the variable element of "super reach".

In addition, the pending symbols and the execution symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db can execute the "suspension change notice", and even in the execution symbols suggesting the content of the variable effect being executed, the "suspension change notice" It is configured to take over (inherit) and display the changed display mode of the reserved design. That is, it is configured to be able to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the big hit of the variable effect being executed by the display mode of the executed symbols. Therefore, by having the player confirm the display mode of the execution pattern during the execution of the variable element of "Super Reach", the player can predict whether the variable element of "Super Reach" will be a big hit or not. , and gives interest based on the prediction.

In the state of FIG. 53(c), the reach forming pattern of the "7" pattern, which is the cause of the fluctuation factor of this "super reach", is reduced to the upper left of the display area of the third pattern display device 81. it's shown.

In addition, in the state of FIG. 53(c), at the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (below the "ready-to-reach display"), a number symbol (in the first embodiment, , “4”) are not displayed. This is because the cockpit display area Db is always displayed in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, so that the player can recognize the number of variable effects by checking the display contents of the cockpit display area Db. is.

In FIG. 53(d), from the state of FIG. 53(c), the variable element of "super reach" is lost (the character pattern on the enemy side wins), and "failure display" appears in the main display area Dm. It shows a state in which the sub-display area Ds is re-displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 as well. In this state, the character pattern in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is visible again. Note that the character pattern in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is displayed in a disappointing manner due to the appearance of the "missing display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when the variable element of "super reach" is completed and the variable effect is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the display state of the third symbol display device 81 is the initial state, that is, the main The display area Dm, the sub-display area Ds, and the cockpit display area Db are configured to be displayed. By configuring in this way, it is easy for the player to recognize that the variable performance has been stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and when there is a pending (waiting) variable performance, the next variable performance is smoothly performed. It is possible to execute.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 53(a) to 53(d), in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the display states of the main display area Dm and the sub-display area Ds are enlarged or reduced at each timing in the variable effect. , is erased or redisplayed so that the player can easily recognize the display contents of high importance at each timing. In addition, by always displaying the execution symbols and the pending symbols to the player in the cockpit display area Db, the player can be made to clearly recognize how many variable displays are pending.

Next, referring to FIG. 54, the character cut-in image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 will be described. FIG. 54(a) schematically shows a small character cut-in image Dc1 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 54(b) schematically shows a large character cut-in image Dc2 in the fourth embodiment. It is a diagram showing.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, two types of character cut-in images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are provided: a small character cut-in image Dc1 and a large character cut-in image Dc2. The lottery ratio of the small character cut-in image Dc1 and the large character cut-in image Dc2 is equivalent to the "weak pattern" and "strong pattern" of the movable accessories 87 and 88 of the third embodiment (small character cut-in image Dc1 corresponds to the "weak pattern" and the large character cut-in image Dc2 corresponds to the "strong pattern").

As shown in FIG. 54(a), the small character cut-in image Dc1 is a display frame image that is 1/3 of the vertical width and the entire horizontal width of the display screen of the main display area Dm. A small female character pattern is displayed in a mode as if cheering. Also, the background of the display frame image is displayed in blue.

This small character cut-in image Dc1 is displayed in the forefront of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 for one second from the start of display to the end of display (erased). Therefore, other images displayed overlapping the small character cut-in image Dc1 (for example, character images among the variable elements of "Super Reach") are displayed while the small character cut-in image Dc1 is displayed. The overlapping portion is configured to be invisible. In the fourth embodiment, since the small character cut-in image Dc1 is not displayed in the area overlapping the cockpit display area Db, while the small character cut-in image Dc1 is being displayed, the execution pattern of the cockpit display area Db is displayed. and reserved symbols are visible.

When displaying the small character cut-in image Dc1, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display small character cut-in command to notify the display control device 114 that the small character cut-in image Dc1 will be displayed. is configured as When the display control device 114 receives the small character cut-in command for display, it recognizes that the small character cut-in image Dc1 is to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and displays it at a predetermined timing (for example, "super reach"). ”), display control is performed so that the small character cut-in image Dc1 is additionally displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54(b), the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed as a display frame image with a vertical width of 4/5 and the entire horizontal width of the display screen of the main display area Dm. A large female character pattern is displayed in the central part in a manner as if cheering. Also, the background of the display frame image is displayed in red unlike the small character cut-in image Dc1. Therefore, since the small character cut-in image Dc1 and the large character cut-in image Dc2 are clearly different in size and color, the player can clearly recognize the difference.

Like the small character cut-in image Dc1, this large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 for one second from the start of display to the end of display (erased). Therefore, other images displayed overlapping the large character cut-in image Dc2 (for example, execution symbols and pending symbols in the cockpit display area Db, character images among the variable elements of "Super Reach", etc.) While the character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed, the overlapping portion is configured to be invisible. In the fourth embodiment, the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed in an area that overlaps the cockpit display area Db. And the reserved symbols become invisible, and at the timing when the large character cut-in image Dc2 is erased, the executed symbols and the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db become visible again.

When the large character cut-in image Dc2 is to be displayed, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display large character cut-in command to notify the display control device 114 that the large character cut-in image Dc2 is to be displayed. is configured as When receiving the large character cut-in command for display, the display control device 114 recognizes that the large character cut-in image Dc2 is to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and displays the large character cut-in image Dc2 on the third pattern display device 81. ”), display control is performed so that the third pattern display device 81 additionally displays the large character cut-in image Dc2.

The display time of the small character cut-in image Dc1 and the large character cut-in image Dc2 is set to 1 second, so the execution time of each variable element is shorter. In the fourth embodiment, the display control device 114 is configured to randomly determine the execution timing of the small character cut-in image Dc1 and the large character cut-in image Dc2. Specifically, when the display control device 114 receives a display small character cut-in command or a display large character cut-in command from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 refers to a predetermined counter and table to determine which variation Whether or not to display the small character cut-in image Dc1 or the large character cut-in image Dc2 in the element is determined by lottery.

By configuring in this way, the execution timing of the small character cut-in image Dc1 or the large character cut-in image Dc2 can be diversified, and the interest in the game can be enhanced. In addition, since the execution timing is not determined by the sound lamp control device 113, there is no need to transmit a command regarding the execution timing of the small character cut-in image Dc1 or the large character cut-in image Dc2. 114 can be reduced. Furthermore, the appearance timing of the ``pending change notice'' after ``pending erasing'' by the large character cut-in image Dc2 is diversified to provide the player with an unexpected presentation and to diversify the presentation to enhance the interest of the game. can be enhanced.

Further, by setting the display time of the large character cut-in image Dc2 to be shorter than the execution time of each variable element, it is possible to display the large character cut-in image Dc2 for any variable element. In comparison with the case where the cockpit display area Db is covered by driving the respective movable accessories 87 and 88, the process of determining whether or not the large character cut-in image Dc2 can be displayed or not the variable element of the variable effect is unnecessary. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 only needs to perform control for determining whether or not to display the large character cut-in image Dc2 in order to perform the "on hold change notice" after "after hold deletion". While reducing the control load of the control device 113, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance, diversify the performance, and enhance the interest of the game.

Note that the execution timing of the small character cut-in image Dc1 and the large character cut-in image Dc2 may be determined by the sound ramp control device 113, or fixed timing of a specific variable element (for example, "super reach") may be determined. 1 second after the start of the variable element).

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, an execution example of the "hold change notice" "after hold erase" in which the execution pattern changes after the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed will be described. FIG. 55 shows the display mode of the large character cut-in image Dc2 and the situation where the "holding change notice" after "holding deletion" is performed, regarding the variable effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 of the fourth embodiment. It is a figure showing.

Specifically, FIG. 55(a) is a diagram showing a state just before the "ready-to-win display" appears in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. FIG. 55B is a diagram showing a state in which the sub-display area Ds is erased from the state of FIG. FIG. 55(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the variable element of "super reach" is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 55(b). FIG. 55(d) is a diagram showing a state in which the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed from the state of FIG. 55(c) and the cockpit display area Db is covered. FIG. 55(e) is a diagram showing a state in which the large character cut-in image Dc2 has been erased from the state of FIG. 55(d) and the cockpit display area Db has become visible again. FIG. 55(f) is a diagram showing a state just before the "big win display" appears from the state of FIG. 55(e). In addition, in FIGS. 55(a) to 55(f), the display mode of the third pattern is omitted.

In FIG. 55(a), the third symbol "7" is stopped in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and the third symbol "7" is stopped in the right display area Dm3. In addition, in the middle display area Dm2, the third pattern is still unrecognizably "high-speed fluctuating". Therefore, it is a state just before (immediately before) the appearance of the so-called "ready-to-reach display" by the "7" symbol.

In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, the character pattern is displayed in the small central area Ds2 in a forewarning mode suggesting that the "ready-to-reach display" will appear. Specifically, the character design displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner as if the characters are cheering. A predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, and no character design or the like is displayed.

Further, in the cockpit display area Db, an executed symbol is displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, and reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Also, at this stage, the large character cut-in image Dc2 is not displayed, and the cockpit display area Db is visible. Therefore, the execution symbol indicates that the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of pending balls of the variable effect is four.

In FIG. 55(b), in the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 55(a), the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stop-displayed and the "reach display" by the "7" symbol is displayed. is determined, and the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. In this “normal reach” variable, the main display area Dm is displayed as if it were enlarged. Specifically, in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3, the "7" symbol that is being stopped is displayed in an enlarged manner, and in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is displayed at a low speed so that it can be visually recognized. , scrolled at low speed from "5" pattern to "6" pattern).

The sub-display area Ds is erased as the main display area Dm expands based on the occurrence of the "normal reach" variable, and the sub-display area Ds becomes invisible.

In the cockpit display area Db, similar to the display state of FIG. 55(a), the executed symbols are displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. It is Also, as in FIG. 55(a), the large character cut-in image Dc2 is not displayed at this stage, and the cockpit display area Db is visible. Therefore, as in FIG. 55(a), the execution symbol indicates that the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of suspended balls in the variable effect is four. showing.

FIG. 55(c) shows a state in which the variable element of "super reach" is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 55(b). In the "super reach" variable element, the "7" symbol displayed in the "normal reach" variable element is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁

Further, in FIG. 55(c), almost the entire display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is used to display a "battle effect" in which a plurality of character patterns compete for victory or defeat.

In the state of FIG. 55(c), in the cockpit display area Db, as in the display states of FIGS. Reserved symbols are displayed in the to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. As in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b), the large character cut-in image Dc2 is not displayed at this stage, and the cockpit display area Db is visible. Therefore, as in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b), the execution symbols indicate that the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of pending balls in the variable effect is 4 times.

In addition, in the state of FIG. 55(c), the reach formation pattern of the "7" pattern, which is the cause of the fluctuation factor of this "super reach", is reduced to the upper left of the display area of the third pattern display device 81. it's shown.

In FIG. 55(d), from the state of FIG. 55(c), a large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed during execution of the variable element of "Super Reach", and the cockpit display area Db is displayed by the large character cut-in image Dc2. is covered. In this state, the player's character pattern wins in the "battle effect" of the variable element of the "super reach" based on the display of the large character cut-in image Dc2, which is likely to be selected at the time of the big win. Then, expect the appearance of the “jackpot display” in the variable performance.

The entire cockpit display area Db is covered with the large character cut-in image Dc2, and both the executed symbols and the reserved symbols are invisible to the player. Therefore, the player pays attention to the execution contents of the variable element of "super reach" and the large character cut-in image Dc2, and the attention to the invisible cockpit display area Db is fading.

FIG. 55(e) shows a state in which the large character cut-in image Dc2 has been deleted from the state of FIG. 55(d). Also, the display mode of the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db has changed from the display mode (“white”, see FIG. 55(c)) before the display of the large character cut-in image Dc2. ("red"). In other words, it indicates that the "suspended change notice" of "after pending deletion" was performed along with the appearance and disappearance of the large character cut-in image Dc2.

A player who sees for the first time the "suspended change notice" "after pending deletion" by the appearance and disappearance of this large character cut-in image Dc2, at this point, first, the execution from before the display of the large character cut-in image Dc2. The user notices the difference in the display mode of the pattern and feels a sense of incongruity. Then, he recognizes that the source of the discomfort is the "red" execution pattern. Then, it examines when the "reservation change notice" of the "red" execution pattern was made based on its own memory. As a result of examination, it is understood that the "holding change notice" was not performed before the display of the large character cut-in image Dc2, but was performed after the display of the large character cut-in image Dc2. At this moment, in the variable effect being executed, the player sees that the variable element of "Super Reach", the appearance of the large character cut-in image Dc2, and the change to the "red" execution symbol are It is speculated that the combination of executions may have further increased the expectations for the "jackpot display".

FIG. 55(f) shows a state just before the "big win display" appears in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 55(e). In this state, "777", which is the "jackpot display", is stopped and displayed in each of the display areas Dm1 to Dm3. As guessed at the stage of FIG. 55(e), the player can obtain a feeling of happiness and satisfaction from the appearance of the "big win display" in the variable presentation.

In addition, the player who has once experienced the "holding change notice" after "holding deletion" by displaying this large character cut-in image Dc2 will be able to see the large character cut-in image Dc2 from the next time when the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed. After the cockpit display area Db becomes invisible due to the cut-in image Dc2, when the large character cut-in image Dc2 is erased and the cockpit display area Db becomes visible again, the execution pattern of the cockpit display area Db is changed. It will be checked whether or not Therefore, there is interest in confirming the display mode of the execution pattern after the display of the large character cut-in image Dc2, and interest (pleasure) in the display of the large character cut-in image Dc2 and the interest (pleasure) in the change in the execution pattern. can be enjoyed in combination without delay, and the amusement of the game can be dramatically improved.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the cut-in image (for example, the large character cut-in image Dc2) is displayed in the variable effect to make the cockpit display area Db invisible to the player. After that, it is configured to perform the "suspension change notice" at the timing when it becomes visible again. By configuring in this way, compared to the case of directly changing the notification object (change object) that is always visible and notifying it, or the case of making a new notification object appear and notifying , making it difficult for the player to recognize the change of the notice object, the display mode of the execution pattern can be casually changed. By casually changing the execution pattern, first, the player feels uncomfortable, and then, by making the player realize that the root of the uncomfortable feeling is directly linked to the game value (for example, a big win), the player is surprised. To increase the interest of a game by diversifying the performance while providing the performance with quality.

Also, since the display time of the large character cut-in image Dc2 is set to 1 second, it is configured to have a shorter execution time than any of the variable elements. Therefore, the large character cut-in image Dc2 that can appear in any variable element can generate the "hold change notice" "after hold erasure". Therefore, it is possible to diversify the appearance timing of the ``holding change notice'' ``after the holding erasure'', provide the player with an unexpected performance, and diversify the performance to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, by setting the display time of the large character cut-in image Dc2 to be shorter than the execution time of each variable element, it is possible to display the large character cut-in image Dc2 for any variable element. Compared to the case where the cockpit display area Db is covered by driving the movable accessories 87 and 88 of the third embodiment, the process of determining whether or not the large character cut-in image Dc2 can be displayed and the variable element of the variable effect is unnecessary. Become. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 only needs to perform control for determining the display of the large character cut-in image Dc2 in order to perform the "on hold change notice" after "on hold deletion". While reducing the control load of 113, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance, diversify the performance, and enhance the interest of the game.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 62. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "holding change notice" after "holding erase" is executed in the execution pattern indicating the variable effect being executed. As described above, the execution pattern indicates the content of the variable production being executed, so the player can play the game while paying attention to which display mode the display mode of the execution pattern is during the execution of the variable production. It is carried out.

Therefore, when the display mode of the execution pattern is changed during the execution of the variable performance, even if the display mode of the execution pattern is casually changed by the 'reservation change notice' after 'reservation deletion', the change is notified to the player. is likely to be detected.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is configured to be able to execute the "reservation change notice" after "reservation deletion" in the reservation symbols. The player pays less attention to the change of the reserved symbols than the executed symbols, and it is difficult for the player to notice the change. Therefore, when the "reserved change notice" of "after the reserved erasure" is performed for the reserved symbols, the player can delay recognizing the change of the reserved symbols as compared with the change of the executed symbols. During this period, the player can feel uncomfortable. As a result, it is possible to diversify the presentation while providing the player with an unexpected presentation, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, in the execution pattern or the reservation pattern in which the variation effect of the big win is executed, the minimum "holding change notice" is reached at the timing "after erasing the cockpit" when the cockpit display area Db is erased. The change mode is configured to change from the normal display mode (“white”) to the display mode (“blue”) that is one step different. On the other hand, when executing a display mode other than the minimum display mode of the "pending change notice", that is, a display mode (for example, "red") that is changed in multiple stages from the normal display mode ("white"), The execution timing of "after erasing the cockpit" is configured so as not to be selected. By constructing in this way, even with the ``suspension change notice'' of the minimum change mode, which conventionally cannot expect a big win, a big win can be expected depending on the timing of occurrence of the ``suspension change notice''. becomes possible. As a result, the significance of the existence of the one-stage "hold change notice", which is the minimum display mode that could not be found in the past, is enhanced, and a big win can be expected in any production pattern, and the interest of the game is enhanced by various productions. can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when the "reservation change notice" is performed in the reserved symbols in which the variation effect of the big win is executed, the reserved symbols are erased by the variable element of "super reach" etc., and the "super A ``suspension change notice'' can appear (execute) at the timing when the variable element of ``reach'' ends and the ``suspension pattern'' is redisplayed. As a result, when directly changing the notification object (changeable object; reserved pattern in the fifth embodiment) that is always visible and notifying it, or when making a new notification object appear, Compared to the case of notifying, it is possible to casually change the display mode of the notice object while making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change of the notice object. In addition, the reserved symbols that the player does not pay attention to are once hidden, and then casually changed, and the change mode is also a slight change from the normal change (minimum change mode, one-step change). First, while making it difficult for the player to notice the change, the player feels uncomfortable with the change. After that, by making the player recognize that the root of the sense of incongruity is directly linked to the game value (for example, a big win), the player is provided with an unexpected performance, and the performance is diversified to make the game interesting. can increase

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to fourth embodiments. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first to fourth embodiments, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the scenario table 222f in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. FIG. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, not only the executed symbols but also the reserved symbols are displayed with the "suspended change notice" at the timing when the executed symbols and the reserved symbols are erased and re-displayed. configured to run. Therefore, when an effect is executed in which the executed symbols and the reserved symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db are erased, the sound lamp control device 113 redisplays the executed symbols or the reserved symbols after executing the erased effect. Execution timing of "after erasing cockpit" is configured to be selectable so that "pending change notice" can be executed at the timing to be executed.

In the fifth embodiment, when it is decided to execute the "onset change notice", the sound lamp control device 113 refers to the value of the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f to determine the execution timing of "after erasing the cockpit". 1 execution timing is determined from the execution timings of the "holding change notice" including . FIG. 56 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot scenario table 222f1 in the fifth embodiment.

In the jackpot scenario table 222f1 of the fifth embodiment, at each holding ball number (4 patterns of holding ball number 1 to 4) of the variable effect at the time when the vertical line determines "holding change notice", each holding ball Each number is classified into a total of 12 types of situation patterns classified according to the display mode of the "pending change notice" (three patterns of "blue", "red", and "rainbow"). In addition, 4 patterns of the number of held balls (number of held balls "1" to "4") for executing (starting) the "holding change notice" in the horizontal row, and during the change effect (number of holding balls "0" ), there are a total of 8 types of timing patterns: 3 patterns "at the start", "before reaching", "after reaching", and 1 pattern "after cockpit erasing" when the cockpit display area Db is erased. are separated from each other. A value of the scenario counter 223d is associated with each divided group.

The "holding change notice" in the fifth embodiment is executed (appears) in the timing pattern determined by the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f for each situation pattern. is set to

Specifically, for example, in the variable performance based on one starting prize, if the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is selected as "after erasing the cockpit", the variable performance based on the starting winning from the time of the starting winning The "suspension change notice" is executed at the timing when the cockpit display area Db is erased until is displayed. That is, in the variable performance based on one starting prize, if the "holding change notice" after "erasing the cockpit" is determined, any variation will occur before the variable performance based on the starting prize is confirmed and displayed. When a variable element that erases the cockpit display area Db is executed in the effect (including the variable effect based on the start winning prize), after the variable element is completed, at the timing of redisplaying the cockpit display area Db, "Pending change notice ” is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the "holding change notice" is a holding ball count command sent from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64. In this case, a lottery is held in the audio lamp control device 113 to determine whether or not to execute the "holding change notice". When execution of the "holding change notice" is determined, first, the number of holding balls at the time of the decision and the display mode of the decided "holding change notice" are grasped. Then, when the variable effect indicated by the pending ball number command is a big win, the value of the scenario counter 223d and the big win scenario table 222f1 are referred to, and the execution timing (appearance timing) of the "holding change notice" at the time of the big win ) is determined. On the other hand, if the variable effect indicated by the pending ball number command is a loss, the value of the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f2 for loss are referred to, and the execution timing (appearance timing) of the "holding change notice" at the time of loss ) is determined. The losing scenario table 222f2 will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the jackpot scenario table 222f1 in FIG. A total of 12 types of situation patterns are classified according to the display mode of "holding change notice" (three patterns of "blue", "red", and "rainbow") for each number of held balls. In addition, as the timing at which the horizontal row executes (starts) the "holding change notice", 4 patterns at the time of display or shift to each number of holding balls (number of holding balls "1" to "4") and holding balls Three patterns of "at the start (at the time of shift)", "before reach", or "after reach" in the number "0" (during the execution of the variable effect), and the cockpit display area Db regardless of the number of pending It is divided into a total of eight timing patterns, including one pattern "after erasing the cockpit" at the timing after erasing. A possible value of the scenario counter 223d is associated with each of the divided groups.

The "holding change notice" in the fifth embodiment is executed (appears) in the timing pattern determined by the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f for each situation pattern. is set to

Specifically, for example, when the execution timing of "hold change notice" is selected "after cockpit erasure", before the variable effect is confirmed and displayed, the variable element of "super reach" or "special After that, the "suspended change notice" is executed at the timing when the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed. In addition, when the execution timing of the "suspension change notice" is "0" pending balls and "at the start" is selected, the "suspension change notice" is determined at the timing when the variable effect is started. "Pending change notice" is executed. In addition, when the execution timing of the "suspension change notice" is "0" pending balls and "before reach" is selected, it is during the variable performance in the variable performance that determines the "suspension change notice" Before the "reach display" appears (for example, when the left symbol column Z1 is stopped during the execution of the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element or the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element, etc.) Change Notice” is executed. In addition, when the execution timing of the "suspension change notice" is the number of pending balls "0" and "after reach" is selected, it is during the variable performance in the variable performance that determined the "suspension change notice" The "suspension change notice" is executed at the timing during execution of the "reach display" (for example, during execution of the variable element of the "normal reach").

Further, for example, when the number of pending balls "1" is selected as the execution timing of the "holding change notice", the holding symbol indicating the variable effect for which the "holding change notice" is determined is displayed in the first holding symbol display area Db1. The "suspended change notice" is executed at the timing displayed to or at the shifted timing. Further, when the execution timing of the "suspension change notice" is selected with the number of pending balls "2", the pending symbol indicating the variable effect for which the "suspension change notice" is determined is displayed in the second pending symbol display area Db2. The "holding change notice" is executed at the shifted timing or at the shifted timing. Further, when the execution timing of the "suspension change notice" is selected with the number of pending balls "3", the pending symbol indicating the variable effect for which the "suspension change notice" is determined is displayed in the third pending symbol display area Db3. The "holding change notice" is executed at the shifted timing or at the shifted timing. Further, when the execution timing of the "suspended change notice" is selected with the number of "4" pending balls, the pending symbol indicating the variable effect for which the "suspended change notice" is determined is displayed in the fourth pending symbol display area Db4. The "suspension change notice" is executed at the specified timing.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when a pending ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, the voice lamp A lottery for "holding change notice" is performed in the control device 113, and it is determined whether or not to execute the "holding change notice". When execution of the "holding change notice" is determined, first, the number of holding balls at the time of the decision and the display mode of the decided "holding change notice" are grasped. Then, when the variable effect indicated by the pending ball number command is a big win, the value of the scenario counter 223d and the big win scenario table 222f1 are referred to, and the execution timing (appearance timing) of the "holding change notice" at the time of the big win ) is determined.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the jackpot scenario table 222f1, situation patterns of the number of pending balls in the variable effect at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" and each display mode of the "holding change notice" are prepared. A value of the scenario counter 223d is associated with the situation pattern.

First, a case will be described where the number of pending balls in the variable effect is "1" at the time when the "holding change notice" of the big win is determined. In this case, the number of held balls "2" to "4" does not exist when the number of held balls "1" occurs. That is, when the number of reserved balls "1" occurs, the reserved symbols of the number of reserved balls "2" to "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, when the number of pending balls is "1" when the "holding change notice" is determined, the number of holding balls becomes "2" to "4" when the "holding change notice" is executed. No value is assigned to the scenario counter 223d (see FIG. 56).

As shown in the example of FIG. 56, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 19" for "after erasing the cockpit" indicating the timing at which the cockpit display area Db is erased, and "at the start" of the number of held balls "0". ``20 to 39'', ``40 to 59'' for ``before reach'' with ``0'' retained balls, ``60 to 79'' for ``after reach'' with ``0'' retained balls, pending It is "80 to 99" for the number of balls "1".

That is, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after erasing the cockpit". 20%, "at the start" with "0" pending balls is 20%, "before reaching" with "0" pending balls is 20%, and "after reaching" with "0" pending balls is 20%. , and the number of reserved balls "1" (that is, when the reserved pattern is displayed) is set to be a selection ratio of 20%.

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "1" and the display mode is "blue", any execution Timing ("After erasing the cockpit", "At the start" when the number of reserved balls is "0", "Before reaching" when the number of reserved balls is "0", "After reaching" when the number of reserved balls is "0", Number of reserved balls "1") are set to be evenly selected (20%).

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 56, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "-" for "after erasing the cockpit" indicating the timing when the cockpit display area Db is erased, and for "at the start" when the number of held balls is "0". "0 to 19", "20 to 39" for "before reach" with "0" pending balls, "40 to 59" for "after reach" with "0" pending balls, and hold It is "60 to 99" for the number of balls "1".

That is, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after erasing the cockpit". 0%, 20% "at the start" with "0" pending balls, 20% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, and 20% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls. , and the number of reserved balls "1" (that is, when the reserved pattern is displayed) is set to be a selection ratio of 40%.

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "1" and the display mode is "red", the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or the reserved pattern corresponding to the variation effect of the big hit is The display timing is set so that it is most likely to be selected (40%).

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when the display mode is "red" or "rainbow" to be described later, the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or the reserved pattern corresponding to the variable effect of the jackpot is "after erasing the cockpit". is set not to be selected. In other words, the “holding change notice” of the “after erasing the cockpit” of the holding symbols corresponding to the variation effect of the big win is set to be selected only when the display mode is “blue”.

Conventionally, in the "pending change notice", a plurality of change patterns (normal "white", "blue", "green", "red", "rainbow", etc.) are prepared in advance from the initial display mode, and the degree of change The jackpot expected value is configured to be different according to. Therefore, for example, when the "pending change notice" occurs, the display mode of "red", which is a two-step change from the normal display mode, is displayed rather than the "blue" display mode, which is a one-step change from the normal display mode. The aspect is set so that the jackpot expected value is higher. In other words, in the "reservation change notice" in the execution pattern or the reservation pattern, we expect a big hit with a display mode that has changed in multiple stages from the normal display mode ("red", etc.), and a display mode that has changed from the normal display mode by one step ( "Blue", etc.) is set so that a big hit cannot be expected and there are many cases of losing. Therefore, even if the "pending change notice" occurs, for example, when a one-step display mode (such as "blue") appears, the one-step display mode is a multiple-step change display mode (" red, etc.), the player judges that a big win cannot be expected with respect to the variable performance in which the one-step "hold change notice" has occurred, and the player judges that the one-step "hold change notice" I could not find interest in the variable production corresponding to ", but rather lost interest.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, in the case of executing the one-stage "holding change notice" in the execution pattern or the holding pattern showing the variation effect of the big win, the cockpit display area Db is erased "Cockpit erasure It is configured so that it can change to one level of display mode (“blue”) at the timing of “after”. Also, when executing the "pending change notice" that has changed in a plurality of stages, the execution timing of "after erasing the cockpit" is configured not to be selected. By constructing in this way, even with a one-stage "holding change notice" that could not expect a big hit in the past, a big win can be expected depending on the timing of occurrence of the "holding change notice". It becomes possible. As a result, the significance of existence of the one-stage ``reservation change notice'', which has not been found in the past, can be enhanced, a big win can be expected in any performance pattern, and the interest in the game can be enhanced by various performances.

In addition, when performing "reservation change notice" in the reserved design and the execution design showing the variable production that generates a big hit, the reservation design or the execution design is erased by "super reach" etc., and the production of "super reach" is completed. The "suspended change notice" can appear (execute) at the timing when the suspended symbol or the executed symbol is redisplayed. As a result, it is possible to directly change and notify an announcement object (changeable object; in the fifth embodiment, a reserved pattern or an execution pattern) that is always visible, or to newly display the announcement object. It is possible to casually change the display mode of the notice object while making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change of the notice object, as compared with the case where the notice object is displayed and notified. In addition, the reserved symbols that the player does not pay attention to are once hidden, and then casually changed, and the change mode is also a slight change (one step change) from the normal change. While making it difficult to notice the change, the player feels uncomfortable with the change. After that, by making the player recognize that the root of the sense of incongruity is directly linked to the game value (for example, a big win), the player is provided with an unexpected performance, and the performance is diversified to make the game interesting. can increase

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 56, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "rainbow", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "-" for "after erasing the cockpit", "0 to 29" for "at the start" when the number of held balls is "0", and the number of held balls is " It is "30 to 59" for "0" "before reaching", and "60 to 99" for "after reaching" with "0" held balls. In addition, the display mode of "rainbow" of "suspended change notice" does not appear in the suspended pattern, and can only appear in the executed pattern. No value is assigned to the scenario counter 223d.

That is, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "rainbow", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after erasing the cockpit". 0%, "At the start" with "0" pending balls is 30%, "Before reaching" with "0" pending balls is 30%, "After reaching" with "0" pending balls is 40% , the number of reserved balls "1" (that is, when the reserved pattern is displayed) is set to be a selection ratio of 0%.

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "1" and the display mode is "rainbow", "reach display ” is set so that the timing during execution is likely to be selected (40%). It should be noted that the display mode of the "rainbow" of the "suspension change notice" at the time of the big win is set to the above selection ratio regardless of the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "suspension change notice". Therefore, the description of the display mode of the "rainbow" of the "holding change notice" at the time of the big hit with the number of "2" to "4" holding balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is omitted.

Next, a case will be described where the number of pending balls in the variable effect is "2" at the time when the "holding change notice" of the big win is determined. In this case, the number of held balls "3" or "4" does not exist when the number of held balls "2" occurs. That is, when the number of reserved balls is "2", the reserved symbols with the number of reserved balls of "3" or "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, when the number of pending balls is "2" when the "holding change notice" is determined, the number of holding balls becomes "3" or "4" when the "holding change notice" is executed. No value is assigned to the scenario counter 223d (see FIG. 56).

As shown in the example of FIG. 56, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 29" for "after erasing the cockpit" indicating the timing at which the cockpit display area Db is erased, and "at the start" of the number of retained balls "0". ``30 to 39'', ``40 to 49'' for ``before reach'' with ``0'' retained balls, ``50 to 59'' for ``after reach'' with ``0'' retained balls, pending It is "60 to 79" for the number of balls "1", and "80 to 99" for the number of held balls "2".

That is, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after erasing the cockpit". 30%, 10% "at the start" with "0" held balls, 10% "before reach" with "0" held balls, 10% "after reach" with "0" held balls , The selection ratio is set so that the number of reserved balls "1" (that is, when the reserved pattern is shifted) is 20% and the number of reserved balls is "2" (that is, when the reserved pattern is displayed) is 20%. .

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the cockpit display area is The redisplay timing of Db is set so that it is most likely to be selected (30%).

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 56, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "-" for "after erasing the cockpit" indicating the timing when the cockpit display area Db is erased, and for "at the start" when the number of held balls is "0". "0 to 19", "20 to 39" for "before reach" with "0" pending balls, "40 to 59" for "after reach" with "0" pending balls, and hold It is "60 to 69" for the number of balls "1" and "70 to 99" for the number of held balls "2".

That is, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after erasing the cockpit". 0%, 20% "at the start" with "0" pending balls, 20% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, and 20% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls. , The selection ratio is set so that the number of reserved balls "1" (that is, when the reserved pattern is shifted) is 10%, and the number of reserved balls "2" (that is, when the reserved pattern is displayed) is 30%. .

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "1" and the display mode is "red", the "reserved change notice" of the execution pattern or the reserved pattern corresponding to the variation effect of the big hit is The display timing is set so that it is most likely to be selected (30%).

Next, a case will be described where the number of pending balls in the variable effect is "3" at the time when the "holding change notice" of the big win is determined. In this case, the number of held balls "4" does not exist when the number of held balls "3" occurs. That is, when the number of reserved balls is "3", the reserved symbols with the number of reserved balls of "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, when the number of pending balls is "3" when the "holding change notice" is determined, the scenario counter 223d for the number of holding balls "4" when the "holding change notice" is executed is not assigned (see FIG. 56).

As shown in the example of FIG. 56, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 39" for "after erasing the cockpit" indicating the timing when the cockpit display area Db is erased, "40 to 49", "50 to 59" for "before reaching" with "0" retained balls, "60 to 69" for "after reaching" with "0" retained balls, "70 to 79" for the number of "1" balls, "80 to 89" for the number of "2" held balls, and "90 to 99" for the number of "3" held balls. .

That is, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after erasing the cockpit". 40%, 10% "at the start" with "0" held balls, 10% "before reach" with "0" held balls, 10% "after reach" with "0" held balls , The number of retained balls "1" (that is, at the time of the retained pattern shift) is 10%, the number of retained balls "2" (that is, at the time of the retained design shift) is 10%, The number of retained balls "3" (that is, the retained (during symbol display) is set to a selection ratio of 10%.

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the cockpit display area The redisplay timing of Db is set so that it is most likely to be selected (40%).

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 56, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "-" for "after erasing the cockpit" indicating the timing when the cockpit display area Db is erased, and for "at the start" when the number of held balls is "0". "0 to 19", "20 to 39" for "before reach" with "0" pending balls, "40 to 59" for "after reach" with "0" pending balls, and hold "60 to 69" for the number of "1" balls, "70 to 79" for the number of "2" held balls, and "80 to 99" for the number of "3" held balls. .

That is, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after erasing the cockpit". 0%, 20% "at the start" with "0" pending balls, 20% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, and 20% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls. , The number of reserved balls "1" (that is, when shifting the reserved pattern) is 10%, the number of reserved balls "2" (that is, when shifting the reserved pattern) is 10%, and the reserved pattern is "3" (that is, the reserved pattern display) is set to a selection ratio of 20%.

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "3" and the display mode is "red", the number of pending balls is Equal execution timings for "0" "at the start", "0" pending balls "before reaching", "0" pending balls "after reaching", and "3" pending balls is set to be selected (20%) to

Next, a case will be described where the number of pending balls in the variable effect is "4" at the time when the "holding change notice" of the big win is determined.

As shown in the example of FIG. 56, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 49" for "after erasing the cockpit" indicating the timing at which the cockpit display area Db is erased, and "at the start" of the number of held balls "0". ``50 to 59'', ``60 to 69'' for ``before reach'' with ``0'' retained balls, ``70 to 79'' for ``after reach'' with ``0'' retained balls, pending "80 to 84" for "1" ball, "85 to 89" for "2" held ball, "90 to 94" for "3" held ball, "90 to 94" for held ball It is "95 to 99" for "4" pieces.

That is, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after erasing the cockpit". 50%, 10% "at the start" with "0" pending balls, 10% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, and 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls , the number of retained balls "1" (that is, when the retained pattern is shifted) is 5%, the number of retained balls is "2" (that is, when the retained pattern is shifted) is 5%, and the number of retained balls is "3" (that is, when the retained pattern is shifted). The selection ratio is set to 5% for the pattern shift) and 5% for the reserved patterns "4" (that is, when the reserved patterns are displayed).

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the cockpit display area The redisplay timing of Db is set so that it is most likely to be selected (40%).

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 56, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "-" for "after erasing the cockpit" indicating the timing when the cockpit display area Db is erased, and for "at the start" when the number of held balls is "0". "0 to 19", "20 to 39" for "before reach" with "0" pending balls, "40 to 59" for "after reach" with "0" pending balls, and hold "60 to 69" for "1" ball, "70 to 79" for "2" held ball, "80 to 89" for "3" held ball, "80 to 89" for held ball It is "90 to 99" for "4" pieces.

That is, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after erasing the cockpit". 0%, 20% "at the start" with "0" pending balls, 20% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, and 20% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls. , The number of reserved balls "1" (that is, when shifting the reserved pattern) is 10%, the number of reserved balls "2" (that is, when shifting the reserved pattern) is 10%, and the reserved pattern is "3" (that is, the reserved pattern The selection ratio is set such that 10% is for "shift" and 10% is for "4" reserved symbols (that is, when the reserved symbols are displayed).

Therefore, when the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variation effect of the big hit is "4" and the display mode is "red", the number of holding balls The execution timing of "0" "at the start", "0" held balls "before reach", and "0" held balls "after reach" are evenly selected (20%). is set to

In this way, when the "suspended change notice" is performed in the pending symbol and the execution symbol indicating the variable effect that generates the big win, the cockpit display area Db is displayed before the variable effect corresponding to the "suspended change notice" is confirmed and displayed. is erased and the execution pattern and the reservation pattern in the cockpit display area Db become invisible, the "suspension change notice" can appear (execute) at the timing when it becomes visible again. As a result, it is possible to directly change and notify an announcement object (changeable object; in the fifth embodiment, the execution pattern or the reserved pattern) that is always visible, or to newly display the announcement object. It is possible to casually change the display mode of the notice object while making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change of the notice object, as compared with the case where the notice object is displayed and notified. In other words, by temporarily hiding the notice object and then casually changing it, first, the player is given a sense of discomfort, and then the root of the sense of discomfort is directly linked to the game value (for example, a big win). By recognizing this, it is possible to diversify the presentation while providing the player with an unexpected presentation, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the "holding change notice" of "after erasing the cockpit" is configured to be more likely to be selected as the number of holding balls increases at the time when the "holding change notice" is determined. The greater the number of variable effects to be executed before the variable effect corresponding to the "hold change notice" "after erasing the cockpit" is confirmed and displayed, the higher the possibility that the cockpit display area Db will be erased. It is possible to increase the chances of executing the "holding change notice" after erasing the cockpit, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Next, the losing scenario table 222f2 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the losing scenario table 222f2 of the fifth embodiment. In the losing scenario table 222f2 in FIG. 57, as in the big win scenario table 222f1, each number of holding balls of the variable effect at the time when the vertical row determines "holding change notice" (four patterns of 1 to 4 holding balls) ), a total of 12 types of situation patterns are classified according to the display mode (3 patterns of “blue”, “red”, and “rainbow”) of “holding change notice” for each number of holding balls. there is In addition, as the timing at which the horizontal row executes (starts) the "holding change notice", 4 patterns at the time of display or shift to each number of holding balls (number of holding balls "1" to "4") and holding balls A total of 8 types of timing patterns, including 4 patterns of "start (shift time)", "before reach", "after reach" or "after pending deletion" in the number "0" (during the execution of the variable effect) are separated from each other. A possible value of the scenario counter 223d is associated with each of the divided groups.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the scenario table 222f2 for losing, situation patterns of the number of pending balls of the variable effect at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" and each display mode of the "holding change notice" are prepared. A value of the scenario counter 223d is associated with the situation pattern. It should be noted that the "rainbow" in the display mode of the "holding change notice" indicates the occurrence of a big win when the "rainbow" display mode appears, and is not selected in the event of a loss. Therefore, in the "rainbow" situation pattern of the losing scenario table 222f2, the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to any of the pending numbers of the variable effects at the time when the "pending change notice" is determined. are omitted.

First, a case will be described where the number of pending balls in the variable effect is "1" at the time when the "holding change notice" for losing is determined. In this case, the number of held balls "2" to "4" does not exist when the number of held balls "1" occurs. That is, when the number of reserved balls "1" occurs, the reserved symbols of the number of reserved balls "2" to "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this losing scenario table 222f2, when the number of pending balls is "1" when the "holding change notice" is determined, the number of holding balls becomes "2" to "4" when the "holding change notice" is executed. No value is assigned to the scenario counter 223d (see FIG. 57).

As shown in the example of FIG. 57, when the number of pending balls at the time of determining the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "after erasing the cockpit" indicating the timing when the cockpit display area Db is erased, ``10 to 19'', ``20 to 29'' for ``before reach'' with ``0'' pending balls, ``30 to 39'' for ``after reach'' with ``0'' held balls, pending It is "40 to 99" for the number of balls "1".

That is, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after erasing the cockpit". 10%, 10% "at the start" with "0" pending balls, 10% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, and 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls. , and the number of reserved balls "1" (that is, when the reserved pattern is displayed) is set to be a selection ratio of 60%.

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "1" and the display mode is "blue", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variable performance of the loss is "blue". The display timing is set so that it is most likely to be selected (60%).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the value of the scenario counter 223d was not assigned to "after pending deletion" in the losing scenario table 222f2, but in the losing scenario table 222f2 of the third embodiment, It is set to allocate the scenario counter 223d to the execution timing "after erasing the cockpit". This is because erasing of the cockpit display area Db can be executed even in a variable effect executed before the variable effect corresponding to the "holding change notice" "after erasing the cockpit". This is because the "big win display" is not determined even when Db is erased.

Then, as shown in the example of FIG. 57, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "-" for "after erasing the cockpit" indicating the timing when the cockpit display area Db is erased, and for "at the start" when the number of held balls is "0". "0 to 19", "20 to 39" for "before reach" with "0" pending balls, "40 to 59" for "after reach" with "0" pending balls, and hold It is "60 to 99" for the number of balls "1".

That is, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "1" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after erasing the cockpit". 0%, 20% "at the start" with "0" pending balls, 20% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, and 20% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls. , and the number of reserved balls "1" (that is, when the reserved pattern is displayed) is set to be a selection ratio of 40%.

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "1" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variable effect of the loss is "red". The display timing is set so that it is most likely to be selected (40%).

Next, a case will be described in which the number of pending balls in the variable effect is "2" at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" for losing. In this case, the number of held balls "3" or "4" does not exist when the number of held balls "2" occurs. That is, when the number of reserved balls is "2", the reserved symbols with the number of reserved balls of "3" or "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this losing scenario table 222f2, when the number of pending balls is "2" when the "holding change notice" is determined, the number of holding balls becomes "3" or "4" when the "holding change notice" is executed. No value is assigned to the scenario counter 223d (see FIG. 57).

As shown in the example of FIG. 57, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "after erasing the cockpit" indicating the timing when the cockpit display area Db is erased, ``10 to 19'', ``20 to 29'' for ``before reach'' with ``0'' pending balls, ``30 to 39'' for ``after reach'' with ``0'' held balls, pending It is "40 to 49" for the number of balls "1" and "50 to 99" for the number of held balls "2".

That is, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after erasing the cockpit". 10%, 10% "at the start" with "0" pending balls, 10% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, and 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls. , The selection ratio is set so that the number of reserved balls "1" (that is, when the reserved pattern is shifted) is 10%, and the number of reserved balls "2" (that is, when the reserved pattern is displayed) is 50%. .

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "2" and the display mode is "blue", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variable effect of losing is "blue". The display timing is set so that it is most likely to be selected (50%).

Next, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" shown in the example of FIG. 57 is "2" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing and scenario of the "holding change notice" Correlation with the value of the counter 223d is "-" for "after erasing the cockpit" indicating the timing at which the cockpit display area Db is erased, and "0" for "starting" when the number of held balls is "0". ~ 19", "20 to 39" for "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, "40 to 59" for "after reaching" with "0" pending balls, " "60 to 69" for 1", and "70 to 99" for the number of held balls "2".

That is, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "2" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after erasing the cockpit". 0%, 20% "at the start" with "0" pending balls, 20% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, and 20% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls. , The selection ratio is set so that the number of reserved balls "1" (that is, when the reserved pattern is shifted) is 10%, and the number of reserved balls "2" (that is, when the reserved pattern is displayed) is 30%. .

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "2" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variable effect of the loss is "red". The display timing is set so that it is easy to select (30%).

Next, a case will be described in which the number of pending balls in the variable effect is "3" at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" of loss. In this case, the number of held balls "4" does not exist when the number of held balls "3" occurs. That is, when the number of reserved balls is "3", the reserved symbols with the number of reserved balls of "4" are not displayed. Therefore, in this losing scenario table 222f2, when the number of pending balls is "3" when the "holding change notice" is determined, the scenario counter 223d for the number of holding balls of "4" when the "holding change notice" is executed is not assigned (see FIG. 57).

As shown in the example of FIG. 57, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "after erasing the cockpit" indicating the timing when the cockpit display area Db is erased, ``10 to 19'', ``20 to 29'' for ``before reach'' with ``0'' pending balls, ``30 to 39'' for ``after reach'' with ``0'' held balls, pending "40 to 49" for the number of balls "1", "50 to 59" for the number of held balls "2", and "60 to 99" for the number of held balls "3" .

That is, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after erasing the cockpit". 10%, 10% "at the start" with "0" pending balls, 10% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, and 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls. , The number of retained balls "1" (that is, at the time of the retained pattern shift) is 10%, the number of retained balls "2" (that is, at the time of the retained design shift) is 10%, The number of retained balls "3" (that is, the retained (during symbol display) is set to a selection ratio of 40%.

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "3" and the display mode is "blue", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variable effect of the loss is "blue". The display timing is set so that it is most likely to be selected (40%).

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 57, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "-" for "after erasing the cockpit" indicating the timing when the cockpit display area Db is erased, and for "at the start" when the number of held balls is "0". "0 to 19", "20 to 39" for "before reach" with "0" pending balls, "40 to 59" for "after reach" with "0" pending balls, and hold "60 to 69" for the number of "1" balls, "70 to 79" for the number of "2" held balls, and "80 to 99" for the number of "3" held balls. .

That is, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "3" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after erasing the cockpit". 0%, 20% "at the start" with "0" pending balls, 20% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, and 20% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls. , The number of reserved balls "1" (that is, when shifting the reserved pattern) is 10%, the number of reserved balls "2" (that is, when shifting the reserved pattern) is 10%, and the reserved pattern is "3" (that is, the reserved pattern display) is set to a selection ratio of 20%.

Therefore, the "reservation change notice" of the execution pattern or the reservation design corresponding to the change performance of the loss, when the number of reservation balls at the time of determination is "3" and the display mode is "red", the variation performance "At the time of start", "before reach", "after reach", or when displaying reserved symbols are set to be easily selected (each 20%).

Next, a case will be described where the number of pending balls in the variable effect at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" for losing is "4".

As shown in the example of FIG. 57, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is "0 to 9" for "after erasing the cockpit" indicating the timing when the cockpit display area Db is erased, ``10 to 19'', ``20 to 29'' for ``before reach'' with ``0'' pending balls, ``30 to 39'' for ``after reach'' with ``0'' held balls, pending "40 to 49" for "1" ball, "50 to 59" for "2" held ball, "60 to 69" for "3" held ball, "60 to 69" for held ball It is "70 to 99" for "4" pieces.

That is, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after erasing the cockpit". 10%, 10% "at the start" with "0" pending balls, 10% "before reaching" with "0" pending balls, and 10% "after reaching" with "0" pending balls. , The number of retained balls "1" (that is, at the time of the retained pattern shift) is 10%, the number of retained balls "2" (that is, at the time of the retained design shift) is 10%, The number of retained balls "3" (that is, the retained The selection ratio is set to 10% for the pattern shift) and 30% for the reserved patterns "4" (that is, when the reserved patterns are displayed).

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "4" and the display mode is "blue", the "holding change notice" of the execution pattern or the holding pattern corresponding to the variable effect of the loss is "blue". The display timing is set so that it is most likely to be selected (30%).

Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 57, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "red", the "holding change notice" is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is "-" for "after erasing the cockpit" indicating the timing when the cockpit display area Db is erased, and for "at the start" when the number of held balls is "0". "0 to 19", "20 to 39" for "before reach" with "0" pending balls, "40 to 59" for "after reach" with "0" pending balls, and hold "60 to 69" for "1" ball, "70 to 79" for "2" held ball, "80 to 89" for "3" held ball, "80 to 89" for held ball It is "90 to 99" for "4" pieces.

That is, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination of the "holding change notice" is "4" and the display mode is "red", the execution timing of the "holding change notice" is "after erasing the cockpit". 0%, "At the start" with "0" pending balls is 20%, "Before reaching" with "0" pending balls is 20%, "After reaching" with "0" pending balls is 10% , The number of reserved balls "1" (that is, when shifting the reserved pattern) is 10%, the number of reserved balls "2" (that is, when shifting the reserved pattern) is 10%, and the reserved pattern is "3" (that is, the reserved pattern The selection ratio is set such that 10% is for "shift" and 10% is for "4" reserved symbols (that is, when the reserved symbols are displayed).

Therefore, when the number of pending balls at the time of determination is "4" and the display mode is "red", the variable effect "At the start", "before reaching" or "after reaching" are set to be easily selected (each 20%).

In this way, even if the same "pending change notice (for example," blue ")" is different at the time of losing the variable production and at the time of the big hit, the execution timing (appearance timing) is different, so that the "pending change notice , and the timing at which the display mode appears. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the suggested content of the degree of expectation for a big win by the "suspension change notice" according to the display mode and appearance timing of the "suspension change notice", thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Next, the hold information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the pending information storage area 223e and execution information storage area 223f in the fifth embodiment. The configuration of the pending information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f in the fifth embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that pending deletion information storage areas 223e7 and 223f7 and re-change information storage areas 223e8 and 223f8 are provided. Not the point. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, description thereof will be omitted.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pending ball number command, the value of the sub pending ball number counter 223b updated by the pending ball number command in the pending information storage areas 1 to 4 of the pending information storage area 223e. Based on the values stored in the respective counter storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the X-th area storing the pending information corresponding to, prefetching processing (holding display setting processing (see FIG. 59)) is performed, and based on the result of this prefetching processing The suspension change information and scenario data generated by the above are stored in the storage areas 223e5 and 223e6 of the same suspension information storage X-th area.

In addition, when the scenario data of "holding change notice" after "erasing the cockpit" is stored in the scenario data storage areas 223e6 and 223f6, the sound lamp control device 113 provides a variable element of "super reach or more" in the variable effect. is executed and the cockpit display area Db is erased, a pending symbol corresponding to the execution information storage area 223f or the pending information storage area 223e storing the scenario data of "pending change notice" "after erasing the cockpit" or "Pending change notice" is executed for the execution pattern, and the holding change information stored in the holding change information storage areas 223f5 and 223e5 of the execution information storage area 223f or the holding information storage area 223e is changed to hold changed information. is configured to be rewritten and stored. In this way, when the "pending change notice" "after erasing the cockpit" is executed, the holding change information stored in the holding change information storage areas 223f5 and 223e5 of the execution information storage area 223f or the hold information storage area 223e is By rewriting the hold changed information, it is possible to avoid redundant execution of the “hold change notice” after “after erasing the cockpit”, thereby reducing the control load of the MPU 221 .

On the other hand, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command and a stop type command meaning the start of the variation effect from the main control device 110, shift processing is performed in the pending information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f. That is, the suspended variable performance is reduced by one, and the execution of the variable performance suspended first in terms of time is started, so that the first area for storing the suspended information corresponding to the first suspended variable performance is stored. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e6 and various information (data) are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f corresponding to the variable performance currently being executed. Let

In addition, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and various information (data) stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e6 of the pending information storage second area are stored in the respective storage areas 223e1 to 223e6 of the pending information storage first area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and various information (data) stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e6 of the third pending information storage area are stored in the respective storage areas 223e1 to 223e6 of the second pending information storage area. , the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e6 of the fourth pending information storage area and various information (data) are stored in the respective storage areas 223e1 to 223e1 of the third pending information storage area. 223e6.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223f stores the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203c of the main controller 110. FIG. In addition, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first to fourth holding areas of the holding ball storage area 203b of the main controller 110 are stored in the first to fourth holding information storage areas. will be That is, in the sound lamp control device 113, counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the variable effects being executed and held by the main control device 110 are stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the hold information storage area 223e. be.

The pending deletion information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f of the fifth embodiment are not provided with the pending deletion information storage areas 223e7 and 223f7 and the re-change information storage areas 223e8 and 223f8. The storage capacity is reduced compared to the information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the pending display setting process (S1209) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing a hold display setting process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113, when it is determined in the command determination process (S1110 in FIG. 28) that the command for the number of pending balls has been received, performs this pending display setting process, and the "holding change notice" When execution is determined, the pending change information and scenario data are stored in the respective storage areas 223e5 and 223e6 of the pending information storage area X indicated by the sub pending ball number counter 223b updated by the pending ball number command.

Specifically, in the process of S1303 of the pending display setting process (S1209), it is determined whether or not the execution lottery for the "holding change notice" has been won based on the various information indicated by the pending ball number command received this time ( S1303). As a result of the determination, if the execution lottery for the "holding change notice" is not won (S1303: No), the "holding change notice" is not executed. Null data is stored in the pending change information storage area 223e5 and the scenario data storage area 223e6 of the X area (S1361), and the process proceeds to S1313.

On the other hand, in the process of S1303, if the execution lottery for the "hold change notice" is won (S1303: Yes), the processes of S1304 and S1305 are performed as in the first embodiment, and the hold change information and the scenario data are Stored in the storage areas 223e5 and 223e6 of the X-th storage area for storage information indicated by the number-of-holds-balls command, and the process proceeds to S1313.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the command for the number of pending balls is received, the pending deletion information indicating whether or not the cockpit display area Db is deleted in the variable effect, and the variable element of "re-variation" are executed in the variable effect. It does not discriminate and store re-variation information indicating whether or not it will be changed. As a result, the capacity of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced, and the control load of the MPU 221 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the change effect processing (S1109) of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing the variation effect processing (S1109) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 of the fifth embodiment.

This variable effect processing is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28), and in order to display the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, first, it is stored in the pending information storage first area of the pending information storage area 223e. Various information is shifted to the execution information storage area 223f, and the information stored in the pending information storage second to fourth areas is shifted to the pending information storage first to third areas. In addition, when the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main controller 110 do not match the contents (information) stored in the execution information storage area 223f, an error command for display is generated, and the command is displayed. Processing is performed to set for transmission to the device 114 . Furthermore, when it is the execution timing of "suspension change notice" in the execution pattern, various commands related to each execution timing of the "suspension change notice" are generated, and these commands are set to be transmitted to the display control device 114. process. Also, when it is the execution timing of the "suspension change notice" in the pending symbol, various commands related to each execution timing of the "suspension change notice" are generated, and these commands are set to be transmitted to the display control device 114. process.

In the fluctuation effect process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1401). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is not on (that is, it is off) (S1401: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this fluctuation effect processing. and return to the main process (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is ON (S1401: Yes), both the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received, so the processes of S1402 to S1412 are performed as in the first embodiment. , the process proceeds to S1413.

In the processing of S1413, it is determined whether or not it is the execution timing for displaying the "suspended change notice" in the execution symbols displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 (S1413). This determination is made by confirming the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 provided in the execution information storage area 223f. It is determined whether or not the data indicates "at the start", "before reach" or "after reach" (hereinafter abbreviated as "at start" to "after reach").

As a result of the determination in S1413, the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f is "after erasing the cockpit" or the number of retained balls is "0" and the number of If the data indicates one of "after" (S1413: Yes), in order to execute "reservation change notice" in the executed symbols, the executed symbol change process is performed (S1414), and the process proceeds to S1415.

On the other hand, in the process of S1413, the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f is data indicating "after erasing the cockpit" or the number of retained balls is "0" and "at the start to "after reaching" (S1413: No), the process of S1414 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1415. The executed symbol change processing of S1414 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, in the processing of S1415, it is determined whether or not it is the execution timing for displaying the "holding change notice" in the reserved symbols displayed in the first to third reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db3 (S1415). This determination is made for each scenario data stored in the scenario data storage areas 223f6 provided in the first to third pending information storage areas of the pending information storage area 223e. That is, each scenario data in each scenario data storage area 223f6 determines whether or not it is the execution timing of the "suspended change notice" in the shifted suspended symbol display areas Db1 to Db3. This determination is made, for example, by determining whether or not the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6, which is shifted to the first storage area for holding information, is data indicating the number of held balls "1", or whether or not the cockpit display is performed. After the area Db is erased, it is determined whether or not it is the data (that is, "after erasing the cockpit") to execute the "holding change notice" in the holding symbol display areas Db1 to Db3.

As a result of the process of S1415, if there are no reserved information storage first to third areas for storing scenario data corresponding to the execution timing (S1415: No), it is not necessary to give a "hold change notice" to the reserved symbols. Therefore, the variable effect processing (S1109) is ended, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 28). On the other hand, if there are the first to third storage areas for storing the scenario data corresponding to the execution timing (S1415: Yes), then the change timing of the pending symbols, that is, the "holding change notice" in the pending symbols. It is determined whether the execution timing is "when shifting" or "after erasing the cockpit" (S1461). As a result of the determination, if the change timing of the reserved design is the time of shift of the reserved design (S1461: "at the time of shift"), the corresponding reserved design is stored in the reserved change information storage area 223f5 with the display mode of "holding change notice ' is set to the display control device 114 (S1462), and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

The display shift hold change command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and sent to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 28). sent. The display control device 114 that has received the hold change command during shift for display performs display control so as to display the corresponding hold design in the display mode of the determined "hold change notice" when shift-displaying the hold design. .

On the other hand, in the processing of S1461, if the change timing of the reserved symbols is the timing when the reserved symbols are erased, that is, "after erasing the cockpit" (S1461: "after erasing the cockpit"), then the third symbol is displayed from now on. It is determined whether or not a variable element of "super reach or more" is executed in the variable performance executed by the device 81 (S1463). That is, in the variable effect, it is confirmed whether or not there is a timing at which the cockpit display area Db is erased and the reserved symbols become invisible due to the variable element of "super reach or higher". This determination is performed by determining the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command stored in the RAM 223 in the processing of S1202 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 29).

In the process of S1463, if the variable element of "super reach or more" is not executed in the variable effect to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 from now on (S1463: No), in the variable effect to be executed from now on, "after erasing the cockpit , the process of S1464 to S1466 is skipped, the variable effect process (S1109) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, in the process of S1463, if the variable element of "super reach or more" is executed in the variable effect to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 from now on (S1463: Yes), then the cockpit display area Db is already executed. (S1464). This determination is to determine whether or not the pending change information stored in the pending change information storage area 223e5 of the pending information storage area 223e has been rewritten to pending changed information. When the pending change information in the pending change information storage area 223e5 is pending changed information, since the "holding change notice" has already been executed for the pending symbol, there is no need to carry out the "holding change notice" again. Therefore, as a result of the determination in S1464, if the pending changed information is stored in the pending change information storage area 223e5 (S1464: Yes), the processing of S1465 and S1466 is skipped, and the variable effect processing (S1109) is terminated. Then, the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, if the pending change information is not stored in the pending change information storage area 223e5 as a result of the determination in S1464 (S1464: No), the "hold change notice" "after erasing the cockpit" has not yet been executed. After the cockpit display area Db is erased, at the timing when it is redisplayed, the display control device 114 executes the "holding change notice" in the display mode stored in the holding change information storage area 223e5 for the corresponding holding pattern. Towards, a post-delete pending change command for display including the information of the corresponding pending pattern is set (S1465). Then, the pending changed information is stored in the pending change information storage area 223e5 of the corresponding pending pattern (S1466), and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

In addition, when the "hold change notice" of "after erasing the cockpit" is executed, the hold changed information is stored in the hold change information storage area 223e5 of the corresponding hold pattern. The scenario data in the pattern scenario data storage area 223e6 may be changed from "after erasing the cockpit" to null data or the like. With this configuration, in the process of S1415, it is determined that there are no reserved information storage first to third areas for storing scenario data corresponding to the execution timing (S1415: No), and thereafter, the corresponding reserved pattern is determined. can be configured not to perform "hold change notice" in .

The post-erase change command for display set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 28). be done. The display control device 114, which has received the post-delete change command for display, executes a variable element of "super reach or more" in the variable effect, erases the cockpit display area Db, and executes the "super reach or more" variable element. At the timing when the cockpit display area Db is displayed again after completion, display control is performed so that the corresponding pending pattern is displayed in the display mode of the determined "pending change notice".

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the executed symbol change process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing execution symbol change processing executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 of the fifth embodiment. This execution symbol change process is executed in the variation effect process (see FIG. 60) executed in the main process (see FIG. 28), and the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the third symbol display device 81. in order to perform a "pending change notice".

In the execution symbol change process of the fifth embodiment, as a result of the determination in S1501, the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f is "0" in the number of pending balls and "after cockpit deletion". (S1501: "After erasing the cockpit"), first, it is determined whether or not the effect of erasing the cockpit display area Db has already been executed and the execution pattern has changed (S1571). This determination is to determine whether or not the pending change information stored in the pending change information storage area 223f5 of the execution information storage area 223f has been rewritten to pending changed information. If the pending change information in the pending change information storage area 223f5 is pending changed information, the "holding change notice" has already been executed in the execution pattern, so there is no need to perform the "holding change notice" again. Therefore, as a result of the determination in S1571, if pending changed information is stored in the pending change information storage area 223f5 (S1571: Yes), the processing of S1572 to S1574 is skipped, and this execution symbol change processing (S1414) is skipped. It ends and returns to the variable effect processing (see FIG. 60).

On the other hand, in the process of S1571, if no pending change information is stored in the pending change information storage area 223f5 (S1571: No), the "hold change notice" "after erasing the cockpit" has not yet been executed. Then, in order to confirm whether or not it is possible to execute the "holding change notice" after "erasing the cockpit" in the variable effect, it is determined whether or not the variable element of "super reach or more" is executed in the variable effect. (S1572). This determination is performed by determining the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command stored in the RAM 223 in the processing of S1202 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 29).

As a result of the determination in S1572, if a variable element of "super reach or more" is executed in the variable effect (S1572: Yes), there is an effect in which the cockpit display area Db is erased in the variable effect. , in order to confirm whether or not it is possible to execute the "holding change notice" after the "reach display" of the variable effect, it is determined whether or not the variable element of "re-variation" is executed in the variable effect (S1573 ). This determination is performed by determining the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command stored in the RAM 223 in the processing of S1202 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 29).

As a result of the determination in S1573, if the variable element of "re-variation" is executed in the variable effect (S1573: Yes), the variable effect in which "re-variation" is executed after "reach display", and the cockpit Since it is a variable effect in which the "suspended change notice" can be executed when the display area Db is redisplayed, the "suspended change notice" is executed in the display mode stored in the pending change information storage area 223f5 of the execution information storage area 223f. Then, the change command after erasing for display is set toward the display control device 114 (S1574), and the process returns to the variation effect processing (see FIG. 60).

The post-erase change command for display set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 28). be done. The display control device 114 that has received the post-delete change command for display, after the "super reach" or "special reach" of the variable effect is completed with respect to the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0. , and performs display control so as to change the execution pattern (for example, from 'normal (white)' to 'blue') to the display mode of the determined 'suspension change notice' at the timing before execution of 'revariation'.

On the other hand, in the process of S1572, if the variable element of "super reach or more" is not executed in the variable effect (S1572: No), the effect of erasing the cockpit display area Db is not performed in the variable effect. Unable to execute 'pending change notice' after deletion.

Also, in the process of S1573, if the variation element of "re-variation" is not executed in the variation effect (S1573: No), since the variation element of "re-variation" is not included in the variation effect, "after erasing the cockpit" There is no point in executing the "pending change notice" of Specifically, for example, even if the execution symbol "hold change notice" is executed after "super reach" is executed and the "big win display" is confirmed, no effect will occur after the "super reach". , it is not possible to give the player any interest, but rather to make him lose interest by the meaningless presentation. Also, for example, even if the execution symbol "hold change notice" is executed after the "super reach" is executed and the "losing display" is confirmed, the "losing display" is confirmed as it is, and the next variable effect is started. In such a case, the discrepancies in the performance will give the player a sense of distrust in the game.

Therefore, in the process of S1572, if it is determined that the variable element of "super reach or more" is not executed in the variable effect (S1572: No), or in the process of S1573, "re-variation" in the variable effect If it is determined that the variable element will not be executed (S1573: No), the "holding change notice" cannot be executed "after the cockpit is erased", so the process goes to S1504 to confirm the timing at which the "holding change notice" can be executed. Move to

By configuring in this way, even if it is a variable effect that cannot execute the initially set "after erasing cockpit" "holding change notice", at the executable execution timing ("after reach" or "before reach") It can be changed to execute a "pending change notice". Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of cases where the ``holding change notice'' is not executed even though the lottery for executing the ``holding change notice'' is won, and the execution rate of the ``holding change notice'' can be increased, thereby improving the amusement of the game. In addition, even if the lottery process for the "pending change notice" and the lottery process for the variable effect are performed by different processes (different systems), adjustments will be made so that there is no discrepancy between the contents of the mutual effects. Therefore, by performing each lottery process with a different (different system) program, it is possible to easily design each program and to execute a consistent effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, an execution example of the "holding change notice" "after erasing the cockpit" will be described. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a situation in which the "holding change notice" is performed "after the cockpit is erased" in the variable effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 of the fifth embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 62(a) is a diagram showing a state just before the "ready-to-win display" appears in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. FIG. 62(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub-display area Ds is erased from the state of FIG. 62(a) and "normal reach" is performed in the main display area Dm. FIG. 62(c) is a diagram showing a state in which "super reach" is performed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 62(b). FIG. 62(d) is a diagram showing a state in which an effect suggesting that a "loss display" will appear in the "super reach" effect is being executed from the state of FIG. 62(c). FIG. 62(e) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed from the state of FIG. be. FIG. 62(f) shows that the variable effect is digested from the state of FIG. 62(e), and in the variable effect corresponding to the reserved design displayed in the third reserved design display area Db3 at the stage of FIG. 62(e) It is the figure which showed the state just before "big-win display" appears. In addition, in FIGS. 62(a) to 62(f), the display mode of the third pattern is omitted.

In FIG. 62(a), in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol "7" is stop-displayed, and in the right display area Dm3, the third symbol "7" is stop-displayed. In addition, in the middle display area Dm2, the third pattern is still unrecognizably "high-speed fluctuating". Therefore, it is a state just before (immediately before) the appearance of the so-called "ready-to-reach display" by the "7" symbol.

In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, the character pattern is displayed in the small central area Ds2 in a forewarning mode suggesting that the "ready-to-reach display" will appear. Specifically, the character design displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner as if the characters are cheering. A predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, and no character design or the like is displayed.

Further, in the cockpit display area Db, an executed symbol is displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, and reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Therefore, the execution symbol indicates that the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of pending balls of the variable effect is four.

In FIG. 62(b), from the state of FIG. 62(a), in the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stop-displayed and the "ready-to-win display" by the "7" symbol is displayed. is determined, and "normal reach" is being executed in the main display area Dm. In this "normal reach", it is displayed as if the entire main display area Dm were enlarged. Specifically, in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3, the "7" symbol that is being stopped is displayed in an enlarged manner, and in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is displayed at a low speed so that it can be visually recognized. , scrolled at low speed from "5" pattern to "6" pattern).

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is erased as the main display area Dm expands due to the occurrence of "normal reach", and the sub-display area Ds becomes invisible.

In the cockpit display area Db, as in the display state of FIG. 62(a), the execution symbols are displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. It is Therefore, as in FIG. 62(a), the execution symbol indicates that the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of suspended balls in the variable effect is four. showing.

FIG. 62(c) shows a state in which "super reach" is performed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 62(b). In this "super reach", the reach formation pattern of the "7" pattern displayed in the "normal reach" is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁

Also, in FIG. 62(c), a "battle effect" ("competition effect" in "special reach") in which a plurality of character patterns compete for victory or defeat using almost the entire display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62(c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the cockpit display area Db is erased during execution of "Super Reach", and instead, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. A number pattern (“4” in the fifth embodiment) indicating the number of pending balls in the variable effect is newly displayed on the upper left of the display area.

In FIG. 62(d), from the state of FIG. 62(c), in the "battle effect" in the "super reach", the player's character design (left character design) changes to the enemy's character design (right character design). A lost state is displayed. Therefore, when the player recognizes the display contents of FIG. 62(d), the player loses the character pattern in the "battle effect" of the "super reach", and the "big win display" is displayed in the "super reach". ” does not appear and “failure display” appears.

In addition, in FIG. 62(d), as in FIG. 62(c), "super reach" is being executed, so the cockpit display area Db remains in an erased state.

In FIG. 62(e), from the state of FIG. 62(d), the effect of "super reach" is lost (the character pattern on the enemy side wins), and "failure display (787)" is displayed in the main display area Dm. appears, and the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are re-displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 . In this state, the character pattern in the central small region Ds2 of the sub-display region Ds and the execution patterns and reserved patterns in the cockpit display region Db are visible again. Note that the character pattern in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is displayed in a disappointing manner due to the appearance of the "missing display". That is, in the main part of the third symbol display device 81, the chance down state is displayed.

In FIG. 62(e), the reserved design displayed in the third reserved design display area Db3 of the cockpit display area Db is the display mode ("white") before being erased by the execution of the "super reach". b)) is displayed in a different display mode (“blue”). That is, the "suspension change notice" is performed at the execution timing "after cockpit erasure". In other words, in the part (secondary part) which is not the main part of the third symbol display device 81, the state in which the chance is up is displayed. Therefore, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the chance down state in the main part and the chance up state in the non-main part are displayed at the same time.

When the player sees the state of FIG. 62(e), the player sees that the "loss display (787)" appears in the main display area Dm and that he has lost in the "battle effect" in the "super reach". 62(d), as predicted at the time of FIG. It is a state in which the interest is shifted to the next variable performance. Then, when the player looks at the pending symbol in the cockpit display area Db to focus on the content of the next variable effect, the pending symbol in the third pending symbol display area Db3 indicating the pending variable effect is "suspended change notice". is performed to recognize that the reserved symbol has changed to "blue".

A player who sees the "hold change notice" for the first time "after erasing the cockpit" first notices the difference in the display mode of the hold symbols from before the execution of the "battle effect" of the "super reach". Feel something is wrong. Then, the user recognizes that the source of the discomfort is the reserved design of "blue". Then, it considers when the "reservation change notice" of the "blue" reservation pattern was made based on its own memory. As a result of examination, it is understood that the "pending change notice" was not performed before the execution of the "super reach", but was performed after the "super reach" was finished. At this moment, the player anticipates that some kind of event will occur in the pending variable presentation in which this "holding change notice" is executed.

In FIG. 62(f), two variable effects are digested from the state of FIG. 62(e) (at the stage of FIG. A variable production corresponding to the reserved design is executed), and just before the "jackpot display" appears in the variable production corresponding to the reserved design displayed in the third reserved design display area Db3 at the stage of FIG. 62(e). state. In this variable presentation, the display is stopped at "777" which is the "big hit display". As guessed at the stage of FIG. 62(e), the player can obtain happiness and satisfaction from the appearance of the "big win display" in the variable presentation in which the "holding change notice" has occurred. .

In addition, players who have experienced this "holding change notice" once "after erasing the cockpit" will be able to use "super reach" and "special reach" from the next time, even if the "super reach" etc. ' appears, it is checked whether or not the reserved symbols have been changed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4 of the re-displayed cockpit display area Db. Therefore, even after the execution of "super reach", there is an interest in checking the display mode of the reserved pattern that is redisplayed, and even if the variable display during execution is lost, the reserved pattern "holds A game can be played while anticipating that a "prediction of change" will occur and that a "big win display" will appear in the variable performance corresponding to the reserved symbol. Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by executing the "holding change notice" at various timings.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when the "holding change notice" is performed in the holding pattern and the execution pattern showing the variation effect that generates the big hit, the holding pattern is performed by "super reach" etc. Alternatively, the execution pattern is erased, and at the timing when the performance of the "super ready-to-win" ends and the reservation pattern or the execution pattern is redisplayed, the "reservation change notice" can appear (execute). As a result, it is possible to directly change and notify an announcement object (changeable object; in the fifth embodiment, a reserved pattern or an execution pattern) that is always visible, or to newly display the announcement object. It is possible to casually change the display mode of the notice object while making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change of the notice object, as compared with the case where the notice object is displayed and notified. In particular, the reserved symbols that the player does not pay attention to are temporarily hidden, and then casually changed. First, while making it difficult for the player to notice the change in the reserved pattern, the change gives the player a sense of incompatibility. After that, by making the player recognize that the root of the sense of incongruity is directly linked to the game value (for example, a big win), the player is provided with an unexpected performance, and the performance is diversified to make the game interesting. can increase

In addition, in the execution pattern or the reservation pattern showing the fluctuation effect of the big win, when the one-stage "suspension change notice" is executed, the one-stage display mode is performed at the timing "after the cockpit is erased" when the cockpit display area Db is erased. (“blue”). Also, when executing the "pending change notice" that has changed in a plurality of stages, the execution timing of "after erasing the cockpit" is configured not to be selected. By constructing in this way, even with a one-stage "holding change notice" that could not expect a big hit in the past, a big win can be expected depending on the timing of occurrence of the "holding change notice". It becomes possible. As a result, the significance of existence of the one-stage ``reservation change notice'', which has not been found in the past, can be enhanced, a big win can be expected in any performance pattern, and the interest in the game can be enhanced by various performances.

Further, the "holding change notice" "after erasing the cockpit" is configured to be more likely to be selected as the number of holding balls increases at the time when the "holding change notice" is determined. The greater the number of variable effects to be executed before the variable effect corresponding to the "hold change notice" "after erasing the cockpit" is confirmed and displayed, the higher the possibility that the cockpit display area Db will be erased. It is possible to increase the chances of executing the "holding change notice" after erasing the cockpit, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

The pending information storage area 223e and the execution information storage area 223f are not provided with the pending deletion information storage areas 223e7 and 223f7 and the re-change information storage areas 223e8 and 223f8. The storage capacity is reduced compared to the execution information storage area 223f.

Furthermore, when the command for the number of pending balls is received, pending deletion information indicating whether or not the cockpit display area Db is deleted in the variable effect, and re-variation indicating whether or not the variable element of "re-variation" is performed in the variable effect. Information is not discriminated and stored. As a result, the capacity of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced, and the control load of the MPU 221 can be reduced.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 70. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the variable effect being executed, the cockpit display area Db is erased by the appearance of the "super reach" variable element, and the "super reach" variable element is terminated. At the timing when the cockpit display area Db is displayed again, "reserved change notice" after "reserved deletion" is performed for the execution symbol. In addition, in the variable effect of the first embodiment, as the "reach display", the variable element of "normal reach", the variable element of "super reach" and the variable element of "special reach" (hereinafter abbreviated as "each reach display" There are three types of "reach display" different from each other), and the reach pattern (execution mode) of "each reach display" was composed of one type each.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, a plurality of reach patterns (in the sixth embodiment, two types of "weak pattern" and "strong pattern") are provided for "each reach display". When "reach display" is selected, the reach pattern of the "each reach display" is determined. Specifically, for example, in the variable effect, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected, the values of the reach pattern table 222h and the reach pattern counter 223k, which will be described later, are referred to, and the "super reach" effect mode is " It is configured to select either a "weak pattern" or a "strong pattern" reach pattern.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, when executing the "hold change notice" after "hold erasure", when the reach pattern of "strong pattern" is selected for "each reach display", Change the "strong pattern" to a "weak pattern" reach pattern. Then, after the "each reach display" of the "weak pattern" is executed, the "suspension change notice" of "after suspension erasure" is executed.

Conventionally, for the purpose of diversification of production patterns, when a plurality of types of reach patterns are provided in each "each reach display", for example, a "strong pattern" reach pattern that is easily selected at the time of a big win, and the "strong pattern". A "weak pattern" reach pattern that is less likely to be selected at the time of a big win is provided. That is, the "weak pattern" ready-to-win pattern is configured to be less likely to be selected at the time of the big win and more likely to be selected at the time of losing, and the "strong pattern" ready-to-reach pattern is configured to be more easily selected at the time of the big win and less likely to be selected at the time of losing. . Therefore, when the ``weak pattern'' of ``each reach display'' appears, the player recognizes that the possibility of winning a jackpot in the variation performance is low due to the low expected value of the jackpot, and the variation There is a risk that you will give up on the big hit in the production and lose interest due to the appearance of the "weak pattern" reach pattern.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, when performing the "hold change notice" after the "hold erasure" in the variation effect of the jackpot, the reach pattern of the "strong pattern" is displayed in the "each reach display" of the change effect. When it is selected, the reach pattern of the "strong pattern" is configured to be changed to the reach pattern of the "weak pattern". By configuring in this way, even if the reach pattern of the "weak pattern" appears, after the variable element of the "reach display" of the "weak pattern" ends, the "suspension change notice" of "after pending deletion" Appearance of the "weak pattern" results in a big hit, so it is possible to enjoy the game without losing interest even when the "weak pattern" appears.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to fifth embodiments. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first to fifth embodiments, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 63, detailed electrical configurations of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment. The ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the sixth embodiment stores at least a reach pattern table 222h in addition to the ROM 222 of the first to fifth embodiments. The reach pattern table 222h will be described later with reference to FIG.

The RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the sixth embodiment is provided with at least a reach pattern counter 223k in addition to the RAM 223 of the first to fifth embodiments.

The reach pattern counter 223k is a counter for drawing the reach pattern of "each reach display". As described above, when the sound ramp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, it extracts a variation pattern (effect mode) from the variation pattern command. Then, when the extracted variation pattern includes the effect mode of "reach display", the reach pattern of "reach display" is determined by the reach pattern counter 223k and the reach pattern table 222h based on the type of the "reach display". It is configured to draw lots to determine which of the "weak pattern" and the "strong pattern".

This reach pattern counter 223k is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99") in the counter update processing (see S1111 in FIG. 28) of the main processing of the sound ramp control device 113, and the maximum value (For example, in the case of a counter that can take a value from "0 to 99", it returns to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the reach pattern counter 223k is updated (eg, incremented by 1) once (see S1111 in FIG. 28) each time the main process loops. In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, when a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110, the variation pattern of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command is extracted, and the reach pattern is extracted based on the type of "reach display". By referring to the value of the counter 223k and the reach pattern table 222h, the reach pattern of "reach display" is selected (see S1703 in FIG. 67).

Here, with reference to FIG. 64, a reach pattern table 222h showing the reach pattern of "each reach display" and the selection ratio of each reach pattern of "each reach display" in the sixth embodiment will be described. . FIG. 64(a) is a diagram showing an example of the reach pattern "weak pattern" and "strong pattern" in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 64(b) schematically shows an example of the reach pattern table 222h. It is a diagram showing.

When the sound ramp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, it extracts a variation pattern from the variation pattern command. Then, when it is determined that the "ready-to-reach display" is executed for the variation pattern, the reach-to-reach pattern table 222h is referred to based on the value of the reach-to-reach pattern counter 223k at that time, and the reach-to-reach pattern for the "ready-to-reach display" is determined. be done. Specifically, in the sixth embodiment, "background blue" and "background red" are provided as reach patterns of "normal reach", and "punch" and "kick" are provided as reach patterns of "super reach", "Gun" and "cannon" are provided as reach patterns of "special reach" (see FIG. 64(a)). It should be noted that "special variation" is not provided with a reach pattern, so it is written as "-" (see FIG. 64(a)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 65, a reach pattern for each "reach display" in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 65(a) is a diagram showing a "weak pattern" of "normal reach" in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 65(b) is a diagram showing a "strong pattern" of "normal reach". 65(c) is a diagram showing a "weak pattern" of "super reach", FIG. 65(d) is a diagram showing a "strong pattern" of "super reach", and FIG. 65(e) is a diagram showing a "weak pattern" of "special reach", and FIG. 65(f) is a diagram showing a "strong pattern" of "special reach".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the "background blue" reach pattern is provided as the "weak pattern" of the "normal reach" (see FIG. 65(a)). Also, as a "strong pattern" of "normal reach", a reach pattern of "background red" is provided (see FIG. 65(b)).

In addition, a reach pattern of "punch" is provided as a "weak pattern" of "super reach" (see FIG. 65(c)). In addition, a reach pattern of "kick" is provided as a "strong pattern" of "super reach" (see FIG. 65(d)).

Furthermore, a reach pattern of "gun" is provided as a "weak pattern" of "special reach" (see FIG. 65(e)). Also, as a "strong pattern" of "special reach", a reach pattern of "cannon" is provided (see FIG. 65(f)).

Returning to FIG. 64(b), the description is continued. As shown in FIG. 64(b), the reach pattern table 222h is grouped based on the selected "reach display".

Specifically, "Loss: Normal Reach", which is referred to when "Normal Reach" is determined at the time of loss, and "Loss: Super Reach", which is referred to when "Super Reach" is determined at the time of loss. For "Loss: Special Reach", which is referred to when "Special Reach" is determined at the time of loss, and "Big Hit: Normal Reach", which is referred to when "Normal Reach" is determined at the time of the big hit. , for "jackpot: super reach" that is referred to when "super reach" is determined at the time of the jackpot, and for "jackpot: special reach" that is referred to when the "special reach" is determined at the time of the jackpot , and for “special fluctuations” at the time of the jackpot. Then, the value of the reach pattern counter 223k is associated with each divided group.

In the reach pattern table 222h, the value of the reach pattern counter 223k is not assigned to the "special variation" at the time of the big win. This is because the ``special variation'' is a performance mode that is selected without omission when the ``2R probability variable jackpot'' is selected, and the variation elements of the ``movie'' are selected without omission, and other reach patterns are not provided.

In the example shown in FIG. 64(b), the correspondence between the reach pattern counter 223k and the reach pattern in the "normal reach" effect mode is "0 to 79" for the "weak pattern" and "0 to 79" for the "strong pattern". It is "80-99".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of losing is selected, it is set so that the "weak pattern" reach pattern is selected at a rate of 80% and the "strong pattern" reach pattern is selected at a rate of 20%. ing. Therefore, the reach pattern to be selected at the time of "normal reach" at the time of failure is set (80%) so that the "weak pattern" is likely to be selected.

In the example shown in FIG. 64(b), the correspondence between the reach pattern counter 223k and the reach pattern in the "super reach" effect mode is "0 to 89" for the "weak pattern" and is "90-99".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of losing is selected, the "weak pattern" reach pattern is set to 90% and the "strong pattern" reach pattern is set to be selected at a rate of 10%. It is Therefore, the ready-to-reach pattern to be selected at the time of "super reach" at the time of losing is set (90%) so that the "weak pattern" is likely to be selected.

In the example shown in FIG. 64(b), the correspondence between the reach pattern counter 223k and the reach pattern in the "special reach" effect mode is "0 to 98" for the "weak pattern" and "0 to 98" for the "strong pattern". is "99".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of losing is selected, the reach pattern of "weak pattern" is set to 99% and the reach pattern of "strong pattern" is selected at a rate of 1%. It is Therefore, the reach pattern to be selected in the "special reach" at the time of losing is set (99%) so that the "weak pattern" is likely to be selected.

Therefore, any "ready-to-win display" is configured so that the "weak pattern" reach-to-win pattern is likely to be selected and the "strong pattern" reach-to-win pattern is less likely to be selected at the time of failure.

In the example shown in FIG. 64(b), the correspondence between the reach pattern counter 223k and the reach pattern in the "normal reach" effect mode is "0 to 9" for the "weak pattern" and "0 to 9" for the "strong pattern". It is "10 to 99".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of the big win is selected, the reach pattern of the "weak pattern" is set to 10% and the reach pattern of the "strong pattern" is set to be selected at a ratio of 90%. ing. Therefore, the reach pattern selected at the time of the "normal reach" at the time of the big hit is set (90%) so that the "strong pattern" is likely to be selected.

In the example shown in FIG. 64(b), the correspondence between the reach pattern counter 223k and the reach pattern in the "super reach" effect mode is "0 to 19" for the "weak pattern" and "0 to 19" for the "strong pattern". is "20 to 99".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of the big win is selected, the "weak pattern" reach pattern is set to 20% and the "strong pattern" reach pattern is set to be selected at a ratio of 80%. It is Therefore, the reach pattern to be selected at the time of the "super reach" at the time of the big hit is set (80%) so that the "strong pattern" is likely to be selected.

In the example shown in FIG. 64(b), the correspondence between the reach pattern counter 223k and the reach pattern in the effect mode of "special reach" is "0 to 29" for the "weak pattern" and is "30 to 99".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of the big win is selected, the reach pattern of the "weak pattern" is set to 30% and the reach pattern of the "strong pattern" is set to be selected at a rate of 70%. It is Therefore, the reach pattern selected at the time of the "special reach" at the time of the big hit is set (70%) so that the "strong pattern" is likely to be selected.

Therefore, any "ready-to-win display" is configured such that the "strong pattern" ready-to-win pattern is likely to be selected and the "weak pattern" to be less likely to be selected at the time of the big win.

In this way, by providing a "strong pattern" reach pattern that is easily selected at the time of a big win and is difficult to be selected at the time of a loss, and a "weak pattern" reach pattern that is difficult to be selected at the time of a big win and is easily selected at the time of a loss, a "weak pattern" is provided. The difference in the expected value of big wins in the reach patterns of the "pattern" and the "strong pattern" makes it possible to diversify the production pattern of the variable production and improve the interest of the game.

Next, the command determination process (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S1110). This command determination process (S1110) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. .

In the command determination process (S1110), first, from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read out and analyzed. is received (S1201). Then, when it is determined that the variation pattern command is received (S1201: Yes), the variation pattern is extracted from the variation pattern command, and the details of the variation effect are variation pattern determination processing for determining the variation pattern (reach pattern). (S1251) and returns to the main process (see FIG. 28). In the process of S1201, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1201: No), the processes of S1204 to S1212 are performed, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

Here, with reference to FIG. 67, the variation pattern determination process (S1251) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing this variation pattern determination process (S1251). In this variation pattern determination process (S1251), when the variation pattern extracted by the variation pattern command is "reach display", the reach pattern of the "reach display" is determined, and the variation for display for the display control device 114 is determined. Perform processing to set the pattern command.

In this variation pattern determination process (S1251), first, a variation pattern is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1701). The fluctuation pattern extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 . Then, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern includes "ready-to-reach display" (S1702). As a result of the determination, if the variation pattern includes "reach display" (S1702: Yes), in order to determine the detailed reach pattern of "reach display", the reach based on the value of the reach pattern counter 223k at that time A reach pattern is determined by referring to the pattern table 222h (S1703), and the process proceeds to S1704. On the other hand, if the variation pattern does not include "reach display" (S1702: No), the process of S1703 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1704.

In the processing of S1704, based on the extracted variation pattern and reach pattern, a variation pattern command for display is set for notifying the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern and reach pattern for the display control device 114 (S1704). , the variation pattern determination process (S1251) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 66). In addition, in the process of S1704, a variation pattern command for exclusive use for display is set for a variation effect that does not have a ready-to-win pattern like the "special variation" effect mode.

The display variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (S1102 in FIG. 28). . As a result, the display control device 114 executes processing to display the variation pattern and the ready-to-win pattern determined by the sound ramp control device 113 on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the variation effect processing (S1109) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing the variation effect processing (S1109) of the sixth embodiment.

This variable effect processing (S1109) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28). Various information stored in the area is shifted to the execution information storage area 223f, and information stored in the pending information storage second to fourth areas is shifted to the pending information storage first to third areas. Also, it determines whether or not the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 matches the contents (information) stored in the execution information storage area 223f, and executes the "hold change notice" after "hold erase". When the reach pattern is changed from "strong pattern" to "weak pattern", change change processing is performed. Furthermore, when the stop type command received from the main controller 110 does not match the contents (information) stored in the execution information storage area 223f, a display error command is generated and this command is transmitted to the display controller 114. Perform the processing to be set. In addition, when it is the execution timing of the "holding change notice" in the execution pattern and the holding pattern, to generate various commands related to each execution timing of the "holding change notice" and to transmit these commands to the display control device 114 Perform processing to set to .

Specifically, in the variation effect processing (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1401). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is not on (that is, it is off) (S1401: No), at least the stop type command is not received from the main controller 110, so this fluctuation effect End the process and return to the main process (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is ON (S1401: Yes), since both the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received, the processes of S1402 to S1404 are performed to start the fluctuation effect. Next, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 matches the contents (information) stored in the execution information storage area 223f. Variation change processing is performed to change the reach pattern from the “strong pattern” to the “weak pattern” when executed (S1471). After the processing of this variation change processing (S1471), the processing of S1408 to S1416 is executed, this variation effect processing (S1109) is ended, and the main processing (see FIG. 28) is returned to.

Here, with reference to FIG. 69, the variation changing process (S1471) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing this variation change processing (S1471). In this variation change process, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 matches the contents (information) stored in the execution information storage area 223f. When "notice" is executed, processing is performed to change the reach pattern from "strong pattern" to "weak pattern".

Specifically, first, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223f, the variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed from now on is acquired (S1801). Then, the variation pattern stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the variation pattern in the variation performance extracted from the variation pattern command stored in the RAM 223 in the processing of S1701 of the variation pattern determination processing (see FIG. 67) are the same. It is determined whether or not they match (S1802). If the information on the variable performance indicated by the variation pattern command received this time is different from the information on the variable performance previously stored in the execution information storage area 223f (reserved information storage area 223e), some abnormality (noise, etc.) ), it is not possible to execute a normal variation effect (variation pattern). Therefore, by this determination process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined, and it is confirmed whether or not a normal variation effect can be executed.

As a result of the determination of S1802, if it is determined that the variation pattern stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the variation pattern stored in the RAM 223 do not match (S1802: No), some abnormality related to the variation effect to be executed has occurred, a display error command for notifying the display control device 114 of the abnormality is generated and set (S1803), and the process proceeds to S1804.

The display error command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 28). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display error command, it recognizes that some abnormality has occurred regarding the variation effect, switches the third symbol display device 81 to error display (for example, default variation), and displays the error Starts display control of the display.

On the other hand, in the process of S1802, if it is determined that the variation pattern stored in the execution information storage area 223f and the variation pattern stored in the RAM 223 match (S1802: Yes), there is no abnormality regarding the variation effect to be executed. Since it has not occurred, the process of S1803 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1804.

Next, in the process of S1804, it is determined whether or not it is the execution timing for displaying the "holding change notice" in the execution symbols displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 (S1804). This determination is made by confirming the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 provided in the execution information storage area 223f. ”, “after reach”, or “after pending deletion” (hereinafter abbreviated as “at start” to “after pending deletion”).

As a result of the determination in S1804, the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f indicates that the number of pending balls is "0" and indicates any of "at the start" to "after pending deletion". If it is data (S1804: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the "suspension change notice" is "after suspension erasure" (S1805).

Since it is determined in S1805 whether or not the execution timing of the "hold change notice" is "after hold erasure", the processing of whether or not the execution timing of the "hold change notice" in the execution pattern in S1804 is It is possible to omit it.

As a result of the determination in S1805, if the execution timing of the current "suspension change notice" is "after deletion of suspension" (S1805: Yes), then the reach pattern of "reach display" executed in the variable effect is "strong pattern" is determined (S1806). This determination is performed by determining the reach pattern determined in the process of S1703 of the variation pattern determination process (see FIG. 67). As a result of determination, if the reach pattern of the "reach display" executed in the variable effect is a "strong pattern" (S1806: Yes), the reach pattern of the "reach display" is changed from the "strong pattern" to the "weak pattern". (S1807), set the reach pattern change command for display based on the changed reach pattern (S1808), end this variation change processing (S1471), to the variation effect processing (see FIG. 68) return.

In this way, when performing the "suspension change notice" of "after pending deletion" in the variable effect, if the reach pattern of "strong pattern" is selected in the "each reach display" of the variable effect, the "strong pattern ” reach pattern to a “weak pattern” reach pattern. By configuring in this way, even if the reach pattern of the "weak pattern" appears, after the variable element of the "reach display" of the "weak pattern" ends, the "suspension change notice" of "after pending deletion" Appearance of the "weak pattern" results in a big hit, so that the player can enjoy the game without losing interest even when the "weak pattern" appears.

In the process of S1804, the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223f6 of the execution information storage area 223f is the number of pending balls "0" and any one of "at the start" to "after pending deletion". If the data is not shown (S1804: No), the "suspension change notice" in the execution pattern is not executed, so the processing of S1805 to S1808 is skipped, this variation change processing (S1471) is terminated, and the variation effect processing ( (See FIG. 68). In addition, in the processing of S1805, if the execution timing of the current "suspension change notice" is not "after deletion of suspension" (S1805: No), the processing of S1806 to S1808 is skipped, and this variation change processing (S1471) is skipped. End and return to the variable effect process (see FIG. 68). In the process of S1806, if the reach pattern of the "reach display" executed in the variable effect is not the "strong pattern" (S1806: No), there is no need to change the reach pattern, so the processes of S1807 and S1808 are skipped. Then, this variation change process (S1471) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 68).

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, an execution example of the "suspension change notice" "after suspension erasure" in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a situation in which a "suspended change notice" after "suspended erasure" is performed in the variable effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment.

Specifically, FIG. 70(a) is a diagram showing a state just before the "ready-to-win display" appears in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. FIG. 70(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub-display area Ds is erased from the state of FIG. 70(a) and the "normal reach" variable element is executed in the main display area Dm. FIG. 70(c) shows a state in which the cockpit display area Db is erased from the state of FIG. 70(b), and the "weak pattern" of the variable element of "super reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. It is a diagram. FIG. 70(d) is a diagram showing a state in which an effect suggesting that a "loss display" will appear in the effect of the variable element of "super reach" from the state of FIG. 70(c) is being executed. . FIG. 70(e) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed from the state of FIG. be. FIG. 70(f) is a diagram showing a state just before the "big win display" appears after the "revariation" is executed from the state of FIG. 70(e). In addition, in FIGS. 70(a) to 70(f), the display mode of the third pattern is omitted.

In FIG. 70(a), in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol "7" is stop-displayed, and in the right display area Dm3, the third symbol "7" is stop-displayed. In addition, in the middle display area Dm2, the third pattern is still unrecognizably "high-speed fluctuating". Therefore, it is a state just before (immediately before) the appearance of the so-called "ready-to-reach display" by the "7" symbol.

In the sub-display area Ds, the character pattern is displayed in the small central area Ds2 in a forewarning mode suggesting that the "ready-to-reach display" will appear. Specifically, the character pattern displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner as if the player is cheering. A predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, and no character design or the like is displayed.

Further, in the cockpit display area Db, an executed symbol is displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, and reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Therefore, the execution symbol indicates that the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of pending balls of the variable effect is four.

In FIG. 70(b), in the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 70(a), the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stop-displayed and the "reach display" by the "7" symbol is displayed. is determined, and the variable element of "normal reach" is executed in the main display area Dm. In this “normal reach” variable, the main display area Dm is displayed as if it were enlarged. Specifically, in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3, the "7" symbol that is being stopped is displayed in an enlarged manner, and in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is displayed at a low speed so that it can be visually recognized. , scrolled at low speed from "5" pattern to "6" pattern).

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is erased as the main display area Dm expands due to the occurrence of the "normal reach" variable, and the sub-display area Ds becomes invisible.

In the state of FIG. 70(b), in the cockpit display area Db, similar to the display state of FIG. Reserved symbols are displayed in the areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Therefore, as in FIG. 70(a), the execution symbol indicates that the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of suspended balls in the variable effect is four. showing.

FIG. 70(c) shows a state in which the "weak pattern" of the variable element of "super reach" is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 70(b). In the "weak pattern" of the variable element of "super reach", the reach formation pattern of "7" pattern displayed as the variable element of "normal reach" is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third pattern display device 81. be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 70(c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the cockpit display area Db is erased during the execution of the "super reach" variable element, and instead, the third symbol display is performed. A number pattern (“4” in the sixth embodiment) indicating the number of pending balls in the variable effect is newly displayed on the upper left of the display area of the device 81 .

Furthermore, in the "super reach" variable element of FIG. 70(c), almost the entire display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is used to display a "battle effect" in which a plurality of character patterns compete for victory or defeat. In this "battle effect", an effect (in the sixth embodiment, kickboxing) is executed in which the character pattern on the player side (for example, the character pattern on the left side) and the character pattern on the enemy side (for example, the character pattern on the right side) fight. .

As described above, the variable element of "super reach" is expressed by changing the attack pattern of the character pattern on the player's side. and is configured to be executable. Specifically, a "weak pattern" of "punch" and a "strong pattern" of "kick" and a reach pattern are provided. In the example shown in FIG. A “weak pattern” reach pattern of “punch” is being executed.

Conventionally, in the variable element of "super reach", the "strong pattern" is likely to be selected when the jackpot is won, and the "weak pattern" is easily selected when the jackpot is not won, that is, in the case of losing. It is configured. Therefore, when the player sees the "weak pattern" of the variable element of "super reach", the player side is given the "battle effect" of the variable element of "super reach" at the stage of seeing the "weak pattern". It is expected that the character pattern of 1 is difficult to win against the character pattern of the enemy side, and as a result, the character pattern of the player side is defeated by the character pattern of the enemy side and loses.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, when the "suspension change notice" is executed after "suspension deletion", that is, for example, after winning the jackpot and executing the variable element of "super reach", " When "big hit display" appears by "re-variation", the reach pattern of the variable element of "super reach" can be changed from "strong pattern" to "weak pattern". Therefore, even if a "weak pattern" appears in the variable element of "super reach", a "reservation change notice" after "reservation deletion" will occur and the player will win a big hit. Don't lose interest when the "weak pattern" of the variable element appears, focus on the timing when the variable element of "Super Reach" ends and the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed, and concentrate on the variable effect until that stage. By doing so, you can maintain your interest for a long time.

In the state of FIG. 70(c), the reach formation pattern of the "7" pattern, which is the cause of the fluctuation factor of this "super reach", is reduced to the upper left of the display area of the third pattern display device 81. it's shown.

In FIG. 70(d), from the state of FIG. 70(c), in the "battle effect" in the variable elements of "super reach", the character design on the player side (left character design) changes to the character design on the enemy side (right character design). The lost state is displayed in the symbol). Therefore, when the player recognizes the display contents of FIG. 70(d), the character pattern on the player side loses in the "battle effect" of the variable element of "super reach". In the variable element, it is predicted that the "jackpot display" will not appear and the "losing display" will appear.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, when the "holding change notice" after "holding erasure" is executed, the reach pattern of the variable element of "super reach" is changed from the "strong pattern" to the "weak pattern". is configured to be changeable. Therefore, if the "weak pattern" of the variable element of "super reach" appears, the player who has already experienced the possibility of "hold change notice" occurring "after hold erasure" , the variable element of "super reach" lost to the "battle effect" due to the "weak pattern", but when the variable element of "super reach" ends, the execution pattern of the cockpit display area Db is displayed again. It is in a state of concentrating on the variable production until that stage, paying attention to the possibility that a “holding change notice” will occur at the timing of the change.

Also, in FIG. 70(d), as in FIG. 70(c), the variable element of "super reach" is being executed, so the cockpit display area Db is maintained in an erased state.

In FIG. 70(e), from the state of FIG. 70(d), the production of the variable element of "Super Reach" fails (the character pattern on the enemy side wins), and in the main display area Dm, "Loss display ( 787)” appears, and the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are re-displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. In this state, the character pattern in the central small region Ds2 of the sub-display region Ds and the execution patterns and reserved patterns in the cockpit display region Db are visible again. Note that the character pattern in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is displayed in a disappointing manner due to the appearance of the "missing display". That is, in the main part of the third symbol display device 81, the chance down state is displayed.

In FIG. 70(e), the execution pattern displayed in the cockpit display area Db is a display mode ("white", see FIG. 70(b)) before it is erased by the execution of the "super reach" variable element. is displayed in a display mode (“blue”) changed from . That is, the "suspended change notice" is performed at the execution timing of "after pending erasure". In other words, in the part (secondary part) which is not the main part of the third symbol display device 81, the state in which the chance is up is displayed. Therefore, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the chance down state in the main part and the chance up state in the non-main part are displayed at the same time.

When the player sees the state of FIG. 70(e) for the first time, the player sees that the "loss display (787)" appears in the main display area Dm and the "battle effect" with the variable element of "super reach". 70(d), as predicted at the time of FIG. 70(d), the "big win display" does not appear in this variable effect, and the "loss display" appears, and the "loss display" is confirmed as it is. It is a state in which the user guesses and is interested in the next variable performance. Then, when the player looks at the pending symbols in the cockpit display area Db to focus on the contents of the next variable effect, the "suspended change notice" is performed in the executed symbols in the executed symbol display area Db0 indicating the current variable effect. , recognizes that the execution pattern has changed to "blue".

A player who sees this "hold change notice" for the first time "after hold erasure" first, at this point, first, the difference in the display mode of the execution pattern from before the execution of the "battle effect" of the variable element of "super reach" I notice and feel discomfort. Then, he recognizes that the root of the sense of incongruity is the "blue" execution symbol. Then, it examines when the "holding change notice" of the "blue" execution pattern was made based on its own memory. As a result of examination, we understand that "pending change notice" was not performed before the execution of the variable element of "Super Reach", but was executed after the variable element of "Super Reach" was completed. . At this moment, the player expects that some event will occur due to the "blue" execution symbol in the variable performance being executed.

FIG. 70(f) shows a state in which the variable element of "re-variation" is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 70(e). In the variable element of this "re-variation", the main display area Dm is enlarged and displayed, the sub-display area Ds is erased, and "787" is stopped and displayed in each of the display areas Dm1 to Dm3. starts fluctuating again, and finally stops at "777", which is the "jackpot display". The player is surprised at the occurrence of the variable element of "re-variation", and as guessed at the stage of FIG. It is possible to obtain a sense of happiness and a sense of satisfaction from the appearance of the "jackpot display".

In addition, a player who has once experienced the "holding change notice" after "holding deletion" once, even if the "super reach" fluctuation element of the "weak pattern" from the next time Even if the element is executed with the reach pattern of the "weak pattern" and "failed display" appears as a result of the variable element of the "super reach", in the execution pattern display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db to be redisplayed It is checked whether or not the execution pattern has been changed. Therefore, there is interest in confirming the display mode of the execution pattern that is redisplayed even after the execution of the variable element of "super reach", and the "jackpot display" appears until the variable performance is confirmed and displayed. You can play while expecting Therefore, the amusement of the game can be maintained until the variable effect is definitely displayed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, when performing the "suspension change notice" after "suspension erasure" in the variation effect of the jackpot, in the "each reach display" of the variation effect "strong pattern is selected, the reach pattern of the "strong pattern" is changed to the reach pattern of the "weak pattern". By configuring in this way, even if the reach pattern of the "weak pattern" appears, after the variable element of the "reach display" of the "weak pattern" ends, the "suspension change notice" of "after pending deletion" Appearance of the "weak pattern" results in a big hit, so it is possible to enjoy the game without losing interest even when the "weak pattern" appears.

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. can be easily guessed. For example, each embodiment may add part or more of the configuration of another embodiment to that embodiment or replace it with a part or more of the configuration of that embodiment. The embodiment may be modified and configured. Further, the numerical values given in each of the above embodiments are examples, and it is naturally possible to employ other numerical values.

<Modification 1>
In each of the above embodiments, when the variable element of "super reach" appears, the entire cockpit display area Db is erased, and both the executed symbols and the reserved symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db become invisible. It was erased like this. On the other hand, it is also possible to delete only the pending symbols in the cockpit display area Db and continue to display the executed symbols indicating the content of the variable effect being executed. By configuring in this way, when the "holding change notice" is executed in the execution pattern, the player is suggested the degree of expectation for the big win regarding the variable performance being executed based on the display mode of the "holding change notice". The game can be continued, and the interest in the game can be enhanced in the variable performance being executed. It should be noted that, in the case of continuing to display the executed symbols without erasing them during the variable effect, it is preferable to perform the "suspended change notice" of "after pending erasure" for the suspended symbols.

<Modification 2>
In the first embodiment or the fifth embodiment, the executed pattern or the reserved pattern displayed in the cockpit display area Db is visible in normal times, but becomes invisible when the variable element of "super reach" occurs. , the variable element of the ``super reach'' ends and the ``reservation change notice'' after ``reservation erasure'' is executed at the timing when the execution pattern and the reservation pattern become visible again. On the other hand, it may be configured such that the "post-delete""changenotice" is performed on a displayed object different from the executed symbol or the reserved symbol.

Specifically, for example, the character pattern displayed in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds may be configured to perform the "post-delete" "change notice". In the case where the "post-delete" "change notice" is performed in the character pattern displayed in the central small region Ds2, the character pattern is changed at the timing when the central small region Ds2 is redisplayed after the variable element of "super reach" ends. The display mode of part (for example, only hair or only headband) or all (for example, facial expression of character pattern) can be changed to the normal display mode (for example, "white" for headband, "black" for hair). , If it is a character design expression, it is a special display mode that is different from the disappointing mode when the "disappointment display" appears) It may be configured so as to be displayed in a happy mode if it is a facial expression).

With this configuration, when the deleted display object is redisplayed, the player believes that the same display content as before the deletion will be redisplayed. Since the displayed object changes and the change is very slight from the entire display content, it is difficult to recognize the difference based on initial assumptions. Therefore, it is possible to change the display contents of the display object so as not to be noticed by the player, and to provide the player with an unexpected performance, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Further, for example, a level meter display object is displayed in the right small area Ds3 of the sub-display area Ds, and the level meter display object is always displayed normally. This level meter display object is configured to specifically display the degree of expectation for a big win in the variable performance. The level meter display object is raised step by step when a pattern appears, a cut-in pattern appears, etc.), and the degree of expectation for a big win at that stage is visualized and displayed so that the player can easily understand it. Then, at the timing when the sub-display area Ds is erased by the variable elements of "super reach", etc., the level meter display is also erased, and when the variable elements of "super reach" are completed, the sub-display area Ds is displayed again. At the timing of display, this level meter display is also redisplayed. If the re-displayed level meter display has changed from the display mode before erasing (for example, the level meter step has increased since before erasing), the variable factor of "re-fluctuation" is performed. It is configured to derive a “jackpot display”.

Furthermore, for example, in the background display of the main display area Dm, the background display is erased by the variable element of "super reach", etc., and when the variable element of "super reach" is completed, the background display of the main display area Dm is redisplayed, this background display is also redisplayed. The redisplayed background display has changed from the display mode before deletion (for example, the display color of the background has changed from "city stage" to "empty stage", the display color of the background has changed from "blue" to "light blue", and the background color has changed. When a small character pattern is additionally displayed so as to blend into a part), a variable element of 're-variation' is performed to derive 'big win display'.

In this way, by changing and displaying the display object that is not the execution pattern or the reservation pattern from before it is erased at the timing of redisplaying, the object that is always visible is directly changed and notified. Compared to the case where a new object is made to appear and notified, it is possible to casually change the display mode of the object while making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change of the object. To first make a player feel a sense of incongruity by temporarily hiding an object and then casually changing it, and then to make the player recognize that the root of the sense of incongruity is directly linked to a game value (for example, a big win). Thus, it is possible to diversify the performance while providing the player with an unexpected performance, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Further, it may be configured such that the change of the object is performed for a plurality of objects. With this configuration, when the variable element of "Super Reach" ends and the display screen returns to the normal display mode, the player can find out where the displayed object that has been changed from before erasing is located. A game to search for is born, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

<Modification 3>
In each of the above embodiments, when executing the "holding change notice" after "holding erase", the display mode of the execution pattern or the holding pattern is displayed in a display mode raised (chance up) from the normal display mode was configured to On the other hand, when executing the "suspended change notice" after "suspended deletion", the display mode of the executed pattern or the suspended pattern is displayed in a display mode that is lowered (chance down) from the display mode before erasing. may be configured. By configuring in this way, for example, when the reserved design before erasure is in the display mode of "blue", by displaying the reserved design in the normal display mode of "white" at the timing of redisplaying , The display of the reserved pattern for which the ``reserved change notice'' is performed ``after the reserved erasure'' is equivalent to the display of the other reserved patterns, making it difficult for the player to understand which reserved pattern has changed. . By obscuring the reserved pattern that has changed before erasing, it is made unclear in which variable presentation the ``prediction of reserved change'' has occurred. The ambiguous impression gives the player a sense of incongruity, and then the player recognizes that the root of the sense of incongruity is directly linked to the game value (for example, a big win), thereby giving the player an unexpected performance. While providing the above, the entertainment of the game can be enhanced by diversifying the presentation.

<Modification 4>
In the third embodiment, when the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven, the movable accessories 87 and 88 are driven simultaneously. On the other hand, the movable accessories 87 and 88 may not be driven simultaneously, but may be driven separately. In this case, for example, only the left movable accessory 87 is configured to be driven so as to cover the cockpit display area Db. That is, only when the left movable accessory 87 is driven before the right movable accessory 88, the cockpit display area Db is covered, and when the right movable accessory 88 is driven before the left movable accessory 87, the cockpit display area Db is covered. is configured so that the left movable accessory 87 cannot cover the cockpit display area Db. By configuring in this way, since the contents of the subsequent performance change depending on whether or not one of the movable accessories 87 and 88 starts to move first, it is possible to create interest in how the respective movable accessories 87 and 88 start to move. can.

<Modification 5>
In the above-described third embodiment, the left movable accessory 87 is driven to cover the execution pattern in the cockpit display area Db, and at the timing when the left movable accessory 87 covers the execution pattern, the execution pattern is "suspended change notice". was configured to do On the other hand, the execution pattern may be concealed (covered) by another concealing member (covering member). Specifically, for example, a light guide plate is provided on the front side of the game board 13, and fine linear unevenness is formed by mechanically etching the front side of the light guide plate. Light is introduced through the projections and recesses, and the light introduced by the projections and recesses is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁As a result, the pattern corresponding to the unevenness appears to glow colored with light. By arranging the unevenness on the front side of the execution pattern, the execution pattern is configured to be invisible when light is incident on the light guide plate, and the execution pattern is prevented from entering the light guide plate. is configured to execute "suspension change notice" at the timing when becomes visible again. By configuring in this way, a three-dimensional effect can be produced by the light guide plate and the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time as the light incident timing to the light guide plate, the "hold change notice" after "hold erase" is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to diversify the performance while providing the player with an unexpected performance, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

<Modification 6>
In the sixth embodiment described above, "weak pattern" and "strong pattern" are provided for reach patterns of "reach display", respectively, and when performing "hold change notice" after "pending erasure", "reach display" When a "strong pattern" is selected, it is configured to change the "strong pattern" to a "weak pattern". On the other hand, regarding the reach pattern of the "reach display", for example, in the "battle effect", there are two types of action patterns, an attack pattern and a defense pattern based on the player's character design, and an attack pattern and a defense pattern based on the enemy's character design. Two types of action patterns are provided as defense patterns, and a reach pattern is formed by combining one of the action patterns of the player's character pattern and the other of the enemy's character pattern. may be configured to provide a combination of reach patterns that are selected only when the "holding change notice" of "" is executed. Specifically, when executing the "hold change notice" after "hold erasure", an action pattern that would not normally occur (combination of the defense pattern and the defense pattern) may be executed.

By constructing in this way, the player is given a first sense of discomfort by a combination pattern that cannot normally occur, and then, at the timing when the execution pattern or the reservation pattern is redisplayed, the "suspension change notice" is executed, The change gives the player a second sense of discomfort. When the player perceives the second sense of incongruity, the player recognizes that the root of the second sense of incongruity is directly linked to the game value (for example, a big win), thereby providing an unexpected performance to the player. While providing the above, the entertainment of the game can be enhanced by diversifying the presentation. Also, the player recognizes that the first discomfort before the occurrence of the second discomfort was a preliminary display of the second discomfort. Then, once the player has experienced the event, in the subsequent game, he/she performs the game to search for the second discomfort and the game to search for the first discomfort. You can increase your interest.

<Modification 7>
In each of the above embodiments, when the "holding change notice" is performed after the execution pattern or the holding pattern is made invisible, the "holding change notice" is performed in the execution pattern or the holding pattern at the timing when the cockpit display area Db becomes visible again. was running On the other hand, the configuration may be such that the "suspension change notice" is executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the cockpit display area Db became visible again. In this case, a display mode (for example, morphing) in which the executed symbols or the reserved symbols gradually change may be used to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the executed symbols or the reserved symbols are changing. .

<Modification 8>
In the sixth embodiment, when the "weak pattern" of the variable element of "super reach" appears, the "hold change notice" after "hold erasure" may appear. . That is, the "weak pattern" of the variable element of "super reach" is configured to suggest the possibility that the "holding change notice" will be executed "after pending erasure". On the other hand, during the execution of the variable production, the background display, the notice pattern, or the stop pattern of the "loss display", etc. suggest the possibility that the "hold change notice" will be executed "after the hold deletion" may be configured.

Specifically, for example, a weak background (“blue”) and a strong background (“red”) are provided for the background display, and the strong background is more likely to directly appear “jackpot display” than the weak background, The weak background is configured so that the "suspension change notice" after "suspension erasure" is more likely to be executed than the strong background. Also, for example, a weak notice ("mini character") and a strong notice ("deca character") are provided in the notice pattern. The weak notice is configured so that the "holding change notice" after "holding erase" is more likely to be executed. In addition, the stop symbols of "losing display" are weak losing eyes (no relation to each symbol such as "169") and strong losing eyes (predetermined permutation "123" and word expression possible "645 ( Musico)” and other symbols that are related to each other) are provided, and strong losing eyes are easier to directly display “jackpot display” than weak losing eyes, but weak losing eyes are more likely to appear than strong losing eyes. It is configured so that the "holding change notice" after "holding erasure" is more likely to be executed.

By configuring in this way, the player is made to play while paying attention to whether or not an effect suggesting the execution of the ``reservation change notice'' ``after the suspension erasing'' appears during the execution of the variable performance. , can enhance the interest of the game.

<Modification 9>
In each of the above embodiments, depending on the display (execution pattern or reserved pattern) displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the display is switched from a visually recognizable state to an unrecognizable state, and is again visually recognized. By changing the display mode when possible, it is configured to cause a sense of discomfort based on the change. On the other hand, it may be configured to make the player feel uncomfortable by changing perceptions other than vision, such as perception based on hearing or skin sensations (tactile sensation, temperature sensation, pain sensation, wind sensation, etc.). .

For example, in order to make the player feel uncomfortable with hearing, the sound output by the audio output device 226 is changed from the normal state to make the player feel uncomfortable. The sense of incongruity caused by sound is, for example, the pitch of the sound, the pattern of changes in the sound image, the magnitude of the sound, the change in the rhythm, the type of musical instrument, etc. It is constructed so as to make the player feel uncomfortable.

Specifically, for example, when a sound is first synthesized with a high tone and a low tone and output, the output of the sound is temporarily stopped (silent), and then the sound is output again, only the high tone configured to output with Also, for example, when a sound whose sound image changes from right to left is initially output, the output of the sound is temporarily stopped (no sound), and then the sound is output again, a sound whose sound image changes from left to right configured to output Further, for example, the piano sound is output at first, the output of the sound is temporarily stopped (no sound), and then when the sound is output again, the guitar sound is output.

With visual recognition, it is possible to continue to check with the eyes, so it is easy to recognize at an early stage when a sense of discomfort is felt. It is lower than visual recognition because it cannot be confirmed continuously. Therefore, if the sound is changed from the normal output state to make the player feel uncomfortable, it is possible to prolong the time until the player clearly recognizes the strange feeling.

Also, for example, skin sensation (tactile sensation (perception of touch), temperature sensation (perception of temperature), pain sensation (perception of pain and stimulation), pressure sensation (perception of pressure), wind sensation (perception of wind) ), etc.), the operation handle 51, the frame button 22, the ball removal lever 52, the ball lending button 42, or the return button 43, and other games such as fans and heaters. It is configured to make the player feel a sense of incongruity by making the control state of parts that stimulate the player different from normal.

Specifically, for example, the operation handle 51 is configured to make the player feel uncomfortable by making the biasing force of a spring (not shown) that biases the operation handle 51 toward the initial position stronger than usual at a predetermined timing. good too. Further, for example, the frame button 22 is provided with a lock mechanism that locks the frame button 22 so that the frame button 22 cannot be pressed. may be configured to make the player feel a sense of incongruity by locking and preventing the push-in operation. In this case, it is preferable to perform this while outputting an announcement such as ``please hit the frame button repeatedly'' on the third symbol display device 81 or the like. Further, for example, a fan capable of outputting wind toward a player is normally configured to emit (output) wind to stimulate the player's sense of wind, but initially, it does not output wind. However, it is also possible to make the player feel a sense of incongruity by sucking the wind from the middle.

<Modification 10>
In the first embodiment, when "after erasure of suspension" is selected as the execution timing of "suspension change notice", when the variable element of "re-variation" is not included in the variable effect, "suspension change notice" was configured to change the execution timing of to other timing (for example, "after reach") other than "after pending deletion". On the other hand, if "after erasing pending" is selected as the execution timing of "holding change notice", when "holding change notice" cannot be executed at the timing of "after canceling pending" in the variable effect, "hold change It may be configured to execute other notice effects other than the notice.

Specifically, for example, if it is a variation pattern that does not erase the cockpit display area Db like the variation pattern of "normal reach + re-variation", but does not erase the cockpit display area Db, is selected, instead of the "suspended change notice" of "after pending deletion", "sub-display area Perform "re-display notice" after deletion. As this "re-display notice", for example, the display mode of the character pattern displayed in the sub-display area Ds is changed from before the sub-display area Ds is erased (for example, the color of the headband is changed from "white" to "red", etc.). ) is displayed. In the variable effect including the variable element of "re-variation", the variable element of "normal reach" is always executed, and when the variable element of "normal reach" is executed, the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is erased. Even if it is a variation pattern that cannot execute the "pending change notice" "after pending deletion", it is possible to change the "pending change notice" "after pending deletion" like "re-display notice" "after deleting the sub display area". Equivalent or similar notice effects can be performed to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 11>
In each of the above-described embodiments, a plurality of display modes of "suspension change notice" are provided, one execution timing is selected regarding the execution timing of "suspension change notice", and one of the execution timings determined at the one execution timing is selected. was configured to execute "holding change notice" in the display mode of On the other hand, when a display mode (for example, "red" or "rainbow") is selected in multiple stages in the "hold change notice", the "hold change notice" is executed step by step at multiple execution timings. It may be configured as By constructing in this way, the "suspension change notice" can be executed step by step, and the notice effect of stepping up the degree of expectation for a big win can be executed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

<Modification 12>
In the third embodiment, the movable parts 87 and 88 are driven in the "strong pattern" to cover the cockpit display area Db, and the movable parts 87 and 88 are driven to the initial positions again to release the covering. It was configured to execute "holding change notice" for the execution pattern when it did. On the other hand, each movable accessory 87, 88 is mounted with an LED so that the change in color can be expressed, and before each movable accessory 87, 88 covers the cockpit display area Db, each movable accessory The colors of 87 and 88 are expressed in a suggestive manner. Then, after that, when the cockpit display area Db is covered with each of the movable parts 87 and 88 expressed in the suggestive mode, the suggested mode propagates to the execution pattern (reserved pattern) of the cockpit display area Db, and each movable When the cover of the accessories 87 and 88 is removed and the cockpit display area Db becomes visible, the display mode of the execution pattern may be displayed in a state in which the suggested mode is reflected.

Specifically, for example, the display mode of each of the movable parts 87 and 88 before covering the cockpit display area Db is lit in red, and each of the movable parts 87 and 88 covers the cockpit display area Db. is canceled, the executed pattern (reserved pattern) in the cockpit display area Db is displayed in a red display mode. By configuring in this way, whether or not the execution pattern (reserved pattern) is covered by each of the movable accessories 87 and 88, and if covered, the suggested mode of each of the movable accessories 87 and 88 is determined. Whether or not to propagate to the execution pattern (reserved pattern) is generated, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced. Note that cut-in images or the like may be used instead of the movable accessories 87 and 88 . It should be noted that the "state in which the suggested mode is reflected" means that the display mode of the production means that makes the execution pattern (reserved pattern) difficult to see is directly propagated to the execution pattern (reserved pattern), or that the production means Contents related to the display mode include displaying an execution pattern (reserved pattern), or changing (transitioning) the display mode of the performance means to the execution pattern (reserved pattern) and displaying it.

<Modification 13>
In the third embodiment, the movable parts 87 and 88 are driven from the initial positions in the "strong pattern" to cover the cockpit display area Db, and the movable parts 87 and 88 are driven to the initial positions again. When the cover is released, a "suspension change notice" is executed for the execution pattern, giving the player a sense of incongruity. On the other hand, as an effect that makes the player feel uncomfortable, for example, when each movable accessory 87, 88 is moved from the initial position to the movement position and driven again from the movement position, the initial position is not the initial position. It may be configured to return to a slightly deviated position from . By configuring in this way, the player can feel uncomfortable that the movable accessories 87 and 88 are displaced from the initial positions to the displaced positions.

<Modification 14>
Each of the above-described embodiments is configured to suggest to the player that the degree of expectation for a big win differs according to the difference in the display color of the "holding change notice". On the other hand, it is configured to suggest to the player that the game value (“probability fluctuation state” or “time reduction state”) given at the time of the big win differs according to the difference in the display color of the “holding change notice”. You may Specifically, for example, if the "pending change notice" is "blue", it is unlikely that the "probability change state" will be granted, and if the "pending change notice" is "red", the "probability change state” is highly likely to be granted, and when the “suspension change notice” is “rainbow”, the “probability fluctuation state” is granted, and the jackpot with the highest gaming value (for example, 15R) is granted. It may be configured to suggest that By configuring in this way, when the "hold change notice" is executed "after hold deletion", it is suggested that the gaming value given is different due to the difference in the display color of the "hold change notice". It is possible to create a game of which color the display color of the ``holding change notice'' to be displayed after ``holding and erasing'' will be, and to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in addition to the configuration that suggests that the game value given at the time of the big hit differs according to the difference in the display color of the "hold change notice", depending on the difference in the display color of the "hold change notice", some game It may be configured to suggest the situation to the player. Specifically, for example, if the "hold change notice" is "blue", the fluctuation time of the variable production to be executed is short, and if the "hold change notice" is "red", the variable production to be executed It may be configured to suggest that the fluctuation time is long.

<Modification 15>
In the above-described first embodiment, after the variable element of "Super Reach" is completed, the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed, and the execution symbol display area Db0 of the redisplayed cockpit display area Db is displayed. In the executed symbols, a ``reserved change notice'' after ``reserved erasure'' is executed to change the display mode of the executed symbols from the display mode before erasure to the display mode at the time of re-display, and a big win is achieved based on the change. It was configured to suggest and execute an unexpected production. On the other hand, in the character pattern displayed in the sub-display area Ds, the display mode at the time of re-displaying the character pattern is changed from the display mode before erasure of the character pattern, and based on the change, it is suggested that a big win will be won. It may be configured as In this case, while the temporary "failure display" is displayed in the main display area Dm, the character pattern displayed in the sub-display area Ds is displayed in a display mode (for example, a happy expression) that does not correspond to the "failure display". It may be configured to make the player feel uncomfortable based on the fact that the expression of the character pattern does not correspond to the display mode of the "failure display".

<Modification 16>
In the third embodiment, when the left side movable accessory 87 is driven in the "strong pattern", the entire left side movable accessory 87 covers the entire cockpit display area Db. On the other hand, when the left movable accessory 87 is driven in the "strong pattern", a part of the cockpit display area Db, for example, the execution symbol display area Db0, the first reserved symbol display area Db1 and the second reserved symbol display area It may be configured such that only Db2 is covered and the third reserved design display area Db3 and the fourth reserved design display area Db4 are not covered. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the "reserved change notice" after "reserved erasure" only with the execution pattern and the reserved pattern within the range covered by the left movable accessory 87, and the left movable accessory 87 can be covered. The ``reservation change notice'' after ``reservation erasure'' is not executed for the reservation symbols that cannot be played, thereby enriching game variations.

In the above configuration, the left movable role 87 covers the execution symbol display area Db0, the first reserved symbol display area Db1 and the second reserved symbol display area Db2, and the right movable role 88 covers the third reserved symbol display area. Db3 and the fourth reserved symbol display area Db4 are covered, and the execution timing of the "reserved change notice" after "reserved deletion" is changed depending on the driving mode of each movable accessory 87, 88. good too. At this time, by configuring the driving of the left movable accessory 87 in the "strong pattern" and the driving of the right movable accessory 88 in the "strong pattern" so that the reliability of the big win is different, each movable accessory 87 , 88 and the execution content of the "holding change notice" to provide variation in the game, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

<Modification 17>
In the above-described fourth embodiment, the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed once during the variable effect to hide the execution pattern displayed in the cockpit display area Db. It was configured to perform "pending change notice" after "pending deletion". On the other hand, the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed a plurality of times in the area where the cockpit display area Db is displayed during the variable effect, and after displaying any of the large character cut-in images Dc2, the cockpit display area Db is visually recognized again. When enabled, it may be configured to execute the "pending change notice" after "pending erasure".

Specifically, for example, the large character cut-in image Dc2 is configured to be displayed three times in the variable effect, and when the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed and then erased, the cockpit display area Db is displayed. Whether or not it is erased, and when the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed with the cockpit display area Db erased, and then erased, the execution pattern or the pending pattern in the cockpit display area Db is re-displayed. You may give the playability whether it is displayed or not. For example, based on the display of the first large character cut-in image Dc2, the entire cockpit display area Db is covered, and when the first large character cut-in image Dc2 is erased, the cockpit display area Db is also erased. Then, the second large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed, and only the outer frame of the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed when the second large character cut-in image Dc2 is erased. Then, when the third large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed and the third large character cut-in image Dc2 is erased, the execution symbols are displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, and the execution symbols are displayed. It is configured to change the color and execute the "holding change notice" after "holding erasure". By configuring in this way, it is possible to add amusement whether or not an effect related to the "holding change notice" is executed at the timing when the large character cut-in image Dc2 covering the cockpit display area Db is erased. You can increase your interest.

<Modification 18>
In the fourth embodiment, when the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed, the entire cockpit display area Db is covered with the large character cut-in image Dc2. On the other hand, when the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed, only a part of the cockpit display area Db, for example, the execution symbol display area Db0, the first reserved symbol display area Db1 and the second reserved symbol display area Db2 is covered. , the third reserved symbol display area Db3 and the fourth reserved symbol display area Db4 may be configured not to be covered. By configuring in this way, the ``reserved change notice'' after ``reserved erasure'' can be executed only with the executed symbols and reserved symbols within the range covered by the large character cut-in image Dc2, and covered with the large character cut-in image Dc2. The ``reservation change notice'' after ``reservation erasure'' is not executed in the reservation symbols that cannot be played, thereby enriching game variations.

<Modification 19>
In the above-described fourth embodiment, the large character cut-in image Dc2 that makes the rear side invisible is displayed, and the entire cockpit display area Db is covered by the large character cut-in image Dc2 to hide the cockpit display area Db. When the character cut-in image Dc2 is erased, the cockpit display area Db is configured to be visible again, and the "suspension change notice" is executed at the timing when the visual recognition becomes possible. On the other hand, the rear side of the large character cut-in image Dc2 may be configured to be visible when a predetermined condition is satisfied and invisible when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Specifically, for example, when the display color of the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed in blue, it becomes invisible when the execution pattern is displayed in "blue", while the execution pattern is displayed in "white". or "red", the execution pattern is configured to be seen through the large character cut-in image Dc2. By configuring in this manner, the display color of the execution symbol (reserved symbol) displayed before the large character cut-in image Dc2 appears is the same (same type) display color as the large character cut-in image Dc2. , when the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed, the execution pattern is assimilated with the large character cut-in image Dc2 to make it invisible, and when the large character cut-in image Dc2 is erased, the execution pattern is configured to change the display color of As a result, based on the relationship between the display color of the execution pattern before the large character cut-in image Dc2 is displayed and the display color of the large character cut-in image Dc2, the "hold change notice""after hold erasure" is displayed. Whether or not the game can be executed is determined, and the variety of effects can be increased to enhance the interest of the game.

Also, the read-ahead process may be executed by the display control device 114 . For example, information for performing the look-ahead process, that is, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type obtained from the counter buffer with the start winning in the main control device 110 A pending information storage area and an execution information storage area similar to those shown in FIG. 19 are provided in the display control device 114 to store each value of the counter CS1. And based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area, the display control device 114 executes the pre-reading process, and the big hit is made in the variable performance being executed and the variable performance being held. If it is determined that there is a variable effect, the "suspension change notice" may be executed. In this case, when receiving the pending pitches command from the main controller 110, the audio lamp control device 113 may transmit the pending pitches command as it is to the display control device 114 as a pending pitches command for display. As a result, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the main controller 110 along with the start winning are stored in the pending information first to fourth areas provided in the pending information storage area of the display control device 114. Among them, it can be stored in an area corresponding to the number of reserved balls in the display reserved ball number command. Then, the display control device 114 may perform shift processing similar to the processing of S1403 and S1404 in FIG. 31 on the pending information storage area every time it receives the display variation pattern command. As a result, the execution information storage area of the display control device 114 can store the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c of the main control device 110. The same values as those of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first to fourth reserved ball storage areas 203b of the main controller 110 can be stored in the to fourth areas.

In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and the audio lamp controller 113 instructs the display controller 114 to display. A command may be sent directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114 . Alternatively, the audio lamp control device 113 may be connected to the display control device 114 so that the display control device 114 may transmit commands for instructing the output of each sound and lighting of the lamp to the audio lamp control device 113 . Furthermore, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

When the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured as one control device, the same pending information storage area and execution information storage area as shown in FIG. is provided, and when a pending ball number command is received from the main controller 110, among the first to fourth areas of the prefetch information provided in the pending information storage area, the area corresponding to the prefetch pending number of the pending ball number command , each of the counter values C1 to C3, CS1 included in the pending ball count command may be stored. In addition, each time one control device receives a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, shift processing similar to the processing of S1403 and S1404 in FIG. may be executed.

In the above embodiment, in the command determination process (S911) executed by the audio ramp control device 113, when the stop type command is received, the fluctuation start flag 223a is always set to ON. The fluctuation start flag 223a may be set to ON when the stop type command is received after receiving the command. As a result, it is possible to suppress execution of a strange variation effect when a stop type command is received without receiving a variation pattern command.

Further, the variation start flag 223a may be set to ON at the timing of receiving the variation pattern command. In this case, in the variation effect processing (S910) executed by the sound lamp control device 113, the variation pattern extracted by the variation pattern command is notified to the display control device 114 based on the fact that the variation start flag 223a is turned on. A variation pattern command for display may be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114 . As a result, without waiting for reception of the stop type command by the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 is caused to execute the variation effect on the third pattern display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command. can be done. In this case, the audio lamp control device 113 generates a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command at the timing of receiving the stop type command, You may make it transmit to the display control apparatus 114. FIG. Then, the display control device 114 may determine the stop pattern of the variable effect executed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the stop type command for display.

In the above-described embodiment, whether or not there is a variation effect that will result in a big win during the variation effect of the third symbol that is held and executed with the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is determined by the execution symbol and the The case of performing the "holding change notice" in the holding pattern has been described. On the other hand, when the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67 (start winning), the second symbol (normal symbol) is suspended and executed during the variable display (stops at the "○" symbol). Whether or not there is something to be, using the second design reservation lamp 84 or the third design display device 81, etc., together with whether or not there is a variation effect that becomes a big hit during the variation effect of the third design, or , may alternatively notify the player. As a result, whether there is a winning variable display in the variable display of the pending second pattern (normal pattern) or in the variable display of the second pattern (normal pattern) being executed and held The player can grasp whether or not. Therefore, it can be estimated whether the second symbol will be a hit or not before executing the variable display of the second symbol. Among game machines, there is a game machine which enhances game performance by the presence or absence of winning of normal symbols, and it is particularly effective in such a game machine.

In the above-described embodiment, the demo effect is described as stopping display of the third symbol consisting of the main symbols with no numbers "0" to "9", but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. , the third pattern consisting of main patterns with numbers or main patterns without numbers may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Alternatively, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third pattern. Also, a character or a back image that is completely different from the third pattern or the back image used in the variable effect may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 in which the variable effect is performed has explained the case of executing the "suspended change notice", which is one form of the continuous notice effect. A fourth pattern display device separate from the third pattern display device 81 is provided in the machine 10, and the fourth pattern display device is caused to display the fourth pattern together with the variation performance executed by the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加Executes a continuous notice effect (hereinafter referred to as “continuous notice effect” including “hold change notice”) that is executed across multiple variable effects, unlike “hold change notice” or “hold change notice” You may In this case, the control of the fourth pattern display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, by providing the pachinko machine 10 with a role different from the movable roles 87 and 88 that operate according to various performances and by operating the role in a predetermined mode together with the variable performance, continuous advance notice performance can be achieved. may be executed. Further, by controlling the sound lamp control device 113, by outputting the sound for the continuous notice effect from the sound output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10, the continuous notice effect may be executed, or the illumination part of the pachinko machine 10. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

As a result, every time the variation effect (dynamic display) is performed in the third pattern display device 81 (and the first pattern display device 37), the pattern is continuously displayed in the fourth pattern display device, or the character is displayed. By operating in a predetermined mode, by outputting sound from the sound output device 226, or by lighting or blinking the illumination parts 29 to 33, the player can be given a feeling of expectation of a big win. . In addition, the player normally continues the game while watching the third pattern display device 81 where the variable effect is performed, but the pattern is displayed by the fourth pattern display device different from the third pattern display device 81. , the operation of the character, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting and blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33, so that the continuous announcement effect is performed, so that the player is given a different effect than usual. can be easily recognized. In addition, the continuous announcement effect can be easily continued by simple control such as display of the pattern by the fourth pattern display device, operation of the character, sound output from the sound output device 226, or lighting / blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33. It is possible to perform a preview performance.

Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by outputting sound from the sound output device 226 or by lighting or blinking the illumination parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 113. By making the main control device 110 perform the winning judgment and the lottery processing at the start of the variation, the voice lamp control device 113 performing the continuous notice performance, and the display control device 114 performing the variation performance, the pachinko machine 10 continuously When the advance notice effect is performed, each control device can be made to take charge of each process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from concentrating on one control device, so that the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

In addition, display of symbols for continuous advance notice effect on the third pattern display device 81, display of symbols for continuous notice effect on the fourth pattern display device, operation in a predetermined mode of the role, sound from the sound output device 226 At least two or more of the output and lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 may be combined and controlled in conjunction with each other to execute a continuous advance notice effect. As a result, it is possible to execute more diverse continuous announcement effects. In addition, the execution method of the continuous notice effect (display by the third pattern display device 81, display by the fourth pattern display device, operation of the role, sound output from the sound output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33 , or a combination of them), by changing the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect (15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, off) Prepare multiple continuous notice effect modes selected according to good too.

In the above embodiment, the main controller 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of pending balls incremented by "1" when there is a winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64. The case where each counter C1 to C3, CS1 acquired from the counter buffer along with the start winning is included in the number command and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 has been described, but it is included in the reserved ball number command. The types of counters may be part of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include the values of other counters. Also, when the main controller 110 notifies the audio lamp controller 113 of the values of the counters acquired in conjunction with the start winning, the information indicating the values of the counters is included in the pending ball number command and notified. Instead, information indicating the value of each counter may be included in a command separate from the number-of-holds-balls command, and these values may be notified to the audio lamp control device 113 . As another command, it may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, or a variation pattern command, a stop pattern command, or other information may be voiced. The command for notifying the lamp control device 113 may be added with the value of each counter acquired with the start winning. As another command, when notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, the command indicates that the value of each counter to be notified is a variable effect corresponding to the number of times of suspension It may include information indicating whether it is related. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113, based on the information about the number of times of suspension included in the command, stores each of the A counter value can be stored.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pending ball number command, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated by the pending ball number command are stored in the pending information storage area 223e. Although the case has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and when a pending ball number command (or a command indicating the value of each counter) is received, based on the value of each counter indicated by the command , whether it is a jackpot or not, the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, the type of loss in the case of a loss, etc. are partially or entirely determined, and these determination results are used instead of the values of each counter indicated by the command, or , may be stored in the pending information storage area 223e together with part or all of the value of the counter. As a result, when the prefetching process is executed, the determination result such as whether or not the variable effect being executed or suspended is a big hit is already stored in the pending information storage area 223e. It is only necessary to read it, and the execution of processing can be completed quickly. In addition, if the variable time of the variable effect is determined according to the number of pending balls at the time when the execution of the variable effect is started (strictly, the time when the jackpot lottery is performed), the number of pending balls command (or When a command indicating the value of each counter) is received, it is not possible to determine the number of pending balls when the variable effect is started, so it is impossible to accurately determine the variable time. Therefore, in this case, it is preferable to store at least the value of the variation type counter CS1 used for determining the variation time in the pending information storage area 223e. As a result, when the look-ahead process is executed, if the hitting of balls to the game area is stopped, the number of pending balls when the variable effect is started can be determined. It is possible to calculate the variation time based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 together with the determination result of whether or not the game is a big win, the type of the big win in the case of a big win, and the type of loss in the case of a loss.

In the above embodiment, the case where the game board 13 is provided with one first ball entrance 64 for starting the jackpot lottery when a ball is entered has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances, each of which is independently detected to start a jackpot lottery. In this case, when there is a hold at each of the first ball entrances, the number of held ball commands sent by the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 indicate which of the first ball entrances is being held. May contain information. In addition, the variation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 when starting the variation also includes information indicating which of the first entrances is the suspended variation effect. good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a holding ball counter is prepared for each first ball entrance, and when a holding ball number command is received, the first ball entering indicated by the holding ball number command is received. When the number of held balls is set in the number of held balls counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, if the number of held balls counter for the first entrance indicated by the variation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entrance The number of held balls can be counted every time.

In addition, when a plurality of first ball entrances are arranged on the game board 13, the counter value acquired with the winning (starting winning) of each first ball entrance is notified to the sound lamp control device 113. You may In this case, the command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the counter value acquired by the main controller 110 with the start winning is may include information indicating whether the In addition, the variation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 when starting the variation also includes information indicating whether the variation effect is associated with the start winning to any of the first entrances. may Furthermore, in the sound ramp control device 113, a holding information storage area may be prepared for each first ball entrance. As a result, every time a variation pattern command is received, shift processing is performed on the holding information storage area corresponding to the first entrance where the start winning that triggered the execution of the variation performance indicated by the variation pattern command is detected. It can be carried out. Therefore, the value of each counter corresponding to the pending variable effect for each first ball entrance can be held in the sound ramp control device 113 as well. Therefore, if the probability of winning a jackpot, the distribution probability of the jackpot type, the distribution probability of the losing type, etc. differ depending on the first ball entrance that has started winning, in the look-ahead process, it is determined whether each variable effect will be a jackpot. It is possible to correctly determine whether or not, the type of jackpot in the case of a big win, the type of loss in the case of a loss, etc., based on which first ball entrance the starting prize is entered. In addition, when the variable effect based on the start winning to one first entrance is given priority over the variable effect based on the starting winning to the other first entrance, the first entrance to one Prefetch processing can be performed in order from the value of the counter corresponding to the variable performance based on the start winning to the ball.

In addition, when a plurality of first ball entrances are provided, the sound ramp control device 113 sends the values of each counter acquired based on the start winning to the first ball entrances from the main controller 110 by a command. When it is determined to start the continuous notice performance when receiving, the continuous notice performance is executed over all the variable performances (suspended balls) suspended at that time regardless of the first ball entrance where the starting prize was awarded. may In addition, a plurality of first ball entrances are provided, and the variable performance for winning to one first ball entrance is preferentially executed over the variable performance for winning to other first ball entrances. In the pachinko machine, the start of the continuous advance notice performance may be determined only from the result of reading the counter value acquired for winning the prize at the first ball entrance where the variable performance is preferentially executed. . As a result, it is not determined whether or not the execution of the continuous announcement performance is set for the variable performance corresponding to the winning of the first ball entrance with the low priority, and the continuous announcement performance is not started for this variable performance. . Supposing that the continuous advance notice effect is started for the variable effect corresponding to the winning of the first ball entrance with the low priority, and the variable effect is continuously suspended in the first ball entrance with the high priority, There is a possibility that a situation may occur in which the continuous advance notice effect does not end easily. On the other hand, in this modification, it is not determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is set to be executed for the variable effect corresponding to the winning at the first ball entrance with the low priority. Since the continuous advance notice effect is not started, the occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received in the voice ramp control device 113, the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is decreased by 1 (see S1411 in FIG. 31). , but not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the variation process (see FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the number of held balls of the main controller 110 subtracted in accordance with the variation pattern command set by the variation start process (S307) A pending ball number command is set so that the value (N) of the counter 203a (see S305 in FIG. 22) is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the pending ball number command is a variation pattern. It may be transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 together with the transmission of the command. As a result, the audio lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the number of held balls held by the main control device 110 . Also, the variation pattern command may include the value (N) of the pending ball number counter 203a after the subtraction. In this case, when receiving the variation pattern command, the sound lamp control device 113 may extract the number of held balls (N) included in the variation pattern command and set it in the sub-held ball number counter 223b.

In the above embodiment, winning into the first ball entrance 64 and passage through the second ball entrance 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is limited to four. Instead, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls for the variable effect based on the winning to the first ball entrance 64 is displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 numerically, or the area divided into four is displayed by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. can be configured to

Further, as shown in the above-described embodiment, the variable effect, which is the variable display of the third pattern, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as the identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The pattern may be moved and displayed in the horizontal direction or along a predetermined path such as an L shape. In addition, the variable display of the symbols is not limited to the variable performance of the symbols. Display is also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the variable effect is executed, the case of displaying the high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize them has been described. Alternatively, all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an unrecognizable degree and displayed, or all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is to have a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then confirms and displays the identification information. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Group A: Change the execution timing of "hold change notice" & "hold change notice" when redisplaying>

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a ball enters a starting winning hole and a starting winning is detected while a variable effect (variable display) of symbols or the like is performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. Then, with a predetermined number as the upper limit, there is a variable effect related to the start winning that is suspended. When the variable performance being executed is completed, the execution of the suspended non-executed variable performance is started.

In this variable presentation, as part of the entertainment of the game, a suggestive display that suggests the degree of expectation of the jackpot (for example, "pending change notice", mini appearance notice, etc.) is executed. When executing this suggestive display, the display mode of a display object that is always visible to the player is changed from the first mode to the second mode, or a new display object is additionally made to appear. is configured to suggest the degree of expectation of a big win to the player.

However, in the conventional game machine, when the suggestive display is executed, the display mode of the visible displayed object is always changed or a new displayed object appears additionally. It was easy to recognize, and it was not possible to create unexpectedness in the content of the production. Therefore, there is a need to improve the interest in games from conventional gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of executing an unexpected effect and suitably improving the interest of a game.

Acquisition means (for example, the first entrance 64) for acquiring information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
Determination means (for example, main controller 110) that makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means;
Dynamic display execution means (for example, display a controller 114);
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means,
Storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number (for example, a held ball storage area 203b or a held ball execution area 203c);
Judgment for judging whether or not there is the dynamic display that displays the predetermined identification information among the dynamic displays of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means means (e.g., MPU 221 of audio ramp controller 113);
a second display means (for example, an execution symbol or a pending symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db) capable of displaying the judgment result by the judgment means;
Display switching means for switching and controlling the display state and non-display state of the second display means (for example, changing from the variable element of "normal reach" to the variable element of "super reach");
Changing means (for example, pending display setting process (for example, S1209)) and
When the changing means changes from the first mode to the second mode, and when the second display means made non-display by the display switching means is redisplayed, the display of the second display means is changed. Re-display changing means for changing to the second mode (for example, execution symbol change processing (S1414));
A gaming machine A0 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine A0, information is acquired by the acquiring means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the determining means makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquiring means. Dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means based on the determination result by the determination means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is awarded to the player. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means with a predetermined number as the upper limit. Here, the determination means determines whether or not there is a dynamic display that displays the predetermined identification information among the dynamic displays of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. and the judgment result by the judging means can be displayed by the second display means. Further, the second display means is switched between the display state and the non-display state by the display switching means. Then, the changing means changes the display mode of the second display means from the predetermined first mode to the second mode indicating the judgment result by the judging means. When the changing means changes from the first state to the second mode, the display of the second display means is redisplayed by the redisplay changing means when the second display means, which has been put into the non-display state by the display switching means, is redisplayed. It is changed to the second mode. As a result, compared to the case where the always visible second display means is directly changed from the first mode to the second mode and notified, or the case where the second display means is newly added and made to appear, the second display means It is possible to casually change the second display means to the second mode while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change of the display means. Therefore, by temporarily hiding the second display means and then casually changing it, first, the player feels uncomfortable, and then the player recognizes that the uncomfortable feeling is the appearance of the second mode on the second display means. Thus, there is an effect that, while providing the player with an unexpected performance, the performance can be diversified and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In gaming machine A0,
The changing means is
Change determination means ( For example, holding display setting processing (S1209)),
The redisplay changing means is
at a first display timing for redisplaying the second display means that has been made non-display by the display switching means when the change determination means determines that the first mode is to be changed to the second mode; , change execution means (for example, execution symbol change processing (S1414)) for changing the display of the second display means to the second mode;
A gaming machine A1 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine A1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the change determination means provided in the change means determines whether or not the display mode of the second display means is to be changed from the predetermined first mode to the second mode indicating the result of determination by the determination means. When the change determining means determines to change the state from the first state to the second mode, the change executing means provided in the redisplay changing means reactivates the second display means that has been made non-display by the display switching means. At the first display timing for displaying, the display of the second display means is changed to the second mode. As a result, compared to the case where the always visible second display means is directly changed from the first mode to the second mode and notified, or the case where the second display means is newly added and made to appear, the second display means It is possible to casually change the second display means to the second mode while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change of the display means. Therefore, by temporarily hiding the second display means and then casually changing it, first, the player feels uncomfortable, and then the player recognizes that the uncomfortable feeling is the appearance of the second mode on the second display means. Thus, there is an effect that, while providing the player with an unexpected performance, the performance can be diversified and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In gaming machine A1,
The second display means can display a pattern representing the number of the information acquired by the acquisition means stored in the storage means,
The dynamic display execution means
In the dynamic display, continuous display means for continuously displaying the second display means (for example, variable element of "normal reach");
a special effect executing means (for example, a variable element of "super reach") for executing a special effect including an effect in which the second display means displayed by the continuous display means is turned into a non-display state by the display switching means; ,
After the end of the special effect by the special effect executing means, the second display means is redisplayed by the switching control of the display switching means (for example, after the end of the variable element of "super reach", the cockpit display area Db) and
The change execution means is
A game machine A2 characterized in that, when said second display means is re-displayed by said post-end re-display means, the display of said second display means is changed to said second mode.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the pattern representing the number of pieces of information acquired by the acquisition means stored in the storage means can be displayed by the second display means. Further, the second display means is continuously displayed in the dynamic display by the continuous display means provided in the dynamic display execution means. Then, the special effect execution means executes the special effect including the effect of making the second display means displayed by the continuous display means non-display state by the display switching means, and after the end, the special effect is executed by the re-display means. After the end of the special effect by the means, the second display means is re-displayed by the switching control of the display switching means. Then, the change execution means changes the display of the second display means to the second mode when the second display means is re-displayed by the post-end re-display means.

Conventionally, at the start of dynamic display, the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means is displayed by the second display means, and the second display means is continuously displayed by the continuous display means. When the special performance is executed, the second display means is switched to a non-display state by the display switching means, the second display means is re-displayed by the display switching means after the special performance is finished, and the display is continued at the start of the dynamic display. By returning the second display means to the state displayed by the means, it is prepared for execution of the next dynamic display. That is, by re-displaying the second display means displayed at the start of the dynamic display at the end of the special effect, the end of the dynamic display can be suggested to the player and the number of the next dynamic displays can be increased. The next dynamic display can be executed smoothly while being recognized by the player. Therefore, when the special effect ends, the second display means is redisplayed, which is a natural expression in the flow of the process of executing the dynamic display, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

Then, like the game machine A2, the second display means continuously displayed by the continuous display means is put into a non-display state by the display switching means based on the execution of the special performance, and the display switching means is switched when the special performance ends. at the timing of re-displaying the second display means, the display of the second display means is changed to the second mode. With this configuration, it is possible to change the display mode from the first mode to the second mode while re-displaying the second display means in the non-display state in the flow of the execution process of the dynamic display. can. Therefore, it is possible to casually change the second display means to the second mode while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change of the second display means. As a result, by temporarily hiding the second display means and then casually changing it, first, the player feels a sense of discomfort, and then the player feels that the sense of discomfort is the appearance of the second mode on the second display means. There is an effect that, while providing the player with an unexpected performance, the performance can be diversified and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In gaming machine A1 or A2,
The dynamic display execution means
Temporary display means for displaying temporary identification information other than the predetermined identification information in the dynamic display (for example, temporary "failure display" in FIG. 33(e));
After the provisional identification information is displayed by the provisional display means, re-dynamic means for performing re-dynamic display for changing the provisional identification information to the predetermined identification information (for example, a variable element of "re-change") and
The change execution means is
When the change determining means determines that the first mode is to be changed to the second mode, and the re-dynamic display is executed by the re-dynamic means, the second display is performed at the first display timing. A game machine A3 characterized by changing the display of means to the second mode.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, provisional identification information other than predetermined identification information is displayed in dynamic display by provisional display means provided in dynamic display execution means. Then, after the provisional identification information is displayed by the provisional display means, the provisional identification information is displayed by the provisional identification information by the re-dynamic means provided in the dynamic display execution means, and the re-dynamic display for changing the provisional identification information to the predetermined identification information is performed. . When the change determination means determines that the first mode is to be changed to the second mode and the re-dynamic display is executed by the re-dynamic means, the change execution means performs the second display at the first display timing. The representation of the means is changed to the second mode. That is, in a state in which provisional identification information other than predetermined identification information is temporarily displayed in dynamic display, the second mode of the second display means is displayed, and in that state, dynamic display is performed again to perform provisional identification. The information is configured to change to predetermined identification information. Therefore, the display mode of the second display means is changed from the first mode to the second mode in accordance with the re-display of the second display means, and the player feels uncomfortable based on the change. After that, the re-dynamic display is performed, and the provisional identification information is changed to the predetermined identification information, so that the player can recognize that the root of the discomfort is directly linked to the game value. There is an effect that it is possible to diversify the effects and enhance the interest of the game while providing the effects with unexpectedness to the game.

In gaming machine A3,
The change execution means is
Second timing execution means (for example, , "pending change notice" after "reach"), and
a start time selection means (for example, a scenario counter 223d) for selecting a start time for changing the second display means to the second mode;
Re-dynamic determination for determining whether or not the re-dynamic display is to be executed by the re-dynamic means when the first display timing is selected as the start time of the second mode by the start time selection means. Means (for example, processing for determining re-change information (S1506));
Redynamic timing change for changing the start timing of the second mode from the first display timing to the second display timing when the redynamic determination means determines that the redynamic display is not executed. A gaming machine A4 characterized by comprising means (for example, S1506 of execution symbol change processing).

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second display means is changed to the second mode at the second display timing different from the first display timing by the second timing execution means provided in the change execution means. Further, the start time selection means selects the start time for changing the second display means to the second mode. Then, when the first display timing is selected by the start time selection means as the start time of the second mode, the re-dynamic determining means determines whether or not the re-dynamic display is executed by the re-dynamic means. be. When the re-dynamic determination means determines that the re-dynamic display is not executed, the re-dynamic timing change means changes the start time of the second mode from the first display timing to the second display timing. . As a result, when the first display timing is initially selected as the change start timing for changing the second display means to the second mode, the conditions for changing the second display means to the second mode at the first display timing When the second mode is not in order, by changing the change start timing of the second mode to the second display timing and displaying it, the case where the second mode is not displayed is reduced and the execution rate of the second mode by the second display means is increased. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In gaming machine A3 or A4,
The change execution means is
Second timing execution means (for example, , "pending change notice" after "reach"), and
a start time selection means (for example, a scenario counter 223d) for selecting a start time for changing the second display means to the second mode;
special effect determination means ( For example, processing for determining pending deletion information (S1507));
special timing change means for changing the start timing of the second mode from the first display timing to the second display timing when the special effect determination means determines that the special effect will not be executed. A gaming machine A5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3 or A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second display means is changed to the second mode at the second display timing different from the first display timing by the second timing execution means provided in the change execution means. Further, the start time selection means selects the start time for changing the second display means to the second mode. Then, when the first display timing is selected as the start time of the second mode by the start time selection means, it is determined whether or not the special effect is executed by the special effect execution means. Then, the special timing changing means changes the start timing of the second mode from the first display timing to the second display timing when the special performance determining means determines that the special performance is not executed. As a result, when the first display timing is initially selected as the change start timing for changing the second display means to the second mode, the conditions for changing the second display means to the second mode at the first display timing When the second mode is not in order, by changing the change start timing of the second mode to the second display timing and displaying it, the case where the second mode is not displayed is reduced and the execution rate of the second mode by the second display means is increased. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In gaming machine A4 or A5,
The dynamic display execution means performs a predetermined specific effect (for example, a variable element of "normal reach" or a variable element of "pseudo-run") at a timing before the second display means can be put into a non-display state by the display switching means. etc.)
The gaming machine A6, wherein the second display timing is when the specific effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4 or A5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display executing means executes a predetermined specific effect at a timing before the second display means is brought into the non-display state by the display switching means, and the second display means is brought into the non-display state by the display switching means. The second mode is displayed on the second display means in the specific effect executed at the timing before obtaining. Therefore, even if the second display means is not put into a non-display state by the display switching means, the second mode can be displayed on the second display means, and cases where the second mode is not displayed can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the execution rate of the second mode by the second display means can be increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In any of gaming machines A2 to A6,
The gaming machine A7, wherein the dynamic display executing means executes the special effect in the second half of the dynamic display.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of the game machines A2 to A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display executing means executes the special effect in the latter half of the dynamic display. Thus, even in the second half of the dynamic display, the player can play the game while anticipating the appearance of the display in the second mode by the second display means. Therefore, the player can play the game while anticipating the appearance of the predetermined identification information until the second half of the dynamic display.

In gaming machine A6 or A7,
The game machine A8 is characterized in that the dynamic display execution means is configured such that the execution timing of the specific performance comes at a timing before the execution timing of the special performance in the dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6 or A7, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, the dynamic display executing means is configured such that the execution timing of the specific effect arrives before the execution timing of the special effect in the dynamic display. Thereby, the second mode can be displayed on the second display means in the specific effect executed at the timing before the second display means is put into the non-display state by the special effect. Therefore, even in the dynamic display in which the special effect is not executed, the second display means can be changed to the second mode in the specific effect, so that the cases where the second mode is not displayed can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the execution rate of the second mode by the second display means can be increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In any of gaming machines A4 to A8,
The start time selection means is
timing selection means for selecting a timing for changing the display of the second display means to the second mode at the timing when the acquisition means acquires the information triggered by the establishment of the starting condition;
The dynamic display execution means
an execution establishment determining means for determining the content of the dynamic display based on establishment of a predetermined execution condition;
The change execution means is
and timing correction means for correcting the execution timing of the second mode selected by the start time selection means based on the content of the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display execution means. A game machine A9 to play.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A4 to A8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the timing selection means provided in the start time selection means selects the timing for changing the display of the second display means to the second mode at the timing when the acquisition means acquires the information triggered by the establishment of the starting condition. . Then, the content of the dynamic display is determined by the execution establishment determination means provided in the dynamic display execution means based on establishment of a predetermined execution condition. Then, the execution timing of the second mode selected by the start time selection means is corrected by the timing correction means provided in the change execution means based on the contents of the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display execution means. . That is, the selection of the execution timing of the second mode by the second display means and the determination of the contents of the dynamic display are independently selected or determined, and then the second display means is selected based on the contents of the dynamic display. Correction of the execution timing of the second mode is performed. As a result, even if the determination of the second mode by the second display means and the determination of the content of the dynamic display are performed at different timings, the consistency of the content of the effect is ensured. Adjustments can be made so as not to cause inconsistency with respect to each other's presentation contents. Therefore, by performing each determination by separate processing, there is an effect that it is possible to facilitate the design at the time of development of the control program used for each determination, and to execute a consistent presentation.

In any of gaming machines A3 to A9,
The storage means
For each information acquired by the acquisition means,
a special effect storage means (for example, pending deletion information storage area 223e7) for storing whether or not the special effect is executed in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information;
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information, re-dynamic storage means for storing whether or not the re-dynamic display is executed by the re-dynamic means (for example, a re-change information storage area 223e8), and a game machine A10.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effects of the game machines A3 to A9, the following effects are produced. That is, in the storage means, presence/absence of execution of a special effect is stored by the special effect storage means in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information for each piece of information acquired by the acquisition means. In the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the information, the re-dynamic storage means stores whether or not the re-dynamic display is performed by the re-dynamic means. Accordingly, by confirming whether or not the special effect stored in each storage means is executed and whether or not the re-variation display is executed, it is possible to easily determine the execution mode of the dynamic display stored in the storage means. It becomes possible. Therefore, for example, the execution mode of dynamic display can be grasped without detailed determination of the execution mode of dynamic display at the start of dynamic display, and the processing load at the start of dynamic display can be reduced. It has the effect of being able to

<Group B: change the variable element to execute the “holding change notice”>

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a ball enters a starting winning hole and a starting winning is detected while a variable effect (variable display) of symbols or the like is performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. Then, with a predetermined number as the upper limit, there is a variable effect related to the start winning that is suspended. When the variable performance being executed is completed, the execution of the suspended non-executed variable performance is started.

In this variable presentation, as part of the entertainment of the game, a suggestive display that suggests the degree of expectation of the jackpot (for example, "pending change notice", mini appearance notice, etc.) is executed. When the suggestive display is executed, the timing for starting the suggestive display is determined by a lottery, and the suggestive display appears based on the result of the lottery to suggest the degree of expectation of the big win to the player. ing.

However, in conventional gaming machines, even if the time to start the suggestive display is determined in advance, there are cases where the suggestive display cannot be executed at the determined start time depending on the content of the variable element in the variable effect. In such a case, the execution of the suggestive display itself is stopped, and the presentation cannot be diversified. Therefore, there is a need to improve the interest in games from conventional gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and it is possible to increase the chances of executing the suggestive display at the initially selected start time, diversify the effects, and preferably improve the interest of the game. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can

Acquisition means (for example, the first ball entrance 64) that acquires information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
Determination means (for example, main controller 110) that determines based on the information acquired by the acquisition means;
Dynamic display execution means (for example, display a controller 114);
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means,
The dynamic display is configured by combining a plurality of dynamic elements (for example, "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation elements, "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation elements, and "normal reach" fluctuation elements),
Storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number (for example, a held ball storage area 203b or a held ball execution area 203c);
Judgment for judging whether or not there is the dynamic display that displays the predetermined identification information among the dynamic displays of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means means (e.g., MPU 221 of audio ramp controller 113);
a second display means (for example, an execution symbol or a pending symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db) capable of displaying the judgment result by the judgment means;
Changing means (for example, pending display setting process (for example, S1209)) and
start time selection means (for example, scenario counter 223d) for selecting the start time of the second mode by the second display means when changing from the first mode to the second mode by the change means;
Execution determination means for determining whether or not the second mode can be displayed at the start time selected by the start time selection means (for example, processing for determining re-change information (S1506), or determining pending deletion information processing (S1507));
When the execution determination means determines that the second mode cannot be displayed at the start time selected by the start time selection means, the dynamic element of the dynamic display is selected by the start time selection means. element changing means (for example, S1553 or S1554 of the execution symbol change process) for changing to the dynamic element of the dynamic display capable of displaying the second aspect at the start time;
A gaming machine B0 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine B0, information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and determination is made by the determination means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means based on the determination result by the determination means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is awarded to the player. Also, a dynamic display is composed by combining a plurality of dynamic elements. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means with a predetermined number as the upper limit. Here, the determination means determines whether or not there is a dynamic display that displays the predetermined identification information among the dynamic displays of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. and the judgment result by the judging means can be displayed by the second display means. Then, the changing means changes the display mode of the second display means from the predetermined first mode to the second mode indicating the judgment result by the judging means. When the change means changes to the second mode, the start time selection means selects the start time of the second mode by the second display means. Here, the execution determination means determines whether or not the second mode can be displayed at the start time selected by the start time selection means. When it is determined that the aspect cannot be displayed, the dynamic element of the dynamic display can display the second aspect at the start time selected by the start time selection means by the element changing means. is changed to As a result, when the second mode cannot be displayed at the selected start time, the dynamic elements of the dynamic display can be changed to display the second mode at the selected start time. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the second mode of the second display means at the initially selected start time, diversify the effects, and increase the interest of the game.

In gaming machine B0,
Display switching means for switching and controlling the display state and non-display state of the second display means (for example, changing from the variable element of "normal reach" to the variable element of "super reach"),
The changing means is
Change determination means ( For example, pending display setting processing (S1209)),
When the change determination means determines to change the display mode of the second display means to the second mode, the second display means is changed to the second mode at the execution timing selected by the start time selection means. A change execution means (for example, execution symbol change processing (S1414)) that changes to
The start time selection means is
Re-display timing selection means ( For example, S1506) of the execution pattern change process,
The execution determination means is
First display timing execution determination means for determining whether or not the second mode can be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-display timing selection means (for example, processing for determining re-variation information (S1506); Or, a process for determining pending deletion information (S1507)),
The element changing means is
When the first display timing execution determination means determines that the second mode cannot be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-display time selection means, the dynamic element of the dynamic display is determined. and a first display timing execution element change means (for example, S1553 or S1554 of execution symbol change processing) for changing the dynamic element of the dynamic display capable of displaying the second aspect at the first display timing. A gaming machine B1 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second display means is switched between the display state and the non-display state by the display switching means. Then, the change determination means provided in the change means determines whether or not to change the display mode of the second display means from the predetermined first mode to the second mode indicating the result of determination by the determination means. When the change determination means determines to change to the second mode, the change execution means changes the second display means to the second mode at the execution timing selected by the start time selection means. Then, the re-display time selection means provided in the start time selection means re-displays the second display means that has been placed in the non-display state by the display switching means as the execution timing for displaying the second mode on the second display means. A first display timing is selected. Here, it is determined by the first display timing execution determination means provided in the execution determination means whether or not the second mode can be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-display timing selection means. When the execution determination means determines that the second mode cannot be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-display time selection means, the first display timing execution element change means provided in the element change means, A dynamic element of dynamic display is changed to a dynamic element of dynamic display capable of displaying the second mode at the first display timing. As a result, compared to the case where the always visible second display means is directly changed from the first mode to the second mode and notified, or the case where the second display means is newly added and made to appear, the second display means It is possible to casually change the second display means to the second mode while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change of the display means. Therefore, by temporarily hiding the second display means and then casually changing it, first, the player feels uncomfortable, and then the player recognizes that the uncomfortable feeling is the appearance of the second mode on the second display means. Thus, there is an effect that, while providing the player with an unexpected performance, the performance can be diversified and the interest in the game can be enhanced. Also, when the second mode cannot be displayed at the selected first display timing, the dynamic element of the dynamic display can be changed to display the second mode at the first display timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the chances of executing the second mode of the second display means at the initially selected first display timing can be increased, and the effect can be diversified to increase the interest of the game.

In gaming machine B1,
The second display means can display a pattern representing the number of the information acquired by the acquisition means stored in the storage means,
The dynamic display execution means
In the dynamic display, continuous display means for continuously displaying the second display means (for example, variable element of "normal reach");
a special effect executing means (for example, a variable element of "super reach") for executing a special effect including an effect of hiding the second display means displayed by the continuous display means by the display switching means;
After the end of the special effect by the special effect executing means, the second display means is redisplayed by the switching control of the display switching means (for example, the cockpit display area after the end of the variable element of "super reach") Db) and
The redisplay time selection means includes:
The method further comprises timing selection means for selecting timing for re-displaying the second display means by the post-end re-display means as execution timing for displaying the second mode on the second display means. Game machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the pattern representing the number of pieces of information acquired by the acquisition means stored in the storage means can be displayed by the second display means. Further, the second display means is continuously displayed in the dynamic display by the continuous display means provided in the dynamic display execution means. Then, the special effect executing means executes the special effect including the effect that the second display means displayed by the continuous display means is hidden by the display switching means, and after the end, the special effect executing means executes the special effect executing means. After the end of the special effect by , the second display means is re-displayed by the switching control of the display switching means. Then, the timing at which the second display means is redisplayed by the redisplay means after completion is selected as the execution timing for displaying the second mode on the second display means by the timing selection means provided in the redisplay time selection means. be.

Conventionally, at the start of the dynamic display, the pattern indicating the number of information stored in the storage means is displayed by the second display means, and the second display means is continuously displayed by the continuous display means. When the special performance is executed, the second display means is switched to a non-display state by the display switching means, the second display means is re-displayed by the display switching means after the special performance is finished, and the display is continued at the start of the dynamic display. By returning the second display means to the state displayed by the means, it is prepared for execution of the next dynamic display. That is, by re-displaying the second display means displayed at the start of the dynamic display at the end of the special effect, the end of the dynamic display can be suggested to the player and the number of the next dynamic displays can be increased. The next dynamic display can be smoothly executed while being recognized by the player. Therefore, when the special effect ends, the second display means is redisplayed, which is a natural expression in the flow of the process of executing the dynamic display, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

Then, like the game machine B2, the second display means continuously displayed by the continuous display means is brought into a non-display state by the display switching means based on the execution of the special performance, and the display switching means is switched when the special performance ends. The display of the second display means is changed to the second mode at the timing of re-displaying the second display means. With this configuration, it is possible to change the display mode from the first mode to the second mode while re-displaying the second display means in the non-display state in the flow of the execution process of the dynamic display. can. Therefore, it is possible to casually change the second display means to the second mode while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change of the second display means. As a result, by temporarily hiding the second display means and then casually changing it, first, the player feels a sense of discomfort, and then the player feels that the sense of discomfort is the appearance of the second mode on the second display means. There is an effect that, while making the player aware of it and providing an unexpected performance to the player, the performance can be diversified and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In gaming machine B1 or B2,
The element changing means is
special effect determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special effect in the dynamic display (for example, processing for determining pending deletion information (S1507));
If the special effect determining means determines not to execute the special effect, effect changing means for executing the special effect in the dynamic display (for example, the variable element of "pseudo effect" is changed to "super reach" A process of changing to a variable element or a "special reach" variable element (S1553, S1554)),
The change execution means is
A gaming machine B3, wherein the second display means is changed to the second mode after the special effect changed by the effect change means is finished.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined whether or not a special effect is executed in the dynamic display by the special effect determination means provided in the element change means. Also, when the special effect determining means determines that the special effect is not to be executed by the effect changing means provided in the element changing means, the special effect is executed in the dynamic display. Then, the change execution means changes the second display means to the second mode after the special effect changed by the effect change means is finished. As a result, it is possible to initially display the second mode at the selected first display timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the chances of executing the second mode of the second display means at the initially selected first display timing can be increased, and the effect can be diversified to increase the interest of the game.

In gaming machine B3,
The production change means is
In the dynamic display, dynamic element determination means for determining the presence or absence of a dynamic element to be changed that can be changed to the special effect (for example, a variable element of "pseudo effect") (for example, processing for confirming pseudo effect information ( S1551)),
A game machine B4 characterized in that, when the dynamic element determining means determines that there is the dynamic element to be changed, the dynamic element to be changed is changed to the special effect.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the presence or absence of a dynamic element to be changed that can be changed to a special effect in the dynamic display is determined by the dynamic element determination means provided in the effect change means. Then, when the dynamic element determining means determines that there is a dynamic element to be changed, the dynamic element to be changed is changed to a special effect. Thereby, when there is a dynamic element to be changed that can be changed to the special effect, the second display means can be changed to the special effect of erasing and the second display means can be erased. Therefore, by adding a special effect that erases the second display means while maintaining the consistency of the dynamic elements of the dynamic display, the second mode is displayed on the second display means at the selected first display timing. It becomes possible to Therefore, without re-selecting the dynamic elements of the dynamic display, the chances of executing the second mode of the second display means at the first display timing initially selected are increased, and the effects can be diversified. There is an effect that it is possible to enhance the amusement of the game by changing it.

In gaming machine B4,
The game machine B5 is characterized in that the special effect and the dynamic element to be changed are configured with the same execution time.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the special effect and the dynamic element to be changed are configured with the same execution time. This allows the dynamic elements of the dynamic display to be changed without changing the execution time of the entire dynamic display. Therefore, by adding a special effect that erases the second display means while maintaining the consistency of the dynamic elements of the dynamic display, the second mode is displayed on the second display means at the selected first display timing. It becomes possible to Therefore, without re-selecting the dynamic elements of the dynamic display, the chances of executing the second mode of the second display means at the first display timing initially selected are increased, and the effects can be diversified. There is an effect that it is possible to enhance the amusement of the game by changing it.

In game machine B4 or B5,
The change execution means is
When the first display timing is selected by the re-display timing selection means and the dynamic element determination means determines that there is no dynamic element to be changed that can be changed to the special effect, the first display timing is selected. 2. A game machine B6 characterized in that the display means does not display the second mode.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4 or B5, the following effects are produced. That is, when the change execution means selects the first display timing by the re-display time selection means and the dynamic element determination means determines that there is no dynamic element to be changed that can be changed to the special effect, The second display means is configured not to display the second mode. Thereby, when there is no dynamic element to be changed in the dynamic display for which the special effect can be changed, that is, when there is no appropriate effect as the execution timing of the second mode, the second mode is configured not to be displayed. , there is an effect that a consistent performance can be provided to the player without inconsistency in the content of the performance.

In game machine B4 or B5,
The start time selection means is
Second timing selection means for selecting a second display timing (for example, "after reach") different from the first display timing as the execution timing for starting the display of the second mode (for example, "hold change" of "after reach" Notice”) and
When the first display timing is selected as the start timing of the second aspect, and the dynamic element determining means determines that there is no dynamic element to be changed that can be changed to the special effect, the A game machine B7, further comprising timing changing means for changing the start timing of the second mode from the first display timing to the second display timing.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4 or B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second display timing different from the first display timing is selected as the execution timing for starting the display of the second mode by the second timing selection means provided in the start time selection means. Further, when the first display timing is selected as the start timing of the second aspect, when the dynamic element determining means determines that there is no dynamic element to be changed that can be changed to the special effect, the timing changing means The start timing of the second mode is changed from the first display timing to the second display timing. As a result, when the conditions for displaying the second mode on the second display means at the first display timing initially selected are not met, the start timing of the second mode is changed to the second display timing and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of cases in which the second mode is not displayed, increase the execution rate of the second mode by the second display means, and improve the amusement of the game.

In any of gaming machines B2 to B7,
The gaming machine B8 is characterized in that the special effect is a dynamic element (for example, variable element of "super reach") in which the predetermined identification information may be displayed.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects of the game machines B2 to B7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the special effect is configured as a dynamic element in which predetermined identification information may be displayed, that is, an effect suggesting whether or not to give the player a predetermined game value. As a result, for example, the effect changing means increases the chances of executing a special effect in the dynamic display, allows the player to experience many effects as to whether or not a predetermined game value is given, and enhances the interest in the game. , has the effect of

In any of gaming machines B2 to B8,
The game machine B9 is characterized in that the dynamic element to be changed is a dynamic element (for example, a "pseudo-ream" variable element) in which the predetermined identification information is unlikely to be displayed.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effects of the game machines B2 to B8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic element to be changed is configured as a dynamic element that has no possibility of displaying predetermined identification information, that is, an effect that cannot give predetermined game value to the player. As a result, for example, by changing the dynamic element to be changed to a special effect by the effect changing means, the dynamic element that cannot impart the predetermined game value can be changed to the dynamic element that can impart the predetermined game value. It is possible to increase the interest in the game by allowing the player to experience many effects as to whether or not a predetermined game value is awarded.

In any one of gaming machines B1 to B9,
The dynamic display execution means
Temporary display means for displaying temporary identification information other than the predetermined identification information in the dynamic display (for example, temporary "failure display" in FIG. 33(e));
After the provisional identification information is displayed by the provisional display means, re-dynamic means for performing re-dynamic display for changing the provisional identification information to the predetermined identification information (for example, a variable element of "re-change") and
The change execution means is
When the change determining means determines that the first mode is to be changed to the second mode, and the re-dynamic display is executed by the re-dynamic means, the second display is performed at the first display timing. A gaming machine B10 characterized by changing the display of means to the second mode.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects of the game machines B1 to B9, the following effects are produced. That is, provisional identification information other than the predetermined identification information is displayed in the dynamic display by provisional display means provided in the dynamic display execution means. Then, after the provisional identification information is displayed by the provisional display means, the provisional identification information is displayed by the provisional identification information by the re-dynamic means provided in the dynamic display execution means, and the re-dynamic display for changing the provisional identification information to the predetermined identification information is performed. . When the change determination means determines that the first mode is to be changed to the second mode and the re-dynamic display is executed by the re-dynamic means, the change execution means performs the second display at the first display timing. The representation of the means is changed to the second mode. That is, in a state in which provisional identification information that is not predetermined identification information is temporarily displayed in dynamic display, the second mode of the second display means is displayed, and in that state, dynamic display is performed again, and provisional identification is performed. It is configured to change the information to predetermined identification information. Therefore, the display mode of the second display means is changed from the first mode to the second mode in conjunction with the re-display of the second display means, and the player feels uncomfortable based on the change. After that, the re-dynamic display is performed, and the provisional identification information is changed to the predetermined identification information. There is an effect that it is possible to diversify the effects and increase the interest of the game while providing the effects with unexpectedness to the game.

In any one of gaming machines B1 to B10,
The start time selection means is
timing selection means for selecting timing for changing the display of the second display means to the second mode at the timing when the acquisition means acquires the information triggered by the establishment of the starting condition;
The dynamic display execution means
an execution establishment determination means for determining the content of the dynamic display based on establishment of a predetermined execution condition;
The change execution means is
and timing correction means for correcting the execution timing of the second mode selected by the start time selection means based on the content of the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display execution means. game machine B11.

According to the game machine B11, in addition to the effects of the game machines B1 to B10, the following effects are produced. That is, the timing selection means provided in the start time selection means selects the timing for changing the display of the second display means to the second mode at the timing when the acquisition means acquires the information triggered by the establishment of the starting condition. . Then, the content of the dynamic display is determined by the execution establishment determination means provided in the dynamic display execution means based on establishment of a predetermined execution condition. Then, the execution timing of the second mode selected by the start time selection means is corrected by the timing correction means provided in the change execution means based on the contents of the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display execution means. . That is, the selection of the execution timing of the second mode by the second display means and the determination of the contents of the dynamic display are independently selected or determined, and then the second display means is selected based on the contents of the dynamic display. Correction of the execution timing of the second mode is performed. As a result, even if the determination of the second mode by the second display means and the determination of the content of the dynamic display are performed at different timings, the consistency of the content of the effect is ensured. Adjustments can be made so as not to cause inconsistency with respect to each other's presentation contents. Therefore, by performing each decision in separate processing, it is possible to facilitate the design at the time of development of the control program used for each decision, and at the same time, it is possible to execute a consistent production. be.

In gaming machine B10 or B11,
The storage means
For each information acquired by the acquisition means,
special effect storage means (for example, a pending deletion information storage area 223e7) for storing whether or not the special effect is executed in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information;
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information, re-dynamic storage means (for example, re-change information storage area 223e8), and a gaming machine B12.

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B10 or B11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information for each piece of information acquired by the acquisition means, the special effect storage means stores whether or not the special effect is executed in the storage means, and the corresponding information is stored. In the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on , whether or not the re-dynamic display is executed by the re-dynamic means is stored in the re-dynamic storage means. Accordingly, by confirming whether or not the special effect stored in each storage means is executed and whether or not the re-variation display is executed, it is possible to easily determine the execution mode of the dynamic display stored in the storage means. It becomes possible. Therefore, for example, the execution mode of the dynamic display can be grasped without determining the execution mode of the dynamic display in detail at the start of the dynamic display, and the processing load at the start of the dynamic display can be reduced. It has the effect of being able to

In any of gaming machines B4 to B12,
The storage means
For each information acquired by the acquisition means,
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information, a change target storage means (for example, a pseudo effect information storage area 223e9) for storing whether or not the change target dynamic element is executed is provided. A gaming machine B13 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine B13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B4 to B12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the storage means, whether or not the dynamic element to be changed is executed is stored by the change mode storage means in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information for each piece of information acquired by the acquisition means. . Accordingly, by confirming whether or not the change target dynamic element stored in each storage means is executed, it is possible to easily determine the execution mode of the change target dynamic element that can be changed from the special effect. Therefore, for example, the execution mode of dynamic display can be grasped without detailed determination of the execution mode of dynamic display at the start of dynamic display, and the processing load at the start of dynamic display can be reduced. It has the effect of being able to

<Group C: Drive the movable accessory to execute the “holding change notice”>

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a ball enters a starting winning hole and a starting winning is detected while a variable effect (variable display) of symbols or the like is performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. Then, with a predetermined number as the upper limit, there is a variable effect related to the start winning that is suspended. When the variable performance being executed is completed, the execution of the suspended non-executed variable performance is started.

In this variable presentation, as part of the entertainment of the game, a suggestive display that suggests the degree of expectation of the jackpot (for example, "pending change notice", mini appearance notice, etc.) is executed. When the suggestive display is executed, the timing for starting the suggestive display is determined by a lottery, and the suggestive display appears based on the result of the lottery to suggest the degree of expectation of the big win to the player. ing.

However, in conventional gaming machines, even if the time to start the suggestive display is determined in advance, there are cases where the suggestive display cannot be executed at the determined start time depending on the content of the variable element in the variable effect. In such a case, the execution of the suggestive display itself is stopped, and the presentation cannot be diversified. Therefore, there is a need to improve the interest in games from conventional gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and it is possible to increase the chances of executing the suggestive display at the initially selected start time, diversify the effects, and preferably improve the interest of the game. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can

Acquisition means (for example, the first ball entrance 64) that acquires information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
Determination means (for example, main controller 110) that determines based on the information acquired by the acquisition means;
Dynamic display execution means (for example, display a controller 114);
a movable accessory (for example, a left movable accessory 87) that is driven in conjunction with the effect content of the dynamic display during execution of the dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means;
a role product driving means (for example, role product driving process (S1151)) for driving the movable role product,
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means,
Storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number (for example, a held ball storage area 203b or a held ball execution area 203c);
Judgment for judging whether or not there is the dynamic display that displays the predetermined identification information among the dynamic displays of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means means (e.g., MPU 221 of audio ramp controller 113);
a second display means (for example, an execution symbol or a pending symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db) capable of displaying the judgment result by the judgment means;
Changing means (for example, pending display setting process (for example, S1209)) and
start time selection means (for example, scenario counter 223d) for selecting the start time of the second mode by the second display means when changing from the first mode to the second mode by the change means;
Execution determination means for determining whether the second mode can be displayed at the start time selected by the start time selection means (for example, processing for determining re-variation information (S1506), or determining pending deletion information processing (S1507));
When the execution determination means determines that the second mode cannot be displayed at the start time selected by the start time selection means, drive change means (for example, , the process of setting the super strong flag 223j (S1564));
drive-linked display means for displaying the second mode by the second display means in accordance with the drive of the movable accessory driven by the drive change means;
A gaming machine C0 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine C0, information is acquired by the acquisition means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means based on the determination result by the determination means. During execution of the dynamic display of the identification information, the movable accessory is driven in conjunction with the content of the dynamic display. Then, the movable role product is driven by the role product driving means. Further, when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, predetermined game value is awarded to the player. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means with a predetermined number as the upper limit. Here, the determination means determines whether or not there is a dynamic display that displays the predetermined identification information among the dynamic displays of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. and the judgment result by the judging means can be displayed by the second display means. Then, the change means changes the display mode of the second display means from the predetermined first mode to the second mode indicating the result of determination by the determination means. When the change means changes from the first mode to the second mode, the start time selection means selects the start time of the second mode by the second display means. Here, the execution determination means determines whether the second mode can be displayed at the start time selected by the start time selection means, and the execution determination means determines whether the second mode can be displayed at the start time selected by the start time selection means. can not be displayed, the movable accessory is driven by the accessory driving means by the drive changing means. Then, the drive-linked display means displays the second mode by the second display means in accordance with the drive of the movable accessory driven by the drive change means. As a result, when the second mode cannot be displayed at the selected start time, the movable accessory can be driven and the second mode can be displayed along with the driving. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the second mode of the second display means at the initially selected start time, diversify the effects, and increase the interest of the game.

In gaming machine C0,
Display switching means for switching and controlling the visible state and the invisible state of the second display means (for example, changing from the variable element of "normal reach" to the variable element of "super reach"),
The changing means is
Change determination means ( For example, pending display setting processing (S1209)),
When the change determining means determines to change from the first mode to the second mode, the second display means is changed to the second mode at the execution timing selected by the start time selecting means. A change execution means (for example, execution symbol change processing (S1414)),
The accessory driving means is
drivably controlling the movable accessory to a position where the second display means is in a visually difficult state;
The start time selection means is
As an execution timing for starting the second mode in the second display means, the second display means that has been placed in the difficult-to-visually-visible state by the display-switching means selects the first display timing at which the visible state changes from the difficult-to-visible state. (e.g., "hold change notice" after "strong pattern driving"),
The execution determination means is
First display timing execution determination means for determining whether or not the second mode can be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-viewing time selection means (for example, processing for determining re-variation information (S1506); Or, a process for determining pending deletion information (S1507)),
The driving interlocking display means
When the first display timing execution determining means determines that the second mode cannot be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-viewing time selecting means, the movable role is controlled by the accessory driving means. and a first display timing drive changing means (for example, a process of setting a super strong flag 223j (S1564)) for driving the object to a position where the second display means is in a difficult to see state. Gaming machine C1 to play.

According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display switching means controls switching between the visible state and the invisible state of the second display means. Then, the change determination means provided in the change means determines whether or not to change the display mode of the second display means from the predetermined first mode to the second mode indicating the result of determination by the determination means. Further, when the change determination means determines to change from the first mode to the second mode, the change execution means provided in the change means performs the second display at the execution timing selected by the start time selection means. The means are changed to the second mode. Here, the movable accessory is controlled by the accessory driving means so that the movable accessory can be driven to a position where the second display means is in a visually difficult state. Then, the re-viewing time selection means provided in the start time selection means sets the second display means to be in the visible state by the display switching means as the execution timing for starting the second mode in the second display means. is selected as the first display timing. Here, the first display timing execution determination means provided in the execution determination means determines whether or not the second mode can be displayed at the first display timing selected by the second display timing selection means. When the execution determination means determines that the second mode cannot be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-viewing time selection means, the first display timing drive change means provided in the drive-linked display means changes the role. The object driving means drives the movable accessory to a position that makes the second display means invisible. As a result, compared to the case where the always visible second display means is directly changed from the first mode to the second mode and notified, or the case where the second display means is newly added and made to appear, the second display means It is possible to casually change the second display means to the second mode while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change of the display means. Therefore, by temporarily making the second display means invisible and then casually changing it when the second display means becomes visible again, first, the player feels a sense of discomfort, and then the sense of discomfort is displayed on the second display. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player recognize that it is the appearance of the second mode in the means, to provide the player with an unexpected performance, and to increase the interest of the game by diversifying the performance. Also, when the second mode cannot be displayed at the selected first display timing, the movable accessory can be driven to display the second mode at the first display timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the chances of executing the second mode of the second display means at the initially selected first display timing can be increased, and the effect can be diversified to increase the interest of the game.

Further, when making the second display means difficult to see from the player, by changing the driving mode of the movable accessory different from the dynamic display effect, instead of changing the effect contents of the dynamic display, The second display means can be made invisible. Therefore, it is possible to change to the second mode while making the second display means difficult to see without transmitting additional commands and the like for the control of the dynamic display to replace the effect content. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a game player with an unexpected performance, diversify the performance, and increase the interest of the game without increasing the control load of the dynamic display.

In gaming machine C1,
The accessory driving means is
an initial position of the movable object;
In the dynamic display, a first position (for example, "strong pattern") that makes the second display means difficult to see by the movable accessory;
the movable accessory is drivable from the first position to the initial position that makes the second display means visible again;
The change execution means is
starting the second mode on the second display means in a state in which the movable accessory is at the first position;
The game machine C2 is characterized in that the second mode is continuously displayed on the second display means in a state in which the movable accessory returns to the initial position.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second display means is made difficult to see by driving the movable accessory from the initial position to the first position by the accessory driving means, and the movable accessory is in the first position by the change executing means. , the second mode is started to be displayed by the second display means, and the second mode is continuously displayed on the second display means in a state in which the movable accessory returns to the initial position.

Conventionally, when a movable accessory is driven during execution of dynamic display, it is configured to drive from an initial position to a drive position, and then drive to the initial position again, thereby completing one drive mode. there is In other words, when the movable accessory is driven, it always returns to the initial position so as not to interfere with other effects in the dynamic display. Therefore, when the movable accessory is driven, returning from the drive position to the initial position is a natural expression in the flow of the driving mode of the movable accessory, so the player does not feel uncomfortable.

Then, as in the gaming machine C2, by driving the movable accessory from the initial position to the first position, the second display means is made invisible, and the second display means displays the second display means while the movable accessory is at the first position. Two modes are displayed. After that, the movable accessory is driven from the first position to the initial position, and the second display means continuously displays the second mode, whereby the player can visually recognize the second mode. With this configuration, it is possible to change the display mode while making the second display means visible in the smooth flow of the driving mode of the movable accessory. Therefore, it is possible to casually change the second display means to the second mode while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change of the second display means. As a result, by temporarily hiding the second display means and then casually changing it, first, the player feels uncomfortable. Then, after that, it is possible to make the player recognize that the sense of incongruity is the appearance of the second mode by the second display means, provide the player with an unexpected performance, and diversify the performance to enhance the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to

In gaming machine C1 or C2,
The execution determination means is
In the dynamic display, position determination means for determining whether or not the movable accessory is at the first position (for example, processing for determining whether or not to drive in the "strong pattern" (S1561)). ,
The driving change means is
When the position determination means determines that the movable accessory does not reach the first position, the dynamic display drives the movable accessory to the first position (for example, a super strong flag). 223j (S1564)),
The change execution means is
In a state in which the driving position of the movable accessory is changed to the first position by the driving position changing means and the movable accessory is set to the first position by the accessory driving means, the second display means displays the A game machine C3 characterized by starting display of the second mode.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the position determination means provided in the execution determination means determines whether or not the movable accessory is at the first position in the dynamic display, and the drive position change means provided in the drive change means determines the position determination means If it is determined that the movable accessory does not go to the first position, the movable accessory is driven to the first position in the dynamic display. Then, the change execution means starts the display of the second mode on the second display means while the movable accessory is in the first position. As a result, it is possible to initially display the second mode at the selected first display timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the chances of executing the second mode of the second display means at the initially selected first display timing can be increased, and the effect can be diversified to increase the interest of the game.

In gaming machine C3,
The driving position changing means is
In the dynamic display, dynamic element determination means for determining whether or not there is a dynamic element capable of driving the movable accessory (e.g., "variable element of super reach") (e.g., variable element of "super reach" or higher) A process for confirming the presence (S1563)),
When the dynamic element determination means determines that there is the dynamic element capable of driving the movable accessory, the movable accessory is driven to the first position during execution of the dynamic element. A gaming machine C4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the presence or absence of a dynamic element capable of driving the movable accessory in the dynamic display is determined by the dynamic element determining means provided in the driving position changing means. Then, when the dynamic element determining means determines that there is a dynamic element capable of driving the movable accessory, the movable accessory is driven to the first position during execution of the dynamic element. As a result, when there is a dynamic element that can drive the movable accessory, the second display means can be changed to a driving mode that makes the second display means invisible to the player. Therefore, by making the second display means difficult to see while maintaining consistency between the effect content of the dynamic display and the driving mode of the movable accessory, the second display means can display the second display means at the selected first display timing. It is possible to display two modes. Therefore, without performing processing such as reselecting the dynamic display of the dynamic display, the chances of executing the second mode of the second display means at the first display timing initially selected are increased, and the effects are diversified. There is an effect that it is possible to enhance the amusement of the game by changing it.

In gaming machine C4,
The accessory driving means is
having a predetermined time to drive the movable accessory from the initial position to the first position and then to the initial position again;
The dynamic element discriminating means
A game machine C5 characterized in that, in the dynamic display, it is determined whether or not there is the dynamic element for the predetermined time or longer.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the movable accessory is driven from the initial position to the first position by the accessory driving means, and is driven to the initial position again over a predetermined period of time. Then, the presence/absence of a dynamic element of a predetermined time or longer in the dynamic display is determined by the dynamic element determination means. As a result, in the dynamic element of the dynamic display, the movable accessory can be driven by the dynamic element that can complete the driving of the movable accessory that requires a predetermined time. can be completed, and a composite presentation of the dynamic element of the dynamic display and the driving of the movable accessory can be performed with consistent contents. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand and to improve the interest of the game.

In game machine C4 or C5,
The change execution means is
When the first display timing is selected by the redisplay time selection means, the dynamic element determination means determines that there is no dynamic element capable of driving the movable accessory in the dynamic display. The game machine C6 is characterized in that the second mode is not displayed on the second display means when the game is played.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effects of the game machine C4 or C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first display timing is selected as the start timing of the second aspect by the re-viewing execution means, the dynamic element determination means determines that there is no dynamic element capable of driving the movable accessory. is configured not to display the second mode on the second display means. Thereby, when there is no dynamic element capable of driving the movable accessory in the dynamic display, that is, when there is no appropriate effect as the execution timing of the second mode, the second mode is configured not to be displayed. , there is an effect that a consistent performance can be provided to the player without inconsistency in the content of the performance.

In game machine C4 or C5,
The start time selection means is
Second timing selection means for selecting a second display timing (for example, "after reach") different from the first display timing as the execution timing for starting the display of the second mode (for example, "hold change" of "after reach" Notice”) and
When the first display timing is selected as the start time of the second mode and the dynamic element determining means determines that there is no dynamic element capable of driving the movable accessory, the second A gaming machine C7 characterized by comprising timing changing means for changing the start timing of the two modes from the first display timing to the second display timing.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4 or C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second display timing different from the first display timing is selected as the execution timing for starting the display of the second mode by the second timing selection means provided in the start time selection means. Further, when the first display timing is selected as the start timing of the second mode, and the dynamic element determining means determines that there is no dynamic element capable of driving the movable accessory, the timing is changed. The means changes the start timing of the second mode from the first display timing to the second display. As a result, when the conditions for displaying the second mode on the second display means at the first display timing initially selected are not met, the start timing of the second mode is changed to the second display timing and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of cases in which the second mode is not displayed, increase the execution rate of the second mode by the second display means, and improve the amusement of the game.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C7,
The start time selection means is
timing selection means for selecting a timing for changing the display of the second display means to the second mode at the timing when the acquisition means acquires the information triggered by the establishment of the starting condition;
The dynamic display execution means
an execution establishment determination means for determining the content of the dynamic display based on establishment of a predetermined execution condition;
The change execution means is
and timing correction means for correcting the execution timing of the second mode selected by the start time selection means based on the content of the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display execution means. Game machine C8 to play.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects of the game machines C1 to C7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the timing selection means provided in the start time selection means selects the timing for changing the display of the second display means to the second mode at the timing when the acquisition means acquires the information triggered by the establishment of the starting condition. . Then, the content of the dynamic display is determined by the execution establishment determination means provided in the dynamic display execution means based on establishment of a predetermined execution condition. Then, the execution timing of the second mode selected by the start time selection means is corrected by the timing correction means provided in the change execution means based on the contents of the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display execution means. . That is, the selection of the execution timing of the second mode by the second display means and the determination of the contents of the dynamic display are independently selected or determined, and then the second display means is selected based on the contents of the dynamic display. Correction of the execution timing of the second aspect is performed. As a result, even if the determination of the second mode by the second display means and the determination of the content of the dynamic display are performed at different timings, the consistency of the content of the effect is ensured. Adjustments can be made so as not to cause inconsistency with respect to each other's presentation contents. Therefore, by performing each decision in separate processing, it is possible to facilitate the design at the time of development of the control program used for each decision, and at the same time, it is possible to execute a consistent production. be.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C8,
The storage means
For each information acquired by the acquisition means,
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information, driving information storage means (for example, driving pattern information storage area 223e10) for storing the driving information of the movable character by the character product driving means A gaming machine C9 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effects of the game machines C1 to C8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information for each piece of information acquired by the acquisition means, the drive information storage means stores the drive information of the movable accessory by the accessory drive means. remembered. Accordingly, by confirming the driving information stored in each storage means, it is possible to easily determine the driving mode of the movable accessory. Therefore, for example, the driving mode of the movable role can be grasped without detailed determination of the driving mode of the movable role at the start of the dynamic display, and the processing load at the start of the dynamic display can be reduced. It has the effect of being able to

<D Group: Addition of Effect for Execution of “Holding Change Notice”>

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a ball enters a starting winning hole and a starting winning is detected while a variable effect (variable display) of symbols or the like is performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. Then, with a predetermined number as the upper limit, there is a variable effect related to the start winning that is suspended. When the variable performance being executed is completed, the execution of the suspended non-executed variable performance is started.

In this variable presentation, as part of the entertainment of the game, a suggestive display that suggests the degree of expectation of a big win (for example, "holding change notice", mini appearance notice, etc.) is executed. When the suggestive display is executed, the timing for starting the suggestive display is determined by a lottery, and the suggestive display appears based on the result of the lottery to suggest the degree of expectation of the big win to the player. ing.

However, in conventional gaming machines, even if the time to start the suggestive display is determined in advance, there are cases where the suggestive display cannot be executed at the determined start time depending on the content of the variable element in the variable effect. In such a case, the execution of the suggestive display itself is stopped, and the presentation cannot be diversified. Therefore, there is a need to improve the interest in games from conventional gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and it is possible to increase the chances of executing the suggestive display at the initially selected start time, diversify the effects, and preferably improve the interest of the game. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can

Acquisition means (for example, the first ball entrance 64) that acquires information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
Determination means (for example, main controller 110) that determines based on the information acquired by the acquisition means;
Dynamic display execution means (for example, display a controller 114);
During execution of the dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means, image display means (for example, third and a pattern display device 81),
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means,
Storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number (for example, a held ball storage area 203b or a held ball execution area 203c);
Judgment for judging whether or not there is the dynamic display that displays the predetermined identification information among the dynamic displays of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means means (e.g., MPU 221 of audio ramp controller 113);
a second display means (for example, an execution symbol or a pending symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db) capable of displaying the judgment result by the judgment means;
Changing means (for example, pending display setting process (for example, S1209)) and
start time selection means (for example, scenario counter 223d) for selecting the start time of the second mode by the second display means when changing to the second mode by the change means;
image lottery means (for example, using the drive lottery counter 223g of the third embodiment (described in paragraph 0948)) for lottery for determining whether or not to display the specific image in the dynamic display;
When the specific image is displayed based on the lottery by the image lottery means, an image displaying means (for example, a large character cut-in command for display) for displaying the specific image so as to overlap with the second display means )and,
Execution determination means for determining whether the second mode can be displayed at the start time selected by the start time selection means (for example, processing for determining re-variation information (S1506), or determining pending deletion information processing (S1507));
When the execution determining means determines that the second mode cannot be displayed at the start time selected by the start time selecting means, image changing means (for example, , a pattern in which a large character cut-in image Dc2 is added and displayed);
Appearance-linked display means for displaying the second mode on the second display means in accordance with appearance of the specific image by the image change means;
A gaming machine D0 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine D0, information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and determination is made by the determination means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means based on the determination result by the determination means. During execution of the dynamic display of the identification information, the specific image is displayed by the image display means in conjunction with the content of the dynamic display. Further, when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, predetermined game value is awarded to the player. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number at least until it is used for determination by the determination means. Here, the determination means determines whether or not there is a dynamic display that displays the predetermined identification information among the dynamic displays of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. and the judgment result by the judging means can be displayed by the second display means. Then, the change means changes the display mode of the second display means from the predetermined first mode to the second mode indicating the result of determination by the determination means. When the change means changes from the first mode to the second mode, the start time selection means selects the start time of the second mode by the second display means. Further, the image lottery means draws lots as to whether or not the specific image is to be displayed in the dynamic display, and when the specific image is to be displayed based on the lottery of the image lottery means, the second display is performed by the image display means. A specific image appears so as to overlap (cover, conceal, superimpose, hide, conceal) the means. The execution determination means determines whether or not the second mode can be displayed at the start time selected by the start time selection means, and the execution determination means displays the second mode at the start time selected by the start time selection means. When it is determined that the specific image cannot be displayed, the specific image is displayed by the image display means by the image change means. Then, the appearance-linked display means displays the second mode on the second display means in accordance with the appearance of the specific image by the image change means. As a result, when the second mode cannot appear at the selected start time, the specific image can be made to appear, and the second mode can be displayed along with the appearance. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the second mode of the second display means at the initially set start time, diversify the effects, and increase the interest of the game.

In gaming machine D0,
Visual switching means for switching and controlling the visible state and the invisible state of the second display means (for example, changing from the variable element of "normal reach" to the variable element of "super reach"),
The changing means is
Change determination means ( For example, pending display setting processing (S1209)),
Change executing means (for example, , Execution symbol change processing (S1414)) and
The start time selection means is
As the timing for starting the second mode on the second display means, the second display means that has been placed in the difficult-to-visible state by the visual recognition switching means selects the first display timing for changing from the difficult-to-visible state to the visible state. Selection means for revising (e.g., post-delete change command for display to execute "hold change notice" of "after pending erase"),
The execution determination means is
First display timing execution determination means for determining whether or not the second mode can be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-viewing time selection means (for example, processing for determining re-variation information (S1506); Or, a process for determining pending deletion information (S1507)),
The appearance-linked display means includes:
When the first display timing execution determination means determines that the second mode cannot be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-viewing time selection means, the specific image is displayed by the image display means. (for example, a pattern for adding and displaying a large character cut-in image Dc2).

According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the visibility switching means switches and controls the visible state and the invisible state of the second display means. Then, the change determination means provided in the change means determines whether or not to change the display mode of the second display means from the predetermined first mode to the second mode indicating the result of determination by the determination means. Further, when the change determination means determines that the first mode is to be changed to the second mode, the change execution means provided in the change means causes the second display means to perform at the execution timing selected by the start time selection means. is changed to the second mode. Further, the revising time selection means provided in the start time selection means sets the second display means to be in the visible state by the visibility switching means as the execution timing for starting the second mode in the second display means. is selected as the first display timing. Here, the first display timing execution determination means provided in the execution determination means determines whether or not the second mode can be displayed at the first display timing selected by the second display timing selection means. When the execution determination means determines that the second mode cannot be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-viewing time selection means, the first display timing image change means provided in the appearance-linked display means A specific image is rendered by the image rendering means. As a result, compared to the case where the always visible second display means is directly changed from the first mode to the second mode and notified, or the case where the second display means is newly added and made to appear, the second display means It is possible to casually change the second display means to the second mode while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change of the display means. Therefore, by making the second display means once invisible and then casually changing it when the second display means becomes visible again, first, the player feels uncomfortable, and then the uncomfortable feeling is transferred to the second display means. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player recognize that it is the appearance of the second mode on the display means, to provide an unexpected performance to the player, and to diversify the performance to enhance the interest of the game.

Also, when making the second display means invisible to the player, the dynamic element of the dynamic display is not changed, but a specific image that can be displayed additionally to the dynamic element of the dynamic display is displayed. By changing the presence/absence, it is possible to make the second display means difficult to see. Therefore, without adjusting and changing the dynamic elements of the dynamic display or controlling other movable accessories, the second display means can be made difficult to see by slightly changing the performance of the dynamic display. A second aspect can be performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance, diversify the performance, and increase the interest in the game without greatly increasing the control load related to the dynamic display.

In gaming machine D1,
The execution determination means is
In the dynamic display, image determination means for determining whether or not the specific image appears (for example, processing for determining whether or not the large character cut-in image Dc2 appears);
The image changing means is
When the image determining means determines that the specific image does not appear, an image adding means for displaying the specific image in the dynamic display (for example, processing for additionally displaying a large character cut-in image Dc2) ), with
The change execution means is
The game machine D2 is characterized in that the specific image is caused to appear by the image addition means, and the second display means redisplayed when the specific image is erased is displayed in the second mode.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the image determining means provided in the execution determining means determines whether or not the specific image appears in the dynamic display, and the image adding means provided in the image changing means determines whether the specific image is displayed by the image determining means. The specific image appears in the dynamic display when it is determined not to appear. Then, the change executing means causes the specific image to appear by the image adding means, and the second display means, which was redisplayed when the specific image was erased, is displayed in the second mode. As a result, the second mode of the second display means can be executed at the initially selected first display timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the chances of executing the second mode of the second display means at the initially selected first display timing can be increased, and the effect can be diversified to increase the interest of the game.

In gaming machine D1 or D2,
The dynamic display is configured by combining a plurality of dynamic elements,
The image display means is
A game machine D3 characterized in that the specific image is displayed in a time shorter than the execution time of any of the dynamic elements.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display is composed of a combination of multiple dynamic elements. Then, the specific image is displayed by the image display means in a time shorter than the execution time of any dynamic element. As a result, the performance of the specific image can be completed in any dynamic element of the dynamic display, and the composite performance of the dynamic element of the dynamic display and the specific image can be executed with consistent contents. . Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, by setting the display time of the specific image to be shorter than the execution time of each dynamic element, for example, compared to the case of covering the second display means by driving a movable accessory that requires a predetermined driving time, the specific image It becomes unnecessary to determine whether or not the dynamic element can be displayed. Therefore, when executing the second mode after making the second display means invisible with the specific image, it is only necessary to perform control for determining the display timing of the specific image. There is an effect that it is possible to provide an unexpected production, diversify the production, and enhance the interest of the game.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D3,
The start time selection means is
timing selection means for selecting a timing for changing the display of the second display means to the second mode at the timing when the acquisition means acquires the information triggered by the establishment of the starting condition;
The dynamic display execution means
an execution establishment determination means for determining the content of the dynamic display based on establishment of a predetermined execution condition;
The change execution means is
and timing correction means for correcting the execution timing of the second mode selected by the start time selection means based on the content of the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display execution means. game machine D4.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the timing selection means provided in the start time selection means selects the timing for changing the display of the second display means to the second mode at the timing when the acquisition means acquires the information triggered by the establishment of the starting condition. . Then, the content of the dynamic display is determined by the execution establishment determination means provided in the dynamic display execution means based on establishment of a predetermined execution condition. Then, the execution timing of the second mode selected by the start time selection means is corrected by the timing correction means provided in the change execution means based on the contents of the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display execution means. . That is, the selection of the execution timing of the second mode by the second display means and the determination of the contents of the dynamic display are independently selected or determined, and then the second display means is selected based on the contents of the dynamic display. Correction of the execution timing of the second mode is performed. As a result, even if the determination of the second mode by the second display means and the determination of the content of the dynamic display are performed at different timings, the consistency of the content of the effect is ensured. Adjustments can be made so as not to cause inconsistency with respect to each other's presentation contents. Therefore, by performing each decision in separate processing, it is possible to facilitate the design at the time of development of the control program used for each decision, and at the same time, it is possible to execute a consistent production. be.

In any of gaming machines D1 to D4,
The storage means
For each information acquired by the acquisition means,
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information, a success/failure information storage means (for example, a first hit random number counter) for storing information on whether or not the predetermined identification information appears a storage area 223e1);
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information, type information storage means for storing type information for determining the type of the predetermined identification information (for example, the first hit type counter storage area 223e2 )and,
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information, dynamic information storage means (for example, stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3 or Fluctuation type counter storage area 223e4),
a second mode storage means (for example, pending change information storage area 223e5) for storing information about the display mode of the second mode in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information;
timing storage means (for example, scenario data storage area 223e6) for storing the execution timing in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information;
The game machine D5 is characterized in that the memory means stores only the win/fail information memory means, the type information memory means, the dynamic information memory means, the second mode memory means and the timing memory means.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects of the game machines D1 to D4, the following effects are produced. That is, only the following information is stored in the storage means for each piece of information acquired by the acquisition means. First, the success/failure information storage means stores the success/failure information as to whether or not the predetermined identification information appears. Further, the type information storing means stores type information for determining the type of predetermined identification information. Further, dynamic display execution information is stored by the dynamic information storage means. Further, the second mode to be displayed on the second display means is stored by the second mode storage means. Furthermore, the execution timing of the second mode is determined by the timing storage means. Only the win/fail information storage means, type information storage means, dynamic information storage means, second mode storage means, and timing storage means are stored in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the storage capacity of the entire storage means can be reduced without storing extra information in the storage means.

<Group E: One-step increase in value of “pending change notice” depending on execution timing>

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a ball enters a starting winning hole and a starting winning is detected while a variable effect (variable display) of symbols or the like is performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. Then, with a predetermined number as the upper limit, there is a variable effect related to the start winning that is suspended. When the variable performance being executed is completed, the execution of the suspended non-executed variable performance is started.

In this variable presentation, as part of the entertainment of the game, a suggestive display that suggests the degree of expectation of a big win (for example, "holding change notice", mini appearance notice, etc.) is executed. This suggestive display is configured to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win for each display mode by preparing a plurality of stages of display modes and selecting a display mode that is unlikely to be selected when a player wins a big win. there is

However, in the conventional game machine, the suggestive display of the display mode that is likely to be selected at the time of losing is configured to be difficult to be selected when winning the big prize, and the suggestive display of the display mode that is likely to be selected at the time of losing is displayed. As a result, the player's sense of expectation for the big win has faded based on the suggestive display, and the player has lost interest in the game. Therefore, there is a need to improve the interest in games from conventional gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game by executing an effect that maintains the expectation of a big win. and

Acquisition means (for example, the first ball entrance 64) that acquires information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
Determination means (for example, main controller 110) that determines based on the information acquired by the acquisition means;
Dynamic display execution means (for example, display a controller 114);
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means,
Storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number (for example, a held ball storage area 203b or a held ball execution area 203c);
Judgment for judging whether or not there is the dynamic display that displays the predetermined identification information among the dynamic displays of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means means (e.g., MPU 221 of audio ramp controller 113);
a second display means (for example, an execution symbol or a pending symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db) capable of displaying the judgment result by the judgment means;
Changing means (for example, pending display setting process (for example, S1209)) and
start time selection means (for example, a scenario counter 223d) for selecting the start time of the second mode by the second display means when changing from the first mode to the second mode by the change means; prepared,
The display mode of the second display means is such that the degree of expectation for the appearance of the predetermined identification information is set in stages (for example, "white", "blue", "red" or "rainbow") based on the type. indicate,
The start time selection means is
When the predetermined identification information is displayed and the second display means is changed to the second mode at the start time selected by the start time selection means, the degree of expectation of the predetermined identification information is one level. Single-step change means for displaying in different single-step change modes (for example, change from "white" to "blue" of "pending change notice" after "pending erasure"),
A gaming machine E0 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine E0, information is acquired by the acquisition means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means based on the determination result by the determination means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is awarded to the player. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means with a predetermined number as the upper limit. Here, the determination means determines whether or not there is a dynamic display that displays the predetermined identification information among the dynamic displays of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. and the judgment result by the judging means can be displayed by the second display means. Then, the change means changes the display mode of the second display means from the predetermined first mode to the second mode indicating the result of determination by the determination means. When the display mode of the second display means is changed by the changing means, the timing for changing the display mode of the second display means is selected by the start timing selection means. Here, in the display mode of the second display means, the degree of expectation for the appearance of the predetermined identification information is indicated step by step based on the type. Then, when the second display means is changed to the second mode at the start time selected by the start time selection means in the case of displaying the predetermined identification information, the single step change means provided in the start time selection means The degree of expectation of the predetermined identification information is displayed in a single-step change mode that differs by one step. As a result, when the predetermined identification information appears, the degree of change of the second display means is displayed in a single-step change mode that differs by one step, so that the degree of change of the second display means is slight, so that the game can be played. It is possible to make it difficult for a person to recognize the degree of change. Then, when the predetermined identification information appears, by casually changing the second display means, first, the player is given a sense of discomfort, and then the sense of discomfort is expressed in the single-step change mode on the second display means. It is expected that the predetermined identification information will appear even in the single-step change mode in subsequent games by making the player recognize that the game is about to start and the predetermined identification information will appear even in the single-step change mode. You can play a game while playing. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to execute an effect that can maintain the expectation for the big win, diversify the effect, and increase the interest in the game.

In gaming machine E0,
Display switching means for switching and controlling the display state and non-display state of the second display means (for example, changing from the variable element of "normal reach" to the variable element of "super reach"),
The changing means is
Change determination means ( For example, pending display setting processing (S1209)),
When the change determining means determines to change from the first mode to the second mode, the second display means is changed to the second mode at the execution timing selected by the start time selecting means. With change execution means (for example, execution symbol change processing),
The start time selection means is
Re-display timing selection means ( For example, S1506) of the execution pattern change process,
The single step change means is
When the second display means is changed to the second mode by the re-display time selection means, the display mode displayed before the second display means is put into the non-display state is changed to the single step change mode. re-display time single step change means for re-displaying the second display means (for example, change from "white" to "blue" of "holding change notice" after "holding erasure") Characteristic game machine E1.

According to the gaming machine E1, the display switching means controls switching between the display state and the non-display state of the second display means. Then, the change determination means provided in the change means determines whether or not to change the display mode of the second display means from the predetermined first mode to the second mode indicating the result of determination by the determination means. Further, when the change determination means determines to change the display mode of the second display means, the second display means is changed to the second mode at the execution timing selected by the start time selection means. Then, the re-display time selection means provided in the start time selection means re-displays the second display means that has been placed in the non-display state by the display switching means as the execution timing for displaying the second mode on the second display means. A first display timing is selected. Further, when the second display means is changed to the second mode by the redisplay time selection means, the second display means is brought into the non-display state by the redisplay single step change means provided in the single step change means. The second display means is redisplayed in a single-step change mode from the previously displayed display mode. As a result, compared to the case where the always visible second display means is directly changed from the first mode to the second mode and notified, or the case where the second display means is newly added and made to appear, the second display means It is possible to casually change the second display means while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change of the display means. In addition, since the degree of change of the second display means is displayed in a single-stage change mode that is one step different from the display mode before erasing, the degree of change of the second display means is slight, so that the player can be notified of the degree of change. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize. Therefore, by temporarily hiding the second display means and then casually changing it, first, the player is given a sense of discomfort, and then the player is told that the sense of discomfort is the emergence of the single-step change mode on the second display means. There is an effect that, while making the player aware of it and providing an unexpected performance to the player, the performance can be diversified and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In gaming machine E1,
The dynamic display execution means
Temporary display means for displaying temporary identification information other than the predetermined identification information in the dynamic display (for example, temporary "failure display" in FIG. 33(e));
After the provisional identification information is displayed by the provisional display means, re-dynamic means for performing re-dynamic display for changing the provisional identification information to the predetermined identification information (for example, a variable element of "re-change") and
The change execution means is
The game machine E2 is characterized in that, when the re-dynamic display is executed by the re-dynamic means, the display of the second display means is changed to the single step change mode at the first display timing.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, provisional identification information other than the predetermined identification information is displayed in the dynamic display by provisional display means provided in the dynamic display execution means. Then, after the provisional identification information is displayed by the provisional display means, the provisional identification information is displayed by the provisional identification information by the re-dynamic means provided in the dynamic display execution means, and the re-dynamic display for changing the provisional identification information to the predetermined identification information is performed. . Then, when the re-dynamic display is executed by the re-dynamic means, the change execution means changes the display of the second display means to the single step change mode at the first display timing. That is, in a state in which provisional identification information that is not predetermined identification information is temporarily displayed in dynamic display, the second display means displays a single-step change mode, and in this state re-executes dynamic display to provide provisional identification information. The identification information is configured to be changed to predetermined identification information.

Conventionally, when the display mode of the second display means is changed based on the determination result of the determination means, the degree of expectation for the appearance of the predetermined identification information is shown step by step based on the type. . Therefore, for example, when changing the display mode of the second display means, a multi-stage mode with multiple levels of expectations different from the display before the change is preferred over a single-stage mode with a one-level expectation from the display before the change. is set so that the degree of expectation for the appearance of predetermined identification information is high. That is, in the display mode of the second display means, the appearance of the predetermined identification information is expected by the appearance of the multi-step change mode, and the appearance of the predetermined identification information is expected by the appearance of the single-step change mode. It is set so that identification information other than the predetermined identification information (that is, failure) often occurs. Therefore, even when the display mode of the second display means changes, for example, when a single-step change mode appears, the single-step change mode is expected to appear more predetermined identification information than a multi-step change mode. Therefore, the player determines that the predetermined identification information cannot be expected to appear in the dynamic display in which the single-step change mode appears, and the player determines that the dynamic display corresponding to the single-step change mode cannot be expected to appear. I didn't find interest in it, and rather, I lost interest in it.

Therefore, in the dynamic display that displays the predetermined identification information, the second display means is put in a non-display state, and at the timing of redisplaying the second display means, the second display means shows a single-step change mode. Thus, even in the case of a single-step change mode in which the appearance of the predetermined identification information could not be expected conventionally, the appearance of the predetermined identification information can be expected depending on the timing at which the single-step change mode appears. can be expected. As a result, it is possible to increase the significance of existence of the single-stage change mode, which has not been able to find interest in the past, and to expect the appearance of predetermined identification information in any production pattern, and to increase the interest of the game by various productions. It has the effect of being able to

In gaming machine E2,
The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the single-stage change mode is a mode in which the degree of expectation of the predetermined identification information is increased by one level.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the single-step change mode is displayed in a mode in which the degree of expectation of the predetermined identification information is increased by one level. Thus, at the timing of erasing the second display means and re-displaying the second display means, the second display means displays a single-step change mode in which the degree of expectation of the predetermined identification information is increased by one step. Therefore, even in a single-step change mode in which the degree of expectation of the predetermined identification information, which cannot be expected to appear in the conventional identification information, is increased by one level, the timing at which the single-step change mode appears Depending on the situation, it is possible to expect the appearance of predetermined identification information. As a result, it is possible to increase the significance of the existence of the single-step change mode in which the degree of expectation of the predetermined identification information, which was not previously found interesting, is increased by one step, and the appearance of the predetermined identification information can be expected in any production pattern. , there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be enhanced by various presentations.

In gaming machine E2 or E3,
The single-step change means executes the single-step change mode in the initial mode with the lowest degree of expectation before the second display means is put into a non-display state,
The game machine E4 is characterized in that the single step change mode is a first rise mode that is one step higher than the initial mode.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2 or E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, before the second display means is put into the non-display state by the single-step changing means, the single-step changing mode is executed in the initial mode with the lowest degree of expectation, and the single-step changing mode is changed from the initial mode to the A first rising mode, which is one step higher, is displayed.

Conventionally, when the display mode of the second display means is changed based on the determination result of the determination means, the first rising mode, which is one step higher than the initial mode with the lowest expectation of the predetermined identification information, is the predetermined identification information. It is configured such that it is likely to be selected when other identification information appears, and is less likely to be selected when predetermined identification information appears. Therefore, the player should judge that the predetermined identification information cannot be expected to appear in the dynamic display in which the first rising mode appears, and should find interest in the dynamic display corresponding to the first rising mode. Rather, he had lost interest.

Therefore, in the dynamic display that displays the predetermined identification information, the second display means is put in a non-display state, and at the timing of redisplaying the second display means, the second display means shows a single-step change mode. , and the single-step changing mode is also a first rising mode, which is one level higher than the initial mode in which the degree of expectation for the appearance of the predetermined identification information is lowest. Even in the case of the first ascending mode that could not be performed, it is possible to expect the appearance of the predetermined identification information depending on the timing at which the first ascending mode appears. As a result, the raison d'être of the first rising mode, which has not been found in the past, can be enhanced, the appearance of predetermined identification information can be expected in any production pattern, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced by various productions. It has the effect of being able to

In any of gaming machines E1 to E4,
The second display means can display a pattern corresponding to each information acquired by the acquisition means stored in the storage means,
The single-step change means is on standby to cause the single-step change mode to appear in a pattern corresponding to the information for which the dynamic display execution is awaited before execution by the dynamic display execution means. A game machine E5 characterized by comprising execution means.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, for each piece of information acquired by the acquisition means stored in the storage means, the second display means can display the pattern corresponding to the information. Then, by the standby execution means provided in the single-step change means, the single-step change mode is changed in the pattern corresponding to the information for which the execution of the dynamic display is waiting before the execution by the dynamic display execution means. appear.

Conventionally, in the dynamic display being executed, a lottery effect is performed as to whether or not predetermined identification information appears. The game is played while paying attention to how the 3 symbols and execution symbols) change. Therefore, when a display object related to the dynamic display is changed during execution of the dynamic display, the player may perceive the change no matter how the object is changed. Therefore, even if the player wants to casually change the display mode of the second display means based on the determination result for the dynamic display being executed, the change may be noticed by the player.

Therefore, instead of changing the display mode of the second display means that can suggest the display result of the dynamic display being executed, the second display showing the dynamic display that is waiting before the dynamic display is executed A single-step change mode appears in the means. The player pays less attention to the change of the second display means showing the dynamic display during standby as much as the symbol that can suggest the display result of the dynamic display being executed, and it is difficult for the player to notice the change. Therefore, when the display mode of the pattern corresponding to the second display means showing the waiting dynamic display is changed, the player is late in noticing the change. It is possible to give a sense of incompatibility to the player. As a result, it is possible to diversify the presentation while providing the player with an unexpected presentation, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In gaming machine E5,
The dynamic display execution means
In the dynamic display, continuous display means for continuously displaying the second display means (for example, variable element of "normal reach");
a special effect executing means (for example, a variable element of "super reach") for executing a special effect including an effect of making the second display means displayed by the continuous display means non-display state by the display switching means; ,
After the end of the special effect by the special effect executing means, the second display means is redisplayed by the switching control of the display switching means (for example, the cockpit display area after the end of the variable element of "super reach") Db) and
The single step change means is
A game machine E6 characterized in that, when said second display means is re-displayed by said post-end re-display means, the display of said second display means is changed to said single step change mode.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second display means is continuously displayed in the dynamic display by the continuous display means provided in the dynamic display execution means. Then, the special effect execution means executes the special effect including the effect that the second display means displayed by the continuous display means is put into a non-display state by the display switching means, and the dynamic display execution means is also provided. The post-end re-display means re-displays the second display means under the switching control of the display switching means after the special effect execution means ends the special effect. Then, when the second display means is re-displayed by the re-display means after completion, the single-step change means changes the display of the second display means to the single-step change mode.

Conventionally, at the start of the dynamic display, the pattern indicating the number of information stored in the storage means is displayed by the second display means, and the second display means is continuously displayed by the continuous display means. Then, when the special performance is executed, the second display means is set to a non-display state, and after the special performance ends, the second display means is displayed again, and the state displayed by the continuous display means at the start of the dynamic display is restored. 2 display means are ready for execution of the next dynamic display. That is, by re-displaying the second display means displayed at the start of the dynamic display at the end of the special effect, the end of the dynamic display can be suggested to the player and the number of the next dynamic displays can be increased. The next dynamic display can be executed smoothly while being recognized by the player. Therefore, when the special effect ends, the second display means is made visible again, which is a natural expression in the flow of the execution process of the dynamic display, and the player does not feel a sense of incongruity.

Then, the second display means continuously displayed by the continuous display means as in the gaming machine E6 is brought into a non-display state by the display switching means based on the execution of the special effect in the dynamic display, and the special effect is terminated. At the timing when the second display means is redisplayed by the display switching means, the display of the second display means is changed to the single step change mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the display mode while making the second display means in the non-display state visible again in the flow of the execution process of the dynamic display. Also, since the content of the change is also a one-step change, the change is so slight that it is difficult for the player to recognize it. Further, by causing the single-step change mode to appear in the second display means showing the dynamic display during standby, which the player is not paying attention to, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the change. Therefore, while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change of the second display means, it is possible to casually change the second display means to the single step change mode. As a result, by temporarily hiding the second display means and then casually changing it, first, the player feels uncomfortable, and then the uncomfortable feeling is the appearance of the single-step change mode on the second display means. It is possible to provide the player with an unexpected presentation, diversify the presentation, and increase the interest in the game.

In gaming machine E6,
The storage means
For each information acquired by the acquisition means,
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information, when the single-step change mode is displayed on the second display means by the standby execution means, the single-step change mode is displayed. Displayed information storage means for storing displayed information indicating that it has been displayed,
When the displayed information is stored in the displayed information storage means, the single-step changing means, when the special effect execution means executes the special effect, performs the above-mentioned The game machine E7 is characterized by comprising display maintaining means for maintaining the display mode displayed by the second display means.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the corresponding information for each piece of information acquired by the acquisition means in the storage means, the second display means is displayed by the displayed information storage means and by the standby execution means When the single-step change mode is displayed in , displayed information indicating that the single-step change mode has been displayed is stored. In addition, when the displayed information is stored in the displayed information storage means by the display maintaining means provided in the single-step change means, when the special effect has already been executed by the special effect executing means, the special effect The display mode displayed by the second display means before the execution of is maintained. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second display means from performing the single-step change mode redundantly, and it is possible to maintain the consistency of the presentation.

<F Group: Reach pattern changed to "weak pattern">

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a ball enters a starting winning hole and a starting winning is detected while a variable effect (variable display) of symbols or the like is performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. Then, with a predetermined number as the upper limit, there is a variable effect related to the start winning that is suspended. When the variable performance being executed is completed, the execution of the suspended non-executed variable performance is started.

In this variable performance, when suggesting the appearance of a big win, any of the suggestive performances (first suggestive performance or second suggestive performance) with different expectations for the appearance of the big win can be executed. Therefore, for example, at the time of the big win, the second suggestive performance different from the first suggestive performance is configured to be easier to select than the first suggestive performance, and the second suggestive performance is set so that the expectation of the appearance of the big win is higher. there is That is, it is set so that the player expects the appearance of a big win by executing the second suggestive effect, and is less likely to expect the appearance of a big win by executing the first suggestive effect.

In such a gaming machine, when the first suggesting effect is executed in the variable effect, the first suggesting effect is less likely to be selected at the time of the big win and more likely to be selected at the time of losing than the second suggesting effect. As for the variable performance in which the suggested performance appears, it is judged that the appearance of the big win cannot be expected, and the interest in the variable performance in which the first suggested performance is executed is not found, and rather the interest is lost. Therefore, there is a need to improve the interest in games from conventional gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and provides a game machine capable of favorably improving the interest in a game by maintaining the expectation of a big win regardless of the performance. for the purpose.

Acquisition means (for example, the first ball entrance 64) that acquires information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
Determination means (for example, main controller 110) that determines based on the information acquired by the acquisition means;
Dynamic display execution means (for example, display a controller 114);
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means,
In the dynamic display, a first suggestive effect (for example, "weak pattern" of variable elements of "super reach") suggesting appearance of the predetermined identification information, and the predetermined identification information from the first suggestive effect a second suggestive effect (for example, "strong pattern" of variable elements of "super reach") with a high degree of expectation for the appearance of, and a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing
Storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number (for example, a held ball storage area 203b or a held ball execution area 203c);
Judgment for judging whether or not there is the dynamic display that displays the predetermined identification information among the dynamic displays of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means means (e.g., MPU 221 of audio ramp controller 113);
a second display means (for example, an execution symbol or a pending symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db) capable of displaying the judgment result by the judgment means;
changing means (for example, pending display setting processing (S1209)) for changing the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first mode to a second mode showing the judgment result by the judgment means;
starting time selection means (for example, scenario counter 223d) for selecting the start time of the second mode by the second display means when changing to the second mode by the changing means;
The dynamic display execution means
When displaying the predetermined identification information, when the second mode is displayed at the start time selected by the start time selection means, before the second mode is displayed, the suggestive effect executing means performs the second mode. 1 first suggestion execution means (for example, reach pattern change command for display) for executing suggestion effect,
A gaming machine F0 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine F0, information is acquired by the acquisition means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means based on the determination result by the determination means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is awarded to the player. In the dynamic display, a first suggestive effect suggesting the appearance of predetermined identification information and a second suggestive effect in which the degree of expectation for appearance of the predetermined identification information is higher than that of the first suggestive effect are generated by the suggestive effect executing means. executable. Further, the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means with a predetermined number as the upper limit. Here, the determination means determines whether or not there is a dynamic display that displays the predetermined identification information among the dynamic displays of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. and the judgment result by the judging means can be displayed by the second display means. Then, the change means changes the display mode of the second display means from the predetermined first mode to the second mode indicating the result of determination by the determination means. Further, when the change means changes to the second mode, the start time of the second mode by the second display means is selected by the start time selection means. Then, when the predetermined identification information is displayed by the first suggestion execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means, the second mode is displayed on the second display means at the start time selected by the start time selection means. When doing so, the first suggestive effect is executed by the suggestive effect executing means before the second mode is displayed. As a result, the first suggestion effect is executed before the display of the second mode, and then the predetermined identification information appears after the second display means changes to the display of the second mode. As a result, even in the first suggestive effect, where the appearance of the predetermined identification information could not be expected from the second suggestive effect, the second mode appears after that, and the predetermined identification information can be obtained. Appearance can be expected. On the other hand, when the second suggestive effect, which is not the first suggestive effect, appears, the expected appearance of the predetermined identification information by the second suggestive effect is higher than that of the first suggestive effect. Based on the degree, it is possible to expect the appearance of predetermined identification information. As a result, the raison d'être of the first suggestive performance, which has not been found in the past, can be enhanced, the appearance of predetermined identification information can be expected in any performance pattern, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced by various performances. It has the effect of being able to

In gaming machine F0,
The dynamic display execution means
Temporary display means for displaying temporary identification information other than the predetermined identification information in the dynamic display (for example, temporary "failure display" in FIG. 33(e));
After the provisional identification information is displayed by the provisional display means, re-dynamic means for performing re-dynamic display for changing the provisional identification information to the predetermined identification information (for example, a variable element of "re-change") and
The first suggestion execution means
When the changing means changes from the first mode to the second mode and when the re-dynamic display is executed by the re-dynamic means, display on the second display means The game machine F1 is characterized in that the first suggestive effect is executed before changing to the second mode.

According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, provisional identification information other than the predetermined identification information is displayed in the dynamic display by provisional display means provided in the dynamic display execution means. Then, after the provisional identification information is displayed by the provisional display means, the provisional identification information is displayed by the re-dynamic means provided in the dynamic display execution means, and then the re-dynamic display is executed to change the provisional identification information to predetermined identification information. be. Then, when the changing means changes from the first mode to the second mode and when the re-dynamic display is performed by the re-dynamic means, the display of the second display means is changed to the second mode. The first suggestion effect is executed by the first suggestion execution means before the first suggestion execution means. That is, before the second mode of the second display means is displayed, the first suggestion effect is executed, then the provisional identification information appears, the second display means changes to the second mode of display, and then , a re-dynamic display is performed that changes the temporary identification to the predetermined identification. As a result, even in the first suggestive effect, in which the appearance of the predetermined identification information could not be expected conventionally, the appearance of the predetermined identification information can be expected by the appearance of the second mode after that. becomes possible. Further, when a second suggestive effect that is not the first suggestive effect appears, the expected degree of appearance of the predetermined identification information by the second suggestive effect is higher than that of the first suggestive effect. Based on this, it is possible to expect the appearance of predetermined identification information. As a result, the raison d'être of the first suggestive performance, which has not been found in the past, can be enhanced, the appearance of predetermined identification information can be expected in any performance pattern, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced by various performances. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine F1,
Display switching means for switching and controlling the display state and non-display state of the second display means (for example, changing from the variable element of "normal reach" to the variable element of "super reach"),
The changing means is
Change determination means for determining whether or not to change the display mode of the second display means from a predetermined first mode to a second mode indicating the determination result of the determination means (for example, pending display setting process (S1209) )and,
Change executing means (for example, , Execution pattern change processing) and
The start time selection means is
Re-display timing selection means ( For example, S1506) of execution pattern change processing,
The first suggestion execution means
When the second mode is displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-display time selection means, display for executing the first suggestive effect by the suggestive effect executing means before displaying the second mode. Previous first suggestion execution means (for example, reach pattern change command for display),
A gaming machine F2 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display switching means controls switching between the display state and the non-display state of the second display means. Then, the change determination means provided in the change means determines whether or not to change the display mode of the second display means from the predetermined first mode to the second mode indicating the result of determination by the determination means. When the change determination means determines to change to the second mode, the change execution means changes the second display means to the second mode at the execution timing selected by the start time selection means. Then, the re-display time selection means provided in the start time selection means re-displays the second display means that has been placed in the non-display state by the display switching means as the execution timing for displaying the second mode on the second display means. A first display timing is selected. Further, when the first suggestion execution means before display provided in the first suggestion execution means displays the second mode on the second display means by the re-display selection means, a suggestion is made before the display of the second mode. The first suggestive effect is executed by the effect executing means.

Conventionally, when suggesting the appearance of predetermined identification information by the suggestion effect executing means, the degree of expectation for the appearance of the predetermined identification information is configured to differ based on the type. Therefore, for example, when suggesting the appearance of predetermined identification information by the suggestive effect executing means, the second suggestive effect different from the first suggestive effect is better than the first suggestive effect to execute the predetermined identification information. The appearance expectation is set to be high. In other words, the player expects the appearance of the predetermined identification information by executing the second suggestion effect, and cannot expect the appearance of the predetermined identification information by the execution of the first suggestion effect. It is set so that identification information other than the identification information of (that is, failure) is often expected. Therefore, for example, when the first suggesting effect is executed, the first suggesting effect cannot expect the appearance of the predetermined identification information from the second suggesting effect. With respect to the dynamic display that has appeared, it has been judged that the appearance of the predetermined identification information cannot be expected, and the interest in the dynamic display in which the first suggestion effect is executed has not been found, and rather the interest has been lost.

Therefore, in the dynamic display in which the display of the second display means is changed to the second mode at the timing of redisplaying the second display means after the second display means is put into the non-display state by the redisplay time selection means, before the second mode is displayed, , the first suggestive effect is executed by the suggestive effect executing means. Then, as the provisional identification information appears, the second display means changes to display in the second mode at the first display timing. A re-dynamic display is performed that changes to As a result, even in the first suggestive effect, in which the appearance of the predetermined identification information could not be expected conventionally, the appearance of the predetermined identification information can be expected by the appearance of the second mode after that. becomes possible. Further, when a second suggestive effect that is not the first suggestive effect appears, the expected degree of appearance of the predetermined identification information by the second suggestive effect is higher than that of the first suggestive effect. Based on this, it is possible to expect the appearance of predetermined identification information. As a result, the raison d'être of the first suggestive performance, which has not been found in the past, can be enhanced, the appearance of predetermined identification information can be expected in any performance pattern, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced by various performances. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine F2,
The second display means can display a pattern representing the number of the information acquired by the acquisition means stored in the storage means,
The suggestion effect execution means is
In the dynamic display, continuous display means for continuously displaying the second display means (for example, variable element of "normal reach");
special effect executing means (for example, Variable elements of "weak pattern" or "strong pattern" of "super reach"),
After completion of the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect by the special effect executing means, the second display means is redisplayed by switching control of the display means (for example, "super reach" display means) Re-display the cockpit display area Db after the end of the variable element),
The change execution means is
A game machine F3 characterized by changing the display of the second display means to the second mode when the second display means is re-displayed by the post-end re-display means.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the pattern representing the number of pieces of information acquired by the acquisition means stored in the storage means can be displayed by the second display means. Further, the second display means is continuously displayed in the dynamic display by the continuous display means provided in the dynamic display execution means. Then, the suggestive effect executing means executes the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect including the effect that the second display means displayed by the continuous display means is put into a non-display state by the display switching means, and similarly the suggestive effect. After the end re-display means provided in the execution means, the second display means is re-displayed by switching control of the display switching means after the end of the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect by the special effect execute means. Then, the change execution means changes the display of the second display means to the second mode when the second display means is re-displayed by the post-end re-display means.

Conventionally, at the start of the dynamic display, the pattern indicating the number of information stored in the storage means is displayed by the second display means, and the second display means is continuously displayed by the continuous display means. Then, the second display means is switched to a non-display state by the display switching means when the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect is executed, and the second display means is switched by the display switch means after the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect is completed. to return the second display means to the state in which it was displayed by the continuous display means at the start of the dynamic display, thereby preparing for execution of the next dynamic display. That is, by re-displaying the second display means displayed at the start of the dynamic display at the end of the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect, the end of the dynamic display can be suggested to the player, and the following The next dynamic display can be executed smoothly while allowing the player to recognize the number of dynamic displays. Therefore, when the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect ends, the second display means is redisplayed, which is a natural expression in the flow of the execution process of the dynamic display, so that the player feels uncomfortable. do not feel.

Then, as in the game machine F3, the second display means continuously displayed by the continuous display means is put into a non-display state by the display switching means based on the execution of the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect, and The second mode is displayed on the second display means at the timing of re-displaying the second display means by the display switching means at the end of the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the display mode from the first mode to the second mode while re-displaying the second display means in a smooth flow of the execution process of the dynamic display. Therefore, it is possible to casually change the second display means to the second mode while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change of the second display means. As a result, the second display means is temporarily hidden by the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect, and then casually changed to first give the player a sense of discomfort, and then the sense of discomfort is felt on the second display means. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is the appearance of the second mode, and provide an unexpected performance to the player, and diversify the performance to enhance the interest of the game.

In the game machine F3,
The first suggestion execution means
suggestive effect determination means for determining whether or not to execute the second suggestive effect in the dynamic display (for example, variation change processing (S1471));
When the suggestive effect determination means determines that the second suggestive effect is to be executed, effect change means for changing the second suggestive effect to the first suggestive effect (for example, "strong pattern" to "weak pattern") A process to change (S1807)),
The redisplay time selection means includes:
A game machine F4 characterized in that, when displaying the second display means after the end of the first suggestive effect changed by the effect change means, the display of the second display means is changed to the second mode. .

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined whether or not the second suggestive effect is to be executed in the dynamic display by the suggestive effect determining means provided in the first suggestive effect executing means. Also, when the suggesting performance discriminating means determines that the second suggesting performance is to be executed, the second suggesting performance is changed to the first suggesting performance by the performance changing means provided in the first suggesting performance means. Then, the display on the second display means is changed to the second mode by the re-display time selecting means after the first suggestive effect changed by the effect changing means ends. Thus, by simple control of replacing the second suggestive performance with the first suggestive performance, the opportunity for the predetermined identification information to appear after the first suggestive performance is executed is increased, and the predetermined identification information by the first suggestive performance is increased. You can raise the expectation of the appearance of Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to diversify the effects by simple control and increase the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine F4,
The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect are constructed with the same execution time.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect are configured with the same execution time. Thus, the first suggestive effect can be changed to the second suggestive effect without changing the execution time of the entire dynamic display. Therefore, by changing the second suggestive effect to the first suggestive effect while maintaining the consistency of the execution time of the dynamic display, the second suggestive effect can be eliminated without reselecting the dynamic elements of the dynamic display. It is possible to increase the degree of expectation for the appearance of the predetermined identification information by the one-suggestion effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the presentation can be diversified and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In any of the game machines F1 to F5,
The start time selection means is
timing selection means for selecting a timing for changing the display of the second display means to the second mode at the timing when the acquisition means acquires the information triggered by the establishment of the starting condition;
The dynamic display execution means
an execution establishment determination means for determining the content of the dynamic display based on establishment of a predetermined execution condition;
The change execution means is
and timing correction means for correcting the execution timing of the second mode selected by the start time selection means based on the content of the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display execution means. Game machine F6 to play.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the timing selection means provided in the start time selection means selects the timing for changing the display of the second display means to the second mode at the timing when the acquisition means acquires the information triggered by the establishment of the starting condition. . Then, the content of the dynamic display is determined by the execution establishment determination means provided in the dynamic display execution means based on establishment of a predetermined execution condition. Then, the execution timing of the second mode selected by the start time selection means is corrected by the timing correction means provided in the change execution means based on the contents of the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display execution means. . That is, the selection of the execution timing of the second mode by the second display means and the determination of the contents of the dynamic display are independently selected or determined, and then the second display means is selected based on the contents of the dynamic display. Correction of the execution timing of the second aspect is performed. As a result, even if the determination of the second mode by the second display means and the determination of the content of the dynamic display are performed at different timings, the consistency of the content of the effect is ensured. Adjustments can be made so as not to cause inconsistency with respect to each other's presentation contents. Therefore, by performing each decision in separate processing, it is possible to facilitate the design at the time of development of the control program used for each decision, and at the same time, it is possible to execute a consistent production. be.

<Group G: The content of the hidden object propagates to the hidden object>

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a ball enters a starting winning hole and a starting winning is detected while a variable effect (variable display) of symbols or the like is performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. Then, with a predetermined number as the upper limit, there is a variable effect related to the start winning that is suspended. When the variable performance being executed is completed, the execution of the suspended non-executed variable performance is started.

In this variable presentation, as part of the entertainment of the game, a suggestive display that suggests the degree of expectation of a big win (for example, "holding change notice", mini appearance notice, etc.) is executed. When executing this suggestive display, the display mode of the displayed object that is always visible to the player is changed from the first mode to the second mode, or a new displayed object is additionally made to appear. is configured to suggest the degree of expectation of a big win to the player.

However, in the conventional game machine, when the suggestive display is executed, the display mode of the visible displayed object is always changed or a new displayed object appears additionally. It was easy to recognize, and it was not possible to create unexpectedness in the content of the production. Therefore, there is a need to improve the interest in games from conventional gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game by executing an unexpected effect.

Acquisition means (for example, the first ball entrance 64) that acquires information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
Determination means (for example, main controller 110) that determines based on the information acquired by the acquisition means;
Dynamic display execution means (for example, display a controller 114);
production means (for example, movable accessories, cut-in images, etc.) controlled in conjunction with the production content of the dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means;
and an effect mode changing means for changing the display mode of the effect means,
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means,
Storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number (for example, a held ball storage area 203b or a held ball execution area 203c);
Judgment for judging whether or not there is the dynamic display that displays the predetermined identification information among the dynamic displays of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means means (e.g., MPU 221 of audio ramp controller 113);
a second display means (for example, an execution symbol or a pending symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db) configured to display the result of determination by the determination means;
Changing means (for example, pending display setting process (for example, S1209)) and
start time selection means (for example, scenario counter 223d) for selecting the start time of the second mode by the second display means when changing to the second mode by the change means;
When the display of the second display means is changed to the second mode at the start time selected by the start time selection means, the display mode of the effecting means is propagated to the second display means to the second mode. (For example, the display color of the left movable accessory 87 is reflected in the display color of the execution pattern).

According to the gaming machine G0, information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and determination is made by the determination means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means based on the determination result by the determination means. The effect means is controlled so as to interlock with the effect contents of the dynamic display of the identification information. Further, the display mode of the rendering means is changed by the rendering mode changing means. A predetermined game value is awarded to the player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means with a predetermined number as the upper limit. Here, the determination means determines whether or not there is a dynamic display that displays the predetermined identification information among the dynamic displays of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. and the result of determination by the determination means can be displayed by the second display means. Then, the changing means changes the display mode of the second display means from the predetermined first mode to the second mode indicating the judgment result by the judging means. When the change means changes to the second mode, the start time of the second mode by the second display means is selected by the start time selection means. When the display of the second display means is changed to the second mode at the start time selected by the start time selection means, the second mode is displayed by propagating the display mode of the effect means to the second display means. . As a result, when the second display means is changed from the first mode to the second mode, the display mode of the effect means is propagated and changed. A game feature is created as to whether or not the display mode is propagated to the second display means. Therefore, when the second display means is changed, the display mode of the effect means is propagated to the second display means and changed, so that the effect is diversified while providing the player with an unexpected effect. There is an effect that it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by It should be noted that "propagating the display mode of the effect means to the second display means" means that the display mode of the effect means is directly propagated to the second display means, or that the content related to the display mode of the effect means The second display means is displayed, or the display mode of the effect means is changed (transferred) to the second display means and displayed.

In gaming machine G0,
Display switching means (for example, change from "normal reach" variable element to "super reach" variable element) for switching and controlling the display state and non-display state of the second display means by the effect means,
The changing means is
Change determination means ( For example, pending display setting processing (S1209)),
Change executing means (for example, , Execution symbol change processing (S1414)),
The start time selection means is
Re-display timing selection means ( For example, S1506) of execution pattern change processing,
The display propagation means is
When the re-display selection means changes the display of the second display means to the second mode at the first display timing, the second display means is made invisible by the effect means, and the display switching means is switched. When the second display means is made visible again by switching control, the display mode of the effect means is propagated to the second display means to display the second mode. The game machine G1 is characterized in that the display color of the accessory 87 is reflected in the display color of the executed symbol.

According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display switching means controls switching between the display state and the non-display state of the second display means by the effect means. Then, the change determination means provided in the change means determines whether or not to change the display mode of the second display means from the predetermined first mode to the second mode indicating the result of determination by the determination means. When the change determination means determines to change to the second mode, the change execution means changes the display mode of the second display means at the execution timing selected by the start time selection means. Here, the re-display time selection means provided in the start time selection means restarts the second display means that has been made non-display by the display switching means as the execution timing for displaying the second mode on the second display means. A first display timing for displaying is selected. Then, when the second display means is changed to the second mode at the first display timing by the re-display time selection means, the second display means is changed to the effect means by the re-display time propagation means provided in the propagation display means. and the second display means is made visible again by the switching control of the display switching means, the display mode of the effect means is propagated to the second display means to display the second mode. As a result, compared to the case where the always visible second display means is directly changed from the first mode to the second mode and notified, or the case where the second display means is newly added and made to appear, the second display means It is possible to casually change the second display means to the second mode while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change of the display means. Also, the change of the second display means from the first mode to the second mode is also propagated and changed by the display mode of the effect means. is propagated to the second display means. Therefore, the second display means is temporarily made invisible by the effect means, and then the display mode of the effect means is casually propagated to the second display means to change it. is the appearance of the second mode on the second display means, providing the player with an unexpected performance and diversifying the performance to increase the interest in the game. .

In gaming machine G1,
The gaming machine G2, wherein the presentation means is a movable accessory capable of covering the front side of the second display means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effect means is constituted by the movable accessory capable of covering the front side of the second display means. Thereby, the second display means can be made invisible by the driving mode of the movable accessory different from the display means for displaying the dynamic display. Therefore, it is possible to implement a composite performance of the dynamic element of the dynamic display and the driving of the movable accessory with consistent content, provide the player with an unexpected performance, and diversify the performance to play the game. There is an effect that it is possible to enhance the interest of

In gaming machine G2,
Character product driving means (for example, character product driving process (S1151)) for driving the movable accessory,
The accessory driving means is
an initial position of the movable object;
In the dynamic display, a first position (for example, "strong pattern") that makes the second display means invisible by the movable accessory;
the movable accessory is drivable from the first position to the initial position that makes the second display means visible again;
The propagating means at re-viewing,
while the movable accessory is in the first position, propagating the display mode of the movable accessory to the second display means to start displaying the second mode;
The game machine G3 is characterized in that the second mode is continuously displayed on the second display means in a state in which the movable accessory returns to the initial position.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the movable accessory is driven by the accessory driving means, and the movable accessory is driven from the initial position to the first position by the accessory driving means, whereby the second display means is made difficult to see, and when re-viewing The time propagation means propagates the display mode of the movable role object to the second display means while the movable role object is at the first position, thereby starting the display of the second mode and returning the movable role object to the initial position. Then, the second mode is continuously displayed on the second display means.

Conventionally, when a movable accessory is driven during execution of dynamic display, it is configured to drive from an initial position to a drive position, and then drive to the initial position again, thereby completing one drive mode. there is In other words, when the movable accessory is driven, it always returns to the initial position so as not to interfere with other effects in the dynamic display. Therefore, when the movable accessory is driven, returning from the drive position to the initial position is a natural expression in the flow of the driving mode of the movable accessory, so the player does not feel uncomfortable.

Then, as in the game machine G3, the movable accessory is driven from the initial position to the first position to make the second display means difficult to see, and the movable accessory is displayed while the movable accessory is at the first position. The aspect propagates to the second display means to display the second aspect. After that, the movable accessory is driven from the first position to the initial position, and the second display means continuously displays the second mode, whereby the player can visually recognize the second mode. With this configuration, it is possible to change the display mode while making the second display means visible in the smooth flow of the driving mode of the movable accessory. Therefore, it is possible to casually change the second display means to the second mode while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change of the second display means. As a result, by temporarily hiding the second display means and then casually changing it, the player first feels a sense of incompatibility, and then the player feels that the sense of incompatibility is the appearance of the second mode by the second display means. There is an effect that, while making the player aware of it and providing an unexpected performance to the player, the performance can be diversified and the interest in the game can be enhanced. In addition, there is an effect that the playability of whether or not the display mode of the movable accessory is propagated to the second display means is created, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

In gaming machine G3,
The start time selection means is
Execution determination means for determining whether the second mode can be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-viewing selection means (for example, processing for determining re-variation information (S1506), or pending deletion Information determination processing (S1507));
When it is determined by the execution determination means that the second mode cannot be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-viewing time selection means, the movable accessory is moved by the accessory drive means to the and driving change means for driving the second display means to a position to make it difficult to see (for example, processing for setting a super strong flag 223j (S1564)).

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the execution determination means provided in the start time selection means determines whether or not the second mode can be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-viewing selection means. When it is determined that the second mode cannot be displayed at the first display timing selected by the means, the drive changing means causes the movable accessory to move the second display means to a position where the second display means is difficult to see. driven to As a result, when the second mode cannot be displayed at the selected first display timing, the movable accessory can be driven to display the second mode at the first display timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the chances of executing the second mode of the second display means at the initially selected first display timing can be increased, and the effect can be diversified to increase the interest of the game.

Further, when making the second display means difficult to see from the player, by changing the driving mode of the movable accessory different from the dynamic display effect, instead of changing the effect contents of the dynamic display, The second display means can be made invisible. Therefore, it is possible to change to the second mode while making the second display means difficult to see without transmitting additional commands and the like for the control of the dynamic display to replace the effect content. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a game player with an unexpected performance, diversify the performance, and increase the interest of the game without increasing the control load of the dynamic display.

In gaming machine G4,
The execution determination means is
In the dynamic display, position determination means for determining whether or not the movable accessory is at the first position (for example, processing for determining whether or not to drive in the "strong pattern" (S1561)). ,
The driving change means is
When the position determination means determines that the movable accessory does not reach the first position, the dynamic display drives the movable accessory to the first position (for example, a super strong flag). 223j (S1564)),
The propagating means at re-viewing,
A display mode of the movable accessory in a state in which the driving position of the movable accessory is changed to the first position by the driving position changing means and the movable accessory is set to the first position by the accessory driving means. to the second display means to start the display of the second mode.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the position determination means provided in the execution determination means determines whether or not the movable accessory is at the first position in the dynamic display, and the drive position change means provided in the drive change means determines the position determination means If it is determined that the movable accessory does not go to the first position, the movable accessory is driven to the first position in the dynamic display. Then, while the movable accessory is in the first position, the propagating means for re-viewing propagates the display mode of the movable role to the second display means, thereby starting the display of the second mode. As a result, it is possible to initially display the second mode at the selected first display timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the chances of executing the second mode of the second display means at the initially selected first display timing can be increased, and the effect can be diversified to increase the interest of the game. In addition, there is an effect that the playability of whether or not the display mode of the movable accessory is propagated to the second display means is created, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

In gaming machine G5,
The driving position changing means is
In the dynamic display, dynamic element determination means for determining whether or not there is a dynamic element capable of driving the movable accessory (e.g., "variable element of super reach") (e.g., variable element of "super reach" or higher) A process for confirming the presence (S1563)),
When the dynamic element determination means determines that there is the dynamic element capable of driving the movable accessory, the movable accessory is driven to the first position during execution of the dynamic element. A game machine G6 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the presence or absence of a dynamic element capable of driving the movable accessory in the dynamic display is determined by the dynamic element determination means provided in the drive position change means. Then, when the dynamic element determining means determines that there is a dynamic element capable of driving the movable accessory, the movable accessory is driven to the first position during execution of the dynamic element. As a result, when there is a dynamic element capable of driving the movable accessory, the driving mode is changed to make the second display means invisible, and the second display means can be hidden from the player. Therefore, by making the second display means difficult to see while maintaining consistency between the effect content of the dynamic display and the driving mode of the movable accessory, the second display means can display the second display means at the selected first display timing. It is possible to display two modes. Therefore, without processing such as reselecting the dynamic display of the dynamic display, the chances of executing the second mode of the second display means at the first display timing initially selected are increased, and the effects are diversified. There is an effect that it is possible to enhance the amusement of the game by changing it.

In gaming machine G6,
The accessory driving means is
having a predetermined time to drive the movable accessory from the initial position to the first position and then to the initial position again;
The dynamic element discriminating means
A gaming machine G7 characterized in that, in the dynamic display, presence/absence of the dynamic element for the predetermined time or longer is discriminated.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the movable accessory is driven from the initial position to the first position by the accessory driving means, and is driven to the initial position again over a predetermined period of time. Then, the presence/absence of a dynamic element of a predetermined time or longer in the dynamic display is determined by the dynamic element determination means. As a result, in the dynamic element of the dynamic display, the movable accessory can be driven by the dynamic element that can complete the driving of the movable accessory that requires a predetermined time. can be completed, and a composite presentation of the dynamic element of the dynamic display and the driving of the movable accessory can be executed with consistent contents. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G7,
The gaming machine G8, wherein the effect means is a specific image displayed overlapping with the second display means.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G1 to G7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific image displayed overlapping the second display means constitutes the effect means. Accordingly, by additionally displaying an image on the display means for displaying the dynamic display, the second display means can be made invisible. Therefore, without adjusting and changing the dynamic element of the dynamic display or controlling other movable accessories, the second image can be displayed by slightly changing the effect of the dynamic display by adding and displaying the specific image. There is an effect that the second mode can be performed after the display means is hidden, the player can be provided with an unexpected performance, and the performance can be diversified to enhance the interest of the game.

In gaming machine G8,
The start time selection means is
When the execution determining means determines that the second mode cannot be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-viewing time selecting means, the image displaying means causes the specific image to appear. and image changing means (for example, a pattern for adding and displaying a large character cut-in image Dc2).

According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the execution determining means determines that the second mode cannot be displayed at the first display timing selected by the re-viewing time selecting means, the image changing means causes the image displaying means to cause the specific image to appear. be. Thus, when the second mode cannot be displayed at the selected first display timing, the specific image is displayed and the display mode of the specific image is propagated to the second display means at the first display timing. to display the second aspect. Therefore, there is an effect that the opportunity to execute the second mode of the second display means at the first display timing initially set can be increased, and the effect can be diversified to increase the interest of the game.

In gaming machine G8 or G9,
The dynamic display is configured by combining a plurality of dynamic elements,
The image display means is
A game machine G10 characterized in that the specific image is displayed in a time shorter than the execution time of any of the dynamic elements.

According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G8 or G9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display is composed of a combination of multiple dynamic elements. Then, the specific image is displayed by the image display means in a time shorter than the execution time of any dynamic element. As a result, the performance of the specific image can be completed in any dynamic element of the dynamic display, and the composite performance of the dynamic element of the dynamic display and the specific image can be executed with consistent contents. . Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, by setting the display time of the specific image to be shorter than the execution time of each dynamic element, for example, compared to the case of covering the second display means by driving a movable accessory that requires a predetermined driving time, the specific image It becomes unnecessary to determine whether or not the dynamic element can be displayed. Therefore, when executing the second mode after making the second display means invisible with the specific image, it is only necessary to perform control for determining the display timing of the specific image. There is an effect that it is possible to provide an unexpected production, diversify the production, and enhance the interest of the game.

<H Group: Simultaneous Display of Chance Down & Chance Up>
Acquisition means (for example, the first ball entrance 64) that acquires information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
Determination means (for example, main controller 110) that determines based on the information acquired by the acquisition means;
Dynamic display execution means (for example, display a controller 114);
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means,
a rise effect execution means for executing an expectation level increase effect (for example, generation of variable element of "super reach", etc.) indicating that the level of expectation for the appearance of the predetermined identification information has increased in the dynamic display; ,
In the dynamic display, an expectation level decreasing effect indicating that the level of expectation for the appearance of the predetermined identification information has decreased (for example, the change element of "super reach" is lost, etc.);
main execution means capable of executing the expectation level increasing effect and the expectation level decreasing effect respectively on a main display portion (for example, a main display area Dm) of the display means;
Storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number (for example, a held ball storage area 203b or a held ball execution area 203c);
Judgment for judging whether or not there is the dynamic display that displays the predetermined identification information among the dynamic displays of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means means (e.g., MPU 221 of audio ramp controller 113);
a second display means (for example, an execution symbol or a pending symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db) capable of displaying the judgment result by the judgment means;
Display switching means for switching and controlling the display state and non-display state of the second display means (for example, changing from the variable element of "normal reach" to the variable element of "super reach");
Change determination means ( For example, pending display setting processing (S1209)),
start time selection means (for example, execution symbol change process) for selecting the start time of the second mode by the second display means when the change determination means determines to change to the second mode; with
The display switching means is
Non-display means (for example, variable elements of “super reach”) and
The second display means brought into a non-display state by the non-display means when the expectation level lowering effect is executed by the lowering effect executing means on the main display portion of the display means by the main executing means. Redisplay means for redisplaying (for example, the end of the variable element of "super reach"),
The start time selection means is
As the execution timing for displaying the second mode in the second display means, when the expectation level lowering effect is being executed in the main display section, a display section other than the main display section and the main display section In a sub-display portion (for example, cockpit display area Db) which is a smaller display area, re-display time selection means (for example, " a post-delete change command for display for executing a "post-delete change notice" after deferred deletion.

According to the game machine H0, information is acquired by the acquisition means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means based on the determination result by the determination means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is awarded to the player. The increasing effect executing means executes an expectation increasing effect indicating that the expectation that the predetermined identification information appears has increased in the dynamic display. In addition, in the dynamic display, an expectation level lowering effect indicating that the level of expectation that the predetermined identification information appears has decreased is executed by the lowering effect executing means. Then, the main execution means enables the display means to execute the expectation level increasing effect and the expectation level decreasing effect respectively on the main display section. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means with a predetermined number as the upper limit. Here, the determination means determines whether or not there is a dynamic display that displays the predetermined identification information among the dynamic displays of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. and the judgment result by the judging means can be displayed by the second display means. Further, the display switching means controls switching between the display state and the non-display state of the second display means. Then, the change determination means determines whether or not to change the display mode of the second display means from the predetermined first mode to the second mode indicating the result of determination by the determination means. When the change determination means determines to change to the second mode, the start time selection means selects the start time of the second mode by the second display means. Then, by the non-display means provided in the display switching means, the second display means is in the non-display state when the main execution means executes the expectation level increase effect by the increase effect execution means in the main display portion of the display means. It is said that Similarly, by the re-display means provided in the display switching means, when the main execution means executes the expectation level lowering effect by the lowering effect executing means in the main display portion of the display means, the non-display means is put into a non-display state. The second display means is displayed again. Then, by the re-display time selection means provided in the start time selection means, when the expectation lowering effect is being executed on the main display section as the execution timing for displaying the second mode on the second display means, the main display is performed. At the first display timing when the second display means is redisplayed by the redisplay means in the sub display part which is a display area other than the main display part and which is a display area smaller than the main display part, the display of the second display means is displayed as the second display means. It is changed into two modes. As a result, compared to the case where the always visible second display means is directly changed from the first mode to the second mode and notified, or the case where the second display means is newly added and made to appear, the second display means It is possible to casually change the second display means to the second mode while making it difficult for the player to recognize the change of the display means. Further, by displaying the second mode by the second display means on the sub-display part of the display means during the execution of the expectation level-lowering effect after executing the expectation level-increasing effect on the main display part of the display means, the player can It is possible to casually change the second display means while paying attention to the effect result of the main display section. Therefore, by casually changing the second display means, first, the player is given a sense of discomfort, and then the player is made to recognize that the sense of discomfort is the appearance of the second mode on the second display means. There is an effect that it is possible to diversify the presentation while providing a realistic presentation and increase the interest of the game.

<Group I: discomfort in cognition of visual, auditory, and tactile sensations>
Acquisition means (for example, the first ball entrance 64) that acquires information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
Determination means (for example, main controller 110) that determines based on the information acquired by the acquisition means;
Dynamic display execution means (for example, display a controller 114);
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means,
Storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number (for example, a held ball storage area 203b or a held ball execution area 203c);
Judgment for judging whether or not there is the dynamic display that displays the predetermined identification information among the dynamic displays of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means Means (for example, pending display setting process (S1209));
Suggestion means configured to be able to suggest a judgment result by the judgment means (for example, an execution symbol or a pending symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db);
means for making it difficult for the player to perceive the suggesting means (for example, variable elements of "super reach");
Recognition resuming means (e.g., cockpit display area redisplayed after the fluctuation element of "super reach") that makes the suggesting means, which has become difficult to recognize by the player's perception due to the recognition difficulty means, again perceptible Db) and
Change executing means for changing from a predetermined first state to a second state based on the determination result of the determining means in the suggesting means when the suggesting means becomes recognizable again by the recognition resuming means (e.g., " a post-erase change command for display that causes the “pending change notice” of “after pending erase” to be executed;
A gaming machine I0 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine I0, information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and determination is made by the determination means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means based on the determination result by the determination means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is awarded to the player. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means with a predetermined number as the upper limit. Here, the determination means determines whether or not there is a dynamic display that displays the predetermined identification information among the dynamic displays of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. be done. Then, the judgment result by the judging means can be suggested by the suggesting means. The suggesting means is made difficult to recognize by the player's perception by the recognition difficulty means, and the suggestion means whose recognition by the player's perception is made difficult by the recognition difficulty means is configured to be recognizable again by the recognition restart means. . Then, when the suggesting means becomes recognizable again by the recognition resuming means, the change executing means changes from the predetermined first mode to the second state based on the judgment result of the judging means in the suggestion. As a result, the player can clearly recognize the suggestion by the suggesting means, compared to the case where the suggesting means, which is always perceptible by the player's perception, is directly changed from the first state to the second state. While making it difficult, it is possible to casually change the suggesting means to the second state to suggest the judgment result of the judging means. Therefore, by making it difficult to perceive the suggesting means once, and then suggesting the judgment result of the judging means at the timing when it becomes recognizable again, firstly, the player feels uncomfortable, and then the root of the uncomfortable feeling is caused by the suggesting means. By making the player recognize that it is a suggestion, there is an effect that it is possible to diversify the presentation and enhance the interest of the game while providing the player with an unexpected presentation.

In gaming machine I0,
The suggesting means is a display object on the display means,
The recognition difficulty means has a visibility difficulty means (for example, a variable element of "super reach") that makes the display of the displayed object difficult to see,
The recognition resuming means has re-display means (for example, end of variable element of "super reach") that makes the displayed object made invisible by the visibility difficulty means visible again,
When the displayed object is made visible again by the re-displaying means, the change execution means changes the display mode of the displayed object from the display mode of the displayed object before it is made invisible by the visibility making means. and change means at redisplay for changing based on the result of determination by the determination means (for example, a post-erase change command for display for executing "hold change notice" of "after hold erase"). Gaming machine I1.

According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I0, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, the suggesting means is a display object on the display means, and the display of the display object is made difficult to see by the visibility-difficult means provided in the recognition-difficult means. Further, the re-display means provided in the recognition resuming means makes visible again the displayed object that has been made difficult to see by the visibility making means. Then, when the displayed object is made visible again by the redisplay means, the display mode of the displayed object is changed to the state before the visible object is made invisible by the visible means. The display mode of the display object is changed based on the determination result by the determination means. As a result, the player can clearly recognize the change in the displayed object, compared to the case where the displayed object, which is always visually recognizable by the player's eyes, is directly changed from the first state to the second state and notified. While making it difficult, it is possible to casually suggest the judgment result of the judgment means by the change of the displayed object. By making the displayed object, which is the suggesting means, once invisible, and then suggesting the judgment result of the judging means at the timing when it becomes visible again, first, the player feels uncomfortable, and then the source of the uncomfortable feeling is the suggesting means. By making the player recognize that it is a suggestion by the player, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance and diversify the performance to enhance the interest of the game.

In gaming machine I0 or I1,
Equipped with a sound output means (for example, a speaker) that outputs a sound audible to the player,
The recognition difficulty means has a hearing difficulty means (for example, stopping sound output from a speaker) that makes it difficult to hear the sound output by the sound output means,
The recognition resuming means has re-output means (for example, re-outputting the sound from a speaker) that outputs the sound made difficult to hear by the hard-to-hear means so that it can be heard again,
When the re-output means outputs the sound again in an audible manner, the notification execution means is based on the judgment result of the judgment means from the output mode of the sound before it is made difficult to hear by the hard-to-hear means. A gaming machine I2 characterized by comprising means for changing at the time of re-output (for example, changing the volume of sound).

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I0 or I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the sound output means outputs a sound that can be heard by the player's sense of hearing. The hard-to-hear means provided in the difficult-to-recognize means makes the sound output by the sound output means difficult to hear. Further, the re-output means provided in the recognition resuming means makes it possible to hear again the output of the sound made difficult to hear by the hearing difficulty means. Then, when the output of the sound is made audible again by the re-output means by the re-output time changing means provided in the notification execution means, the output mode of the sound is changed to the state before the sound is made difficult to hear by the hard-to-hear means. The output mode of the sound is changed based on the result of determination by the determination means. As a result, the player can clearly recognize the suggestion by the suggesting means, compared to the case where the suggesting means, which is always made audible by the player's sense of hearing, is directly changed from the first state to the second state. While making it difficult, the judgment result of the judging means can be informed casually by the suggesting means. In addition, by making the sound that is the suggesting means once difficult to hear and then suggesting the judgment result of the judging means at the timing when the sound becomes audible again, first, the player feels uncomfortable, and then the root of the uncomfortable feeling is suggested. By making the player recognize that it is a suggestion by the player, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance and diversify the performance to enhance the interest of the game.

Acquisition means (for example, the first ball entrance 64) that acquires information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
Determination means (for example, main controller 110) that determines based on the information acquired by the acquisition means;
Dynamic display execution means (for example, display a controller 114);
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means,
Storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number (for example, a held ball storage area 203b or a held ball execution area 203c);
Judgment for judging whether or not there is the dynamic display that displays the predetermined identification information among the dynamic displays of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means Means (for example, pending display setting process (S1209));
Suggestion means (for example, a blower) configured to be able to suggest a judgment result by the judgment means;
Perception switching means for switching and controlling the cognitive state (for example, with wind) and the non-perceived state (for example, without wind) of the suggesting means according to the player's skin sensation (for example, touch, temperature, pain, wind, etc.) (e.g., audio ramp controller 113);
Change determination means ( For example, pending display setting processing (S1209)),
When the change determination means determines that the first state is to be changed to the second state, at a first recognition timing in which the suggestion means, which has been set to the non-recognition state by the recognition switching means, is set to the recognition state, change execution means (for example, execution symbol change processing (S1414)) for changing the suggestion mode of the suggestion means to the second state;
A gaming machine I3 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine I3, information is acquired by the acquisition means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means based on the determination result by the determination means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is awarded to the player. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means with a predetermined number as the upper limit. Here, the determination means determines whether or not there is a dynamic display that displays the predetermined identification information among the dynamic displays of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. be done. Then, the judgment result by the judging means can be suggested by the suggesting means. Further, the recognition switching means controls switching between the recognition state and the non-recognition state of the suggesting means according to the skin sensation of the player. Then, the change determining means determines whether or not to change the suggesting mode of the suggesting means from a predetermined first state to a second state indicating the result of determination by the determining means. Here, when the change determining means determines that the first state is to be changed to the second state, the change executing means sets the suggesting means, which has been changed to the non-cognitive state by the cognition switching means, to the first cognitive state. At the timing, the suggesting mode of the suggesting means is changed to the second state. Thus, by changing the suggesting means from the first state to the second state according to the player's skin sensation and suggesting the judgment result by the judging means, the player can tell the player by the judging means by the skin sensation that is less sensitive than sight and hearing. It can suggest judgment results. Therefore, while making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change in the suggesting means, it is possible to inform the determination result of the determining means by the casual suggestion. Therefore, by making it difficult for the player to perceive the change in the suggesting means, first, the player feels uncomfortable. There is an effect that it is possible to diversify the presentation while providing a realistic presentation and increase the interest of the game.

<J group: change at the timing of re-display of continuous display items>
Acquisition means (for example, the first ball entrance 64) that acquires information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
Determination means (for example, main controller 110) that determines based on the information acquired by the acquisition means;
Dynamic display execution means (for example, display a controller 114);
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means,
a continuous display object suggesting information about the dynamic display (for example, an execution pattern and a pending pattern in the cockpit display area Db);
Continuous display execution means (for example, MPU 231 of display control device 114) for continuously displaying the continuous display object on the display means;
determination means (for example, MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113) for determining whether or not the predetermined identification information appears based on the determination result of the determination means;
Erasing means for erasing the display of the continuous display object by the continuous display executing means (e.g., variable element of "Super Reach") based on establishment of a predetermined condition (e.g., winning the "Super Reach" effect mode);
re-display means for re-displaying the continuous display objects erased by the erasing means (for example, re-displaying the executed symbols and reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db after the end of the variable element of "Super Reach");
Display mode changing means for changing the display mode of the continuously displayed object from the display mode before erasing by the erasing means based on the judgment result of the judging means when the continuously displayed object is displayed again by the re-displaying means. (e.g., a display post-erase change command that causes a "pending change notice" of "after pending erase" to be executed);
A gaming machine J0 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine J0, information is acquired by the acquiring means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the determining means makes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquiring means. Dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means based on the determination result by the determination means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is awarded to the player. Information about the dynamic display is suggested by a continuous display object continuously displayed on the display means by the continuous display execution means. Then, the judgment means judges whether or not the predetermined identification information appears based on the judgment result by the judgment means. Further, the erasing means erases the continuously displayed object displayed by the continuously displaying means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the continuously displayed object erased by the erasing means is displayed again by the re-displaying means. When the redisplay means redisplays the continuously displayed object, the display mode changing means changes the display mode of the continuously displayed object from the display mode before erasing by the erasing means based on the judgment result of the judging means. This makes it more difficult for the player to recognize the change in the continuously displayed object than in the case of directly changing the always visible displayed object and informing it, or in the case of making a new displayed object appear and informing the player. , the judgment result of the judging means can be casually displayed by the display mode of the continuous display object. Therefore, when the continuous display object is once hidden and then displayed again, by casually changing the display mode of the continuous display object from before erasing it, first, the player feels uncomfortable, and then the continuous display object is displayed again. , there is an effect that it is possible to make the player recognize that the discomfort is a change of the continuously displayed object, and to provide the player with an unexpected performance, while diversifying the performance and enhancing the interest of the game. In addition, when the deleted continuous display object is redisplayed, the player can re-display the same display contents as before the continuous display object is deleted because the continuous display object is continuously displayed. I'm assuming it will show up. In the midst of this, it is difficult to recognize the difference based on initial assumptions due to the change in the redisplayed continuous display object. Therefore, it is possible to change the display contents of the continuously displayed object so as not to be noticed by the player, and to provide the player with an unexpected presentation to increase the interest of the game.

For any one of the game machines A0 to A10, the game machines B0 to B13, C0 to C9, D0 to D5, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G10, H0, I0 to I3, A configuration limited to any one of J0 may be applied. Further, for any one of the gaming machines B0 to B13, the gaming machines A0 to A10, C0 to C9, D0 to D5, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G10, H0, I0 to I3, A configuration limited to any one of J0 may be applied. Further, for any one of the gaming machines C0 to C9, the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B13, D0 to D5, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G10, H0, I0 to I3, A configuration limited to any one of J0 may be applied. Further, for any one of the gaming machines D0 to D5, the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B13, C0 to C9, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G10, H0, I0 to I3, A configuration limited to any one of J0 may be applied. Further, for any one of the game machines E0 to E7, the game machines A0 to A10, B0 to B13, C0 to C9, D0 to D5, F0 to F6, G0 to G10, H0, I0 A configuration limited to one of I3 and J0 may be applied. Further, for any one of the game machines F0 to F6, the game machines A0 to A10, B0 to B13, C0 to C9, D0 to D5, E0 to E7, G0 to G10, H0, I0 to I3, A configuration limited to any one of J0 may be applied. Further, for any one of the gaming machines G0 to G10, the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B13, C0 to C9, D0 to D5, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, H0, I0 to I3, A configuration limited to any one of J0 may be applied. Further, any one of the game machines A0 to A10, B0 to B13, C0 to C9, D0 to D5, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G10, I0 to I3, and J0 is used for the configuration of the game machine H0. Alternatively, the configuration limited in 1 may be applied. Further, any one of the game machines A0 to A10, B0 to B13, C0 to C9, D0 to D5, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G10, H0, and J0 for the configuration of the game machines I0 to I3 Alternatively, the configuration limited in 1 may be applied. Further, any one of the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B13, C0 to C9, D0 to D5, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G10, H0, and I0 to I3 for the configuration of the gaming machine J0 or 1 may be applied. In these cases, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

In any of gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B13, C0 to C9, D0 to D5, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G10, H0, I0 to I3, J0, the gaming machine is a slot machine A gaming machine K1 characterized by: Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B13, C0 to C9, D0 to D5, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G10, H0, I0 to I3, J0, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine K2 characterized by: Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B13, C0 to C9, D0 to D5, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G10, H0, I0 to I3, J0, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A gaming machine K3 characterized by being a combination of a slot machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

It should be noted that "entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "predetermined starting condition" in the claims, and "counters C1 to C3, The CS1 value” corresponds to the “information” acquired by the “acquisition means” in the claims, and the “third pattern” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “identification information” in the claims. However, the "variable effect" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "dynamic display of identification information" described in the claims, and the "jackpot design" described in the above embodiments corresponds to the claims. Corresponds to the "predetermined identification information", and the "jackpot" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "predetermined game value" described in the claims.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 Third pattern display device (dynamic display execution means, part of second display means)
113 Audio lamp controller (dynamic display execution means, part of second display means)
114 Display control device (dynamic display execution means, part of second display means)
203b Reserved ball storage area (part of storage means)
203c Reserved ball execution area (part of storage means)
221 MPU (judgment means)
223e Hold information storage area (part of storage means)
223f Execution information storage area (part of storage means)
Db cockpit display area (part of the second display means)
Db0 Execution symbol display area (a part of the second display means)
S204 (acquisition means)
S307 Fluctuation start processing (determining means)
S1209 Hold display setting process (judgment means)

Claims (1)

Acquisition means for acquiring information triggered by establishment of a predetermined start condition;
determination means for determining based on the information acquired by the acquisition means;
dynamic display execution means for causing a display means to dynamically display identification information based on the determination result of the determination means;
an image display means for displaying a specific image in conjunction with effect content of the dynamic display during execution of the dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means;
A gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in dynamic display of the identification information that can be executed by combining two or more dynamic elements,
Storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
Judgment means for judging whether or not there is a dynamic display showing the predetermined identification information among the dynamic displays of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. and,
a second display means capable of displaying the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information may appear as information on the judgment result by the judgment means;
changing means for changing the mode of the display element of the second display means from a predetermined first mode to a second mode in which the expectation that the predetermined identification information can appear is higher than in the first mode;
The start timing for changing the mode of the display element of the second display means to the second mode by the changing means is at least one of a plurality of start timings during execution of dynamic display at which the predetermined identification information can appear. start timing selection means for selecting one start timing from
image lottery means for lottery for determining whether or not the specific image is to be displayed in a dynamic display in which the predetermined identification information can be displayed ;
image displaying means for displaying the specific image so as to overlap at least a part of the second display means when the specific image is displayed based on the lottery by the image lottery means;
During the execution of the dynamic element, when the start timing is selected by the start timing selection means, it is determined that the mode of the display element of the second display means is changed to the second mode. a means for judging the situation to
a specific presenting means for causing the specific image to appear in a situation where the mode of the display element of the second display means is not displayed in the second mode during execution of the dynamic element;
a corresponding display means for displaying the second mode in correspondence with the display of the specific image;
The specific appearance means is
A gaming machine characterized by displaying the specific image in a specific period shorter than the execution period of the dynamic element being executed.

Images